ASME B PVC.X-2021
SECTION X
2021
ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code
An International Code
Fibe r- R e in f orce d P l a s t i c
Pre ssure Ve sse ls
Markings such as “ASME,” “ASME Standard,” or any other marking including “ASME,” ASME logos,
or the ASME Single Cer�fica�on Mark shall not be used on any item that is not constructed in
accordance with all of the applicable requirements of the Code or Standard. Use of of the ASME
Single Cer�fica�on Mark requires formal ASME cer�fica�on; if no cer�fica�on program is
available, such ASME markings may not be used. (For Cer�fica�on and Accredita�on Programs,
see h�ps://www.asme.org/cer�fica�on-accredita�on.)
Items produced by par�es not formally possessing an ASME Cer�ficate may not be described,
either explicitly or implicitly, as ASME cer�fied or approved in any code forms or other document.
AN INTERNATIONAL CODE
2021 ASME Boiler &
Pressure Vessel Code
2021 Edition
July 1, 2021
X
FIBER-REINFORCED PLASTIC
PRESSURE VESSELS
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee
on Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels
Two Park Avenue • New York, NY • 10016 USA
Date of Issuance: July 1, 2021
This international code or standard was developed under procedures accredited as m eeting the criteria for
American National Standards and it is an American National Standard. The Standards Committee that approved
the code or standard was balanced to assure that individuals from competent and concerned interests have had an
opportunity to participate. The proposed code or standard was made available for public review and comment that
provides an opportunity for additional public input from industry, academia, regulatory agencies, and the public-atlarge.
ASME does not “approve,” “certify,” “rate,” or “endorse” any item, construction, proprietary device, or activity.
ASME does not take any position with respect to the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any
items mentioned in this document, and does not undertake to insure anyone utilizing a standard against liability for
infringement of any applicable letters patent, nor assume any such liability. Users of a code or standard are expressly
advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, is
entirely their own responsibility.
Participation by federal agency representative(s) or person(s) affiliated with industry is not to be interpreted as
governm ent or industry endorsem ent of this code or standard.
ASME accepts responsibility for only those interpretations of this document issued in accordance with the established ASME procedures and policies, which precludes the issuance of interpretations by individuals.
The endnotes and preamble in this document (if any) are part of this American National Standard.
ASME Collective Membership Mark
ASME Single Certification Mark
"ASME" and the above ASME symbols are registered trademarks of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No part of this document may be reproduced in any form, in an electronic
retrieval system or otherwise, without the prior written permission of the
publisher.
Library of Congress Catalog Card Number: 56-3934
Printed in the United States of America
Adopted by the Council of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers, 1914; latest edition 2021.
The American Society of Mechanical Engineers
Two Park Avenue, New York, NY 10016-5990
Copyright © 2021 by
THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS
All rights reserved
TABLE OF CONTENTS
List of Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiv
Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xvi
Statement of Policy on the Use of the ASME Single Certification Mark and Code Authorization in Advertising
xviii
Statement of Policy on the Use of ASME Marking to Identify Manufactured Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xviii
Submittal of Technical Inquiries to the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Standards Committees . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xix
Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxii
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xliii
Summary of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xlvii
List of Changes in Record Number Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xlix
Cross-Referencing and Stylistic Changes in the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
l
PART RG
Article RG-1
RG-100
RG-110
RG-120
Article RG-2
RG-200
Article RG-3
RG-300
RG-310
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scope and Jurisdiction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jurisdiction of Section X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Organization of This Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Responsibilities and Duties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Responsibilities and Duties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User's Responsibilities — Design Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1
1
1
1
2
3
3
4
4
4
RG-320
RG-330
Article RG-4
RG-400
PART RM
Fabricator's Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspector's Duties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fabrication Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fabrication Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4
6
7
7
8
Article RM-1
RM-100
RM-110
RM-120
RM-140
General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Laminate Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resin System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use of Two or More Materials Specifications or Processes in Fabricating a
Class I Vessel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mechanical Properties of Lamina for Class II Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Miscellaneous Pressure Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Miscellaneous Metallic Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
8
8
8
RM-150
Article RM-2
RM-200
RM-210
PART RD
Article RD-1
iii
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10
10
11
11
11
12
12
RD-100
RD-110
RD-120
RD-130
RD-140
RD-150
RD-160
Article RD-2
RD-200
Article RD-3
RD-300
RD-310
Article RD-4
RD-400
Article RD-5
RD-500
RD-510
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Design Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Design Allowances for Degradation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Methods of Fabrication in Combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Proof of Design Adequacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shells of Revolution Under Internal Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shells of Revolution Under External Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Qualification of Vessels for External Pressure Service . . . . . . . . . . .
Secondary Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Design of Secondary Bonded Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Openings and Their Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12
12
13
14
14
14
14
15
15
16
16
16
17
17
18
18
18
RD-520
Article RD-6
RD-600
RD-610
RD-620
Article RD-7
RD-700
RD-710
RD-720
RD-730
Restrictions for Class II Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nozzles and Other Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Qualifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integral Flanged Nozzles for Class II Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bolted Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flat Heads, Covers, and Blind Flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bolted Flanged Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Openings in Flat Metallic Heads, Metallic Covers, and Metallic Blind Flanges
Welded or Brazed Connections to Metal Flat Heads, Covers, or Blind
Flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick-Actuating Closures (For Class I Vessels Only) . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Design Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attachments and Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Access and Inspection Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment of Vessels Requiring Access or Inspection Openings . . . . .
Size of Manhole Openings for Class I Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Size of Manhole Openings for Class II Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum Gasket Bearing Widths for Manhole Cover Plates . . . . . . . .
Threaded Openings in Class I Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Threaded Openings in Class II Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mandatory Design Rules for Class II Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Design Basis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Design Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
19
19
19
19
27
27
27
28
Article RD-8
RD-800
Article RD-9
RD-900
RD-910
Article RD-10
RD-1000
RD-1010
RD-1020
RD-1030
RD-1040
RD-1050
RD-1060
Article RD-11
RD-1100
RD-1110
RD-1120
iv
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
28
29
29
30
30
30
31
31
31
31
31
32
32
32
33
33
33
33
RD-1130
RD-1140
RD-1150
RD-1160
RD-1170
RD-1180
Article RD-12
RD-1200
RD-1210
RD-1220
RD-1230
RD-1240
RD-1250
PART RF
Article RF-1
RF-100
RF-110
Design Acceptability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vessel Parts Subject to Design Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Laminate Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Design Rules — Method A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discontinuity Analysis — Method B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Laminate Stiffness Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Laminate Stiffness Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stiffness Coefficients for Design by Method B Rules . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lamina Reduced Stiffness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stiffness Coefficients for the Laminate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure for Calculating the Stiffness Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . .
FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Article RF-2
Special Fabrication Requirements for Bag-Molding Process (for Class
I Vessels Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Form of Fiber Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Molds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Liners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Openings in Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Molded-In Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Fabrication Requirements for Centrifugal-Casting Process
(for Class I Vessels Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RF-200
RF-210
RF-220
RF-230
RF-240
RF-250
Article RF-3
RF-300
RF-310
RF-320
RF-330
RF-340
Article RF-4
RF-400
RF-410
RF-420
RF-430
RF-440
Article RF-5
RF-500
RF-510
RF-520
RF-530
RF-540
Fiber Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Form of Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mandrels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Liners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Openings in Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Fabrication Requirements for Filament-Winding Process
(Classes I and II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Form of Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mandrels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Liners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Openings in Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Fabrication Requirements for Contact-Molding Process
(Classes I and II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Form of Fiber Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Molds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Liners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Openings in Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
v
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
33
33
33
33
35
48
54
54
54
54
56
57
58
59
59
59
59
60
60
60
61
61
61
61
62
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
62
62
62
62
62
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
63
63
63
63
64
64
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
65
65
65
65
65
66
Article RF-6
RF-600
RF-610
RF-620
RF-630
Article RF-7
RF-700
PART RQ
Article RQ-1
RQ-100
RQ-110
RQ-120
RQ-130
RQ-140
Article RQ-2
RQ-200
Article RQ-3
RQ-300
Article RQ-4
RQ-400
Article RQ-5
RQ-500
Article RQ-6
RQ-600
PART RR
PART ROP
Article ROP-1
ROP-100
ROP-110
ROP-120
ROP-130
ROP-140
ROP-150
ROP-160
ROP-170
PART RT
Article RT-1
RT-100
RT-110
RT-120
Special Fabrication Requirements for Matched Molded Heads (Used
for Closures for Centrifugally Cast Vessels — for Class I Vessels
Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Form of Fiber Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Molds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Openings in Heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Fabrication Requirements for Joining Components . . . . . .
Procedure Specifications and Qualifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Responsibility for Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance of Procedure Specification and Qualification Records . . .
Procedure Specification Qualification Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Means to Be Used in Qualifying Class I Designs and Fabricating Procedures
Means for Qualifying Class II Vessel Design and Fabrication . . . . . . . .
Special Requirements for Bag-Molding Procedure Qualification
(Class I Vessels) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Essential Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Requirements for Centrifugal-Casting Procedure
Qualification (Class I Vessels) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Essential Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Requirements for Filament-Winding Procedure Qualification
(Class I Vessels) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Essential Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Requirements for Contact-Molding Procedure Qualification
(Class I Vessels) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Essential Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Requirements for Class II Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Essential Design Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OVERPRESSURE PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Determination of Pressure-Relieving Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overpressure Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Permitted Pressure Relief Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure-Setting and Performance Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RULES GOVERNING TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Testing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fabricator's Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspector's Duties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vi
67
67
67
68
68
69
69
70
70
70
70
70
71
71
73
73
74
74
75
75
76
76
77
77
78
79
79
79
79
79
79
80
80
80
80
82
82
82
82
82
Article RT-2
RT-200
RT-210
RT-220
Article RT-3
RT-300
RT-310
RT-320
RT-330
RT-340
Article RT-4
RT-400
RT-410
RT-420
RT-430
RT-440
RT-450
RT-460
Article RT-5
RT-500
RT-510
RT-520
Article RT-6
RT-600
RT-610
RT-620
RT-630
Article RT-7
Design and Procedure Qualification Test Requirements for Class I
Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Qualification Checks and Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Qualification Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quality Control Test and Examination Requirements for Class I
Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency of Cyclic Pressure and Qualification Pressure Tests . . . . . .
Frequency of Determination of Weight of Resin and Fiber . . . . . . . . .
Frequency of Volumetric Expansion Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency of Thickness Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Production Test Requirements for Class I Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visual Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thickness Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vessel Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Barcol Hardness Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydrostatic Leakage Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conditions Under Which Pneumatic Leakage Test May Be Used . . . . .
Hydrostatic Testing Procedures and Equipment for Class I and Class II
Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Provision of Vents At High Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration of Acoustic Emission Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acceptance Test Procedure for Class II Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acceptance Checks and Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acceptance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Penetrant Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Determination of Mechanical Properties of Lamina for Use With Class
II Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
83
83
83
84
87
87
87
87
87
87
88
88
88
89
89
89
89
90
91
91
91
91
92
92
92
92
93
94
RT-700
Article RT-8
RT-800
RT-810
RT-820
Required Mechanical Properties of the Lamina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Methods for Determining Damage-Based Design Criterion .
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Referenced Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Apparatus, Loading Procedure, and Data Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
94
96
96
96
96
PART RI
Article RI-1
RI-100
RI-110
RI-120
INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Qualification of Inspectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Access for Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
97
97
97
97
97
RI-130
RI-140
RI-150
RI-160
Inspector's Duties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspection of Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspection During Fabrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alternative Inspection for Multiple, Duplicate Fabrication . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
97
98
98
98
vii
Article RI-2
RI-200
RI-210
Article RI-3
RI-300
RI-310
Article RI-4
RI-400
RI-410
Article RI-5
RI-500
RI-510
PART RS
Article RS-1
RS-100
RS-110
RS-120
RS-130
Article RS-2
RS-200
Article RS-3
RS-300
Mandatory Appendix 1
1-100
1-110
Mandatory
Mandatory
Mandatory
5-100
5-200
5-300
5-400
5-500
5-600
Mandatory
6-100
Mandatory
Mandatory
8-100
8-200
8-300
8-400
8-500
Appendix 2
Appendix 4
Appendix 5
Appendix 6
Appendix 7
Appendix 8
Special Inspection Requirements for Bag Molding (Class I Vessels)
Check of Bag-Molding Procedure Specification Qualification . . . . . . . .
Visual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Inspection Requirements for Centrifugal Casting (Class I
Vessels) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check of Centrifugal-Casting Procedure Specification Qualification . . . .
Visual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Inspection Requirements for Filament Winding . . . . . . . . .
Check of Filament-Winding Procedure Specification Qualification . . . .
Visual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Inspection Requirements for Contact Molding . . . . . . . . . .
Check of Contact-Molding Procedure Specification Qualification . . . . . .
Visual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MARKING, STAMPING, AND REPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents, Methods, and Means of Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Marking for Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application of Stamp to Vessel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Part Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use of Certification Mark Stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Certification Mark Stamp Bearing Official Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Report Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fabricator's Data Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quality Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outline of Some of the Features to Be Included in the Quality Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
99
99
99
100
100
100
101
101
101
102
102
102
103
103
103
103
104
104
105
105
106
.
.
.
106
107
107
.
107
Capacity Conversions for Safety Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glossary of Terms Related to Fiber-Reinforced Plastics . . . . . . . . .
Specific Gravity of Liquid Resins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Apparatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Structural Laminate Visual Acceptance Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Structural Laminate Visual Acceptance Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Units for Use in Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class III Vessels With Liners for High Pressure Fluids in Stationary
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fabrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
109
110
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
120
120
125
viii
126
126
127
127
129
129
8-600
Mandatory Appendix 9
10-100
10-200
10-300
10-400
10-500
10-600
10-700
Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Establishing Governing Code Editions, Addenda, and Cases for FRP
Pressure Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fabrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overpressure Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Laminates With Load-Sharing Metallic Shells for High Pressure
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fabrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Examination and Testing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Laminate Procedure Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspector's Duties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
152
152
152
153
156
158
162
164
Nonmandatory Appendix AA
Article AA-1
AA-100
Article AA-2
AA-200
Suggested Methods of Preliminary Design for Class I Vessels . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shells of Revolution Under Internal Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
166
166
166
167
167
AA-210
Article AA-3
AA-300
Article AA-4
AA-400
AA-410
Article AA-5
AA-500
AA-510
AA-520
Nonmandatory Appendix AB
AB-100
Nonmandatory Appendix AC
Article AC-1
AC-100
Article AC-2
AC-200
AC-210
AC-220
Die-Formed Heads, Pressure on Concave Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shells of Revolution Under External Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reinforcement of Openings in Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reinforcement for Internal Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attachments and Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discontinuity Stresses for Class II, Method B Vessels . . . . . . . . . .
Examples of Discontinuity Stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example Illustrating the Application of Discontinuity Analysis . . . . . .
Examples of Stress Analysis of Cylindrical Shells . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sign Convention and Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Principal Stresses and Stress Intensities Due to Internal Pressure . . .
Bending Analysis for Uniformly Distributed Edge Loads . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
168
169
169
170
170
170
171
171
171
171
174
174
176
176
176
182
182
183
183
9-100
9-200
9-300
9-400
9-500
9-600
9-700
9-800
9-900
9-1000
Mandatory Appendix 10
ix
130
150
150
150
150
150
150
151
151
151
151
151
AC-230
AC-240
Article AC-3
AC-300
AC-310
AC-320
AC-330
AC-340
Article AC-4
AC-400
AC-410
AC-420
AC-430
AC-440
AC-450
Nonmandatory Appendix AD
AD-100
AD-200
AD-300
AD-310
AD-400
AD-500
AD-510
Nonmandatory Appendix AF
AF-100
AF-200
AF-210
AF-300
AF-310
AF-400
AF-410
AF-420
AF-500
Nonmandatory Appendix AG
Nonmandatory Appendix AH
AH-100
AH-200
AH-300
Nonmandatory Appendix AI
AI-100
Displacements, Bending Moments, and Shearing Forces in Terms of
Conditions at Reference Edge, x = 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Principal Stresses Due to Bending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Examples of Stress Analysis of Spherical Shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nomenclature and Sign Convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Principal Stresses and Stress Intensities Resulting From Internal or
External Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bending Analysis for Uniformly Distributed Edge Loads . . . . . . . . . .
Alternate Bending Analysis of a Hemispherical Shell Subjected to
Uniformly Distributed Edge Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Examples of Stress Analysis of Flat Circular Heads . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
183
184
186
186
186
.
.
187
188
.
.
189
190
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nomenclature and Sign Convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure and Edge Loads on Circular Flat Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flat Plate Pressure Vessel Heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Geometry Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stress Intensities in a Flat Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Laminate Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lamina (Ply) Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustrative Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Strain-Space Failure Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Examples for Design Rules for Class II Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cylindrical Shells Under Uniform Internal Pressure (See RD-1171.1) . .
Spherical Shells Under Internal Pressure (See RD-1171.2) . . . . . . . . .
Cylindrical Shells Under External Pressure (See RD-1172.1) . . . . . . . .
Spherical Shells Under Uniform External Pressure (See RD-1172.2) . . .
Thickness of Heads Under Internal Pressure (See RD-1173.1) . . . . . . .
Thickness of Heads Under External Pressure (See RD-1173.2) . . . . . .
Reinforcement of Openings and Nozzle Attachments (See RD-1174.2) .
Head-To-Shell Joint Overlay Subject to Internal Pressure (See RD-1175.2)
Guide to Information Appearing on Certificate of Authorization (See
Figure AG-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guidance for the Use of U.S. Customary and Si Units in the ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use of Units in Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guidelines Used to Develop SI Equivalents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Soft Conversion Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rigorous NASA SP-8007 Solution for Lateral and Longitudinal
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
...................................................
190
190
190
191
192
193
194
194
194
195
195
195
195
205
210
210
210
210
210
211
211
211
211
212
x
213
215
215
215
217
218
218
AI-200
Nonmandatory
Nonmandatory
AK-100
AK-200
AK-300
AK-400
AK-500
Nonmandatory
AL-100
AL-200
Nonmandatory
AM-100
Figures
RD-620.3
RD-620.4(a)
RD-620.4(b)
RD-620.5
RD-620.6
RD-700.1
RD-1120.1
RD-1174.2
RD-1174.3
RD-1175.2
RD-1176.1
RD-1176.2
RD-1176.3
RD-1176.4
RD-1176.5
RD-1220.1
RD-1220.2
RD-1220.3
RD-1250.1
RF-210.1
RF-210.2
RF-610.1
RF-610.2
RS-100.1
RS-132.1
8-700.5.11.1-1
10-201-1
10-201-2
10-201-3
Appendix AJ
Appendix AK
Appendix AL
Appendix AM
Buckling Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forms Required by Section X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lamina Elastic Constants — Micromechanics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lamina Elastic Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preliminary Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Micromechanics Equations for a Unidirectional Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Micromechanics of a Randomly Distributed, Fiber-Reinforced Lamina .
Fire and Excessive Heat Exposure Guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suggested Methods to Mitigate Fire Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guide to the Relocation of Part RR Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
219
223
259
259
259
259
261
262
269
269
269
271
271
Flange Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plate‐Type Gussets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
24
Typical Cone‐Type Gusset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flush Nozzle Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Penetrating Nozzle Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acceptable Types of Flat Heads for Class I Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Design Limitations for Class II Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions of Reinforcing Pad and Nozzle Overlays . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stress Concentration Factors for a Circular Hole in a Pressurized
Cylindrical Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head/Shell or Shell/Shell Overlay Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Design of Full‐Face Nozzle Flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Values of V (Integral Flange Factor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Values of F (Integral Flange Factor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Values of f (Hub Stress Correction Factor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Values of T, Z, Y, and U (Terms Involving K) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moment Resultants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In‐Plane Force Resultants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Geometry of an N‐Layered Laminate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Side Wall Lay‐Up for Bag Molding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head or End Preform for Cylindrical Vessel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Preform and Insert for Head for Centrifugally Cast Vessel . . . . .
Fiber Head or End Preformed Inserts for Centrifugally Cast Vessel Heads
Official Certification Mark to Denote the American Society of Mechanical
Engineers’ Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Form of Stamping and Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pendulum Impact Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Laminate Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Laminate Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
25
26
27
34
38
xi
39
41
43
45
46
47
48
55
55
56
58
60
60
67
68
103
104
141
152
153
153
AA-522.1
AA-523.1
AA-524.1
AA-524.2
AC-100.1
AC-100.2
AC-100.3
AC-100.4
AC-100.5
AC-200
AC-310
AC-410
AC-421
AC-422
AC-430
AC-431
AD-201
Saddle‐Type Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ring or Flange Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Metal Attachment in Vessel End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Metal Attachments in Thickened Ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.................................................
.................................................
.................................................
.................................................
.................................................
Symbols and Sign Convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.................................................
.................................................
.................................................
.................................................
.................................................
.................................................
.................................................
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
172
172
173
173
176
177
178
178
179
182
187
191
191
191
191
192
194
AD-202
AD-500
AD-503
AD-505
AD-510
AG-1
Q-115.1
Reference Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..................................................
..................................................
..................................................
Failure Envelopes — Example Laminate in Strain Space . . . . . . . . .
Sample Certificate of Authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Schematic Views of Permissible Joint Designs for Adhesive‐Bonded
Cylinder Joints for Tensile Tests (Revision A — 1998) . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
195
196
201
201
209
214
..
233
Resin Systems Required Certification by Resin Manufacturer . . . . . . .
Resin Systems Required Test by Vessel Fabricator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flange and Nozzle Dimensions for Hand Lay‐Up and Pressure-Molded
Flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Values of Spherical Radius Factor Ko for Ellipsoidal Heads With Pressure on
Convex Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Evaluation Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Structural Laminate Visual Acceptance Criteria for Class I Pressure Vessels
Structural Laminate Visual Acceptance Criteria for Class II Pressure
Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Units for Use in Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resin Systems: Required Certifications and Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visual Acceptance Criteria for FRP Laminate (U.S. Customary Units) . .
Visual Acceptance Criteria for FRP Laminate (SI Units) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Qualification Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guide for Completing Fabricator’s Data Report CPV-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resin Supplier Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tests by Laminate Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pre-Preg Supplier Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
9
Tables
RM-120.1
RM-120.2
RD-620.1
RD-1173.2
RT-620.1
6-100.1
6-100.2
7-100.1
8-300.4.1-1
8-600.2.1-1
8-600.2.1-2
8-700.2.1-1
8-900.3-1
10-305.1-1
10-305.1-2
10-307-1
xii
21
37
93
121
123
125
128
131
132
137
145
154
155
155
10-307-2
10-503-1
10-503-1M
10-503-2
AC-440.1
AD-500
AD-501
156
159
161
162
193
196
198
202
203
204
207
AJ-1
AJ-2
AJ-3
AJ-4
Pre-Preg Systems Tests by CRPV Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visual Acceptance Criteria for FRP Laminate (U.S. Customary Units) . .
Visual Acceptance Criteria for FRP Laminate (SI Units) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acoustic Emission Evaluation Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
....................................................
Assumed Lamina Elastic and Strength Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transformed Modulus Components, 106 psi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Matrices for Illustrative Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Off‐Axis Mechanical Strain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On‐Axis Mechanical Strain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Strain‐Space Envelope Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guide to Information Appearing on Certificate of Authorization (See Figure
AG-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Latest Revision and Year Date of Forms Referenced in This Code . . . .
Guide for Completing Form RP-1 (Revision E — 2017) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guide for Completing Form RP-2 (Revision C — 2013) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guide for Completing Form RP-3 (Revision F — 2017) . . . . . . . . . . . .
AJ-5
AJ-6
AM-100-1
Guide for Completing Form RP-4 (Revision C — 2013) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guide for Completing Form RP-5 (Revision C — 2017) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cross-Reference List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
256
258
271
AD-506
AD-507.2
AD-507.3
AD-510
AG-1
213
223
247
250
253
Forms
CPV-1
CPV-2
Q-106
Q-107
Q-108
Q-115
Q-120
RP-1
RP-2
RP-3
RP-4
RP-5
Endnotes
Fabricator's Data Report for Composite Reinforced Pressure Vessels (Class
III) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended Form for Qualifying the Laminate Design and the Laminate
Procedure Specification Used in the Fabrication of Composite
Reinforced Pressure Vessels (Class III) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended Form for Qualifying the Vessel Design and the Procedure
Specification Used in Fabricating Bag-Molded and Centrifugally Cast
Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels (Class I) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended Form for Qualifying the Vessel Design and the Procedure
Specification Used in Fabricating Filament-Wound Fiber-Reinforced
Plastic Pressure Vessels (Class I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended Form for Qualifying the Vessel Design and the Procedure
Specification Used in Fabricating Contact-Molded, Fiber-Reinforced
Plastic Pressure Vessels (Class I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended Form for Qualifying the Design and the Procedure
Specification Used in Adhesive Bonding of Parts of Fiber-Reinforced
Plastic Pressure Vessels (Class I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure Specification for Class II Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fabricator's Data Report for Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels
(Class I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fabricator's Partial Data Report (Class I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fabricator's Data Report for Class II Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fabricator's Partial Data Report for Class II Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fabricator's Data Report Supplementary Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..................................................
xiii
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
143
147
224
226
228
231
235
245
248
251
254
257
272
LIST OF SECTIONS
ð21Þ
SECTIONS
I
Rules for Construction of Power Boilers
II
Materials
• Part A — Ferrous Material Specifications
• Part B — Nonferrous Material Specifications
• Part C — Specifications for Welding Rods, Electrodes, and Filler Metals
• Part D — Properties (Customary)
• Part D — Properties (Metric)
III
Rules for Construction of Nuclear Facility Components
• Subsection NCA — General Requirements for Division 1 and Division 2
• Appendices
• Division 1
– Subsection NB — Class 1 Components
– Subsection NCD — Class 2 and Class 3 Components*
– Subsection NE — Class MC Components
– Subsection NF — Supports
– Subsection NG — Core Support Structures
• Division 2 — Code for Concrete Containments
• Division 3 — Containment Systems for Transportation and Storage of Spent Nuclear Fuel and High-Level
Radioactive Material
• Division 5 — High Temperature Reactors
IV
Rules for Construction of Heating Boilers
V
Nondestructive Examination
VI
Recommended Rules for the Care and Operation of Heating Boilers
VII
Recommended Guidelines for the Care of Power Boilers
VIII
Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels
• Division 1
• Division 2 — Alternative Rules
• Division 3 — Alternative Rules for Construction of High Pressure Vessels
IX
Welding, Brazing, and Fusing Qualifications
X
Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels
XI
Rules for Inservice Inspection of Nuclear Power Plant Components
• Division 1 — Rules for Inspection and Testing of Components of Light-Water-Cooled Plants
• Division 2 — Requirements for Reliability and Integrity Management (RIM) Programs for Nuclear Power
Plants
XII
Rules for Construction and Continued Service of Transport Tanks
XIII
Rules for Overpressure Protection
*
In the 2021 Edition, Subsections NC and ND have been incorporated into one publication, Subsection NCD (BPVC.III.1.NCD), Class 2 and Class 3
Components.
xiv
INTERPRETATIONS
Interpretations are issued in real time in ASME’s Interpretations Database at http://go.asme.org/Interpretations.
Historical BPVC interpretations may also be found in the Database.
CODE CASES
The Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code committees meet regularly to consider proposed additions and revisions to the
Code and to formulate Cases to clarify the intent of existing requirements or provide, when the need is urgent, rules for
materials or constructions not covered by existing Code rules. Those Cases that have been adopted will appear in the
appropriate 2021 Code Cases book: “Boilers and Pressure Vessels” or “Nuclear Components.” Each Code Cases book is
updated with seven Supplements. Supplements will be sent or made available automatically to the purchasers of the Code
Cases books up to the publication of the 2023 Code. Annulments of Code Cases become effective six months after the first
announcement of the annulment in a Code Case Supplement or Edition of the appropriate Code Case book. Code Case users
can check the current status of any Code Case at http://go.asme.org/BPVCCDatabase. Code Case users can also view an
index of the complete list of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Cases and Nuclear Code Cases at http://go.asme.org/BPVCC.
xv
ð21Þ
FOREWORD*
In 1911, The American Society of Mechanical Engineers established the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee to
formulate standard rules for the construction of steam boilers and other pressure vessels. In 2009, the Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Committee was superseded by the following committees:
(a) Committee on Power Boilers (I)
(b) Committee on Materials (II)
(c) Committee on Construction of Nuclear Facility Components (III)
(d) Committee on Heating Boilers (IV)
(e) Committee on Nondestructive Examination (V)
(f) Committee on Pressure Vessels (VIII)
(g) Committee on Welding, Brazing, and Fusing (IX)
(h) Committee on Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels (X)
(i) Committee on Nuclear Inservice Inspection (XI)
(j) Committee on Transport Tanks (XII)
(k) Committee on Overpressure Protection (XIII)
(l) Technical Oversight Management Committee (TOMC)
Where reference is made to “the Committee” in this Foreword, each of these committees is included individually and
collectively.
The Committee’s function is to establish rules of safety relating to pressure integrity, which govern the construction** of
boilers, pressure vessels, transport tanks, and nuclear components, and the inservice inspection of nuclear components
and transport tanks. The Committee also interprets these rules when questions arise regarding their intent. The technical
consistency of the Sections of the Code and coordination of standards development activities of the Committees is
supported and guided by the Technical Oversight Management Committee. This Code does not address other
safety issues relating to the construction of boilers, pressure vessels, transport tanks, or nuclear components, or
the inservice inspection of nuclear components or transport tanks. Users of the Code should refer to the pertinent
codes, standards, laws, regulations, or other relevant documents for safety issues other than those relating to pressure
integrity. Except for Sections XI and XII, and with a few other exceptions, the rules do not, of practical necessity, reflect the
likelihood and consequences of deterioration in service related to specific service fluids or external operating environments. In formulating the rules, the Committee considers the needs of users, manufacturers, and inspectors of pressure vessels. The objective of the rules is to afford reasonably certain protection of life and property, and to provide a
margin for deterioration in service to give a reasonably long, safe period of usefulness. Advancements in design and
materials and evidence of experience have been recognized.
This Code contains mandatory requirements, specific prohibitions, and nonmandatory guidance for construction
activities and inservice inspection and testing activities. The Code does not address all aspects of these activities
and those aspects that are not specifically addressed should not be considered prohibited. The Code is not a handbook
and cannot replace education, experience, and the use of engineering judgment. The phrase engineering judgment refers
to technical judgments made by knowledgeable engineers experienced in the application of the Code. Engineering judgments must be consistent with Code philosophy, and such judgments must never be used to overrule mandatory requirements or specific prohibitions of the Code.
The Committee recognizes that tools and techniques used for design and analysis change as technology progresses and
expects engineers to use good judgment in the application of these tools. The designer is responsible for complying with
Code rules and demonstrating compliance with Code equations when such equations are mandatory. The Code neither
requires nor prohibits the use of computers for the design or analysis of components constructed to the requirements of
the Code. However, designers and engineers using computer programs for design or analysis are cautioned that they are
responsible for all technical assumptions inherent in the programs they use and the application of these programs to their
design.
*
The information contained in this Foreword is not part of this American National Standard (ANS) and has not been processed in accordance with
ANSI's requirements for an ANS. Therefore, this Foreword may contain material that has not been subjected to public review or a consensus process. In
addition, it does not contain requirements necessary for conformance to the Code.
**
Construction, as used in this Foreword, is an all-inclusive term comprising materials, design, fabrication, examination, inspection, testing, certification, and overpressure protection.
xvi
The rules established by the Committee are not to be interpreted as approving, recommending, or endorsing any
proprietary or specific design, or as limiting in any way the manufacturer’s freedom to choose any method of design or any
form of construction that conforms to the Code rules.
The Committee meets regularly to consider revisions of the rules, new rules as dictated by technological development,
Code Cases, and requests for interpretations. Only the Committee has the authority to provide official interpretations of
this Code. Requests for revisions, new rules, Code Cases, or interpretations shall be addressed to the Secretary in writing
and shall give full particulars in order to receive consideration and action (see Submittal of Technical Inquiries to the
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Standards Committees). Proposed revisions to the Code resulting from inquiries will be
presented to the Committee for appropriate action. The action of the Committee becomes effective only after confirmation
by ballot of the Committee and approval by ASME. Proposed revisions to the Code approved by the Committee are
submitted to the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) and published at http://go.asme.org/BPVCPublicReview
to invite comments from all interested persons. After public review and final approval by ASME, revisions are published at
regular intervals in Editions of the Code.
The Committee does not rule on whether a component shall or shall not be constructed to the provisions of the Code.
The scope of each Section has been established to identify the components and parameters considered by the Committee
in formulating the Code rules.
Questions or issues regarding compliance of a specific component with the Code rules are to be directed to the ASME
Certificate Holder (Manufacturer). Inquiries concerning the interpretation of the Code are to be directed to the
Committee. ASME is to be notified should questions arise concerning improper use of the ASME Single Certification
Mark.
When required by context in this Section, the singular shall be interpreted as the plural, and vice versa, and the feminine,
masculine, or neuter gender shall be treated as such other gender as appropriate.
The words “shall,” “should,” and “may” are used in this Standard as follows:
– Shall is used to denote a requirement.
– Should is used to denote a recommendation.
– May is used to denote permission, neither a requirement nor a recommendation.
xvii
STATEMENT OF POLICY ON THE USE OF THE ASME SINGLE
CERTIFICATION MARK AND CODE AUTHORIZATION IN
ADVERTISING
ASME has established procedures to authorize qualified organizations to perform various activities in accordance with
the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. It is the aim of the Society to provide recognition of
organizations so authorized. An organization holding authorization to perform various activities in accordance with the
requirements of the Code may state this capability in its advertising literature.
Organizations that are authorized to use the ASME Single Certification Mark for marking items or constructions that
have been constructed and inspected in compliance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code are issued Certificates
of Authorization. It is the aim of the Society to maintain the standing of the ASME Single Certification Mark for the benefit of
the users, the enforcement jurisdictions, and the holders of the ASME Single Certification Mark who comply with all
requirements.
Based on these objectives, the following policy has been established on the usage in advertising of facsimiles of the
ASME Single Certification Mark, Certificates of Authorization, and reference to Code construction. The American Society of
Mechanical Engineers does not “approve,” “certify,” “rate,” or “endorse” any item, construction, or activity and there shall
be no statements or implications that might so indicate. An organization holding the ASME Single Certification Mark and/
or a Certificate of Authorization may state in advertising literature that items, constructions, or activities “are built
(produced or performed) or activities conducted in accordance with the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code,” or “meet the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.”An ASME corporate logo shall not
be used by any organization other than ASME.
The ASME Single Certification Mark shall be used only for stamping and nameplates as specifically provided in the Code.
However, facsimiles may be used for the purpose of fostering the use of such construction. Such usage may be by an
association or a society, or by a holder of the ASME Single Certification Mark who may also use the facsimile in advertising
to show that clearly specified items will carry the ASME Single Certification Mark.
STATEMENT OF POLICY ON THE USE OF ASME MARKING TO
IDENTIFY MANUFACTURED ITEMS
The ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code provides rules for the construction of boilers, pressure vessels, and nuclear
components. This includes requirements for materials, design, fabrication, examination, inspection, and stamping. Items
constructed in accordance with all of the applicable rules of the Code are identified with the ASME Single Certification
Mark described in the governing Section of the Code.
Markings such as “ASME,” “ASME Standard,” or any other marking including “ASME” or the ASME Single Certification
Mark shall not be used on any item that is not constructed in accordance with all of the applicable requirements of the
Code.
Items shall not be described on ASME Data Report Forms nor on similar forms referring to ASME that tend to imply that
all Code requirements have been met when, in fact, they have not been. Data Report Forms covering items not fully
complying with ASME requirements should not refer to ASME or they should clearly identify all exceptions to the ASME
requirements.
xviii
SUBMITTAL OF TECHNICAL INQUIRIES TO THE BOILER AND
PRESSURE VESSEL STANDARDS COMMITTEES
1 INTRODUCTION
(a) The following information provides guidance to Code users for submitting technical inquiries to the applicable
Boiler and Pressure Vessel (BPV) Standards Committee (hereinafter referred to as the Committee). See the guidelines on
approval of new materials under the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code in Section II, Part D for requirements for
requests that involve adding new materials to the Code. See the guidelines on approval of new welding and brazing
materials in Section II, Part C for requirements for requests that involve adding new welding and brazing materials
(“consumables”) to the Code.
Technical inquiries can include requests for revisions or additions to the Code requirements, requests for Code Cases,
or requests for Code Interpretations, as described below:
(1) Code Revisions. Code revisions are considered to accommodate technological developments, to address administrative requirements, to incorporate Code Cases, or to clarify Code intent.
(2) Code Cases. Code Cases represent alternatives or additions to existing Code requirements. Code Cases are written
as a Question and Reply, and are usually intended to be incorporated into the Code at a later date. When used, Code Cases
prescribe mandatory requirements in the same sense as the text of the Code. However, users are cautioned that not all
regulators, jurisdictions, or Owners automatically accept Code Cases. The most common applications for Code Cases are
as follows:
(-a) to permit early implementation of an approved Code revision based on an urgent need
(-b) to permit use of a new material for Code construction
(-c) to gain experience with new materials or alternative requirements prior to incorporation directly into the
Code
(3) Code Interpretations
(-a) Code Interpretations provide clarification of the meaning of existing requirements in the Code and are
presented in Inquiry and Reply format. Interpretations do not introduce new requirements.
(-b) Interpretations will be issued only if existing Code text is ambiguous or conveys conflicting requirements. If a
revision of the requirements is required to support the Interpretation, an Intent Interpretation will be issued in parallel
with a revision to the Code.
(b) Code requirements, Code Cases, and Code Interpretations established by the Committee are not to be considered as
approving, recommending, certifying, or endorsing any proprietary or specific design, or as limiting in any way the
freedom of manufacturers, constructors, or Owners to choose any method of design or any form of construction
that conforms to the Code requirements.
(c) Inquiries that do not comply with the following guidance or that do not provide sufficient information for the
Committee’s full understanding may result in the request being returned to the Inquirer with no action.
2 INQUIRY FORMAT
Submittals to the Committee should include the following information:
(a) Purpose. Specify one of the following:
(1) request for revision of present Code requirements
(2) request for new or additional Code requirements
(3) request for Code Case
(4) request for Code Interpretation
(b) Background. The Inquirer should provide the information needed for the Committee’s understanding of the
Inquiry, being sure to include reference to the applicable Code Section, Division, Edition, Addenda (if applicable), paragraphs, figures, and tables. This information should include a statement indicating why the included paragraphs, figures,
or tables are ambiguous or convey conflicting requirements. Preferably, the Inquirer should provide a copy of, or relevant
extracts from, the specific referenced portions of the Code.
xix
ð21Þ
(c) Presentations. The Inquirer may desire to attend or be asked to attend a meeting of the Committee to make a formal
presentation or to answer questions from the Committee members with regard to the Inquiry. Attendance at a BPV
Standards Committee meeting shall be at the expense of the Inquirer. The Inquirer’s attendance or lack of attendance at a
meeting will not be used by the Committee as a basis for acceptance or rejection of the Inquiry by the Committee. However,
if the Inquirer’s request is unclear, attendance by the Inquirer or a representative may be necessary for the Committee to
understand the request sufficiently to be able to provide an Interpretation. If the Inquirer desires to make a presentation
at a Committee meeting, the Inquirer should provide advance notice to the Committee Secretary, to ensure time will be
allotted for the presentation in the meeting agenda. The Inquirer should consider the need for additional audiovisual
equipment that might not otherwise be provided by the Committee. With sufficient advance notice to the Committee
Secretary, such equipment may be made available.
3 CODE REVISIONS OR ADDITIONS
Requests for Code revisions or additions should include the following information:
(a) Requested Revisions or Additions. For requested revisions, the Inquirer should identify those requirements of the
Code that they believe should be revised, and should submit a copy of, or relevant extracts from, the appropriate requirements as they appear in the Code, marked up with the requested revision. For requested additions to the Code, the
Inquirer should provide the recommended wording and should clearly indicate where they believe the additions should
be located in the Code requirements.
(b) Statement of Need. The Inquirer should provide a brief explanation of the need for the revision or addition.
(c) Background Information. The Inquirer should provide background information to support the revision or addition,
including any data or changes in technology that form the basis for the request, that will allow the Committee to
adequately evaluate the requested revision or addition. Sketches, tables, figures, and graphs should be submitted,
as appropriate. The Inquirer should identify any pertinent portions of the Code that would be affected by the revision
or addition and any portions of the Code that reference the requested revised or added paragraphs.
4 CODE CASES
Requests for Code Cases should be accompanied by a statement of need and background information similar to that
described in 3(b) and 3(c), respectively, for Code revisions or additions. The urgency of the Code Case (e.g., project
underway or imminent, new procedure) should be described. In addition, it is important that the request is in connection
with equipment that will bear the ASME Single Certification Mark, with the exception of Section XI applications. The
proposed Code Case should identify the Code Section and Division, and should be written as a Question and a Reply, in the
same format as existing Code Cases. Requests for Code Cases should also indicate the applicable Code Editions and
Addenda (if applicable) to which the requested Code Case applies.
5 CODE INTERPRETATIONS
(a) Requests for Code Interpretations should be accompanied by the following information:
(1) Inquiry. The Inquirer should propose a condensed and precise Inquiry, omitting superfluous background information and, when possible, composing the Inquiry in such a way that a “yes” or a “no” Reply, with brief limitations or
conditions, if needed, can be provided by the Committee. The proposed question should be technically and editorially
correct.
(2) Reply. The Inquirer should propose a Reply that clearly and concisely answers the proposed Inquiry question.
Preferably, the Reply should be “yes” or “no,” with brief limitations or conditions, if needed.
(3) Background Information. The Inquirer should include a statement indicating why the included paragraphs,
figures, or tables are ambiguous or convey conflicting requirements. The Inquirer should provide any need or background
information, such as described in 3(b) and 3(c), respectively, for Code revisions or additions, that will assist the
Committee in understanding the proposed Inquiry and Reply.
If the Inquirer believes a revision of the Code requirements would be helpful to support the Interpretation, the Inquirer
may propose such a revision for consideration by the Committee. In most cases, such a proposal is not necessary.
(b) Requests for Code Interpretations should be limited to an Interpretation of a particular requirement in the Code or
in a Code Case. Except with regard to interpreting a specific Code requirement, the Committee is not permitted to consider
consulting-type requests such as the following:
(1) a review of calculations, design drawings, welding qualifications, or descriptions of equipment or parts to
determine compliance with Code requirements
xx
(2) a request for assistance in performing any Code-prescribed functions relating to, but not limited to, material
selection, designs, calculations, fabrication, inspection, pressure testing, or installation
(3) a request seeking the rationale for Code requirements
6 SUBMITTALS
(a) Submittal. Requests for Code Interpretation should preferably be submitted through the online Interpretation
Submittal Form. The form is accessible at http://go.asme.org/InterpretationRequest. Upon submittal of the form, the
Inquirer will receive an automatic e-mail confirming receipt. If the Inquirer is unable to use the online form, the Inquirer
may mail the request to the following address:
Secretary
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee
Two Park Avenue
New York, NY 10016-5990
All other Inquiries should be mailed to the Secretary of the BPV Committee at the address above. Inquiries are unlikely
to receive a response if they are not written in clear, legible English. They must also include the name of the Inquirer and
the company they represent or are employed by, if applicable, and the Inquirer’s address, telephone number, fax number,
and e-mail address, if available.
(b) Response. The Secretary of the appropriate Committee will provide a written response, via letter or e-mail, as
appropriate, to the Inquirer, upon completion of the requested action by the Committee. Inquirers may track the status of
their Interpretation Request at http://go.asme.org/Interpretations.
xxi
ð21Þ
PERSONNEL
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Standards Committees,
Subgroups, and Working Groups
January 1, 2021
TECHNICAL OVERSIGHT MANAGEMENT COMMITTEE (TOMC)
R. E. McLaughlin, Chair
N. A. Finney, Vice Chair
S. J. Rossi, Staff Secretary
G. Aurioles, Sr.
R. W. Barnes
T. L. Bedeaux
D. A. Bowers
C. Brown
D. B. DeMichael
R. P. Deubler
P. D. Edwards
J. G. Feldstein
G. W. Galanes
J. A. Hall
T. E. Hansen
G. W. Hembree
ADMINISTRATIVE COMMITTEE
J. F. Henry
R. B. Keating
B. Linnemann
W. M. Lundy
D. I. Morris
T. P. Pastor
M. D. Rana
S. C. Roberts
F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
G. Scribner
W. J. Sperko
D. Srnic
R. W. Swayne
M. Wadkinson
J. E. Batey, Contributing Member
R. E. McLaughlin, Chair
N. A. Finney, Vice Chair
S. J. Rossi, Staff Secretary
D. A. Bowers
J. Cameron
D. B. DeMichael
J. A. Hall
R. B. Keating
B. Linnemann
M. D. Rana
S. C. Roberts
R. R. Stevenson
R. W. Swayne
MARINE CONFERENCE GROUP
E. Lawson, Staff Secretary
J. G. Hungerbuhler, Jr.
G. Nair
H. N. Patel
N. Prokopuk
J. D. Reynolds
CONFERENCE COMMITTEE
C. B. Cantrell — Nebraska, Chair
J. T. Amato — Ohio, Secretary
W. Anderson — Mississippi
P. Bearden — Minnesota
R. Becker — Colorado
T. D. Boggs — Missouri
R. A. Boillard — Indiana
R. J. Bunte — Iowa
J. H. Burpee — Maine
S. Chapman — Tennessee
T. G. Clark — Oregon
B. J. Crawford — Georgia
E. L. Creaser — New Brunswick,
Canada
J. J. Dacanay — Hawaii
R. DeLury — Manitoba, Canada
C. Dinic — Ontario, Canada
D. Eastman — Newfoundland and
Labrador, Canada
D. A. Ehler — Nova Scotia, Canada
S. D. Frazier — Washington
T. J. Granneman II — Oklahoma
S. Harder — Arizona
E. G. Hilton — Virginia
M. L. Jordan — Kentucky
R. Kamboj — British Columbia,
Canada
E. Kawa, Jr. — Massachusetts
A. Khssassi — Quebec, Canada
D. Kinney — North Carolina
J. Klug — City of Milwaukee,
Wisconsin
K. S. Lane — Alaska
J. LeSage, Jr. — Louisiana
Subgroup on Research and Development (TOMC)
S. C. Roberts, Chair
S. J. Rossi, Staff Secretary
R. W. Barnes
N. A. Finney
J. F. Henry
W. Hoffelner
B. Hrubala
R. B. Keating
R. E. McLaughlin
T. P. Pastor
D. Andrei, Contributing Member
Subgroup on Strategic Initiatives (TOMC)
N. A. Finney, Chair
S. J. Rossi, Staff Secretary
R. W. Barnes
T. L. Bedeaux
G. W. Hembree
J. F. Henry
M. H. Jawad
R. B. Keating
R. E. McLaughlin
T. P. Pastor
S. C. Roberts
Task Group on Remote Inspection and Examination (SI-TOMC)
S. C. Roberts, Chair
P. J. Coco
N. A. Finney
S. A. Marks
R. Rockwood
C. Stevens
M. Tannenbaum
J. Cameron, Alternate
P. Lang, Contributing Member
J. Pang, Contributing Member
S. J. Rossi, Contributing Member
C. A. Sanna, Contributing Member
Special Working Group on High Temperature Technology (TOMC)
D. Dewees, Chair
F. W. Brust
T. D. Burchell
P. R. Donavin
B. F. Hantz
J. F. Henry
R. I. Jetter
P. Smith
xxii
A. M. Lorimor — South Dakota
M. Mailman — Northwest Territories, Canada
W. McGivney — City of New York,
New York
S. F. Noonan — Maryland
A. K. Oda — Washington
B. S. Oliver — New Hampshire
J. L. Oliver — Nevada
M. Poehlmann — Alberta, Canada
P. B. Polick — Illinois
J. F. Porcella — West Virginia
C. F. Reyes — California
W. J. Ross — Pennsylvania
M. J. Ryan — City of Chicago, Illinois
M. H. Sansone — New York
T. S. Seime — North Dakota
C. S. Selinger — Saskatchewan,
Canada
J. E. Sharier — Ohio
R. Spiker — North Carolina
D. J. Stenrose — Michigan
R. J. Stimson II — Kansas
R. K. Sturm — Utah
D. K. Sullivan — Arkansas
J. Taveras — Rhode Island
G. Teel — California
S. R. Townsend — Prince Edward
Island, Canada
R. D. Troutt — Texas
D. M. Warburton — Florida
M. Washington — New Jersey
E. Wiggins — Alabama
INTERNATIONAL INTEREST REVIEW GROUP
V. Felix
Y.-G. Kim
S. H. Leong
W. Lin
O. F. Manafa
Subgroup on General Requirements and Piping (BPV I)
C. Minu
Y.-W. Park
A. R. Reynaga Nogales
P. Williamson
E. M. Ortman, Chair
D. E. Tompkins, Vice Chair
F. Massi, Secretary
P. D. Edwards
T. E. Hansen
M. Ishikawa
M. Lemmons
R. E. McLaughlin
COMMITTEE ON POWER BOILERS (BPV I)
R. E. McLaughlin, Chair
E. M. Ortman, Vice Chair
U. D’Urso, Staff Secretary
D. I. Anderson
J. L. Arnold
K. K. Coleman
P. D. Edwards
J. G. Feldstein
S. Fincher
G. W. Galanes
T. E. Hansen
J. F. Henry
J. S. Hunter
M. Ishikawa
G. B. Komora
F. Massi
L. Moedinger
P. A. Molvie
Y. Oishi
D. E. Tompkins
D. E. Tuttle
J. Vattappilly
M. Wadkinson
R. V. Wielgoszinski
F. Zeller
H. Michael, Delegate
D. L. Berger, Honorary Member
D. N. French, Honorary Member
J. Hainsworth, Honorary Member
W. L. Lowry, Honorary Member
J. R. MacKay, Honorary Member
T. C. McGough, Honorary Member
J. T. Pillow, Honorary Member
B. W. Roberts, Honorary Member
R. D. Schueler, Jr., Honorary Member
J. M. Tanzosh, Honorary Member
R. L. Williams, Honorary Member
L. W. Yoder, Honorary Member
L. Moedinger
B. J. Mollitor
Y. Oishi
D. E. Tuttle
M. Wadkinson
R. V. Wielgoszinski
W. L. Lowry, Contributing Member
Subgroup on Locomotive Boilers (BPV I)
J. R. Braun, Chair
S. M. Butler, Secretary
A. Biesecker
C. Cross
G. W. Galanes
D. W. Griner
M. A. Janssen
S. A. Lee
L. Moedinger
G. M. Ray
M. W. Westland
Subgroup on Materials (BPV I)
K. K. Coleman, Chair
K. Hayes, Vice Chair
M. Lewis, Secretary
S. H. Bowes
G. W. Galanes
P. F. Gilston
J. F. Henry
J. S. Hunter
E. Liebl
F. Masuyama
M. Ortolani
D. W. Rahoi
J. Vattappilly
F. Zeller
B. W. Roberts, Contributing Member
J. M. Tanzosh, Contributing Member
Executive Committee (BPV I)
E. M. Ortman, Chair
R. E. McLaughlin, Vice Chair
D. I. Anderson
J. L. Arnold
J. R. Braun
K. K. Coleman
H. Dalal
T. Dhanraj
U. D'Urso
P. F. Gilston
K. Hayes
P. Jennings
A. Spangenberg
D. E. Tompkins
Subgroup on Solar Boilers (BPV I)
P. Jennings, Chair
R. E. Hearne, Secretary
S. Fincher
J. S. Hunter
F. Massi
P. Swarnkar
Task Group on Modernization (BPV I)
D. I. Anderson, Chair
U. D’Urso, Staff Secretary
J. L. Arnold
D. Dewees
G. W. Galanes
J. P. Glaspie
T. E. Hansen
Subgroup on Design (BPV I)
D. I. Anderson, Chair
L. S. Tsai, Secretary
P. Becker
D. Dewees
G. B. Komora
L. Krupp
P. A. Molvie
N. Ranck
J. Vattappilly
M. Wadkinson
J. P. Glaspie, Contributing Member
J. F. Henry
R. E. McLaughlin
P. A. Molvie
E. M. Ortman
D. E. Tuttle
J. Vattappilly
Germany International Working Group (BPV I)
Subgroup on Fabrication and Examination (BPV I)
J. L. Arnold, Chair
P. F. Gilston, Vice Chair
P. Becker, Secretary
A. Biesecker
K. K. Coleman
S. Fincher
G. W. Galanes
T. E. Hansen
A. Spangenberg, Chair
P. Chavdarov, Secretary
B. Daume
J. Fleischfresser
R. Kauer
D. Koelbl
S. Krebs
T. Ludwig
R. A. Meyers
H. Michael
P. Jennings
M. Lewis
C. T. McDaris
R. E. McLaughlin
R. J. Newell
Y. Oishi
R. V. Wielgoszinski
xxiii
F. Miunske
M. Sykora
R. Helmholdt, Contributing Member
J. Henrichsmeyer, Contributing
Member
B. Müller, Contributing Member
P. Paluszkiewicz, Contributing
Member
R. Uebel, Contributing Member
India International Working Group (BPV I)
H. Dalal, Chair
T. Dhanraj, Vice Chai
K. Thanupillai, Secretary
P. Brahma
S. Chakrabarti
A. Hantodkar
S. A. Kumar
A. J. Patil
A. R. Patil
Subgroup on Ferrous Specifications (BPV II)
S. Purkait
M. G. Rao
U. Revisankaran
G. U. Shanker
D. K. Shrivastava
K. Singha
R. Sundararaj
S. Venkataramana
A. Appleton, Chair
K. M. Hottle, Vice Chair
C. Hyde, Secretary
B. M. Dingman
M. J. Dosdourian
O. Elkadim
D. Fialkowski
J. F. Grubb
J. Gundlach
D. S. Janikowski
S. G. Lee
W. C. Mack
K. E. Orie
D. Poweleit
E. Upitis
J. D. Fritz, Contributing Member
Subgroup on International Material Specifications (BPV II)
COMMITTEE ON MATERIALS (BPV II)
J. Cameron, Chair
J. F. Grubb, Vice Chair
C. E. O’Brien, Staff Secretary
A. Appleton
P. Chavdarov
J. R. Foulds
D. W. Gandy
J. A. Hall
J. F. Henry
K. M. Hottle
M. Ishikawa
K. Kimura
F. Masuyama
K. E. Orie
D. W. Rahoi
W. Ren
E. Shapiro
R. C. Sutherlin
F. Zeller
O. Oldani, Delegate
F. Abe, Contributing Member
M. Ishikawa, Chair
A. R. Nywening, Vice Chair
B. Mruk, Secretary
A. Chaudouet
P. Chavdarov
H. Chen
A. F. Garbolevsky
D. O. Henry
A. Chaudouet, Contributing Member
D. B. Denis, Contributing Member
J. D. Fritz, Contributing Member
W. Hoffelner, Contributing Member
M. Katcher, Contributing Member
R. K. Nanstad, Contributing Member
M. L. Nayyar, Contributing Member
D. T. Peters, Contributing Member
B. W. Roberts, Contributing Member
J. J. Sanchez-Hanton, Contributing
Member
R. W. Swindeman, Contributing
Member
J. M. Tanzosh, Contributing Member
E. Upitis, Contributing Member
R. G. Young, Contributing Member
T. M. Cullen, Honorary Member
W. D. Edsall, Honorary Member
G. C. Hsu, Honorary Member
C. E. Spaeder, Jr., Honorary Member
A. W. Zeuthen, Honorary Member
W. M. Lundy
F. Zeller
C. Zhou
O. Oldani, Delegate
H. Lorenz, Contributing Member
T. F. Miskell, Contributing Member
E. Upitis, Contributing Member
Subgroup on Nonferrous Alloys (BPV II)
E. Shapiro, Chair
S. Yem, Vice Chair
J. Robertson, Secretary
R. M. Beldyk
J. M. Downs
J. F. Grubb
W. MacDonald
D. Maitra
J. A. McMaster
D. W. Rahoi
W. Ren
R. C. Sutherlin
J. Weritz
A. Williams
R. Wright
D. B. Denis, Contributing Member
M. Katcher, Contributing Member
D. T. Peters, Contributing Member
Subgroup on Physical Properties (BPV II)
Executive Committee (BPV II)
J. Cameron, Chair
C. E. O’Brien, Staff Secretary
A. Appleton
G. W. Galanes
J. F. Grubb
J. F. Henry
J. F. Grubb, Chair
P. K. Rai, Vice Chair
G. Aurioles, Sr.
D. Chandiramani
P. Chavdarov
H. Eshraghi
B. F. Hantz
R. D. Jones
M. Ishikawa
D. L. Kurle
R. W. Mikitka
E. Shapiro
R. C. Sutherlin
Subgroup on External Pressure (BPV II)
D. L. Kurle, Chair
S. Guzey, Vice Chair
J. A. A. Morrow, Secretary
E. Alexis
L. F. Campbell
H. Chen
D. S. Griffin
P. K. Lam
S. Neilsen
D. W. Rahoi
E. Shapiro
D. K. Verma
S. Yem
D. B. Denis, Contributing Member
Subgroup on Strength, Ferrous Alloys (BPV II)
J. F. Grubb
M. H. Jawad
S. Krishnamurthy
R. W. Mikitka
P. K. Rai
M. Wadkinson
M. Katcher, Contributing Member
S. W. Knowles, Vice Chair
L. S. Nicol, Secretary
J. R. Foulds
G. W. Galanes
J. A. Hall
J. F. Henry
M. Ishikawa
F. Masuyama
M. Ortolani
xxiv
M. Osterfoss
D. W. Rahoi
S. Rosinski
M. Ueyama
F. Zeller
F. Abe, Contributing Member
A. Di Rienzo, Contributing Member
M. Nair, Contributing Member
R. G. Young, Contributing Member
Subgroup on Strength of Weldments (BPV II & BPV IX)
G. W. Galanes, Chair
K. L. Hayes, Vice Chair
S. H. Bowes, Secretary
K. K. Coleman
M. Denault
J. R. Foulds
D. W. Gandy
M. Ghahremani
J. F. Henry
W. F. Newell, Jr.
COMMITTEE ON CONSTRUCTION OF NUCLEAR FACILITY
COMPONENTS (BPV III)
J. Penso
D. W. Rahoi
B. W. Roberts
W. J. Sperko
J. P. Swezy, Jr.
M. Ueyama
P. D. Flenner, Contributing Member
J. J. Sanchez-Hanton, Contributing
Member
R. B. Keating, Chair
T. M. Adams, Vice Chair
D. E. Matthews, Vice Chair
K. Verderber, Staff Secretary
A. Appleton
S. Asada
R. W. Barnes
W. H. Borter
M. E. Cohen
R. P. Deubler
P. R. Donavin
A. C. Eberhardt
J. V. Gardiner
J. Grimm
S. Hunter
R. M. Jessee
R. I. Jetter
C. C. Kim
G. H. Koo
V. Kostarev
Working Group on Materials Database (BPV II)
W. Hoffelner, Vice Chair
C. E. O’Brien, Staff Secretary
F. Abe
J. R. Foulds
J. F. Henry
R. C. Sutherlin
D. Andrei, Contributing Member
J. L. Arnold, Contributing Member
D. T. Peters, Contributing Member
W. Ren, Contributing Member
B. W. Roberts, Contributing Member
R. W. Swindeman, Contributing
Member
Working Group on Creep Strength Enhanced Ferritic Steels (BPV II)
M. Ortolani, Chair
G. W. Galanes, Vice Chair
S. H. Bowes
K. K. Coleman
J. R. Foulds
J. F. Henry
M. Lang
S. Luke
F. Masuyama
T. Melfi
W. F. Newell, Jr.
Executive Committee (BPV III)
J. J. Sanchez-Hanton
J. A. Siefert
W. J. Sperko
F. Zeller
F. Abe, Contributing Member
G. Cumino, Contributing Member
P. D. Flenner, Contributing Member
R. W. Swindeman, Contributing
Member
J. M. Tanzosh, Contributing Member
R. B. Keating, Chair
K. Verderber, Staff Secretary
T. M. Adams
P. R. Donavin
J. V. Gardiner
J. Grimm
P. R. Donavin, Chair
R. P. Deubler
M. A. Gray
R. I. Jetter
R. B. Keating
K. A. Manoly
D. E. Matthews
S. McKillop
F. Abe, Contributing Member
W. Hoffelner, Contributing Member
M. Katcher, Contributing Member
D. T. Peters, Contributing Member
B. W. Roberts, Contributing Member
R. W. Swindeman, Contributing
Member
M. N. Mitchell
S. Sham
W. F. Weitze
G. L. Hollinger, Contributing Member
M. H. Jawad, Contributing Member
W. J. O’Donnell, Sr., Contributing
Member
K. Wright, Contributing Member
Subgroup on Component Design (SC-D) (BPV III)
D. E. Matthews, Chair
P. Vock, Vice Chair
S. Pellet, Secretary
T. M. Adams
D. J. Ammerman
G. A. Antaki
S. Asada
J. F. Ball
C. Basavaraju
D. Chowdhury
R. P. Deubler
P. Hirschberg
M. Kassar
R. B. Keating
D. Keck
O.-S. Kim
T. R. Liszkai
China International Working Group (BPV II)
S. Liu, Chair
Yong Zhang, Vice Chair
A. T. Xu, Secretary
W. Fang
Q. C. Feng
S. Huo
F. Kong
H. Li
J. Li
S. Li
Z. Rongcan
S. Tan
C. Wang
J. Wang
D. E. Matthews
S. McKillop
J. A. Munshi
S. Sham
W. K. Sowder, Jr.
Subcommittee on Design (BPV III)
Working Group on Data Analysis (BPV II)
J. F. Grubb, Chair
J. R. Foulds, Vice Chair
J. F. Henry
F. Masuyama
M. Ortolani
W. Ren
M. Subanovic
M. J. Swindeman
M. A. Lockwood
K. A. Manoly
K. Matsunaga
B. McGlone
S. McKillop
J. C. Minichiello
M. N. Mitchell
T. Nagata
J. B. Ossmann
S. Pellet
E. L. Pleins
S. Sham
W. J. Sperko
C. T. Smith, Contributing Member
W. K. Sowder, Jr., Contributing
Member
M. Zhou, Contributing Member
D. K. Morton, Honorary Member
R. F. Reedy, Sr., Honorary Member
Q.-J. Wang
X. Wang
F. Yang
G. Yang
H.-C. Yang
J. Yang
R. Ye
L. Yin
H. Zhang
X.-H. Zhang
Yingkai Zhang
Q. Zhao
S. Zhao
xxv
K. A. Manoly
R. J. Masterson
J. C. Minichiello
T. Mitsuhashi
D. Murphy
T. M. Musto
T. Nagata
J. R. Stinson
G. Z. Tokarski
J. P. Tucker
S. Willoughby-Braun
C. Wilson
A. A. Dermenjian, Contributing
Member
I. Saito, Contributing Member
K. R. Wichman, Honorary Member
Working Group on Core Support Structures (SG-CD) (BPV III)
D. Keck, Chair
R. Z. Ziegler, Vice Chair
R. Martin, Secretary
G. W. Delport
L. C. Hartless
T. R. Liszkai
H. S. Mehta
M. Nakajima
Working Group on Pumps (SG-CD) (BPV III)
M. D. Snyder
R. Vollmer
T. M. Wiger
C. Wilson
Y. Wong
A. Tsirigotis, Alternate
J. F. Kielb, Contributing Member
D. Chowdhury, Chair
J. V. Gregg, Jr., Secretary
M. D. Eftychiou
R. A. Fleming
S. Hughes
J. Kikushima
K. J. Noel
J. Sulley
A. G. Washburn
Y. Wong
I. H. Tseng, Alternate
X. Di, Contributing Member
C. Gabhart, Contributing Member
R. Ladefian, Contributing Member
Working Group on Supports (SG-CD) (BPV III)
Working Group on Design of Division 3 Containment Systems
(SG-CD) (BPV III)
D. J. Ammerman, Chair
S. Klein, Secretary
V. Broz
D. W. Lewis
A. Rigato
J. R. Stinson, Chair
U. S. Bandyopadhyay, Secretary
K. Avrithi
F. J. Birch
N. M. Bisceglia
R. P. Deubler
N. M. Graham
Y. Matsubara
D. Siromani
X. Zhai
X. Zhang
J. C. Minichiello, Contributing
Member
S. Pellet
G. Z. Tokarski
A. Tsirigotis
L. Vandersip
P. Wiseman
J. Huang, Alternate
R. J. Masterson, Contributing
Member
Working Group on HDPE Design of Components (SG-CD) (BPV III)
T. M. Musto, Chair
J. B. Ossmann, Secretary
M. Brandes
S. Choi
J. R. Hebeisen
P. Krishnaswamy
M. Kuntz
K. A. Manoly
M. Martin
Working Group on Valves (SG-CD) (BPV III)
D. P. Munson
F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
R. Stakenborghs
J. Wright
M. T. Audrain, Alternate
D. Burwell, Contributing Member
J. C. Minichiello, Contributing
Member
P. Vock, Chair
S. Jones, Secretary
M. C. Buckley
A. Cardillo
R. Farrell
G. A. Jolly
J. Lambin
T. Lippucci
Working Group on Piping (SG-CD) (BPV III)
G. A. Antaki, Chair
G. Z. Tokarski, Secretary
C. Basavaraju
J. Catalano
F. Claeys
C. M. Faidy
R. Farrell
R. G. Gilada
N. M. Graham
M. A. Gray
R. W. Haupt
A. Hirano
P. Hirschberg
M. Kassar
J. Kawahata
V. Kostarev
D. Lieb
T. B. Littleton
Working Group on Vessels (SG-CD) (BPV III)
J. F. McCabe
I.-K. Nam
J. O'Callaghan
K. E. Reid II
N. C. Sutherland
D. Vlaicu
S. Weindorf
C.-I. Wu
T. M. Adams, Contributing Member
R. J. Gurdal, Contributing Member
R. B. Keating, Contributing Member
Y. Liu, Contributing Member
J. C. Minichiello, Contributing
Member
A. N. Nguyen, Contributing Member
M. S. Sills, Contributing Member
E. A. Wais, Contributing Member
D. Murphy, Chair
S. Willoughby-Braun, Secretary
J. Arthur
C. Basavaraju
D. Keck
J. I. Kim
O.-S. Kim
D. E. Matthews
T. Mitsuhashi
T. J. Schriefer
M. C. Scott
P. K. Shah
C. Turylo
D. Vlaicu
C. Wilson
T. Yamazaki
R. Z. Ziegler
B. Basu, Contributing Member
R. B. Keating, Contributing Member
W. F. Weitze, Contributing Member
Subgroup on Design Methods (SC-D) (BPV III)
S. McKillop, Chair
P. R. Donavin, Vice Chair
J. Wen, Secretary
K. Avrithi
L. Davies
R. Farrell
S. R. Gosselin
M. A. Gray
J. V. Gregg, Jr.
K. Hsu
R. Kalnas
D. Keck
Working Group on Pressure Relief (SG-CD) (BPV III)
J. F. Ball, Chair
K. R. May, Vice Chair
R. Krithivasan, Secretary
J. W. Dickson
S. Jones
R. Lack
D. Miller
T. Patel
K. Shores
C. A. Mizer
H. O’Brien
J. O’Callaghan
K. E. Reid II
J. Sulley
I. H. Tseng
J. P. Tucker
N. J. Hansing, Alternate
I. H. Tseng
J. Yu
N. J. Hansing, Alternate
J. M. Levy, Alternate
B. J. Yonsky, Alternate
S. T. French, Contributing Member
D. B. Ross, Contributing Member
S. Ruesenberg, Contributing Member
xxvi
J. I. Kim
W. J. O’Donnell, Sr.
W. D. Reinhardt
P. Smith
S. D. Snow
R. Vollmer
W. F. Weitze
T. M. Adams, Contributing Member
C. W. Bruny, Contributing Member
H. T. Harrison III, Contributing
Member
K. Wright, Contributing Member
Working Group on Design Methodology (SG-DM) (BPV III)
R. Farrell, Chair
R. Vollmer, Secretary
K. Avrithi
C. Basavaraju
C. M. Faidy
C. F. Heberling II
M. Kassar
J. I. Kim
T. R. Liszkai
K. Matsunaga
S. McKillop
B. Pellereau
S. Ranganath
W. D. Reinhardt
P. K. Shah
S. D. Snow
S. Wang
W. F. Weitze
J. Wen
T. M. Wiger
G. Banyay, Contributing Member
D. S. S. Bartran, Contributing
Member
R. D. Blevins, Contributing Member
M. R. Breach, Contributing Member
C. W. Bruny, Contributing Member
D. L. Caldwell, Contributing Member
H. T. Harrison III, Contributing
Member
P. Hirschberg, Contributing Member
R. B. Keating, Contributing Member
A. Walker, Contributing Member
K. Wright, Contributing Member
Special Working Group on Computational Modeling for Explicit
Dynamics (SG-DM) (BPV III)
D. J. Ammerman, Vice Chair
V. Broz, Secretary
J. M. Jordan
S. Kuehner
D. Molitoris
W. D. Reinhardt
Working Group on Allowable Stress Criteria (SG-HTR) (BPV III)
R. Wright, Chair
M. McMurtrey, Secretary
K. Kimura
D. Maitra
R. J. McReynolds
M. C. Messner
W. Ren
Working Group on Environmental Fatigue Evaluation Methods
(SG-DM) (BPV III)
M. A. Gray, Chair
W. F. Weitze, Secretary
S. Asada
K. Avrithi
R. C. Cipolla
T. M. Damiani
C. M. Faidy
T. D. Gilman
S. R. Gosselin
Y. He
A. Hirano
P. Hirschberg
H. S. Mehta
J.-S. Park
B. Pellereau
G. L. Stevens
D. Vlaicu
K. Wang
R. Z. Ziegler
S. Cuvilliez, Contributing Member
K. Wright, Contributing Member
Working Group on Analysis Methods (SG-HTR) (BPV III)
M. C. Messner, Chair
R. W. Barnes
J. A. Blanco
P. Carter
M. E. Cohen
R. I. Jetter
G. H. Koo
H. Qian
S. H. Kleinsmith
H. S. Mehta
B. Pellereau
S. Ranganath
G. L. Stevens
Y. Wang
W. F. Weitze
Y. Zou
D. Dewees, Contributing Member
S. Majumdar, Contributing Member
W. J. O'Donnell, Sr., Contributing
Member
K. Wright, Contributing Member
S. Sham, Chair
Y. Wang, Secretary
M. Ando
F. W. Brust
P. Carter
M. E. Cohen
R. I. Jetter
S. Sham
X. Wei
S. X. Xu
T. Hassan, Contributing Member
S. Krishnamurthy, Contributing
Member
M. J. Swindeman, Contributing
Member
D. O. Henry
A. Hirano
A. Martin
P. J. O'Regan
B. Pellereau
R. S. Hill III, Contributing Member
G. H. Koo
M. McMurtrey
M. C. Messner
J. C. Poehler
H. Qian
X. Wei
Working Group on High Temperature Flaw Evaluation (SG-HTR) (BPV III)
F. W. Brust, Chair
P. Carter
S. Kalyanam
B.-L. Lyow
M. C. Messner
J. C. Poehler
Working Group on Probabilistic Methods in Design
(SG-DM) (BPV III)
M. Golliet, Chair
R. Kalnas, Vice Chair
T. Asayama
K. Avrithi
G. Brouette
J. Hakii
R. Rupp
S. Sham
Y. Wang
X. Wei
J. R. Foulds, Contributing Member
R. W. Swindeman, Contributing
Member
Working Group on Creep-Fatigue and Negligible Creep
(SG-HTR) (BPV III)
Working Group on Fatigue Strength (SG-DM) (BPV III)
P. R. Donavin, Chair
M. S. Shelton, Secretary
T. M. Damiani
D. W. DeJohn
C. M. Faidy
P. Gill
S. R. Gosselin
R. J. Gurdal
C. F. Heberling II
C. E. Hinnant
P. Hirschberg
K. Hsu
J. I. Kim
P. Y.-K. Shih
S. D. Snow
C.-F. Tso
M. C. Yaksh
U. Zencker
H. Qian
P. J. Rush
C. J. Sallaberry
D. J. Shim
X. Wei
S. X. Xu
Subgroup on General Requirements (BPV III)
J. V. Gardiner, Chair
N. DeSantis, Secretary
V. Apostolescu
A. Appleton
S. Bell
J. R. Berry
G. Brouette
G. C. Deleanu
J. W. Highlands
E. V. Imbro
K. A. Kavanagh
Y.-S. Kim
B. McGlone
xxvii
E. C. Renaud
T. N. Rezk
J. Rogers
D. J. Roszman
R. Spuhl
G. E. Szabatura
D. M. Vickery
J. DeKleine, Contributing Member
H. Michael, Contributing Member
C. T. Smith, Contributing Member
W. K. Sowder, Jr., Contributing
Member
Working Group on General Requirements (SG-GR) (BPV III)
B. McGlone, Chair
J. Grimm, Secretary
V. Apostolescu
A. Appleton
S. Bell
J. R. Berry
G. Brouette
J. Carter
P. J. Coco
N. DeSantis
Y. Diaz-Castillo
O. Elkadim
J. V. Gardiner
S. M. Goodwin
J. Harris
J. W. Highlands
E. V. Imbro
Joint ACI-ASME Committee on Concrete Components for Nuclear
Service (BPV III)
K. A. Kavanagh
Y.-S. Kim
D. T. Meisch
R. B. Patel
E. C. Renaud
T. N. Rezk
J. Rogers
D. J. Roszman
B. S. Sandhu
R. Spuhl
J. F. Strunk
G. E. Szabatura
D. M. Vickery
J. L. Williams
J. DeKleine, Contributing Member
S. F. Harrison, Jr., Contributing
Member
J. A. Munshi, Chair
J. McLean, Vice Chair
J. Cassamassino, Staff Secretary
C. J. Bang
L. J. Colarusso
A. C. Eberhardt
F. Farzam
P. S. Ghosal
B. D. Hovis
T. C. Inman
C. Jones
O. Jovall
T. Kang
N.-H. Lee
T. Muraki
N. Orbovic
J. F. Strunk
G. Thomas
S. Wang
A. Adediran, Contributing Member
J. F. Artuso, Contributing Member
S. Bae, Contributing Member
J.-B. Domage, Contributing Member
B. B. Scott, Contributing Member
M. R. Senecal, Contributing Member
Z. Shang, Contributing Member
M. Sircar, Contributing Member
C. T. Smith, Contributing Member
Working Group on Design (BPV III-2)
N.-H. Lee, Chair
S. Wang, Vice Chair
M. Allam
S. Bae
L. J. Colarusso
A. C. Eberhardt
F. Farzam
P. S. Ghosal
B. D. Hovis
T. C. Inman
C. Jones
O. Jovall
Special Working Group on General Requirements Consolidation
(SG-GR) (BPV III)
J. V. Gardiner, Chair
J. Grimm, Vice Chair
C. T. Smith, Vice Chair
Y. Diaz-Castillo
R. B. Patel
E. C. Renaud
R. Spuhl
J. L. Williams
Working Group on General Requirements for Graphite and Ceramic
Composite Core Components and Assemblies (SG-GR) (BPV III)
A. Appleton, Chair
W. J. Geringer, Secretary
J. R. Berry
Y. Diaz-Castillo
M. N. Mitchell
E. C. Renaud
W. Windes
Working Group on Materials, Fabrication, and Examination (BPV III-2)
Subgroup on Materials, Fabrication, and Examination (BPV III)
J. Grimm, Chair
S. Hunter, Secretary
W. H. Borter
G. R. Cannell
S. Cho
P. J. Coco
R. H. Davis
B. D. Frew
D. W. Gandy
S. E. Gingrich
M. Golliet
L. S. Harbison
R. M. Jessee
J. Johnston, Jr.
C. C. Kim
M. Kris
J. A. Munshi
T. Muraki
N. Orbovic
J. S. Saini
G. Thomas
A. Istar, Contributing Member
S.-Y. Kim, Contributing Member
J. Kwon, Contributing Member
B. B. Scott, Contributing Member
Z. Shang, Contributing Member
M. Shin, Contributing Member
M. Sircar, Contributing Member
M. Lashley
D. W. Mann
T. Melfi
I.-K. Nam
J. B. Ossmann
J. E. O’Sullivan
M. C. Scott
W. J. Sperko
J. R. Stinson
J. F. Strunk
W. Windes
R. Wright
S. Yee
H. Michael, Delegate
R. W. Barnes, Contributing Member
D. B. Denis, Contributing Member
C. Jones, Chair
A. Eberhardt, Vice Chair
M. Allam
C. J. Bang
B. Birch
J.-B. Domage
P. S. Ghosal
T. Kang
N.-H. Lee
Z. Shang
J. F. Strunk
I. Zivanovic
A. A. Aboelmagd, Contributing
Member
J. F. Artuso, Contributing Member
B. B. Scott, Contributing Member
Special Working Group on Modernization (BPV III-2)
N. Orbovic, Chair
J. McLean, Vice Chair
A. Adediran
O. Jovall
N. Stoeva
A. Varma
S. Wang
I. Zivanovic
J.-B. Domage, Contributing Member
F. Lin, Contributing Member
M. A. Ugalde, Contributing Member
Subgroup on Containment Systems for Spent Nuclear Fuel and
High-Level Radioactive Material (BPV III)
Working Group on HDPE Materials (SG-MFE) (BPV III)
G. Brouette, Chair
M. A. Martin, Secretary
M. C. Buckley
M. Golliet
J. Johnston, Jr.
P. Krishnaswamy
M. Kuntz
B. Lin
D. P. Munson
T. M. Musto
S. Patterson
S. Schuessler
R. Stakenborghs
M. Troughton
J. Wright
B. Hauger, Contributing Member
G. J. Solovey, Chair
D. J. Ammerman, Vice Chair
S. Klein, Secretary
G. Bjorkman
V. Broz
D. W. Lewis
E. L. Pleins
A. Rigato
P. Sakalaukus, Jr.
xxviii
D. Siromani
D. B. Spencer
J. Wellwood
X. J. Zhai
X. Zhang
D. Dunn, Alternate
W. H. Borter, Contributing Member
N. M. Simpson, Contributing Member
Subgroup on Fusion Energy Devices (BPV III)
W. K. Sowder, Jr., Chair
D. Andrei, Staff Secretary
D. J. Roszman, Secretary
M. Bashir
J. P. Blanchard
L. C. Cadwallader
T. P. Davis
B. R. Doshi
L. El-Guebaly
G. Holtmeier
D. Johnson
K. A. Kavanagh
K. Kim
I. Kimihiro
Working Group on Nonmetallic Design and Materials (SG-HTR) (BPV III)
S. Lee
G. Li
X. Li
P. Mokaria
T. R. Muldoon
M. Porton
F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
P. Smith
Y. Song
M. Trosen
C. Waldon
I. J. Zatz
R. W. Barnes, Contributing Member
W. Windes, Chair
W. J. Geringer, Vice Chair
A. Appleton
T. D. Burchell
S.-H. Chi
V. Chugh
S. T. Gonczy
K. Harris
Special Working Group on High Temperature Reactor Stakeholders
(SG-HTR) (BPV III)
M. E. Cohen, Chair
M. Arcaro
R. W. Barnes
N. Broom
V. Chugh
R. A. Fleming
K. Harris
R. I. Jetter
Y. W. Kim
G. H. Koo
K. J. Noel
Working Group on General Requirements (BPV III-4)
D. J. Roszman, Chair
M. Ellis
P. Mokaria
W. K. Sowder, Jr.
Working Group on In-Vessel Components (BPV III-4)
M. Bashir, Chair
Y. Carin
T. P. Davis
M. Kalsey
S. T. Madabusi
T. M. Adams, Chair
F. G. Abatt, Secretary
G. A. Antaki
C. Basavaraju
A. Berkovsky
D. Chowdhury
R. Döring
K. Kim, Vice Chair
Working Group on Materials (BPV III-4)
M. Porton, Chair
T. P. Davis
Argentina International Working Group (BPV III)
J. Fernández, Chair
A. Politi, Vice Chair
O. Martinez, Staff Secretary
A. Gomez, Secretary
A. Acrogliano
W. Agrelo
G. O. Anteri
M. Anticoli
C. A. Araya
J. P. Balbiani
A. A. Betervide
D. O. Bordato
G. Bourguigne
M. L. Cappella
A. Claus
R. G. Cocco
A. Coleff
A. J. Dall’Osto
L. M. De Barberis
D. P. Delfino
D. N. Dell’Erba
F. G. Diez
A. Dominguez
D. Johnson
Q. Shijun
Y. Song
Subgroup on High Temperature Reactors (BPV III)
S. Sham, Chair
M. Ando
N. Broom
F. W. Brust
P. Carter
M. E. Cohen
W. J. Geringer
B. F. Hantz
M. H. Jawad
R. I. Jetter
K. Kimura
G. H. Koo
A. Mann
M. C. Messner
X. Wei
G. H. Koo
V. Kostarev
A. Maekawa
K. Matsunaga
R. M. Pace
D. Watkins
P. Mummery
Working Group on Vacuum Vessels (BPV III-4)
I. Kimihiro, Chair
L. C. Cadwallader
B. R. Doshi
S. Sham
B. Song
X. Wei
A. Yeshnik
G. L. Zeng
T. Asayama, Contributing Member
X. Li, Contributing Member
M. Morishita, Contributing Member
L. Shi, Contributing Member
G. Wu, Contributing Member
Seismic Design Steering Committee (BPV III)
Working Group on Magnets (BPV III-4)
S. Lee, Chair
M. G. Jenkins
Y. Katoh
J. Lang
M. N. Mitchell
J. B. Ossmann
A. Yeshnik
G. L. Zeng
W. Windes
R. Wright
A. Yeshnik
G. L. Zeng
A. Tsirigotis, Alternate
D. S. Griffin, Contributing Member
X. Li, Contributing Member
S. Majumdar, Contributing Member
D. L. Marriott, Contributing Member
M. Morishita, Contributing Member
W. O'Donnell, Sr., Contributing
Member
L. Shi, Contributing Member
R. W. Swindeman, Contributing
Member
xxix
S. A. Echeverria
E. P. Fresquet
M. M. Gamizo
I. M. Guerreiro
I. A. Knorr
M. F. Liendo
D. E. Matthews
L. R. Miño
J. Monte
R. L. Morard
A. E. Pastor
E. Pizzichini
J. L. Racamato
H. C. Sanzi
G. J. Scian
G. G. Sebastian
M. E. Szarko
P. N. Torano
A. Turrin
O. A. Verastegui
M. D. Vigliano
P. Yamamoto
M. Zunino
China International Working Group (BPV III)
J. Yan, Chair
W. Tang, Vice Chair
Y. He, Secretary
L. Guo
Y. Jing
D. Kang
Y. Li
B. Liang
H. Lin
S. Liu
W. Liu
J. Ma
K. Mao
D. E. Matthews
W. Pei
United Kingdom International Working Group (BPV III)
C. Peiyin
Z. Sun
G. Tang
L. Ting
Y. Tu
Y. Wang
H. Wu
S. Xue
Z. Yin
D. Yuangang
G. Zhang
W. Zhang
Y. Zhong
Z. Zhong
C. D. Bell, Chair
P. M. James, Vice Chair
C. B. Carpenter, Secretary
T. Bann
M. J. Chevalier
M. Consonni
M. J. Crathorne
Special Working Group on Editing and Review (BPV III)
D. E. Matthews, Chair
R. P. Deubler
A. C. Eberhardt
J. V. Gardiner
S. Hunter
J. C. Minichiello
J. F. Strunk
C. Wilson
Special Working Group on HDPE Stakeholders (BPV III)
Germany International Working Group (BPV III)
J. Wendt, Chair
D. Koelbl, Vice Chair
R. Gersinska, Secretary
P. R. Donavin
R. Döring
C. G. Frantescu
A. Huber
R. E. Hueggenberg
C. Huttner
E. Iacopetta
M. H. Koeppen
C. Kuschke
G. Innes
S. A. Jones
B. Pellereau
C. R. Schneider
J. W. Stairmand
J. Sulley
J. Talamantes-Silva
M. Brandes, Chair
S. Patterson, Secretary
S. Choi
C. M. Faidy
M. Golliet
R. M. Jessee
J. Johnston, Jr.
M. Kuntz
M. Lashley
K. A. Manoly
H.-W. Lange
T. Ludwig
X. Pitoiset
M. Reichert
G. Roos
J. Rudolph
L. Sybert
I. Tewes
R. Tiete
R. Trieglaff
F. Wille
S. Zickler
D. P. Munson
T. M. Musto
J. E. O’Sullivan
V. Rohatgi
F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
R. Stakenborghs
M. Troughton
J. Wright
C. Lin, Alternate
D. Burwell, Contributing Member
Special Working Group on Honors and Awards (BPV III)
J. C. Minichiello, Chair
A. Appleton
R. W. Barnes
India International Working Group (BPV III)
R. N. Sen, Chair
S. B. Parkash, Vice Chair
A. D. Bagdare, Secretary
S. Aithal
S. Benhur
N. M. Borwankar
M. Brijlani
H. Dalal
S. K. Goyal
A. Johori
D. Kulkarni
R. Kumar
D. Narain
E. L. Pleins
V. Sehgal
S. Singh
B. K. Sreedhar
Special Working Group on Industry Experience for New Plants
(BPV III & BPV XI)
J. T. Lindberg, Chair
J. B. Ossmann, Chair
M. C. Buckley, Secretary
A. Cardillo
T. L. Chan
P. J. Hennessey
D. O. Henry
J. Honcharik
C. G. Kim
Korea International Working Group (BPV III)
G. H. Koo, Chair
O.-S. Kim, Secretary
H. Ahn
S. Cho
G.-S. Choi
S. Choi
J. Y. Hong
N.-S. Huh
J.-K. Hwang
S. S. Hwang
C. Jang
I. I. Jeong
S. H. Kang
J.-I. Kim
J.-S. Kim
M.-W. Kim
S.-S. Kim
Y.-B. Kim
Y.-S. Kim
R. M. Jessee
D. E. Matthews
D. Kwon
B. Lee
D. Lee
S. Lee
S.-G. Lee
H. Lim
I.-K. Nam
C.-K. Oh
C.-Y. Oh
E.-J. Oh
C. Park
H. Park
J.-S. Park
Y. S. Pyun
T. Shin
S. Song
W. J. Sperko
J. S. Yang
O. Yoo
O.-S. Kim
K. Matsunaga
D. E. Matthews
R. E. McLaughlin
D. W. Sandusky
R. M. Wilson
S. M. Yee
A. Tsirigotis, Alternate
Special Working Group on International Meetings and IWG Liaisons
(BPV III)
D. E. Matthews, Chair
K. Verderber, Staff Secretary
T. M. Adams
R. W. Barnes
T. D. Burchell
xxx
R. L. Crane
P. R. Donavin
E. L. Pleins
W. J. Sperko
Special Working Group on New Plant Construction Issues (BPV III)
E. L. Pleins, Chair
M. C. Scott, Secretary
A. Cardillo
P. J. Coco
J. Honcharik
O.-S. Kim
M. Kris
D. W. Sandusky
COMMITTEE ON NONDESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION (BPV V)
R. R. Stevenson
M. L. Wilson
H. Xu
J. Yan
N. J. Hansing, Alternate
J. C. Minichiello, Contributing
Member
K. Verderber, Contributing Member
N. A. Finney, Chair
C. May, Vice Chair
C. R. Ramcharran, Staff Secretary
D. Bajula
J. Bennett
P. L. Brown
M. A. Burns
N. Carter
T. Clausing
C. Emslander
A. F. Garbolevsky
J. F. Halley
P. T. Hayes
G. W. Hembree
F. B. Kovacs
K. Krueger
COMMITTEE ON HEATING BOILERS (BPV IV)
J. A. Hall, Chair
T. L. Bedeaux, Vice Chair
C. R. Ramcharran, Staff Secretary
L. Badziagowski
B. Calderon
J. P. Chicoine
J. M. Downs
J. L. Kleiss
J. Klug
M. Mengon
P. A. Molvie
R. D. Troutt
M. Wadkinson
R. V. Wielgoszinski
H. Michael, Delegate
D. Picart, Delegate
D. Nelson, Alternate
S. V. Voorhees, Contributing Member
Executive Committee (BPV V)
C. May, Chair
N. A. Finney, Vice Chair
C. R. Ramcharran, Staff Secretary
N. Carter
C. Emslander
V. F. Godinez-Azcuaga
Subgroup on Care and Operation of Heating Boilers (BPV IV)
R. D. Troutt, Chair
C. R. Ramcharran, Staff Secretary
B. Ahee
T. L. Bedeaux
J. M. Downs
J. A. Hall
J. L. Kleiss
P. A. Molvie
M. Wadkinson
J. F. Halley
P. T. Hayes
G. W. Hembree
F. B. Kovacs
C. Vorwald
Subgroup on General Requirements/Personnel Qualifications and
Inquiries (BPV V)
C. Emslander, Chair
D. I. Morris, Vice Chair
J. Bennett
N. Carter
T. Clausing
N. A. Finney
J. F. Halley
G. W. Hembree
Subgroup on Cast Boilers (BPV IV)
J. P. Chicoine, Chair
J. M. Downs, Vice Chair
C. R. Ramcharran, Staff Secretary
T. L. Bedeaux
B. D. Laite
L. E. Mullins
T. L. Plasek
P. B. Shaw
C. Vorwald
G. M. Gatti, Delegate
S. J. Akrin, Contributing Member
J. E. Batey, Contributing Member
A. S. Birks, Contributing Member
N. Y. Faransso, Contributing Member
R. W. Kruzic, Contributing Member
F. J. Sattler, Contributing Member
H. C. Graber, Honorary Member
O. F. Hedden, Honorary Member
J. R. MacKay, Honorary Member
T. G. McCarty, Honorary Member
J. A. Hall
J. L. Kleiss
M. Mengon
F. B. Kovacs
K. Krueger
C. May
C. Vorwald
S. J. Akrin, Contributing Member
J. E. Batey, Contributing Member
N. Y. Faransso, Contributing Member
J. P. Swezy, Jr., Contributing Member
Subgroup on Materials (BPV IV)
M. Wadkinson, Chair
J. M. Downs, Vice Chair
C. R. Ramcharran, Staff Secretary
Subgroup on Surface Examination Methods (BPV V)
L. Badziagowski
T. L. Bedeaux
J. A. Hall
N. Carter, Chair
B. D. Laite, Vice Chair
P. L. Brown
T. Clausing
C. Emslander
N. Farenbaugh
N. A. Finney
J. F. Halley
K. Hayes
G. W. Hembree
C. May
Subgroup on Water Heaters (BPV IV)
L. Badziagowski, Chair
J. L. Kleiss, Vice Chair
C. R. Ramcharran, Staff Secretary
B. Ahee
J. P. Chicoine
C. Dinic
B. J. Iske
P. A. Molvie
T. E. Trant
R. D. Troutt
Subgroup on Welded Boilers (BPV IV)
T. L. Bedeaux, Chair
J. L. Kleiss, Vice Chair
C. R. Ramcharran, Staff Secretary
B. Ahee
L. Badziagowski
B. Calderon
C. Dinic
M. Mengon
P. A. Molvie
R. D. Troutt
M. Wadkinson
R. V. Wielgoszinski
D. Nelson, Alternate
xxxi
L. E. Mullins
P. B. Shaw
C. Vorwald
C. Wassink
D. M. Woodward
G. M. Gatti, Delegate
S. J. Akrin, Contributing Member
J. E. Batey, Contributing Member
N. Y. Faransso, Contributing Member
R. W. Kruzic, Contributing Member
F. J. Sattler, Contributing Member
Subgroup on Volumetric Methods (BPV V)
C. May, Chair
J. F. Halley, Vice Chair
D. Adkins
P. L. Brown
N. A. Finney
A. F. Garbolevsky
R. W. Hardy
P. T. Hayes
G. W. Hembree
F. B. Kovacs
K. Krueger
Working Group on Ultrasonics (SG-VM) (BPV V)
L. E. Mullins
E. Peloquin
T. L. Plasek
C. Vorwald
G. M. Gatti, Delegate
S. J. Akrin, Contributing Member
J. E. Batey, Contributing Member
N. Y. Faransso, Contributing Member
R. W. Kruzic, Contributing Member
F. J. Sattler, Contributing Member
Special Working Group on Advanced Ultrasonic Testing Techniques
(BPV V)
L. E. Mullins, Chair
K. Krueger, Vice Chair
D. Adkins
D. Bajula
N. A. Finney
J. L. Garner
J. F. Halley
P. T. Hayes
M. Lozev
E. Peloquin
M. Sens
D. Tompkins
C. Wassink
K. Hayes
G. W. Hembree
K. Krueger
M. Lozev
L. E. Mullins
D. Richard
M. Sens
D. Tompkins
O. Volf
C. Wassink
R. K. Miller
L. Zhang
J. E. Batey, Contributing Member
N. Y. Faransso, Contributing Member
Working Group on Computed Tomography (BPV V)
C. May, Chair
T. L. Clifford
R. W. Hardy
G. W. Hembree
F. B. Kovacs
R. J. Mills
T. L. Plasek
C. Vorwald
B. White
L. E. Mullins, Contributing Member
Working Group on Radiography (SG-VM) (BPV V)
C. Vorwald, Chair
D. M. Woodward, Vice Chair
J. Anderson
P. L. Brown
C. Emslander
A. F. Garbolevsky
R. W. Hardy
G. W. Hembree
F. B. Kovacs
B. D. Laite
M. A. Grimoldi
G. Luoni
O. Oldani
U. Papponetti
P. Pedersoli
A. Veroni
M. Zambon
V. Calo, Contributing Member
G. Gobbi, Contributing Member
G. Pontiggia, Contributing Member
COMMITTEE ON PRESSURE VESSELS (BPV VIII)
Working Group on Acoustic Emissions (SG-VM) (BPV V)
V. F. Godinez-Azcuaga, Chair
S. R. Doctor, Vice Chair
J. Catty
N. F. Douglas, Jr.
D. Tompkins
D. Van Allen
J. Vinyard
C. Vorwald
C. Wassink
D. Alleyne, Contributing Member
J. E. Batey, Contributing Member
N. Y. Faransso, Contributing Member
R. W. Kruzic, Contributing Member
G. M. Light, Contributing Member
P. Mudge, Contributing Member
F. J. Sattler, Contributing Member
J. Vanvelsor, Contributing Member
Italy International Working Group (BPV V)
P. L. Dinelli, Chair
D. D. Raimander, Secretary
M. Agostini
T. Aldo
F. Bresciani
G. Campos
N. Caputo
M. Colombo
F. Ferrarese
E. Ferrari
Working Group on Full Matrix Capture (FMC) (BPV V)
P. T. Hayes, Chair
E. Peloquin, Vice Chair
D. Adkins
D. Bajula
D. Bellistri
J. Catty
N. A. Finney
J. L. Garner
V. F. Godinez-Azcuaga
R. T. Grotenhuis
J. F. Halley
J. F. Halley, Chair
K. Krueger, Vice Chair
D. Adkins
D. Bajula
C. Brown
C. Emslander
N. A. Finney
P. T. Hayes
G. W. Hembree
B. D. Laite
C. May
L. E. Mullins
E. Peloquin
M. J. Quarry
C. May
R. J. Mills
T. L. Plasek
T. Vidimos
B. White
S. J. Akrin, Contributing Member
J. E. Batey, Contributing Member
N. Y. Faransso, Contributing Member
R. W. Kruzic, Contributing Member
S. C. Roberts, Chair
M. D. Lower, Vice Chair
J. Oh, Staff Secretary
S. J. Rossi, Staff Secretary
G. Aurioles, Sr.
S. R. Babka
R. J. Basile
P. Chavdarov
D. B. DeMichael
J. F. Grubb
B. F. Hantz
M. Kowalczyk
D. L. Kurle
R. Mahadeen
S. A. Marks
P. Matkovics
R. W. Mikitka
B. R. Morelock
T. P. Pastor
D. T. Peters
M. J. Pischke
M. D. Rana
G. B. Rawls, Jr.
F. L. Richter
C. D. Rodery
J. C. Sowinski
D. Srnic
D. B. Stewart
P. L. Sturgill
K. Subramanian
D. A. Swanson
J. P. Swezy, Jr.
S. Terada
E. Upitis
A. Viet
K. Xu
P. A. McGowan, Delegate
H. Michael, Delegate
K. Oyamada, Delegate
M. E. Papponetti, Delegate
X. Tang, Delegate
A. Chaudouet, Contributing Member
J. P. Glaspie, Contributing Member
W. S. Jacobs, Contributing Member
K. T. Lau, Contributing Member
U. R. Miller, Contributing Member
K. Mokhtarian, Contributing Member
G. G. Karcher, Honorary Member
K. K. Tam, Honorary Member
Executive Committee (BPV VIII)
M. D. Lower, Chair
S. J. Rossi, Staff Secretary
G. Aurioles, Sr.
M. Kowalczyk
S. A. Marks
P. Matkovics
xxxii
F. L. Richter
S. C. Roberts
J. C. Sowinski
K. Subramanian
A. Viet
K. Xu
Subgroup on Design (BPV VIII)
J. C. Sowinski, Chair
C. S. Hinson, Vice Chair
G. Aurioles, Sr.
S. R. Babka
O. A. Barsky
R. J. Basile
D. Chandiramani
M. Faulkner
B. F. Hantz
C. E. Hinnant
M. H. Jawad
S. Krishnamurthy
D. L. Kurle
K. Kuscu
M. D. Lower
R. W. Mikitka
B. Millet
M. D. Rana
G. B. Rawls, Jr.
Subgroup on General Requirements (BPV VIII)
S. C. Roberts
C. D. Rodery
T. G. Seipp
D. Srnic
D. A. Swanson
S. Terada
J. Vattappilly
K. Xu
K. Oyamada, Delegate
M. E. Papponetti, Delegate
W. S. Jacobs, Contributing Member
P. K. Lam, Contributing Member
K. Mokhtarian, Contributing Member
T. P. Pastor, Contributing Member
S. C. Shah, Contributing Member
K. K. Tam, Contributing Member
E. Upitis, Contributing Member
Z. Wang, Contributing Member
F. L. Richter, Chair
M. Faulkner, Vice Chair
J. Hoskinson, Secretary
N. Barkley
R. J. Basile
T. P. Beirne
D. T. Davis
D. B. DeMichael
M. D. Lower
T. P. Pastor
D. K. Peetz
G. B. Rawls, Jr.
S. C. Roberts
J. C. Sowinski
P. Speranza
D. Srnic
D. B. Stewart
D. A. Swanson
R. Uebel
J. P. Glaspie, Contributing Member
Z. Wang, Contributing Member
Y. Yang, Contributing Member
Task Group on Fired Heater Pressure Vessels (BPV VIII)
J. Hoskinson, Chair
J. Bradley
W. Kim
S. Kirk
D. Nelson
T. P. Pastor
R. Robles
J. Rust
P. Shanks
E. Smith
D. Srnic
J. P. Swezy, Jr.
Working Group on Design-By-Analysis (BPV VIII)
B. F. Hantz, Chair
T. W. Norton, Secretary
D. A. Arnett
J. Bedoya
S. Guzey
C. F. Heberling II
C. E. Hinnant
M. H. Jawad
S. Kataoka
S. Kilambi
K. D. Kirkpatrick
S. Krishnamurthy
A. Mann
C. Nadarajah
P. Prueter
T. G. Seipp
M. A. Shah
S. Terada
R. G. Brown, Contributing Member
D. Dewees, Contributing Member
K. Saboda, Contributing Member
Task Group on Subsea Applications (BPV VIII)
M. Sarzynski, Chair
A. J. Grohmann, Vice Chair
L. P. Antalffy
R. C. Biel
J. Ellens
J. Hademenos
J. Kaculi
K. Karpanan
F. Kirkemo
C. Lan
Working Group on Elevated Temperature Design (BPV I and VIII)
A. Mann, Chair
C. Nadarajah, Secretary
D. Anderson
D. Dewees
B. F. Hantz
M. H. Jawad
R. I. Jetter
S. Krishnamurthy
T. Le
Task Group on UG-20(f) (BPV VIII)
M. C. Messner
M. N. Mitchell
P. Prueter
M. J. Swindeman
J. P. Glaspie, Contributing Member
D. L. Marriott, Contributing Member
N. McMurray, Contributing Member
B. J. Mollitor, Contributing Member
S. Krishnamurthy, Chair
T. L. Anderson
K. E. Bagnoli
R. P. Deubler
B. F. Hantz
B. R. Macejko
J. Penso
M. Prager
M. D. Rana
Subgroup on Heat Transfer Equipment (BPV VIII)
Subgroup on Fabrication and Examination (BPV VIII)
S. A. Marks, Chair
D. I. Morris, Vice Chair
T. Halligan, Secretary
N. Carter
J. Lu
B. R. Morelock
O. Mulet
M. J. Pischke
M. J. Rice
J. Roberts
C. D. Rodery
B. F. Shelley
D. Smith
P. Lutkiewicz
N. McKie
S. K. Parimi
R. H. Patil
J. R. Sims
M. P. Vaclavik
R. Cordes, Contributing Member
S. Krishna, Contributing Member
D. T. Peters, Contributing Member
P. L. Sturgill
J. P. Swezy, Jr.
E. Upitis
C. Violand
E. A. Whittle
K. Oyamada, Delegate
W. J. Bees, Contributing Member
L. F. Campbell, Contributing Member
J. Lee, Contributing Member
J. Si, Contributing Member
R. Uebel, Contributing Member
X. Xue, Contributing Member
B. Yang, Contributing Member
P. Matkovics, Chair
M. D. Clark, Vice Chair
L. Bower, Secretary
G. Aurioles, Sr.
S. R. Babka
J. H. Barbee
O. A. Barsky
T. Bunyarattaphantu
A. Chaudouet
D. L. Kurle
R. Mahadeen
S. Mayeux
S. Neilsen
E. Smith
A. M. Voytko
R. P. Wiberg
I. G. Campbell, Contributing Member
G. G. Karcher, Contributing Member
J. Pasek, Contributing Member
D. Srnic, Contributing Member
Z. Tong, Contributing Member
Working Group on Plate Heat Exchangers (BPV VIII)
P. Matkovics, Chair
S. R. Babka
J. F. Grubb
V. Gudge
R. Mahadeen
S. A. Marks
xxxiii
D. I. Morris
M. J. Pischke
E. Smith
D. Srnic
S. Sullivan
Subgroup on High Pressure Vessels (BPV VIII)
K. Subramanian, Chair
M. Sarzynski, Vice Chair
A. P. Maslowski, Staff Secretary
L. P. Antalffy
R. C. Biel
P. N. Chaku
L. Fridlund
R. T. Hallman
K. Karpanan
J. Keltjens
A. K. Khare
G. M. Mital
G. T. Nelson
M. Parr
D. T. Peters
E. A. Rodriguez
E. D. Roll
J. R. Sims
E. Smith
F. W. Tatar
S. Terada
Argentina International Working Group (BPV VIII)
C. Tipple
R. Wink
Y. Xu
A. M. Clayton, Contributing Member
R. Cordes, Contributing Member
R. D. Dixon, Contributing Member
Q. Dong, Contributing Member
T. A. Duffey, Contributing Member
D. Fuenmayor, Contributing Member
R. M. Hoshman, Contributing
Member
Y. Huang, Contributing Member
F. Kirkemo, Contributing Member
R. A. Leishear, Contributing Member
C. Romero, Contributing Member
K.-J. Young, Contributing Member
D. J. Burns, Honorary Member
D. M. Fryer, Honorary Member
G. J. Mraz, Honorary Member
E. H. Perez, Honorary Member
Subgroup on Materials (BPV VIII)
M. Kowalczyk, Chair
J. Cameron, Vice Chair
S. Kilambi, Secretary
P. Chavdarov
J. F. Grubb
D. Maitra
D. W. Rahoi
J. Robertson
R. C. Sutherlin
E. Upitis
K. Xu
S. Yem
A. Di Rienzo, Contributing Member
J. D. Fritz, Contributing Member
M. Katcher, Contributing Member
W. M. Lundy, Contributing Member
J. A. McMaster, Contributing Member
J. Penso, Contributing Member
B. Pletcher, Contributing Member
P. G. Wittenbach, Contributing
Member
X. Wu, Contributing Member
Subgroup on Toughness (BPV VIII)
K. Xu, Chair
T. Halligan, Vice Chair
N. Carter
C. S. Hinson
W. S. Jacobs
S. Kilambi
D. L. Kurle
M. D. Rana
F. L. Richter
K. Subramanian
D. A. Swanson
J. P. Swezy, Jr.
S. Terada
E. Upitis
J. Vattappilly
K. Oyamada, Delegate
S. Krishnamurthy, Contributing
Member
K. Mokhtarian, Contributing Member
Subgroup on Graphite Pressure Equipment (BPV VIII)
A. Viet, Chair
C. W. Cary, Vice Chair
G. C. Becherer
F. L. Brown
R. J. Bulgin
J. D. Clements
H. Lee, Jr.
T. Rudy
A. A. Stupica
A. Dominguez, Chair
F. P. Larrosa, Secretary
M. M. Acosta
R. A. Barey
C. Alderetes
F. A. Andres
L. F. Boccanera
O. S. Bretones
A. Burgueno
G. Casanas
D. H. Da Rold
J. I. Duo
M. Favareto
M. D. Kuhn
L. M. Leccese
C. Meinl
M. A. Mendez
J. J. Monaco
M. A. A. Pipponzi
D. Rizzo
R. Robles
J. C. Rubeo
S. Schamun
G. Telleria
M. M. C. Tocco
China International Working Group (BPV VIII)
X. Chen, Chair
B. Shou, Vice Chair
Z. Fan, Secretary
Y. Chen
Z. Chen
J. Cui
R. Duan
W. Guo
B. Han
J. Hu
Q. Hu
H. Hui
D. Luo
Y. Luo
C. Miao
X. Qian
L. Sun
B. Wang
C. Wu
F. Xu
F.-Z. Xuan
Y. Yang
K. Zhang
Yanfeng Zhang
Yijun Zhang
S. Zhao
J. Zheng
G. Zhu
Germany International Working Group (BPV VIII)
P. Chavdarov, Chair
M. Sykora, Vice Chair
B. Daume
A. Emrich
J. Fleischfresser
R. Helmholdt
R. Kauer
D. Koelbl
S. Krebs
T. Ludwig
R. A. Meyers
H. Michael
S. Reich
A. Spangenberg
G. Naumann, Contributing Member
P. Paluszkiewicz, Contributing
Member
R. Uebel, Contributing Member
India International Working Group (BPV VIII)
D. Chandiramani, Chair
D. Kulkarni, Vice Chair
A. D. Dalal, Secretary
P. Arulkumar
B. Basu
P. Gandhi
S. K. Goyal
V. Jayabalan
A. Kakumanu
V. V. P. Kumar
xxxiv
T. Mukherjee
P. C. Pathak
S. B. Patil
D. Prabhu
A. Sadasivam
M. P. Shah
R. Tiru
V. T. Valavan
M. Sharma, Contributing Member
Italy International Working Group (BPV VIII)
A. Teli, Chair
D. D. Raimander, Secretary
B. G. Alborali
P. Aliprandi
A. Avogadri
A. Camanni
M. Colombo
P. Conti
D. Cortassa
P. L. Dinelli
F. Finco
Subgroup on Brazing (BPV IX)
M. Guglielmetti
A. F. Magri
P. Mantovani
M. Millefanti
L. Moracchioli
P. Pacor
G. Pontiggia
S. Sarti
A. Veroni
G. Gobbi, Contributing Member
S. A. Marks, Chair
E. W. Beckman
A. F. Garbolevsky
N. Mohr
Subgroup on General Requirements (BPV IX)
P. L. Sturgill, Chair
N. Carter, Vice Chair
S. A. Marks, Secretary
J. P. Bell
D. A. Bowers
P. Gilston
M. Heinrichs
A. Howard
R. M. Jessee
Special Working Group on Bolted Flanged Joints (BPV VIII)
R. W. Mikitka, Chair
G. Aurioles, Sr.
D. Bankston, Jr.
W. Brown
H. Chen
A. Mann
W. McDaniel
M. Osterfoss
J. R. Payne
G. B. Rawls, Jr.
R. Wacker
D. K. Peetz
H. B. Porter
J. P. Swezy, Jr.
E. W. Woelfel
E. Molina, Delegate
E. W. Beckman, Contributing
Member
B. R. Newmark, Honorary Member
Subgroup on Materials (BPV IX)
Subgroup on Interpretations (BPV VIII)
G. Aurioles, Sr., Chair
J. Oh, Staff Secretary
S. R. Babka
J. Cameron
N. Carter
C. W. Cary
B. F. Hantz
M. Kowalczyk
D. L. Kurle
M. D. Lower
A. Mann
S. A. Marks
P. Matkovics
G. M. Mital
D. I. Morris
D. T. Peters
F. L. Richter
S. C. Roberts
A. R. Nywening
M. J. Pischke
J. P. Swezy, Jr.
C. D. Rodery
T. G. Seipp
J. C. Sowinski
D. B. Stewart
D. A. Swanson
J. P. Swezy, Jr.
J. Vattappilly
A. Viet
K. Xu
R. J. Basile, Contributing Member
D. B. DeMichael, Contributing
Member
R. D. Dixon, Contributing Member
S. Kilambi, Contributing Member
R. Mahadeen, Contributing Member
T. P. Pastor, Contributing Member
P. L. Sturgill, Contributing Member
M. Bernasek, Chair
T. Anderson
E. Cutlip
M. Denault
S. E. Gingrich
L. S. Harbison
M. James
R. M. Jessee
T. Melfi
S. D. Nelson
M. J. Pischke
A. Roza
C. E. Sainz
P. L. Sturgill
C. Zanfir
V. G. V. Giunto, Delegate
D. J. Kotecki, Contributing Member
B. Krueger, Contributing Member
W. J. Sperko, Contributing Member
M. J. Stanko, Contributing Member
Subgroup on Plastic Fusing (BPV IX)
E. W. Woelfel, Chair
D. Burwell
K. L. Hayes
R. M. Jessee
J. Johnston, Jr.
J. E. O’Sullivan
E. G. Reichelt
M. J. Rice
S. Schuessler
M. Troughton
C. Violand
J. Wright
Subgroup on Strength of Weldments (BPV II and IX)
COMMITTEE ON WELDING, BRAZING, AND FUSING (BPV IX)
D. A. Bowers, Chair
M. J. Pischke, Vice Chair
E. Lawson, Staff Secretary
M. Bernasek
M. A. Boring
J. G. Feldstein
P. D. Flenner
S. E. Gingrich
K. L. Hayes
R. M. Jessee
J. S. Lee
W. M. Lundy
S. A. Marks
T. Melfi
W. F. Newell, Jr.
D. K. Peetz
E. G. Reichelt
M. J. Rice
M. B. Sims
W. J. Sperko
P. L. Sturgill
J. P. Swezy, Jr.
E. W. Woelfel
D. Pojatar, Delegate
A. Roza, Delegate
M. Consonni, Contributing Member
S. A. Jones, Contributing Member
S. Raghunathan, Contributing
Member
M. J. Stanko, Contributing Member
P. L. Van Fosson, Contributing
Member
R. K. Brown, Jr., Honorary Member
M. L. Carpenter, Honorary Member
B. R. Newmark, Honorary Member
S. D. Reynolds, Jr., Honorary Member
G. W. Galanes, Chair
K. L. Hayes, Vice Chair
S. H. Bowes, Secretary
K. K. Coleman
M. Denault
J. R. Foulds
D. W. Gandy
M. Ghahremani
J. Henry
W. F. Newell, Jr.
xxxv
J. Penso
D. W. Rahoi
B. Roberts
W. J. Sperko
J. P. Swezy, Jr.
M. Ueyama
A. A. Amiri, Contributing Member
P. D. Flenner, Contributing Member
J. J. Sanchez-Hanton, Contributing
Member
Subgroup on Welding Qualifications (BPV IX)
M. J. Rice, Chair
J. S. Lee, Vice Chair
K. L. Hayes, Secretary
M. Bernasek
M. A. Boring
D. A. Bowers
R. Campbell
R. B. Corbit
P. D. Flenner
L. S. Harbison
M. Heinrichs
W. M. Lundy
D. W. Mann
T. Melfi
W. F. Newell, Jr.
B. R. Newton
E. G. Reichelt
M. B. Sims
W. J. Sperko
S. A. Sprague
P. L. Sturgill
J. P. Swezy, Jr.
C. Violand
A. D. Wilson
D. Chandiramani, Contributing
Member
M. Consonni, Contributing Member
M. Dehghan, Contributing Member
T. C. Wiesner, Contributing Member
COMMITTEE ON FIBER-REINFORCED PLASTIC PRESSURE VESSELS
(BPV X)
B. Linnemann, Chair
B. F. Shelley, Vice Chair
P. D. Stumpf, Staff Secretary
A. L. Beckwith
F. L. Brown
J. L. Bustillos
B. R. Colley
T. W. Cowley
I. L. Dinovo
D. Eisberg
M. R. Gorman
B. Hebb
L. E. Hunt
D. L. Keeler
D. H. McCauley
N. L. Newhouse
G. Ramirez
J. R. Richter
S. L. Wagner
D. O. Yancey, Jr.
P. H. Ziehl
D. H. Hodgkinson, Contributing
Member
COMMITTEE ON NUCLEAR INSERVICE INSPECTION (BPV XI)
Argentina International Working Group (BPV IX)
A. Burgueno, Chair
E. Lawson, Staff Secretary
B. Bardott
L. F. Boccanera
M. Favareto
C. A. Garibotti
J. A. Herrera
M. D. Kuhn
M. A. Mendez
A. E. Pastor
G. Telleria
M. M. C. Tocco
Germany International Working Group (BPV IX)
P. Chavdarov, Chair
A. Spangenberg, Vice Chair
E. Lawson, Staff Secretary
P. Thiebo, Secretary
J. Daldrup
B. Daume
J. Fleischfresser
E. Floer
S. Krebs
T. Ludwig
G. Naumann
A. Roza
K.-G. Toelle
S. Wegener
F. Wodke
R. Helmholdt
Italy International Working Group (BPV IX)
D. D. Raimander, Chair
M. Bernasek
A. Camanni
P. L. Dinelli
F. Ferrarese
M. Mandina
A. S. Monastra
L. Moracchioli
P. Pacor
G. Pontiggia
P. Siboni
A. Volpi
V. Calo, Contributing Member
G. Gobbi, Contributing Member
R. W. Swayne, Chair
S. D. Kulat, Vice Chair
D. W. Lamond, Vice Chair
D. Miro-Quesada, Staff Secretary
J. F. Ball
W. H. Bamford
J. M. Boughman
C. Brown
S. B. Brown
T. L. Chan
R. C. Cipolla
D. R. Cordes
H. Do
E. V. Farrell, Jr.
M. J. Ferlisi
P. D. Fisher
T. J. Griesbach
J. Hakii
M. L. Hall
D. O. Henry
W. C. Holston
J. T. Lindberg
G. A. Lofthus
H. Malikowski
S. L. McCracken
S. A. Norman
C. A. Nove
T. Nuoffer
J. Nygaard
J. E. O’Sullivan
Executive Committee (BPV XI)
Spain International Working Group (BPV IX)
F. J. Q. Pandelo, Chair
F. L. Villabrille, Vice Chair
E. Lawson, Staff Secretary
F. R. Hermida, Secretary
C. A. Celimendiz
M. A. F. Garcia
R. G. Garcia
F. Manas
B. B. Miguel
A. D. G. Munoz
A. B. Pascual
S. Sevil
G. Gobbi, Contributing Member
N. A. Palm
G. C. Park
A. T. Roberts III
D. A. Scarth
F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
S. Takaya
D. Vetter
T. V. Vo
D. E. Waskey
J. G. Weicks
M. Weis
Y.-K. Chung, Delegate
C. Ye, Delegate
M. L. Benson, Alternate
J. K. Loy, Alternate
R. O. McGill, Alternate
D. J. Shim, Alternate
A. Udyawar, Alternate
E. B. Gerlach, Contributing Member
B. R. Newton, Contributing Member
C. D. Cowfer, Honorary Member
D. D. Davis, Honorary Member
R. E. Gimple, Honorary Member
F. E. Gregor, Honorary Member
O. F. Hedden, Honorary Member
R. D. Kerr, Honorary Member
P. C. Riccardella, Honorary Member
R. A. West, Honorary Member
C. J. Wirtz, Honorary Member
R. A. Yonekawa, Honorary Member
S. D. Kulat, Chair
R. W. Swayne, Vice Chair
D. Miro-Quesada, Staff Secretary
W. H. Bamford
M. J. Ferlisi
D. W. Lamond
J. T. Lindberg
xxxvi
S. L. McCracken
C. A. Nove
T. Nuoffer
N. A. Palm
G. C. Park
A. T. Roberts III
M. L. Benson, Alternate
Argentina International Working Group (BPV XI)
F. M. Schroeter, Chair
O. Martinez, Staff Secretary
D. A. Cipolla
A. Claus
D. Costa
D. P. Delfino
D. N. Dell’Erba
A. Dominguez
S. A. Echeverria
E. P. Fresquet
M. M. Gamizo
I. M. Guerreiro
F. Llorente
R. J. Lopez
M. Magliocchi
L. R. Miño
J. Monte
M. D. Pereda
A. Politi
C. G. Real
F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
G. J. Scian
M. J. Solari
P. N. Torano
P. Yamamoto
G. A. Lofthus
S. Matsumoto
D. E. Matthews
P. J. O’Regan
J. B. Ossmann
S. A. Sabo
P. Sullivan
C. Thomas
J. Tucker
Task Group on ISI of Spent Nuclear Fuel Storage and Transportation
Containment Systems (BPV XI)
China International Working Group (BPV XI)
J. H. Liu, Chair
Y. Nie, Vice Chair
C. Ye, Vice Chair
M. W. Zhou, Secretary
J. F. Cai
H. Chen
H. D. Chen
Y. Cheng
Y. B. Guo
Y. Hongqi
D. R. Horn
Y. Hou
S. X. Lin
W. N. Pei
L. Shiwei
Task Group on Inspectability (BPV XI)
J. T. Lindberg, Chair
E. Henry, Secretary
A. Cardillo
D. R. Cordes
M. J. Ferlisi
P. Gionta
D. O. Henry
J. Honcharik
R. Klein
C. Latiolais
S. Shuo
Y. Sixin
Y. X. Sun
G. X. Tang
Q. Wang
Q. W. Wang
Z. S. Wang
L. Xing
F. Xu
S. X. Xu
Q. Yin
K. Zhang
Y. Zhe
Z. M. Zhong
K. Hunter, Chair
M. Orihuela, Secretary
D. J. Ammerman
W. H. Borter
J. Broussard
S. Brown
C. R. Bryan
T. Carraher
S. Corcoran
D. Dunn
N. Fales
R. C. Folley
G. Grant
B. Gutherman
M. W. Joseph
M. Keene
M. Liu
K. Mauskar
R. M. Meyer
B. L. Montgomery
R. M. Pace
E. L. Pleins
M. A. Richter
B. Sarno
R. Sindelar
M. Staley
J. Wellwood
X. J. Zhai
P.-S. Lam, Alternate
G. White, Alternate
J. Wise, Alternate
H. Smith, Contributing Member
Subgroup on Evaluation Standards (SG-ES) (BPV XI)
German International Working Group (BPV XI)
R. Döring, Chair
R. Trieglaff, Vice Chair
R. Piel, Secretary
A. Casse
S. Dugan
C. G. Frantescu
M. Hagenbruch
E. Iacopetta
S. D. Kulat
H.-W. Lange
N. Legl
T. Ludwig
X. Pitoiset
M. Reichert
L. Sybertz
I. Tewes
R. Tiete
J. Wendt
S. Zickler
India International Working Group (BPV XI)
S. B. Parkash, Chair
D. Narain, Vice Chair
K. K. Rai, Secretary
Z. M. Mansuri
M. R. Nadgouda
N. Palm
D. Rawal
R. Sahai
R. K. Sharma
Special Working Group on Editing and Review (BPV XI)
R. W. Swayne, Chair
M. Orihuela
W. H. Bamford, Chair
N. A. Palm, Secretary
M. Brumovsky
H. D. Chung
R. C. Cipolla
C. M. Faidy
M. M. Farooq
B. R. Ganta
T. J. Griesbach
K. Hasegawa
K. Hojo
D. N. Hopkins
D. R. Lee
Y. S. Li
K. R. Rao
R. O. McGill
H. S. Mehta
K. Miyazaki
R. M. Pace
J. C. Poehler
S. Ranganath
D. A. Scarth
D. J. Shim
G. L. Stevens
A. Udyawar
T. V. Vo
G. M. Wilkowski
S. X. Xu
M. L. Benson, Alternate
Task Group on Evaluation of Beyond Design Basis Events
(SG-ES) (BPV XI)
R. M. Pace, Chair
S. X. Xu, Secretary
F. G. Abatt
G. A. Antaki
P. R. Donavin
R. G. Gilada
T. J. Griesbach
xxxvii
M. Hayashi
K. Hojo
S. A. Kleinsmith
H. S. Mehta
T. V. Vo
G. M. Wilkowski
T. Weaver, Contributing Member
Working Group on Flaw Evaluation (SG-ES) (BPV XI)
R. C. Cipolla, Chair
S. X. Xu, Secretary
W. H. Bamford
M. L. Benson
M. Brumovsky
H. D. Chung
M. A. Erickson
C. M. Faidy
M. M. Farooq
B. R. Ganta
R. G. Gilada
F. D. Hayes
P. H. Hoang
K. Hojo
D. N. Hopkins
S. Kalyanam
Y. Kim
V. Lacroix
D. R. Lee
Y. S. Li
C. Liu
M. Liu
H. S. Mehta
G. A. A. Miessi
K. Miyazaki
S. Noronha
R. K. Qashu
S. Ranganath
P. J. Rush
D. A. Scarth
W. L. Server
D. J. Shim
S. Smith
M. Uddin
A. Udyawar
T. V. Vo
K. Wang
B. Wasiluk
G. M. Wilkowski
Working Group on Pipe Flaw Evaluation (SG-ES) (BPV XI)
D. A. Scarth, Chair
G. M. Wilkowski, Secretary
K. Azuma
M. L. Benson
M. Brumovsky
F. W. Brust
H. D. Chung
R. C. Cipolla
N. G. Cofie
C. M. Faidy
M. M. Farooq
B. R. Ganta
S. R. Gosselin
C. E. Guzman-Leong
K. Hasegawa
P. H. Hoang
K. Hojo
D. N. Hopkins
E. J. Houston
R. Janowiak
Working Group on Flaw Evaluation Reference Curves (BPV XI)
G. L. Stevens, Chair
A. Udyawar, Secretary
W. H. Bamford
M. L. Benson
F. W. Brust
R. C. Cipolla
M. M. Farooq
A. E. Freed
P. Gill
K. Hasegawa
K. Hojo
R. Janowiak
A. Jenks
V. Lacroix
H. S. Mehta
K. Miyazaki
B. Pellereau
S. Ranganath
D. A. Scarth
D. J. Shim
S. Smith
T. V. Vo
S. X. Xu
Working Group on Operating Plant Criteria (SG-ES) (BPV XI)
N. A. Palm, Chair
A. E. Freed, Secretary
K. R. Baker
W. H. Bamford
M. Brumovsky
M. A. Erickson
T. J. Griesbach
M. Hayashi
R. Janowiak
M. Kirk
S. A. Kleinsmith
H. Kobayashi
H. S. Mehta
A. D. Odell
R. M. Pace
J. C. Poehler
S. Ranganath
W. L. Server
C. A. Tomes
A. Udyawar
T. V. Vo
H. Q. Xu
S. Kalyanam
K. Kashima
V. Lacroix
Y. S. Li
R. O. McGill
H. S. Mehta
G. A. A. Miessi
K. Miyazaki
S. H. Pellet
P. J. Rush
C. J. Sallaberry
W. L. Server
D. J. Shim
S. Smith
M. F. Uddin
A. Udyawar
T. V. Vo
K. Wang
B. Wasiluk
S. X. Xu
Task Group on Code Case N-513 (WG-PFE) (BPV XI)
R. O. McGill, Chair
E. J. Houston, Secretary
G. A. Antaki
R. C. Cipolla
M. M. Farooq
R. Janowiak
S. M. Parker
D. Rudland
P. J. Rush
D. A. Scarth
S. X. Xu
Task Group on Evaluation Procedures for Degraded Buried Pipe
(WG-PFE) (BPV XI)
R. O. McGill, Chair
S. X. Xu, Secretary
F. G. Abatt
G. A. Antaki
R. C. Cipolla
R. G. Gilada
K. Hasegawa
K. M. Hoffman
R. Janowiak
M. Kassar
M. Moenssens
D. P. Munson
R. M. Pace
S. H. Pellet
D. Rudland
P. J. Rush
D. A. Scarth
Task Group on Flaw Evaluation for HDPE Pipe (WG-PFE) (BPV XI)
P. J. Rush, Chair
P. Krishnaswamy
M. Moenssens
D. P. Munson
D. A. Scarth
D. J. Shim
M. Troughton
J. Wright
S. X. Xu
Task Group on Appendix L (WG-OPC) (BPV XI)
N. Glunt, Chair
R. M. Pace, Secretary
A. E. Freed
M. A. Gray
T. J. Griesbach
H. Nam
A. Nana
A. D. Odell
C.-S. Oh
H. Park
S. Ranganath
D. J. Shim
S. Smith
G. L. Stevens
A. Udyawar
Subgroup on Nondestructive Examination (SG-NDE) (BPV XI)
J. T. Lindberg, Chair
D. R. Cordes, Secretary
M. Briley
C. Brown
T. L. Chan
T. Cinson
S. E. Cumblidge
K. J. Hacker
xxxviii
J. Harrison
D. O. Henry
G. A. Lofthus
S. A. Sabo
F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
R. V. Swain
C. A. Nove, Alternate
Working Group on Personnel Qualification and Surface Visual and
Eddy Current Examination (SG-NDE) (BPV XI)
C. Brown, Chair
T. Cinson, Secretary
J. E. Aycock
J. Bennett
S. E. Cumblidge
A. Diaz
N. Farenbaugh
Task Group on Weld Overlay (BPV XI)
S. L. McCracken, Chair
D. Barborak
S. J. Findlan
M. L. Hall
W. C. Holston
S. Hunter
C. Lohse
S. E. Marlette
D. O. Henry
J. T. Lindberg
C. Shinsky
R. Tedder
T. Thulien
J. T. Timm
Working Group on Procedure Qualification and Volumetric Examination
(SG-NDE) (BPV XI)
G. A. Lofthus, Chair
J. Harrison, Secretary
M. Briley
A. Bushmire
D. R. Cordes
S. R. Doctor
K. J. Hacker
W. A. Jensen
D. A. Kull
C. Latiolais
C. A. Nove
S. A. Sabo
R. V. Swain
D. Van Allen
D. K. Zimmerman
B. Lin, Alternate
B. R. Newton
G. Olson
A. Patel
P. Raynaud
D. W. Sandusky
D. E. Waskey
J. G. Weicks
Working Group on Non-Metals Repair/Replacement Activities
(SG-RRA) (BPV XI)
J. E. O'Sullivan, Chair
S. Schuessler, Secretary
M. Brandes
D. R. Dechene
J. Johnston, Jr.
B. Lin
M. P. Marohl
T. M. Musto
S. Patterson
A. Pridmore
F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
R. Stakenborghs
Task Group on HDPE Piping for Low Safety Significance Systems
(WG-NMRRA) (BPV XI)
Subgroup on Repair/Replacement Activities (SG-RRA) (BPV XI)
S. L. McCracken, Chair
E. V. Farrell, Jr., Secretary
J. F. Ball
M. Brandes
S. B. Brown
R. Clow
P. D. Fisher
M. L. Hall
W. C. Holston
J. Honcharik
A. B. Meichler
B. R. Newton
S. A. Norman
J. E. O’Sullivan
G. C. Park
R. R. Stevenson
R. W. Swayne
D. J. Tilly
D. E. Waskey
J. G. Weicks
B. Lin, Alternate
J. K. Loy, Alternate
Working Group on Welding and Special Repair Processes
(SG-RRA) (BPV XI)
J. G. Weicks, Chair
D. Barborak
S. J. Findlan
P. D. Fisher
R. C. Folley
M. L. Hall
W. C. Holston
J. Honcharik
C. C. Kim
M. Kris
S. E. Marlette
S. L. McCracken
B. R. Newton
J. E. O’Sullivan
D. J. Tilly
D. E. Waskey
J. K. Loy, Alternate
Task Group on Temper Bead Welding (BPV XI)
S. J. Findlan, Chair
D. Barborak
M. L. Hall
S. L. McCracken
N. Mohr
B. R. Newton
G. Olson
J. E. O’Sullivan
A. Patel
J. Tatman
D. J. Tilly
D. E. Waskey
J. G. Weicks
M. Brandes, Chair
J. E. O'Sullivan, Secretary
M. Golliet
B. Lin
T. M. Musto
F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
S. Schuessler
R. Stakenborghs
Task Group on Repair by Carbon Fiber Composites (WGN-MRR) (BPV XI)
J. E. O'Sullivan, Chair
S. F. Arnold
S. W. Choi
D. R. Dechene
M. Golliet
L. S. Gordon
M. Kuntz
H. Lu
M. P. Marohl
L. Nadeau
C. A. Nove
R. P. Ojdrovic
A. Pridmore
P. Raynaud
S. Rios
C. W. Rowley
J. Sealey
R. Stakenborghs
N. Stoeva
M. F. Uddin
J. Wen
B. Davenport, Alternate
Working Group on Design and Programs (SG-RRA) (BPV XI)
S. B. Brown, Chair
A. B. Meichler, Secretary
O. Bhatty
R. Clow
R. R. Croft
E. V. Farrell, Jr.
B. Lin
H. Malikowski
G. C. Park
M. A. Pyne
R. R. Stevenson
R. W. Swayne
Task Group on Repair and Replacement Optimization (WG-D&P) (BPV XI)
S. L. McCracken, Chair
T. Basso
R. Clow
K. Dietrich
E. V. Farrell, Jr.
R. C. Folley
M. L. Hall
W. C. Holston
xxxix
D. Jacobs
H. Malikowski
T. Nuoffer
G. C. Park
A. Patel
R. R. Stevenson
R. G. Weicks
Subgroup on Water-Cooled Systems (SG-WCS) (BPV XI)
M. J. Ferlisi, Chair
J. Nygaard, Secretary
J. M. Boughman
S. B. Brown
S. T. Chesworth
H. Q. Do
K. W. Hall
P. J. Hennessey
K. M. Hoffman
A. E. Keyser
Working Group on General Requirements (BPV XI)
S. D. Kulat
D. W. Lamond
T. Nomura
T. Nuoffer
M. A. Pyne
H. M. Stephens, Jr.
R. Thames
M. Weis
M. J. Homiack, Alternate
T. Nuoffer, Chair
J. Mayo, Secretary
J. F. Ball
T. L. Chan
P. J. Hennessey
K. A. Kavanagh
T. N. Rezk
Subgroup on Reliability and Integrity Management Program
(SG-RIM) (BPV XI)
A. T. Roberts III, Chair
D. Vetter, Secretary
T. Anselmi
N. Broom
V. Chugh
S. R. Doctor
J. D. Fletcher
J. T. Fong
J. Grimm
K. Harris
Task Group on High Strength Nickel Alloys Issues (SG-WCS) (BPV XI)
H. Malikowski, Chair
K. Dietrich, Secretary
W. H. Bamford
T. Cinson
P. R. Donavin
K. M. Hoffman
H. Kobayashi
C. Lohse
S. E. Marlette
B. L. Montgomery
G. C. Park
W. Sims
D. E. Waskey
C. Wax
K. A. Whitney
Working Group on Containment (SG-WCS) (BPV XI)
M. J. Ferlisi, Chair
R. Thames, Secretary
P. S. Ghosal
H. T. Hill
A. E. Keyser
B. Lehman
P. Leininger
A. T. Roberts III
S. R. Scott
D. Vetter
S. E. Woolf
M. T. Audrain, Alternate
R. S. Spencer, Alternate
P. J. Hennessey
D. M. Jones
D. R. Lee
T. Lupold
M. Orihuela
F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
H. M. Stephens, Jr.
R. W. Swayne
S. Takaya
R. Vayda
Working Group on MANDE (BPV XI)
J. A. Munshi
M. Sircar
P. C. Smith
S. Walden
M. Weis
S. G. Brown, Alternate
H. M. Stephens, Jr., Chair
S. R. Doctor, Vice Chair
M. Turnbow, Secretary
T. Anselmi
N. A. Finney
J. T. Fong
D. O. Henry
T. Lupold
L. E. Mullins
M. Orihuela
JSME/ASME Joint Task Group for System-Based Code
(SWG-RIM) (BPV XI)
Working Group on Inspection of Systems and Components
(SG-WCS) (BPV XI)
H. Q. Do, Chair
M. Weis, Secretary
R. W. Blyde
K. Caver
C. Cueto-Felgueroso
M. J. Ferlisi
M. L. Garcia Heras
K. W. Hall
K. M. Hoffman
S. Takaya, Chair
T. Asayama
S. R. Doctor
K. Dozaki
J. T. Fong
J. Hakii
K. Harris
M. Hayashi
Y. Kamishima
J. Howard
A. Keller
S. D. Kulat
E. Lantz
A. Maekawa
T. Nomura
J. C. Nygaard
S. Orita
D. R. Lee
H. Machida
T. Muraki
A. T. Roberts III
F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
R. Vayda
D. Watanabe
M. Morishita, Contributing Member
COMMITTEE ON TRANSPORT TANKS (BPV XII)
N. J. Paulick, Chair
M. D. Rana, Vice Chair
J. Oh, Staff Secretary
A. N. Antoniou
P. Chilukuri
W. L. Garfield
M. Pitts
J. Roberts
Working Group on Pressure Testing (SG-WCS) (BPV XI)
J. M. Boughman, Chair
S. A. Norman, Secretary
T. Anselmi
B. Casey
Y.-K. Chung
M. J. Homiack
A. E. Keyser
D. W. Lamond
J. K. McClanahan
T. P. McClure
B. L. Montgomery
M. Moenssens
R. A. Nettles
C. Thomas
T. A. Rogers
R. C. Sallash
M. Shah
S. Staniszewski
A. P. Varghese
Y. Doron, Contributing Member
R. Meyers, Contributing Member
M. R. Ward, Contributing Member
Executive Committee (BPV XII)
Working Group on Risk-Informed Activities (SG-WCS) (BPV XI)
M. A. Pyne, Chair
S. T. Chesworth, Secretary
G. Brouette
C. Cueto-Felgueroso
R. Haessler
J. Hakii
K. W. Hall
M. J. Homiack
M. D. Rana, Chair
N. J. Paulick, Vice Chair
J. Oh, Staff Secretary
M. Pitts
S. D. Kulat
D. W. Lamond
G. J. Navratil
P. J. O’Regan
N. A. Palm
D. Vetter
J. C. Younger
xl
T. A. Rogers
R. C. Sallash
S. Staniszewski
A. P. Varghese
Subgroup on Design and Materials (BPV XII)
R. C. Sallash, Chair
D. K. Chandiramani
P. Chilukuri
Y. Doron
S. L. McWilliams
N. J. Paulick
M. D. Rana
T. A. Rogers
M. Shah
S. Staniszewski
Executive Committee (BPV XIII)
A. P. Varghese
K. Xu
A. T. Duggleby, Contributing Member
R. D. Hayworth, Contributing
Member
G. G. Karcher, Contributing Member
B. E. Spencer, Contributing Member
M. R. Ward, Contributing Member
J. Zheng, Contributing Member
D. Miller, Chair
D. B. DeMichael, Vice Chair
C. E. O’Brien, Staff Secretary
J. F. Ball
Subgroup on Design and Materials (BPV XIII)
D. Miller, Chair
T. Patel, Vice Chair
B. Mruk, Secretary
C. E. Beair
A. Biesecker
W. E. Chapin
J. L. Freiler
B. Joergensen
V. Kalyanasundaram
B. J. Mollitor
A. Swearingin
Subgroup on Fabrication, Inspection, and Continued Service (BPV XII)
M. Pitts, Chair
P. Chilukuri
Y. Doron
M. Koprivnak
P. Miller
O. Mulet
J. Roberts
A. Donaldson
B. K. Nutter
J. A. West
T. A. Rogers
R. C. Sallash
L. Selensky
S. Staniszewski
R. D. Hayworth
G. McRae, Contributing Member
T. R. Tarbay
J. A. West
A. Williams
D. J. Azukas, Contributing Member
R. D. Danzy, Contributing Member
A. Hassan, Contributing Member
R. Miyata, Contributing Member
M. Mullavey, Contributing Member
S. K. Parimi, Contributing Member
G. Ramirez, Contributing Member
K. Shores, Contributing Member
Subgroup on General Requirements (BPV XIII)
A. Donaldson, Chair
B. F. Pittel, Vice Chair
J. M. Levy, Secretary
D. J. Azukas
J. F. Ball
M. Z. Brown
J. Burgess
D. B. DeMichael
M. Elias
S. T. French
J. Gillham
R. Klimas, Jr.
Z. E. Kumana
P. K. Lam
K. R. May
J. Mize
L. Moedinger
M. Mullavey
M. Poehlmann
K. Shores
D. E. Tezzo
D. E. Tompkins
J. F. White
Subgroup on General Requirements (BPV XII)
S. Staniszewski, Chair
B. F. Pittel, Secretary
A. N. Antoniou
Y. Doron
H. Ebben III
J. L. Freiler
W. L. Garfield
O. Mulet
M. Pitts
R. C. Sallash
L. Selensky
P. Chilukuri, Contributing Member
T. J. Hitchcock, Contributing Member
S. L. McWilliams, Contributing
Member
T. A. Rogers, Contributing Member
D. G. Shelton, Contributing Member
M. R. Ward, Contributing Member
Subgroup on Nonmandatory Appendices (BPV XII)
T. A. Rogers, Chair
S. Staniszewski, Secretary
P. Chilukuri
N. J. Paulick
M. Pitts
R. C. Sallash
D. G. Shelton
Y. Doron, Contributing Member
COMMITTEE ON OVERPRESSURE PROTECTION (BPV XIII)
D. B. DeMichael, Chair
D. Miller, Vice Chair
C. E. O’Brien, Staff Secretary
J. F. Ball
J. Burgess
B. Calderon
J. W. Dickson
A. Donaldson
S. F. Harrison, Jr.
B. K. Nutter
T. Patel
M. Poehlmann
T. R. Tarbay
D. E. Tompkins
Z. Wang
J. A. West
A. Wilson
H. Aguilar, Contributing Member
R. W. Barnes, Contributing Member
R. D. Danzy, Contributing Member
M. Elias, Contributing Member
D. Felix, Contributing Member
A. Frigerio, Contributing Member
J. P. Glaspie, Contributing Member
A. Hassan, Contributing Member
P. K. Lam, Contributing Member
J. M. Levy, Contributing Member
M. Mengon, Contributing Member
J. Mize, Contributing Member
M. Mullavey, Contributing Member
S. K. Parimi, Contributing Member
R. Raman, Contributing Member
M. Reddy, Contributing Member
S. Ruesenberg, Contributing Member
K. Shores, Contributing Member
D. E. Tezzo, Contributing Member
B. Calderon, Contributing Member
P. Chavdarov, Contributing Member
T. M. Fabiani, Contributing Member
J. L. Freiler, Contributing Member
J. P. Glaspie, Contributing Member
G. D. Goodson, Contributing Member
C. Haldiman, Contributing Member
J. Horne, Contributing Member
B. Joergensen, Contributing Member
C. Lasarte, Contributing Member
D. Mainiero-Cessna, Contributing
Member
M. Mengon, Contributing Member
D. E. Miller, Contributing Member
R. Miyata, Contributing Member
B. Mruk, Contributing Member
R. Raman, Contributing Member
M. Reddy, Contributing Member
S. Ruesenberg, Contributing Member
R. Sadowski, Contributing Member
A. Swearingin, Contributing Member
A. P. Varghese, Contributing Member
Subgroup on Nuclear (BPV XIII)
J. F. Ball, Chair
K. R. May, Vice Chair
R. Krithivasan, Secretary
J. W. Dickson
S. Jones
R. Lack
D. Miller
T. Patel
xli
K. Shores
I. H. Tseng
J. Yu
N. J. Hansing, Alternate
J. M. Levy, Alternate
B. J. Yonsky, Alternate
S. T. French, Contributing Member
D. B. Ross, Contributing Member
Subgroup on Testing (BPV XIII)
B. K. Nutter, Chair
T. P. Beirne, Vice Chair
J. W. Dickson, Secretary
B. Calderon
V. Chicola III
B. Engman
R. J. Garnett
R. Houk
R. Lack
M. Mengon
C. Sharpe
COMMITTEE ON NUCLEAR CERTIFICATION (CNC)
A. Strecker
J. R. Thomas, Jr.
Z. Wang
A. Wilson
D. Nelson, Alternate
J. Cockerham, Contributing Member
J. Mize, Contributing Member
M. Mullavey, Contributing Member
R. Raman, Contributing Member
S. Ruesenberg, Contributing Member
K. Shores, Contributing Member
R. R. Stevenson, Chair
J. DeKleine, Vice Chair
Z. McLucas, Staff Secretary
J. F. Ball
G. Claffey
G. Gobbi
S. M. Goodwin
J. W. Highlands
K. A. Kavanagh
J. C. Krane
M. A. Lockwood
T. McGee
E. L. Pleins
T. E. Quaka
T. N. Rezk
G. E. Szabatura
C. Turylo
D. M. Vickery
US TAG to ISO TC 185 Safety Devices for Protection Against Excessive
Pressure (BPV XIII)
D. Miller, Chair
C. E. O'Brien, Staff Secretary
J. F. Ball
T. J. Bevilacqua
D. B. DeMichael
J. W. Dickson
B. K. Nutter
T. Patel
J. R. Thomas, Jr.
J. A. West
J. F. White
COMMITTEE ON BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CONFORMITY
ASSESSMENT (CBPVCA)
R. V. Wielgoszinski, Chair
G. Scribner, Vice Chair
P. Murray, Staff Secretary
J. P. Chicoine
P. D. Edwards
T. E. Hansen
B. L. Krasiun
P. F. Martin
L. E. McDonald
D. Miller
I. Powell
L. Skarin
R. Uebel
E. A. Whittle
P. Williams
T. P. Beirne, Alternate
M. Blankinship, Alternate
J. W. Dickson, Alternate
J. M. Downs, Alternate
B. J. Hackett, Alternate
W. Hibdon, Alternate
Y.-S. Kim, Alternate
B. Morelock, Alternate
M. Poehlmann, Alternate
R. Rockwood, Alternate
B. C. Turczynski, Alternate
D. E. Tuttle, Alternate
S. V. Voorhees, Alternate
D. Cheetham, Contributing Member
A. J. Spencer, Honorary Member
xlii
E. A. Whittle
T. Aldo, Alternate
M. Blankinship, Alternate
P. J. Coco, Alternate
N. DeSantis, Alternate
C. Dinic, Alternate
P. D. Edwards, Alternate
T. B. Franchuk, Alternate
K. M. Hottle, Alternate
P. Krane, Alternate
D. Nenstiel, Alternate
L. Ponce, Alternate
P. F. Prescott, Alternate
S. V. Voorhees, Alternate
M. Wilson, Alternate
S. Yang, Alternate
S. F. Harrison, Jr., Contributing
Member
INTRODUCTION
1 GENERAL
The use of fiber-reinforced plastics for the manufacture of pressure vessels presents unique materials considerations in
the design, fabrication, and testing of these vessels. Metallic vessels, being made from materials that are normally
isotropic and ductile, are designed by using well-established allowable stresses based on measured tensile and ductility
properties. In contrast, fiber-reinforced plastics are usually anisotropic and the physical properties are dependent upon
the fabrication process, the placement and orientation of the reinforcement, and the resin matrix. It is the purpose of this
Introduction to describe in a general way the criteria that were used in preparing Section X, Fiber-Reinforced Plastic
Pressure Vessels. A list of standards referenced in this Section is provided in Table 1.1.
2 MATERIALS
It is not possible to fabricate a reinforced plastic pressure vessel of a single basic material for which there is an ASTM
specification. The vessel parts are made up of various basic materials, such as fiber reinforcement and resin, which are
joined in the presence of a catalyst to create a composite material that is formed into a vessel or vessel part by a specified
process. The composite material will often have directional properties, which shall be considered in design. General
specifications for the basic materials (fiber reinforcement and resin) are stated, as are requirements for determination of
elastic properties for the composite material (laminate) produced. Elastic properties of specific laminates used in vessel
fabrication are required when mandatory rules are used for vessel design. Metallic materials, when used in conjunction
with reinforced fiber laminates, are required to meet ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code specifications, Section VIII,
Division 1. That Section must be used for the design, fabrication, quality control, and inspection of such metallic parts.
However, for hydrostatic leakage testing, these metallic materials that complete the vessel are required to meet Section X
requirements.
3 DESIGN
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 Adequacy of specific designs shall be qualified by one of the following methods:1
(a) Class I Design — qualification of a vessel design through the pressure testing of a prototype.
(b) Class II Design — mandatory design rules and acceptable testing by nondestructive methods.
(c) Class III Design — qualification of a vessel design through the pressure testing of a prototype, other specified tests
of prototypes, mandatory design rules and acceptance testing by nondestructive methods.
3.1.2 Class I designs based on the qualification of a prototype vessel require that the minimum qualification pressure
of the prototype be at least six2 times the design pressure. The maximum design pressure is limited to 150 psi (1 MPa) for
bag-molded, centrifugally cast, and contact-molded vessels; 1,500 psi (10 MPa) for filament-wound vessels; and 3,000 psi
(20 MPa) for filament-wound vessels with polar boss openings.
3.1.3 Class II designs based on mandatory design rules and acceptance testing must comply with Article RD-11 and
Article RT-6. The maximum design pressure allowed under this procedure shall be as specified in RD-1120.
3.1.4 Class III designs include the qualification of a prototype with the minimum qualification pressure of the prototype to be at 2.25 times the design pressure for carbon fiber vessels, and 3.5 times the design pressure for glass fiber
vessels. Hybrid designs using more than one type of fiber are covered in 8-400.7. The maximum design pressure is limited
to 15,000 psi (103 MPa). The minimum design pressure shall be not less than 3,000 psi (20.7 MPa).
1
2
These three methods shall not be intermixed.
An exception to this six times factor is applicable to vessels per (Filament Winding — Polar Boss Openings Only).
xliii
Table 1.1
Referenced Standards in This Section
ð21Þ
Title
Number
Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
ASME B16.1
Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
ASME B16.5
Plain Washers
ASME B18.22.1
Conformity Assessment Requirements
ASME CA-1
Standard Test Method for Kinematic Viscosity and Opaque Liquids (the Calculation of Dynamic Viscosity)
ASTM D445
Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
ASTM D638
Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics
ASTM D695
Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative Density) of Plastics by Displacement
ASTM D792
Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Plasticizers Used in Plastics
ASTM D1045
Standard Test Methods for Epoxy Content of Epoxy Resins
ASTM D1652
Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Glass Strands, Yarns, and Rovings Used in Reinforced Plastics
ASTM D2343
Standard Test Method for Short-Beam Strength of Polymer Matrix Composite Materials and Their Laminates
ASTM D2344
Standard Test Method for Epoxy Resins and Related Components
ASTM D2393
Standard Test Method for Gel Time and Peak Exothermic Temperature of Reacting Thermosetting Resins
ASTM D2471
Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of Barcol Impressor
ASTM D2583
Standard Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced Resins
ASTM D2584
Standard Practice for Obtaining Hydrostatic or Pressure Design Basis for “Fiberglass” (Glass- Fiber-Reinforced
Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D2992
Standard Test Method for Volatile Matter (Including Water) of Vinyl Chloride Resins
ASTM D3030
Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Polymer Matrix Composite Materials
ASTM D3039
Standard Test Method for Constituent Content of Composite Materials
ASTM D3171
Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties for Polymer Matrix Composite Materials With Unsupported Gage Section ASTM D3410
by Shear Loading
Standard Test Method for In-Plane Shear Strength of Reinforced Plastics
ASTM D3846
Standard Test Method for Specific Gravity
ASTM D4052
Standard Specification for Contact-Molded Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermoset Resin Corrosion- Resistant Tanks
ASTM D4097
Standard Guide for Testing In-Plane Shear Properties of Polymer Matrix Composite Materials by the Rail Shear Method ASTM D4255
Standard Test Method for Inplane Shear Properties of Hoop Wound Polymer Matrix Composite Cylinders
ASTM D5448
Standard Test Method for Transverse Compressive Properties of Hoop Wound Polymer Matrix Composite Cylinders
ASTM D5449
Standard Test Method for Transverse Tensile Properties of Hoop Wound Polymer Matrix Composite Cylinders
ASTM D5450
Standard Test Method for Shear Properties of Composite Materials by V-Notched Rail Shear Method
ASTM D7078
Standard Practice for Acoustic Emission Examination of Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Resin (FRP) Tanks/Vessels
ASTM E1067
Standard Practice for Determining Damage-Based Design for Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Materials Using Acoustic ASTM E2478
Emission
Recommended Practice for Personnel Qualification and Certification in Nondestructive Testing
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) The most recently approved version of the above referenced standards apply.
(b) Additional standards referenced for Class III vessels are listed in 8-200.4.
xliv
SNT-TC-1A
3.2 LOW MODULUS CHARACTERISTICS
Fiber-reinforced plastic laminates may have a modulus of elasticity as low as 1.0 × 106 psi (6 900 MPa), compared with
that of ferrous materials which may be of the order of 30 × 106 psi (2.1 × 105 MPa). This low modulus characteristic
requires careful consideration of vessel profile in order to minimize bending and avoid buckling. Spherical heads or
elliptical heads having an ellipse ratio not greater than 2:1 are suggested. Spherical heads are suggested when the material
has isotropic properties. Elliptical heads are preferred when the material has anisotropic properties.
3.3 FATIGUE
3.3.1 Like metallic materials, the composite material (laminate) of fiber-reinforced plastic vessels, when stressed at
sufficiently low levels, exhibits good fatigue life. However, its low modulus of elasticity provides a higher strain per unit of
stress than metals used for metallic vessels.
3.3.2 Section X, therefore, requires that a Class I design that is qualified by testing of a prototype vessel be pressure
cycled 100,000 times over a pressure range of atmospheric to the design pressure; after this, the test vessel must
withstand a hydrostatic qualification test not less than six times the design pressure. An exception to this 100,000
cycle requirement is applicable to vessels per RG-404.2 (Filament Winding — Polar Boss Openings Only). That classification of vessels is designed for a 5:1 factor of safety which requires cycling from atmospheric to the design pressure for
33,000 cycles; after this, the test vessel must withstand a hydrostatic qualification test not less than five times the design
pressure.
3.3.3 Class II vessels qualified using mandatory design rules and acceptance testing are not required to be subjected to
the above cyclic and qualification pressure test criteria.
3.3.4 Section X requires that a Class III design qualification include testing of a prototype vessel that is pressure cycled
for “N” cycles as prescribed in 8-700.5.4.1 over a pressure range of 10% of design pressure to 100% of design pressure
without leakage or rupture.
3.4 CREEP, STRESS-RUPTURE, AND TEMPERATURE EFFECTS
Fiber-reinforced plastic composite material (laminate) is not subject to creep or failure due to low stress-to-rupture
characteristics as are some other materials. The material does, however, lose ultimate strength as the temperature is
increased and gains strength but becomes more brittle as the temperature is lowered. Its low thermal conductivity and
ablative properties are other factors significantly affecting the behavior of this material in the event of fire or other hightemperature environment. The maximum design, operating, and test temperatures of Class I vessels are set as follows:
(a) 150°F (65°C) for design temperatures less than or equal to 150°F (65°C);
(b) 250°F (120°C) or to within 35°F (19°C) of the glass transition temperature (whichever is lower) for design
temperatures in excess of 150°F (65°C).
The maximum design, operating, and test temperatures of Class II vessels are limited to an inside wall temperature of
250°F (120°C) or to within 35°F (19°C) of the glass transition temperature of the resin (whichever is lower). The
maximum design temperature of Class III vessels shall be 35°F (19°C) below the maximum use temperature of the
resin as documented in the Manufacturing Specifications, but in no case shall it exceed 185°F (85°C). The
minimum design temperature of Class I, Class II, and Class III vessels shall be −65°F (−54°C) (see RD-112).
3.5 FABRICATION
3.5.1 Many processes are used in the fabrication of fiber-reinforced composite materials (laminates). Class I vessels
are limited to four processes, namely, filament winding, bag molding, contact molding, and centrifugal casting. Class II
vessels are limited to two processes, namely, filament winding and contact molding.
3.5.2 The fabrication of more than one Class I vessel may be required to comply with the requirements for qualifying a
design using the prototype vessel3 method. Once a specific design has been qualified, the quality of subsequent vessels of
the same dimension and design is to be assured by carefully controlled fabrication procedures and rigid Quality Control
Programs.
3.5.3 Every Class II vessel must be acceptance tested as specified in Article RT-6. Such tests must be documented as
having met the acceptance criteria of Article RT-6 and shall become part of the Fabricator’s Design Report.
3
Prototype vessels used to qualify a design shall not be stamped with the Certification Mark.
xlv
3.5.4 Class III vessels are limited to filament-wound construction with polar loss openings.
3.6 INSPECTION
3.6.1 The general philosophy of Section VIII, Division 1, regarding inspection during fabrication is continued in this
Section. Familiarity with the laminate production processes and the nature of vessel imperfections is required of the
Inspector. Reliance is placed upon careful auditing of the Fabricator’s Quality Control Program, close visual inspection of
completed vessels by both Fabricator personnel and the Inspector, and acceptance testing where required by this Section.
3.6.2 This Section requires that all laminate and secondary bonding work be without use of pigments, fillers, or resin
putty mixtures except as permitted by the Procedure Specification used in fabricating the vessel or vessel part.
3.7 LINERS
Liners may be used in Section X vessels as a barrier between the laminate and the vessel contents. Such liners shall not
be considered part of the structural component of the vessel.
3.8 UNITS
3.8.1 Either U.S. Customary, SI, or any local customary units may be used to demonstrate compliance with all requirements of this Edition (e.g., materials, design, fabrication, examination, inspection, testing, certification, and overpressure protection).
3.8.2 In general, it is expected that a single system of units shall be used for all aspects of design except where
unfeasible or impractical. When components are manufactured at different locations where local customary units
are different than those used for the general design, the local units may be used for the design and documentation
of that component. Similarly, for proprietary components or those uniquely associated with a system of units different
than that used for the general design, the alternate units may be used for the design and documentation of that component.
3.8.3 For any single equation, all variables shall be expressed in a single system of units. When separate equations are
provided for U.S. Customary units and SI units, those equations must be executed using variables in the units associated
with the specific equation. Data expressed in other units shall be converted to U.S. Customary units or SI units for use in
these equations. The result obtained from execution of these equations may be converted to other units.
3.8.4 Production, measurement and test equipment, drawings, welding procedure specifications, welding procedure
and performance qualifications, and other fabrication documents may be in U.S. Customary, SI, or local customary units in
accordance with the Fabricator’s practice. When values shown in calculations and analysis, fabrication documents, or
measurement and test equipment are in different units, any conversions necessary for verification of Code compliance
and to ensure that dimensional consistency is maintained, shall be in accordance with the following:
(a) Conversion factors shall be accurate to at least four significant figures.
(b) The results of conversions of units shall be expressed to a minimum of three significant figures.
3.8.5 Material that has been manufactured and certified to either the U.S. Customary or SI material specification (e.g.,
SA-516M) may be used regardless of the unit system used in design. Standard fittings (e.g., flanges, elbows, etc.) that have
been certified to either U.S. Customary units or SI units may be used regardless of the units system used in design.
3.8.6 Conversion of units, using the precision specified in para. 20, shall be performed to assure that dimensional
consistency is maintained. Conversion factors between U.S. Customary units and SI units may be found in the Nonmandatory Appendix, Guidance for the Use of U.S. Customary and SI units in the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code. Whenever local customary units are used, the Manufacturer shall provide the source of the conversion
factors which shall be subject to verification and acceptance by the Authorized Inspector or Certified Individual.
3.8.7 All entries on a Manufacturer’s Data Report and data for Code required nameplate marking shall be in units
consistent with the fabrication drawings for the component using U.S. Customary, SI, or local customary units. It is
acceptable to show alternate units parenthetically. Users of this Code are cautioned that the receiving Jurisdiction
should be contacted to ensure the units are acceptable.
xlvi
SUMMARY OF CHANGES
Errata to the BPV Code may be posted on the ASME website to provide corrections to incorrectly published items, or to
correct typographical or grammatical errors in the BPV Code. Such Errata shall be used on the date posted.
Information regarding Special Notices and Errata is published by ASME at http://go.asme.org/BPVCerrata.
Changes given below are identified on the pages by a margin note, (21), placed next to the affected area.
Page
Location
Change
xiv
List of Sections
(1) Listing for Section III updated
(2) Section XIII added
(3) Code Case information updated
xvi
Foreword
(1) Subparagraph (k) added, and subsequent subparagraph redesignated
(2) Second footnote revised
(3) Last paragraph added
xix
Submittal of Technical Inquiries to the
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Standards
Committees
Paragraphs 1(a)(3)(-b), 2(b), and 5(a)(3) revised
xxii
Personnel
Updated
xliv
Table 1.1
ASTM E1067 added
1
RG-111
Subparagraphs (a) and (c) revised
3
RG-201
Subparagraph (f) revised
8
RM-121
(1) Subparagraph (d) deleted
9
Table RM-120.1
(1) “Acid number” entry deleted, and subsequent entry renumbered
9
Table RM-120.2
(2) Third and fourth paragraphs after subpara. (c) revised
(2) Note (1) added
Note (1) added
13
RD-111
Second paragraph revised
13
RD-116
Revised
25
Figure RD-620.5
“6tb,” “6ti,” and “6tp” revised to “4tb,” “4ti,” and “4tp,” respectively
26
Figure RD-620.6
“6tb,” “6ti,” and “6tp” revised to “4tb,” “4ti,” and “4tp,” respectively
36
RD-1172.1
Definition of KD revised
38
Figure RD-1174.2
“6tb” and “6tp” revised to “4tb” and “4tp,” respectively
78
Part RR
Requirements moved to Part ROP and Section XIII
79
Part ROP
Added
82
RT-111
Endnote 16 (formerly endnote 17) and subparagraph (a)(7) revised
88
RT-412.2
Title revised
93
RT-622
Last sentence deleted
97
RI-132
Subparagraph (c) revised
103
RS-110
Endnote 22 (formerly endnote 23) revised
104
RS-131
Title revised, and former in-text note relocated to Figure RS-132.1 General
Notes
104
Figure RS-132.1
General Notes added
109
Mandatory Appendix 2
Information moved to Section XIII, Mandatory Appendix IV
126
8-100.3
Revised
140
8-700.5.10
Revised in its entirety
174
Nonmandatory Appendix AB
Paragraphs AB-103 through AB-107 revised
215
AH-200
In subpara. (j), 2,000 psi and 14 MPa added to in-text table
xlvii
Page
Location
Change
223
Table AJ-1
(1) In first column, designators for Forms CPV-1 and CPV-2 corrected
(2) Entry for Form Q-120 updated
(3) Note (1) added
235
Form Q-120
(1) Revision line of heading updated
(2) On third page, line D1 revised
271
Nonmandatory Appendix AM
Added
xlviii
LIST OF CHANGES IN RECORD NUMBER ORDER
DELETED
xlix
CROSS-REFERENCING AND STYLISTIC CHANGES IN THE BOILER
AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE
There have been structural and stylistic changes to BPVC, starting with the 2011 Addenda, that should be noted to aid
navigating the contents. The following is an overview of the changes:
Subparagraph Breakdowns/Nested Lists Hierarchy
•
•
•
•
•
•
First-level breakdowns are designated as (a), (b), (c), etc., as in the past.
Second-level breakdowns are designated as (1), (2), (3), etc., as in the past.
Third-level breakdowns are now designated as (-a), (-b), (-c), etc.
Fourth-level breakdowns are now designated as (-1), (-2), (-3), etc.
Fifth-level breakdowns are now designated as (+a), (+b), (+c), etc.
Sixth-level breakdowns are now designated as (+1), (+2), etc.
Footnotes
With the exception of those included in the front matter (roman-numbered pages), all footnotes are treated as
endnotes. The endnotes are referenced in numeric order and appear at the end of each BPVC section/subsection.
Submittal of Technical Inquiries to the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Standards Committees
Submittal of Technical Inquiries to the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Standards Committees has been moved to the front
matter. This information now appears in all Boiler Code Sections (except for Code Case books).
Cross-References
It is our intention to establish cross-reference link functionality in the current edition and moving forward. To facilitate
this, cross-reference style has changed. Cross-references within a subsection or subarticle will not include the designator/
identifier of that subsection/subarticle. Examples follow:
• (Sub-)Paragraph Cross-References. The cross-references to subparagraph breakdowns will follow the hierarchy of
the designators under which the breakdown appears.
– If subparagraph (-a) appears in X.1(c)(1) and is referenced in X.1(c)(1), it will be referenced as (-a).
– If subparagraph (-a) appears in X.1(c)(1) but is referenced in X.1(c)(2), it will be referenced as (1)(-a).
– If subparagraph (-a) appears in X.1(c)(1) but is referenced in X.1(e)(1), it will be referenced as (c)(1)(-a).
– If subparagraph (-a) appears in X.1(c)(1) but is referenced in X.2(c)(2), it will be referenced as X.1(c)(1)(-a).
• Equation Cross-References. The cross-references to equations will follow the same logic. For example, if eq. (1)
appears in X.1(a)(1) but is referenced in X.1(b), it will be referenced as eq. (a)(1)(1). If eq. (1) appears in
X.1(a)(1) but is referenced in a different subsection/subarticle/paragraph, it will be referenced as eq. X.1(a)(1)(1).
l
ASME BPVC.X-2021
PART RG
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
ARTICLE RG-1
SCOPE AND JURISDICTION
(10) sets forth requirements to assure that no essential variation in qualified fabrication procedures has
occurred;
(11) establishes rules for acceptance testing, inspection, and reporting;
(12) gives requirements for stamping and marking.
(c) For vessels fabricated in accordance with these
rules, the provisions of Section X shall apply over any
other sections of the Code. When metallic components
are part of fiber‐reinforced plastic vessels, they shall
meet the provisions of Section VIII, Division 1.
(d) The Fabricator shall establish the effective Code
edition, addenda and Code Cases for pressure vessels
and replacement parts in accordance with Mandatory
Appendix 9.
RG-100 SCOPE
(a) Section X establishes the requirements for the fabrication of fiber‐reinforced thermosetting plastic pressure
vessels for general service, sets limitations on the permissible service conditions, and defines the types of vessels to
which these rules are not applicable.
(b) To assure that vessels fabricated according to these
rules will be capable of safely withstanding the operating
conditions specified by the Design Specification, this
Section:
(1) gives minimum requirements for the materials of
fabrication;
(2) specifies test procedures for determining laminate mechanical properties;
(3) Defines three methods of design qualification:
(-a) Class I Design — nondestructive qualification
test
(-b) Class II Design — mandatory design rules and
acceptance testing by nondestructive evaluation (NDE)
methods
(-c) Class III Design — qualification of a vessel
design through the destructive test of a prototype
(4) suggests nonmandatory design procedures for
Class I vessels;
(5) provides mandatory design procedures and
acceptance testing for Class II vessels;
(6) defines the general methods of fabrication which
may be used;
(7) limits the types of end closures, connections, and
attachments which may be employed and the means used
to join them to the vessels;
(8) stipulates the procedures to be used in proving
that prototype vessels will withstand specified operating
and test conditions;
(9) establishes rules under which fabricating procedures used for fabricating Class I and Class III prototype
and production vessels are qualified, and defines what
deviations from such procedures necessitate requalification;
RG-110 APPLICATION LIMITATIONS
RG-111 DESIGN PRESSURE
The internal design pressure of vessels fabricated under
this Section shall be limited as follows:
(a) Class I vessels shall not exceed 150 psi (1 MPa) for
bag‐molded, centrifugally cast, and contact‐molded
vessels; 2,000 psi (14 MPa) for filament‐wound vessels
and 3,000 psi (20 MPa) for filament‐wound vessels
with polar boss openings only.
(b) Class II vessels shall not exceed the limits specified
in RD-1120.
(c) Class III vessels shall not exceed 15,000 psi (103.4
MPa) for filament-wound vessels with polar boss openings
only.
RG-112 DESIGN TEMPERATURE
The design temperature of vessels fabricated under this
Section shall not exceed the lower of (a) or (b).
(a) 250°F (120°C) for Class I and Class II, and 185°F
(85°C) for Class III
(b) 35°F (19°C) below the maximum use temperature
(see RM-121) of the resin, nor be less than −65°F (−54°C)
(see RD-112)
1
ð21Þ
ASME BPVC.X-2021
RG-113 POTABLE WATER — SECTION IV
APPLICATIONS ONLY
RG-121 CLASSES OF VESSELS OUTSIDE THE
JURISDICTION OF THIS SECTION
Vessels fabricated under Section X intended for Section
IV use are limited to applications permitted therein. The
vessels are limited to internal pressure only with a
maximum allowable working pressure of 160 psig
[1.1 MPa (gage)]. The maximum allowable temperature
used shall be 210°F (99°C). The provisions of this paragraph only apply to vessels that are intended for use under
Section IV.
The following classes of fiber‐reinforced plastic pressure vessels are exempted from the Scope of this
Section; however, any pressure vessel within these
classes which meets all applicable requirements of this
Section may be stamped with the Certification Mark
and RP Designator:
(a) pressure containers which are integral parts of
components of rotating or reciprocating mechanical
devices, such as pumps, compressors, turbines, generators, engines, and hydraulic or pneumatic cylinders,
where the primary design considerations and/or stresses
are derived from the functional requirements of the
device;
(b) piping systems whose primary function is the transport of fluids from one location to another within a system
of which it is an integral part;
(c) piping components, such as pipe, flanges, bolting,
gaskets, valves, expansion joints, fittings, and pressure
containing parts of other components, such as strainers,
and devices which serve such purposes as mixing, separating, snubbing, distributing and metering, or controlling
flow, provided that the pressure containing parts of such
components are generally recognized as piping components for accessories;
(d) vessels which have any part of the shell, heads,
nozzles, fittings, or support laminates heated above the
temperature limits of RG-112;
(e) vessels having neither an internal nor an external
operating pressure exceeding 15 psi (100 kPa) with no
limitation on size;
(f) vessels having an inside diameter, or maximum
internal cross‐sectional dimension, not exceeding 6 in.
(152 mm) with no limitation on the length of vessel or
pressure;
(g) pressure vessels for human occupancy.2
RG-114 LETHAL FLUIDS1
Vessels fabricated under this Section shall not be used to
store, handle, transport, or process lethal fluids.
RG-120 JURISDICTION OF SECTION X
The jurisdiction of this Section is intended to include
only the vessel and integral communicating chambers
and to terminate at the points defined in the following
subparagraphs (a) and (b).
(a) Where external piping is connected to the vessel,
the jurisdiction shall terminate at:
(1) the face of the first flange in bolted flange connections;
(2) the first threaded joint in that type of connection;
(3) the first circumferential adhesive‐bonded joint in
that type of connection.
(b) Where lugs, skirts, or other supporting structures
are joined directly to a vessel, the jurisdiction shall terminate at the first joint or connection beyond the vessel, but
shall include the attachment of such supporting structures
to the vessel.
2
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RG-2
ORGANIZATION
(i) Part RS, Marking, Stamping, and Reports, setting
forth marking, stamping, and reporting requirements.
RG-200 ORGANIZATION OF THIS SECTION
ð21Þ
RG-201 PARTS
RG-202 ARTICLES, PARAGRAPHS, AND
SUBPARAGRAPHS
This Section is divided into nine major parts:
(a) Part RG, General Requirements, applying to duties
and responsibilities and methods of fabrication;
(b) Part RM, Material Requirements, setting forth rules
governing materials applicable to all methods of fabrication;
(c) Part RD, Design Requirements, providing design requirements for all methods of fabrication;
(d) Part RF, Fabrication Requirements, giving rules for
permissible methods of fabrication;
(e) Part RQ, Qualification Requirements, used in
carrying out the methods of fabrication;
(f) Part ROP, Overpressure Protection, giving rules for
protection against overpresure;
(g) Part RT, Rules Governing Testing, establishing the
following:
(1) methods for qualifying designs and procedure
specifications, for quality control testing, and for production testing;
(2) methods for determining lamina strength and
elastic properties for design criteria and acceptance
testing of Class II vessels;
(h) Part RI, Inspection Requirements, setting forth
minimum inspection requirements;
(a) The Parts of this Section are divided into Articles.
Each Article is given a number and a title, (e.g., Part RG,
Article RG-3, Responsibilities and Duties).
(b) Articles are divided into paragraphs, which are a
three‐ or occasionally a four‐digit number, the first of
which corresponds to the Article number; thus under
Article RG-3 we find paragraph RG-310, User’s Responsibilities.
(c) Paragraphs are divided into subparagraphs. Major
subdivisions of paragraphs are designated by suffixing to
the above‐mentioned three‐ or four‐digit numbers a
decimal point followed by a digit or digits. Where necessary, divisions of subparagraphs are indicated by letters
and further subdivisions by numbers in parentheses.
(d) Minor subdivisions of paragraphs are indicated by
letters instead of decimals followed by digits.
(e) A reference in one of the paragraphs of this Section
to another such paragraph includes all of the applicable
rules in the referenced paragraph and its subdivisions,
unless otherwise stipulated.
3
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RG-3
RESPONSIBILITIES AND DUTIES
(a) As a part of the Fabricator's responsibility for the
structural integrity of a Class I vessel, and vessel parts
fabricated by others as permitted in (g)(5) and RS-301,
and its capability to contain pressure, the Fabricator or
the design agent responsible to him shall make Design
Calculations of the type suggested in Nonmandatory
Appendix AA. Such Design Calculations shall constitute
only a tentative determination that the design, as
shown on the drawings, complies with the requirements
of this Section for the design conditions set forth in the
Design Specification.
(b) For vessels used for potable water, as described in
RG-113 (Section IV application), the Fabricator’s Design
Report shall indicate suitability for potable water use.
(c) It shall be the Fabricator’s responsibility to prove
that a vessel will safely withstand the service conditions
set forth in the Design Specification. The proof shall
consist of subjecting one or more prototype vessels to
tests, as required by the rules of this Section (see
RT-223), and using the procedures established therein.
A report of such tests, designated as the Qualification
Test Report, shall be prepared and certified by the Fabricator and the Inspector.
Prototype vessels used to qualify a design shall not be
stamped with the Certification Mark.
(d) It shall be the Fabricator’s responsibility to prepare
and qualify a Procedure Specification that shall specify the
materials and the procedure employed to fabricate a
prototype vessel or vessels used to verify the capability
of such vessel or vessels to safely withstand the test and
service conditions set forth in the Design Specification.
The Procedure Specification shall provide, as a
minimum, all the information concerning the fabricating
procedure, recorded on the applicable Form Q-106, Form
Q-107, Form Q-108, or Form Q-115.
(e) It shall be the Fabricator’s responsibility to conduct
Quality Control Tests in accordance with the requirements
of Article RT-3 and to record the results thereof to permit
verification that all other vessels, fabricated in accordance
with the qualified Procedure Specification, comply with
this Section.
(f) It shall be the Fabricator’s responsibility to conduct
Production Tests as stipulated in Article RT-4 and to
record the results to permit verification that such
vessels are in compliance with this Section and are acceptable for marking with the Certification Mark.
RG-300 RESPONSIBILITIES AND DUTIES
The various parties involved in specifying, fabricating,
and inspecting vessels under this Section have definite
responsibilities or duties in meeting Code requirements.
The responsibilities and duties set forth hereinafter relate
only to Code compliance and are not to be construed as
involving contractual relationships or legal liabilities.
RG-310 USER’S RESPONSIBILITIES — DESIGN
SPECIFICATION
The User, or an agent3 acting in his behalf, requiring that
a vessel be designed, fabricated, tested, and certified to be
a vessel complying with this Section, shall provide or cause
to be provided for such a vessel information as to operating conditions, including intended use and material
compatibility with the contents, in such detail as will
provide the basis for design, material selection, fabrication, and inspection in accordance with this Section. This
information shall be designated hereinafter as the Design
Specification.
RG-320 FABRICATOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES
The structural integrity of a vessel or part thereof,
including the capability to contain pressure, and its
compliance with the Design Report (see RG-321), are
the responsibility of the Fabricator. The Fabricator,
completing any vessel to be marked with the Certification
Mark with RP Designator, has the responsibility of
complying with all the requirements of this Section
and, through proper certification, of assuring that any
work done by others also complies with all the requirements of this Section.
When such parts are fabricated by an organization other
than the Fabricator responsible for the completed vessel,
they shall be fabricated by an organization having a valid
Certificate of Authorization from ASME and be reported to
the Fabricator of the completed vessel on Partial Data
Report Form RP-2, which shall be certified by both the
parts fabricator and the Inspector.
RG-321 FABRICATOR’S DESIGN REPORT
RG-321.1 Class I Vessel Designs. Class I vessel designs
shall comply as follows:
4
ASME BPVC.X-2021
the same as the lamina or laminas from which elastic
and strength constants were determined and which
served as a basis for Design Calculations and laminate
analysis. The number of laminas, stacking sequence,
and orientation of each lamina shall be the same as
used on the laminate analysis for design purposes. Determination of laminate stiffness coefficients shall be in
accordance with Article RD-12. The determination of
lamina elastic and strength properties shall be in accordance with Article RT-7. As an alternative, the lamina
elastic properties may be determined in accordance
with Nonmandatory Appendix AK. A report of such
test, designated as the Material Property Test Report,
shall be part of the Fabricator’s Design Report and
shall be made available to the Inspector.
(c) It shall be the Fabricator’s responsibility to prepare
and certify a Procedure Specification that shall specify the
materials and fabrication procedures used to fabricate the
specified vessel. The Procedure Specification shall
provide, as a minimum, all the information required by
Form Q-120, which shall verify that the vessel was fabricated according to that specification.
(d) It shall be the Fabricator’s responsibility to subject
each vessel fabricated under this method to acceptance
testing as specified in Article RT-6. A report of such
test, designated as the Acceptance Test Report, shall be
part of the Fabricator’s Design Report and shall be
made available to the Inspector.
(e) It shall be the Fabricator’s responsibility to prepare
and certify a Fabricator’s Design Report consisting of the
following documents:
(1) the Design Specification setting forth the design
conditions;
(2) the Design Drawings including Procedure Specification number;
(3) the Design Calculations;
(4) the material manufacturer’s specification sheets
for all materials used in lamina testing and laminate fabrication;
(5) a properly certified Form RP-4 for vessel parts
fabricated by other Fabricators;
(6) the Procedure Specification to which the vessel
was fabricated;
(7) the Acceptance Test results including the
acoustic emission report, to be designated as the Acceptance Test Report;
(8) the documentation of the elastic and strength
properties of the lamina(s) as specified and determined
in Article RT-7 or Nonmandatory Appendix AK, as applicable, to be designated as the Material Property Test
Report.
The preceding eight documents shall constitute the
Fabricator’s Design Report. It shall be certified by the
Fabricator. It shall be kept on file at the Fabricator’s
place of business or at a safe depository acceptable to
the User and shall be made available to the Inspector
(g) It shall be the responsibility of the Fabricator to
prepare a Fabricator’s Design Report consisting of the
following documents:
(1) the Design Specification setting forth the service
conditions;
(2) the Design Drawings;
(3) the tentative Design Calculations;
(4) the material manufacturer’s specification sheets
for resin, fiber reinforcement, promoters, catalyst, and
other components used in laminate construction;
(5) a properly certified Form RP-2 for parts of the
vessel fabricated by other Fabricators;
(6) the Procedure Specification, providing the fabrication procedures used to fabricate both the prototype
vessel(s) and all production vessels to be certified as
complying with this Section;
(7) the Qualification Test Report, which provides
data that the prototype vessel(s) conforming to the
Design Drawings will safely withstand the specified
test conditions;
(8) the records of the Quality Control Tests Report,
providing the results of the in‐process tests used to assure
that no essential variations from the requirements of the
Procedure Specification occurred;
(9) the Production Test Report of inspections, examinations, and tests performed on each vessel to be marked
with the Certification Mark.
The preceding nine documents shall constitute the
Fabricator’s Design Report. It shall be certified by the
Fabricator. It shall be kept on file at the Fabricator’s
place of business or at a safe depository acceptable to
the User and shall be made available to the Inspector
for at least 5 yr. When fabrication of specific mass‐
produced vessels occurs over an indefinite period of
time, the Fabricator’s Design Report on each specific
design shall be kept on file for at least 5 yr after production
of such vessels has ceased. Copies of the Design Drawings
and Design Calculations shall be furnished to the User or
his agent and, when requested, a copy of the Test Report
shall also be furnished.
RG-321.2 Class II Vessel Designs. Class II vessel
designs shall comply as follows:
(a) As part of the Fabricator's responsibility for the
structural integrity of the vessel, and vessel parts fabricated by others as permitted in (e)(5) and RS-301, and its
ability to contain pressure, the Fabricator of the vessel
shall be responsible for Design Calculations as specified
in Article RD-11. Such calculations shall constitute the
basis for thickness of parts subject to pressure,
number of plies, ply orientation, and other fabrication
details specified on drawings and other fabrication documents. Such calculations shall be part of the Design Report.
(b) It shall be the Fabricator’s responsibility to document the elastic and strength constants of the laminate or
laminates used for Design Calculations. The lamina or
laminas used for vessel laminate construction shall be
5
ASME BPVC.X-2021
for at least 10 yr. A copy of the Design Report shall be
furnished to the User or his agent.
tion contract or agreement is a written agreement
between the Fabricator and the inspection agency in
which the terms and conditions of furnishing the inspection service are specified and in which the mutual duties of
the Fabricator and the Inspector are stated.
For those areas where there is no jurisdiction or where a
jurisdiction does not choose to select an ASME designee to
review a vessel or vessel parts Manufacturer’s facility, that
function shall be performed by an ASME designee selected
by ASME.
Where the jurisdiction is the Fabricator’s inspection
agency, the joint review and joint report shall be made
by the jurisdiction and another representative designated
by an ASME designee.
RG-322 CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE
It is the responsibility of the Fabricator to certify
compliance with the rules of this Section by execution
of the appropriate Fabricator’s Data Report (see
Forms RP-1, RP-2, RP-3, and RP-4). (The vessel may be
registered and the Data Report filed with the National
Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors, 1055
Crupper Avenue, Columbus, Ohio 43229.) See Article RS-3.
RG-323 REQUIREMENTS FOR QUALITY CONTROL
Any Fabricator applying for an official Certification
Mark with RP Designator of The American Society of
Mechanical Engineers and the Certificate of Authorization
shall have, and demonstrate, a Quality Control System
which assures that all Code requirements, including material, design, fabrication, examination by the Fabricator,
and inspection by the Inspector, will be met. The
Quality Control System shall be in accordance with the
requirements of Mandatory Appendix 1.
Before issuance or renewal of a Certificate of Authorization for use of the Certification Mark with RP Designator,
the Fabricator’s facilities and organization are subject to a
joint review by a representative of his inspection agency
and an individual certified as an ASME designee who is
selected by the concerned legal jurisdiction. A written
description or checklist of the Quality Control System
which explains what documents and what procedures
the Fabricator will use to fabricate a Code item shall
be available for review. A written report to the Society
shall be made jointly by the ASME designee and the inspection agency under contract to the Fabricator to provide
inspection services provided by this Section.
The Fabricator may at any time make changes to the
Quality Control System concerning the methods of
achieving results, subject to acceptance by the Inspector.
The Fabricator shall have in force at all times a valid
inspection contract or agreement with an agency
employing Inspectors as defined in RI-110. A valid inspec-
RG-330 INSPECTOR’S DUTIES
(a) It is the duty of the Inspector to make the inspections required by the rules of this Section and, in addition,
such other inspections and investigations as are necessary
in his judgment to verify that:
(1) the User’s Design Specification is available;
(2) the Fabricator’s Design Report is on file and has
been properly executed;
(3) the fabrication conforms to the Design Drawings;
(4) the material and fabrication procedures being
used comply with the requirements of the specified Procedure Specification;
(5) the tests stipulated in Part RT substantiate that
the Procedure Specification(s) was followed.
(b) It is not the duty of the Inspector to verify the accuracy or completeness of the Design Calculations, but he
shall verify that the completed Design Report is on file.
He shall certify compliance with the Procedure Specification used for qualifying the design and fabrication of the
vessel.
(c) The Inspector shall certify on the Fabricator’s Data
Report that the requirements of this Section have been
met.
6
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RG-4
FABRICATION METHODS
RG-400 FABRICATION METHODS4
either at room temperature or elevated temperature
using a catalyst–promoter system.
For purposes of this Section, fiber‐reinforced plastic
pressure vessels are divided into four methods of fabrication. Class I vessels may be fabricated by any combination
of these methods. Class II vessels are restricted to the
contact‐molding and filament‐wound methods of fabrication or a combination of the two.
RG-404 FILAMENT WINDING
RG-404.1 General. In this method, continuous filaments of fiber with the specified resin applied are
wound in a systematic manner under controlled
tension and cured on a mandrel or other supporting structure. Heads and fittings fabricated by contact-molding
methods may be attached with suitable adhesive resins
and secondary reinforcement with cutting of filaments
as required. Opening(s) may be integral wound or with
cutting of filaments as required and need not be centered
on the axis of rotation.
RG-401 BAG MOLDING55
In this method a pressurized bag is used to compress
pre‐rolled fiber cylinders and head preforms, which are
impregnated with the specified resin system, against an
outer heated mold.
RG-404.2 Polar Boss Openings Only. In this special
case which qualifies for reduced cycle and burst test requirements per RT-223.5, heads shall be integrally wound
and satisfy the following criteria:
(a) opening(s) shall be centered on the axis of rotation:
(b) opening(s) shall be a polar boss type, wound in
place at the center of revolution;
(c) boss diameter shall not exceed one‐half vessel I.D.;
(d) no cutting of filaments is permitted to form the
polar boss opening.
RG-402 CENTRIFUGAL CASTING
In this method the sections of the vessel are formed
from chopped fiber strands and a resin system in a
mandrel, which is spun to produce a laminate, and
heated to effect a cure of the resin system.
RG-403 CONTACT MOLDING
In this method cylindrical sections, heads, and/or
attachments are fabricated by applying reinforcement
fiber and resin to a mandrel or mold. System cure is
7
ASME BPVC.X-2021
PART RM
MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
ARTICLE RM-1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
modulus, measured in accordance with ASTM D2343, are
not less than 90% of the manufacturer’s published
minimum values for resin‐impregnated strands.
RM-100 LAMINATE MATERIALS
Fiber‐reinforced plastic materials shall hereinafter be
designated as laminates.
(a) Laminates, as herein considered, are composite
structures consisting of one or more of the following reinforcements embedded in a resin matrix:
(1) glass
(2) carbon or graphite
(3) aramid
(b) The Fabricator shall keep on file the published
specifications for all laminate materials used in each
vessel fabrication, the material manufacturer’s recommendations for storage conditions and shelf life for all
laminate materials, and the material manufacturer’s certification that each shipment conforms to said specification
requirements. This certification shall be part of the Procedure Specification.
RM-113 ARAMID FIBERS
The fiber manufacturer shall certify that the aramid
fibers conform to the manufacturer’s specifications for
the product and that the minimum strength and
modulus, measured in accordance with ASTM D2343,
are not less than 90% of the manufacturer’s published
minimum values for resin‐impregnated strands.
RM-114 FIBER SURFACE TREATMENT
The surface of glass, carbon, and graphite fiber shall be
treated to provide a bond between the fiber and resin
matrix. Aramid fibers do not normally require surface
treatment.
RM-110 FIBER SYSTEM
RM-120 RESIN SYSTEM
RM-111 GLASS FIBERS
The resin system shall consist of an epoxy or polyester/
vinyl ester, phenolic, or furan resin plus the resin manufacturer’s recommended promoters and curing agents. No
filler, pigment, thixotrope, or dye which will interfere with
the natural color of the resin shall be used except as
permitted by the Procedure Specification. If required
by the User, the vessel may be painted following all
required inspections and certifications by the Inspector.
The glass fibers used in any of the fabrication processes
permitted by this Section shall be one or more of the
following glass compositions:
(a) Type A
(b) Type E
(c) Type S
(d) Type E‐CR
(e) Type C
The glass manufacturer shall certify that the fibers
conform to the manufacturer’s specifications for the
product and that the minimum strength and modulus,
measured in accordance with ASTM D2343, are not
less than 90% of the manufacturer’s published
minimum values for resin‐impregnated strands.
RM-121 RESIN SPECIFICATION
The resin materials used in the fabrication of vessels
shall be the same as those specified in the Procedure Specification. Each resin shall be traceable by the name of its
manufacturer and the trade name or number of that manufacturer.
The resin manufacturer shall supply to the Fabricator a
Certificate of Analysis for each resin used. It shall include
the following information:
(a) resin identification
(b) batch number(s)
RM-112 CARBON OR GRAPHITE FIBERS
The fiber manufacturer shall certify that the carbon or
graphite fibers conform to the manufacturer’s specifications for the product and that the minimum strength and
8
ð21Þ
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Procedure Specification. The resin testing shall be done
at first usage.
The values obtained for gel‐time and peak‐exotherm
temperature shall be for a particular resin/curing
system test formulation and temperature, and shall be
within the limits listed in the Procedure Specification.
The test formulation and temperature shall be representative of the formulations used during vessel fabrication.
The tolerance limits for the test formulation (as listed in
the Procedure Specification) may be established by either
the resin manufacturer or the Fabricator. The tolerance
limits shall be established using formulation components
having manufacturer‐specified material characteristics.
The tolerance limits established shall be within a sufficiently narrow range such that test results outside this
range would reflect deviations in component material
characteristics and alert the Fabricator of possible material irregularities. Material tested and found to be inside
the established tolerance limit range shall be deemed fit
for use.
In addition, the Fabricator shall establish and document
a maximum use temperature for the resin/cure system
used. This may be in conjunction with the resin manufacturer or independent laboratory, and may be based on
heat distortion temperature or glass transition temperature. The Fabricator shall redocument the maximum use
temperature at least every twelve months using current
batches of resin and curing agent.
A record of these determinations shall become part of
the Fabricator’s Quality Control Tests Report and shall be
made available to the Inspector.
The data for each batch of resin which is used to fabricate a Class II vessel shall be recorded on the Procedure
Specification (Form Q-120) and become part of the Fabricator’s Design Report for that vessel.
Table RM-120.1
Resin Systems Required Certification
by Resin Manufacturer
ð21Þ
Resin System
Required Certification [Note (1)]
Polyester/Vinyl Ester
1. Viscosity
ASTM D445 or D2393
2. Specific gravity
Wt. per gallon cup or ASTM D4052
Epoxy
1. Viscosity
ASTM D445 or D2393
2. Epoxide equivalent
ASTM D1652
3. Specific gravity
Wt. per gallon cup or ASTM D4052
Furan/Phenolic
1. Viscosity
ASTM D445 or D2393
2. pH
Glass electrode method
3. Total volatiles
Similar to ASTM D3030
4. Specific gravity
Wt. per gallon cup or ASTM D4052
NOTE: (1) Alternate documented method may be used.
ð21Þ
Table RM-120.2
Resin Systems Required Test by Vessel Fabricator
Resin System
Required Test [Note (1)]
Polyester/Vinyl Ester
1. Viscosity
ASTM D445 or D2393
2. Gel time and peak
exotherm
temperature
ASTM D2471
3. Specific gravity
Mandatory Appendix 5 or ASTM D4052
Epoxy
1. Viscosity
ASTM D445 or D2393
2. Gel time
ASTM D2471
3. Specific gravity
Mandatory Appendix 5 or ASTM D4052
RM-122 CURING AGENTS
Furan/Phenolic
1. Viscosity
ASTM D445 or D2393
2. Gel time
Not Applicable
3. Specific gravity
Mandatory Appendix 5 or ASTM D4052
The curing agents used, and curing procedure followed,
in the vessel fabrication shall be as specified in the Procedure Specification. Each such curing agent shall be traceable by the manufacturer’s name, the manufacturer’s
designation, and the generic name.
The curing agent and the resin‐to‐curing‐agent ratio
used to fabricate vessels shall be recorded and become
part of the Quality Control Tests Report specification.
NOTE: (1) Alternate documented method may be used.
(c) date of manufacture
In addition, the resin manufacturer shall certify for each
batch shipped, the value (and the limits stipulated in his
specification) of the properties identified in Table
RM-120.1.
The Fabricator shall test each batch of resin in accordance with Table RM-120.2 for the appropriate resin to
assure that the material characteristics of the resin have
not changed from specified values listed in the Procedure
Specification.
The values obtained for viscosity and specific gravity for
the resin alone shall be within the limits of the manufacturer’s specification for that resin and as listed in the
RM-123 LAMINATE CURE
The Fabricator shall determine and document as part of
the Procedure Specification and the Quality Control Tests
Report that the laminate of each vessel and vessel part is
properly cured.
This shall normally be done using the Barcol Test in
accordance with ASTM D2583 (see RQ-141 and
RT-221). Barcol readings shall be within the tolerance
specified by the resin manufacturer as listed in the Procedure Specification. If the resin manufacturer does not
9
ASME BPVC.X-2021
provide Barcol specifications (for the resin/curing system
used), the Fabricator shall establish Barcol specifications
(for the resin/curing system used) that have been documented by independent third party testing that such
Barcol readings are indicative of complete resin cure.
These shall become part of the Procedure Specification.
If the Fabricator elects not to use the Barcol Test as a
measure of proper laminate cure, he shall define and document the method used to assure that proper laminate cure
is attained. Such method(s) shall be acceptable to the
Inspector. The results thereof shall be part of the Procedure Specification and Quality Control Tests Report
recorded in lieu of Barcol Test results on the various
forms.
RM-150 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF
LAMINA FOR CLASS II VESSELS
RM-151 EXAMPLES OF LAMINA
For the purposes of this Section, a lamina is defined as a
layer or multiple layers of the same material and same
orientation. An example of a lamina is a layer of thermoset
resin reinforced with chopped strand mat, unidirectional
reinforcement, or woven roving.
As a single exception and in the absence of thermal
stress, due to existing fabrication methods, alternate
layers of chopped strand mat and woven roving may
be considered as a lamina.
RM-152 LAMINA SPECIFICATION
RM-140 USE OF TWO OR MORE MATERIALS
SPECIFICATIONS OR PROCESSES IN
FABRICATING A CLASS I VESSEL
The lamina, lamina stacking sequence, and orientation
shall be specified in the Procedure Specification.
RM-153 LAMINA PROPERTIES
Two or more Procedure Specifications may be used in
fabricating a pressure vessel, provided each Procedure
Specification is used in its entirety for the part of the
vessel fabricated with that procedure.
The lamina strength properties shall be determined in
accordance with Article RT-7. The lamina elastic properties shall be determined in accordance with either Article
RT-7 or Nonmandatory Appendix AK.
RM-154 LAMINATE ANALYSIS
The lamina properties shall be used to analyze the laminate and determine effective laminate elastic constants in
accordance with Article RD-12.
10
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RM-2
MISCELLANEOUS PRESSURE PARTS
RM-200 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
RM-210 MISCELLANEOUS METALLIC PARTS
All portions of the vessel which are under the jurisdiction of this Section and which are fabricated of laminate
materials by the Fabricator responsible for the completed
vessel, or by other parties, shall conform to all applicable
requirements of this Section, including inspection in the
shop of the Fabricator. In addition, parts fabricated by
parties other than the Fabricator responsible for the
completed vessel shall require inspection in the shop
of the part fabricator and preparation of a Partial Data
Report, Forms RP-2 and RP-4, as applicable.
RM-211 FOR CLASS I VESSELS
Metallic parts for Class I vessels shall comply with the
design, fabrication, quality control, and inspection requirements of Section VIII, Division 1. For hydrostatic
leakage testing, metallic parts shall comply with the requirements of RT-450.
RM-212 FOR CLASS II VESSELS
The only metallic parts permitted for Class II vessels
shall be removable parts such as multibolted flat
flange covers and fasteners. Such parts shall comply
with all requirements of Section VIII, Division 1.
11
ASME BPVC.X-2021
PART RD
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
ARTICLE RD-1
GENERAL
for the pressure setting of the pressure relief devices
protecting the vessel.
(b) The design shall take into account the maximum
difference in fluid pressure which can occur under the
conditions of operation specified in the Design Specification (which may include pressure due to static head)
between the inside and outside of the vessel at any
point or between two chambers of a combination unit.
(c) The design shall take into account all combinations
of loadings other than pressure (see RD-120) which may
occur, coincident with the specified operating pressure
and temperature. For Class I vessels, any additional thickness required to withstand such supplementary loadings
shall be added to that required to withstand pressure
loading as determined by the requirements of Article
RT-2. For Class II vessels, such supplementary loadings
shall be included in the Design Calculations.
(d) When liners, whether metallic or nonmetallic, are
installed in vessels covered by this Section, no credit shall
be given to the strength of the liner in establishing the
design pressure. However, the weight of the liner shall
be taken into account when determining loadings
other than pressure.
Applications that require a liner for corrosion resistance purposes shall be so identified in the Design Specification. Any part of the laminate, such as an inner surface
and interior layer composition as described in ASTM
D4097, that is intended for corrosion resistance shall
be so designated in the Procedure Specification. The thickness of this part of the laminate shall be in addition to that
required for pressure and other loading considerations.
RD-100 SCOPE
Section X provides two methods by which the thickness
of vessel parts subject to internal or external pressure may
be determined:
(a) Class I Design — qualification and testing of a prototype vessel;
(b) Class II Design — mandatory design rules and
acceptance testing.
For Class I vessels, tentative thickness of vessel parts
may be determined by the suggested design procedures
given in Nonmandatory Appendix AA or by other procedures at the Fabricator’s option. Regardless of how the
thicknesses of vessel parts are determined, the adequacy
of the design of a vessel or vessels to be certified for specified service conditions shall be determined by testing one
or more prototype vessels in accordance with the requirements of Article RT-2; all vessels to be so certified shall be
constructed in strict accordance with the Procedure Specification utilized in fabricating the prototype vessel or
vessels (see Article RQ-1).
For Class II vessels, thickness of vessel parts and other
fabrication details shall be determined by procedures
specified in Article RD-11. The number of plies and ply
orientation shall be as specified in the Procedure Specification, Form Q-120.
RD-101 DESIGN BASIS
(a) The pressure of the fluid at the top of the vessel in its
normal operating position, with the laminate temperature
for Class I vessels taken at 150°F (65°C) for design
temperatures less than or equal to 150°F (65°C) or at
the specified design temperature when the design
temperature exceeds 150°F (65°C), shall be that on
which the design is based. The pressure of the fluid at
the top of the vessel in its normal operating position
with the laminate temperature as specified in the
Design Specification for Class II vessels, shall be that
on which the design is based. When applicable, static
head shall be included in establishing the design basis.
The pressure at the top of the vessel is also the basis
RD-110 DEFINITIONS
The terms relating to design used throughout this
Section, together with limiting values, are defined in
RD-111 through RD-116.
12
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ð21Þ
ture. The MAWP for a vessel part is the maximum internal
or external pressure including static head thereon.
RD-111 DESIGN PRESSURE
The design pressure is the pressure used in the design of
the vessel for the purposes of establishing minimum thickness or minimum laminate requirements of the different
zones of the vessel. Static head shall be included in the
design pressure to determine the minimum thickness
or minimum laminate requirements of any specific
zone of the vessel.
For Class I vessels, the design pressure at any point
under consideration shall not exceed the lower of 150
psi (1 MPa) for bag‐molded, centrifugally cast, and
contact‐molded vessels, and 2,000 psi (14 MPa) for filament‐wound vessels, or one‐sixth of the bursting pressure
determined in accordance with the rules of Article RT-2.
The same design pressure at any point under consideration shall not exceed the lower of 3,000 psi (20 MPa) for
filament‐wound vessels with polar boss openings only or
one‐fifth of the bursting pressure determined in accordance with the rules of Article RT-2.
For Class II vessels, the design pressure shall not exceed
the limits specified in RD-1120.
RD-114 QUALIFICATION PRESSURE
The qualification pressure of a Class I vessel is the
maximum hydrostatic pressure that has been attained
by a prototype vessel and an optional internal bladder
(see Mandatory Appendix 4). This pressure serves as
proof of the adequacy of the vessel’s design and fabrication
for the specified service conditions (see RT-223).
RD-115 TEST PRESSURE
The test pressure is that pressure applied at the top of
the vessel. For Class I vessels see Article RT-4. For Class II
vessels see Article RT-6 on acceptance testing.
RD-116 PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICE SETTINGS
The pressure for which pressure relief devices shall be
set to open is established in ROP-160.
RD-120 LOADINGS
RD-112 DESIGN TEMPERATURE6
The loadings to be included in designing a vessel shall
include any expected combination of loads listed below
and stipulated in the Design Specification:
(a) internal and/or external design pressure as defined
in RD-111;
(b) impact loads;
(c) weight of the vessel and normal contents under
operating and test conditions (this includes additional
pressure due to static head of liquids);
(d) superimposed loads, such as other vessels, operating equipment, insulation, corrosion‐resistant or
erosion‐resistant linings, and piping;
(e) live loads due to personnel, which shall be a
minimum of 250 lb (1 100 N) in a 4 in. (100 mm)
circle on the top of the vessel;
(f) snow and ice loads;
(g) wind loads, and earthquake loads where required;
(h) reactions of supporting lugs, rings, saddles, and
other types of supports;
(i) loads due to thermal expansion and thermal gradients.
RD-112.1 Maximum Design Temperature. For Class I
vessels, the maximum design temperature, even though a
lower operating temperature is specified in the Design
Specification, shall be taken as 150°F (65°C) for design
temperatures less than or equal to 150°F (65°C), or at
the specified design temperature when the design
temperature exceeds 150°F (65°C). When the design
temperature exceeds 150°F (65°C) on Class I vessels,
the specified design temperature shall not exceed
250°F or 35°F (120°C or 19°C) below the maximum
use temperature (see RM-121) of the resin, whichever
is lower. The hydrostatic qualification pressure tests
used to establish the permissible design pressure shall
be conducted at that temperature (see Article RT-2).
For Class II vessels, the design temperature shall not
be less than the interior laminate wall temperature
expected under operating conditions for the part considered and shall not exceed, 250°F or 35°F (120°C or 19°C)
below the maximum use temperature (see RM-121) of the
resin, whichever is lower.
RD-112.2 Minimum Design Temperature. The
minimum permissible temperature to which a vessel
constructed under this Section may be subjected is
−65°F (−54°C) (see RG-112).
RD-121 STRESS DUE TO COMBINED LOADINGS
The geometry and wall thickness of a vessel designed
under this Section shall be such that:
(a) for Class I vessels, the maximum direct (membrane)
stress due to all combinations of loadings listed in RD-120
that are expected to occur simultaneously during normal
operation of the vessel shall not exceed one‐sixth7 of the
maximum membrane stress value, as determined from the
qualification pressure test, and considering any additional
membrane stresses caused by other test loadings in addition to the pressure loading (see RD-130 and RQ-132);
RD-113 MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE WORKING
PRESSURE
The Maximum Allowable Working Pressure (MAWP) is
the maximum pressure at the top of the vessel in its normal
operating position at the coincident laminate tempera-
13
ð21Þ
ASME BPVC.X-2021
(b) for Class II vessels, the stress or strain distributions
shall be computed for all combinations of loadings listed in
RD-120 and in the Design Specification (RG-310) which
are expected to occur simultaneously during normal
operation, and for other combinations of loads which
could occur during operation or testing of the vessel.
provided the applicable rules and restrictions for each
material and joining are followed (see RM-140,
RM-210, and Article RF-7).
NOTE: Because of different moduli of elasticity and thermal coefficients of expansion of plastic and metallic materials, caution
shall be exercised in design and fabrication under the provisions
of this paragraph in order to avoid difficulties in service under
extreme temperature conditions or with unusual restraint of
parts such as may occur at points of stress concentration.
RD-130 DESIGN RESTRICTIONS
Insofar as is reasonably attainable, pressure vessels
constructed under the rules of this Section shall be
designed to be free of bending and shearing stresses, especially if the vessel is to be subjected to cyclic conditions of
loading. Particular care shall be used in selecting the kind
of end closure, whether formed head or flat head type, and
of nozzle connections for attachment of piping, etc., to
avoid or minimize bending and shearing stresses likely
to be imposed on the structure by such design details.
Class I and Class II methods of design shall not be intermixed.
RD-152 COMBINATION UNITS
When a vessel unit consists of more than one independent pressure chamber, operating at the same or different
pressures or temperatures, each such pressure chamber
(vessel) shall be designed and fabricated to withstand the
most severe conditions of pressure expected in normal
service and as specified in the Design Specification.
Only the parts of the chambers which come within the
scope of this Section (see RG-100) shall be fabricated
in compliance with this Section.
RD-140 DESIGN ALLOWANCES FOR
DEGRADATION
RD-160 PROOF OF DESIGN ADEQUACY
For Class I vessels, a design shall be considered
adequate for the specified service conditions when one
or more full‐scale prototype vessels (see RG-321.1),
after having been subjected to 100,000 cycles of pressure
ranging from atmospheric to the design pressure (see
RD-111 and Article RT-2), shall withstand a pressure
not less than six times the specified maximum design pressure. The test fluid shall have a temperature as specified in
RT-223.
A lesser number of cycles at a higher pressure is allowable for vessels fabricated per RG-404.2 (Filament
Winding — Polar Boss Openings Only). See RT-223.5.
For Class II vessels, a design shall be considered
adequate for the specified service when the design provisions of Article RD-11 and the Acceptance Test provisions
of Article RT-6 have been met.
When specified in the Design Specification, the design
shall make provision for, but not be limited to, the
following:
(a) selection of resin, fiber, fiber surface treatment, and
liner materials that are chemically resistant to the specified vessel contents;
(b) fire protection, fire proofing, or fire retardancy;
(c) degradation from ultraviolet exposure;
(d) abrasive conditions.
RD-150 METHODS OF FABRICATION IN
COMBINATION
A vessel may be fabricated by a combination of the applicable methods covered by this Section (see RG-400).
RD-151 MATERIALS IN COMBINATION
A vessel may be designed and fabricated of any combination of materials permitted by this Section, including
metallic materials covered in Section VIII, Division 1,
14
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RD-2
SHELLS OF REVOLUTION UNDER INTERNAL PRESSURE
Design qualification of shells of revolution of Class II
vessels shall be in accordance with the design criteria
of Article RD-11 and the Acceptance Test criteria of
Article RT-6. Materials and laminate construction used
in vessel fabrication shall be in accordance with the Procedure Specification (Form Q-120) for the specified vessel
and fabrication procedure(s) that meet the requirements
of Mandatory Appendix 1 which have been properly qualified by the Fabricator.
RD-200 GENERAL
As indicated in RD-100, there are two methods
permitted in this Section for the design of shells of revolution under internal pressure. In Nonmandatory Appendix
AA suggested procedures are given by which tentative
thicknesses of Class I vessel parts may be determined
for use in fabricating prototype vessels for qualification
of the design. The designer is free to use other equations to
arrive at such tentative thicknesses.
15
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RD-3
SHELLS OF REVOLUTION UNDER EXTERNAL PRESSURE
(a) Prototype vessels shall be subjected to 100,000
cycles of pressure ranging from the maximum external
design pressure, psi (kPa), to the maximum internal
design pressure, psi (kPa), without failure. These external
and internal pressure tests may be carried out in two steps
(see RT-223).
(b) Prototype vessels shall then withstand an external
pressure, psi (kPa), of twice the maximum external design
pressure, or 29 in. of mercury (98.2 kPa), whichever is
larger, without buckling.
(c) Prototype vessels shall then withstand a hydrostatic qualification pressure of at least six times the
maximum internal design pressure.
RD-300 GENERAL
(a) As indicated in RD-100, this Section addresses two
methods by which shells of revolution under external
pressure may be designed.
(b) Vessels with heat transfer jackets are outside the
scope of this Section.
(c) Regardless of the design method used, the following
factors shall be included in establishing the design:
(1) the low modulus of elasticity of the material;
(2) the anisotropic character of the material;
(3) the lack of uniformity in centrifugal castings;
(4) the orientation of filaments in filament‐wound
vessels.
(d) While there are no mandatory equations for design
of Class I vessels, there are mandatory rules for testing the
prototype vessel thus constructed, as set forth in RD-311
or RD-312.
(e) Class II vessels shall comply with Articles RD-11,
RD-12, and RT-6 and the requirements set forth in
RD-313 and RD-314.
RD-312 CLASS I VESSELS FOR EXTERNAL
PRESSURE SERVICE ONLY
Class I vessels designed for external pressure only shall
be designed for a minimum of 15 psi (100 kPa) internal
pressure in addition to the design requirement for
external pressure. The design shall be qualified by:
(a) subjecting a prototype vessel to an external pressure of twice the maximum external design pressure, or 29
in. of mercury (98.2 kPa), whichever is larger, without
buckling; and
(b) cyclic pressure and hydrostatic qualification pressure tests in accordance with RD-160 based on 15 psi (100
kPa) internal design pressure.
RD-310 QUALIFICATION OF VESSELS FOR
EXTERNAL PRESSURE SERVICE
(a) Class I vessels may be designed for either:
(1) external pressure only; or
(2) a combination of both internal and external pressure service.
(b) Class II vessels may only be designed for external
pressure when the Design Specification includes both
internal and external pressure design conditions. Class
II vessels designed for external pressure only are not
permitted.
Vessels for external pressure service shall be qualified
as required by RD-311, RD-312, or RD-313.
RD-313 CLASS II VESSELS FOR BOTH EXTERNAL
AND INTERNAL PRESSURE SERVICE
Class II vessels designed for both external and internal
pressure shall have Design Calculations made for both
conditions in accordance with Articles RD-11 and
RD-12. The most severe condition shall govern and be
the basis for design. The vessel shall then be acceptance
tested for both internal and external pressure in accordance with Article RT-6 for both design conditions.
RD-311 CLASS I VESSELS FOR BOTH EXTERNAL
AND INTERNAL PRESSURE SERVICE
RD-314 CLASS II VESSELS FOR EXTERNAL
PRESSURE ONLY
Class I vessels designed for both external and internal
pressure shall have their designs qualified as required
below.
Class II vessels designed for external pressure only are
not permitted.
16
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RD-4
SECONDARY BONDING
bonded joints shall be determined in accordance with the
requirements of RD-160.
(c) Secondary bonded joints of Class II vessels shall
employ laminate overlays that are calculated in accordance with Articles RD-11 and RD-12 and pass the Acceptance Test criteria of Article RT-6.
(d) Parts to be joined by secondary bonding shall be
surface prepared as specified in the Procedure Specification to enhance bond strength and reduce stress intensifications caused by structural discontinuities.
RD-400 DESIGN OF SECONDARY BONDED
JOINTS
(a) Secondary bonded joints for Class I vessels may be
made by adhesive bonding or laminate overlay. Secondary
bonded joints for Class II vessels shall be made by laminate
overlay only.
(b) Secondary bonded joints of Class I vessels shall be
designed to withstand a minimum of six times the design
pressure of the vessel without leakage. The adequacy of
17
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RD-5
OPENINGS AND THEIR REINFORCEMENT
(b) Changes outside the scope of the Design Report in
the design of openings and their reinforcement shall be
considered as changes in the vessel design, and the vessel
shall be requalified, if required, as specified in RT-201 and
RT-202.
RD-500 GENERAL
As indicated in RD-100, there are two methods in this
Section for determining the design adequacy of openings
and their reinforcement.
Suggested procedures are given in Article AA-4 for
determining how to reinforce openings in Class I
vessels. The designer is free to use other procedures.
Reinforcement of openings in Class II vessels shall
comply with the procedures of Articles RD-11 and RD-12.
RD-512 QUALIFICATION OF CLASS II VESSELS
(a) Vessels built in accordance with Design Calculations as set forth in Articles RD-11 and RD-12 and as specified in the Design Drawing and the Procedure
Specification, shall be pressure tested and nondestructively monitored as specified in Article RT-6.
(b) Repairs and modifications to the vessel shall
require it to be retested per Article RT-6.
RD-510 QUALIFICATION
RD-511 QUALIFICATION OF CLASS I VESSELS
(a) The prototype vessel, complete with all openings
and their reinforcement as specified in the Design
Drawing, shall be qualified by cyclic pressure and hydrostatic qualification pressure tests at the design temperature and pressure in accordance with RT-223.
RD-520 RESTRICTIONS FOR CLASS II VESSELS
(a) Openings in Class II vessels shall be flanged nozzles
having a minimum diameter of 2 in. (50 mm).
(b) Screwed connections, or metal insert threaded
connections, in the vessel shell or head are not allowed.
18
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RD-6
NOZZLES AND OTHER CONNECTIONS
tion. For pressures greater than 150 psi (1 MPa) and/
or nozzles greater than 12 in. (DN 300), see RD-1176
for nozzle design. The flange physical dimensions
(except thickness) shall be in accordance with ASME
B16.5 (Class 150 flanges) for NPS8 2 to NPS 24 (DN 50
to DN 600) and in accordance with ASME B16.1 (Class
125) for NPS over 24 (DN 600) unless otherwise noted
and specified in the Design Report. The nozzle shall
extend at least 6 in. (150 mm) from the shell outer
surface to the nozzle flange face unless otherwise
permitted in the Procedure Specification and specified
in the Design Report.
RD-600 GENERAL
As indicated in RD-100, there are two methods in this
Section for determining the design adequacy of nozzles
and other openings. The designer is referred to the
Articles AA-2 and AA-4 for general guidance for Class I
vessels. For Class II vessels the designer shall comply
with Articles RD-11 and RD-12.
RD-610 QUALIFICATIONS
RD-611 QUALIFICATION OF CLASS I VESSELS
(a) The prototype vessel shall be qualified by cyclic
pressure and hydrostatic qualification pressure tests at
the design temperature and pressure in accordance
with RT-223, with nozzles and other connections as specified on the Design Drawings.
(b) Any change in the design of nozzles or other connections shall be considered a change in the vessel design, and
the combinations shall be requalified, if required, as specified in RT-201 and RT-202.
RD-620.2 Flange Bolt Holes. All bolt holes shall be
spot faced for ASME B18.22.1, Type A washers as
shown in Table RD-620.1, unless another size is permitted
in the Procedure Specification and specified in the Design
Report. Overall machine facing of the back of flanges is not
permitted.
RD-620.3 Flange Faces. Flange face drawback and
waviness shall not exceed 1∕32 in. (0.8 mm) as measured
at or inside the bolt circle. No reverse drawback is
permitted. See Figure RD-620.3 sketches (a), (b), and (c).
RD-612 QUALIFICATION OF CLASS II VESSELS
RD-620.4 Gussets. All nozzles of 6 in. nominal
diameter (DN 150) and smaller shall be provided with
gussets. Gussets shall be plate type [see Figure
RD-620.4(a)] or conical [see Figure RD-620.4(b)]. Plate
gussets, if used, shall be evenly spaced around the
nozzle. Gussets shall be added after complete assembly
of the nozzle on the shell and shall not interfere with
bolting or seating of the washer into the spot face.
(a) Each specified vessel, including nozzles and other
connections, shall be pressure tested and nondestructively monitored as specified in Article RT-6.
(b) Repairs and modifications will require that the
complete vessel be retested per Article RT-6.
RD-613 RESTRICTIONS FOR CLASS II VESSELS
(a) Nozzles for Class II vessels shall be limited to
flanged nozzles that conform to the requirements of
RD-620 and have a minimum diameter of 2 in. (50 mm).
(b) Nozzles and other protrusions shall be capable of
supporting a 250 lb (1 000 N) vertical load.
RD-620.5 Nozzle Installation. Nozzles shall be
installed per Figure RD-620.5 or Figure RD-620.6 as specified in the Procedure Specification. Nozzle opening reinforcement (reinforcing pad) and secondary bonding to
secure the nozzle to the vessel shall be calculated per
RD-1174.2. If specified in the Procedure Specification,
the secondary overlay necessary to bond nozzles to
the shell may be evenly divided inside and outside the
vessel as shown in Figures RD-620.5 and RD-620.6. An
inside overlay consisting only of a corrosion‐resistant
liner per RD-101 shall not be considered as part of the
secondary overlay.
RD-620 INTEGRAL FLANGED NOZZLES FOR
CLASS II VESSELS
RD-620.1 Integral Flange Physical Dimensions. All
integral flanged nozzles shall have full‐face flanges and
be fabricated by the contact‐molding process. The
flanges and nozzles shall be of integral construction as
shown in Table RD-620.1, whereby the nozzle and
flange are fabricated in a single contact‐molding opera-
19
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Flange thicknesses based on an allowable stress of
2,500 psi (17 MPa) are precalculated for nozzles sizes
2 in. to 48 in. (DN 50 to DN 1 200) for internal hydrostatic
pressures of 25 psi to 150 psi (170 kPa to 1 MPa) and are
listed in Table RD-620.1.
RD-621 FLANGE DESIGN FOR CLASS II VESSELS
Flange design shall be in accordance with RD-1176. The
allowable stress shall be 0.001 times the lower of the longitudinal or transverse modulus of the flange laminate as
determined by Article RT-7.
20
Table RD-620.1
Flange and Nozzle Dimensions for Hand Lay‐Up and Pressure-Molded Flanges
U.S. Customary Units, in. and psi
Bolt
Hole
Dia.,
C
Dia.
Spot
Facing
Bolts,
Size
Dia.
Flange and Nozzle Thickness, in., for Pressure, psi
No. of
Bolts
25
FT
50
75
100
NT
FT
NT
FT
NT
FT
125
NT
150
FT
NT
FT
NT
Gusset
Spacing
21
2
6
4.75
0.75
1.75
0.63
4
0.5
0.25
0.5
0.25
0.63
0.25
0.63
0.25
0.69
0.25
0.75
0.25
12
3
7.5
6
0.75
1.75
0.63
4
0.5
0.25
0.56
0.25
0.69
0.25
0.75
0.25
0.81
0.31
0.88
0.31
13.5
4
9
7.5
0.75
1.75
0.63
8
0.5
0.25
0.63
0.25
0.75
0.25
0.88
0.31
1
0.31
1
0.31
15
6
11
9.5
0.88
2
0.75
8
0.56
0.25
0.69
0.25
0.81
0.31
1
0.31
1
0.38
1.13
0.44
17
8
13.5
11.75
0.88
2
0.75
8
0.625
0.25
0.81
0.31
1
0.38
1
0
1.31
0.44
1.31
0.5
19.5
10
16
14.25
1
2.25
0.88
12
0.75
0.25
1
0.31
1.13
0.38
1.25
0.4375
1.38
0.5
1.5
0.56
19.5
12
19
17
1
2.25
0.88
12
0.81
0.25
1
0.31
1.31
0.44
1.5
0.5
1.69
0.56
1.88
0.69
19.5
14
21
18.75
1.13
2.5
1
12
0.88
0.313
1.13
0.38
1.38
0.44
1.56
0.56
1.81
0.69
(1)
(1)
19.5
16
23.5
21.25
1.13
2.5
1
16
1
0.313
1.25
0.38
1.5
0.5
1.69
0.63
2
0.75
(1)
(1)
19.5
19.5
18
25
22.75
1.25
2.75
1.13
16
1
0.313
1.38
0.41
1.56
0.56
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
20
27.5
25
1.25
2.75
1.13
20
1.13
0.313
1.5
0.41
1.69
0.56
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
19.5
24
32
29.5
1.38
3
1.25
20
1.25
0.313
1.63
0.5
2
0.69
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
19.5
30
38.75
36
1.38
3
1.25
28
1.5
0.375
2
0.56
2.38
0.81
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
19.5
36
46
42.75
1.63
3.5
1.5
32
2
0.438
2.25
0.69
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
19.5
42
53
49.5
1.63
3.5
1.5
36
2.13
0.438
2.63
0.81
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
19.5
48
59.5
56
1.63
3.5
1.5
44
2.25
0.5
3
0.88
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
19.5
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Size,
in.
Outside Bolt
Dia.,
Circle,
A
B
Table RD-620.1
Flange and Nozzle Dimensions for Hand Lay‐Up and Pressure-Molded Flanges (Cont’d)
SI Units, mm and kPa
Size,
mm
Outside Bolt
Dia.,
Circle,
A
B
Bolt
Hole
Dia.,
C
Dia.
Spot
Facing
Bolts,
Size
Dia.
Flange and Nozzle Thickness, mm, for Pressure, kPa
No. of
Bolts
FT
NT
FT
NT
FT
NT
FT
NT
FT
NT
FT
NT
Gusset
Spacing
170 kPa
340 kPa
510 kPa
690 kPa
860 kPa
1 000 kPa
152
121
19
44
16
4
13
6
13
6
14
6
16
6
17
6
19
6
305
76
191
152
19
44
16
4
13
6
14
6
17
6
19
6
21
8
22
8
343
102
229
191
19
44
16
8
13
6
16
6
19
6
22
8
24
8
25
8
381
152
279
241
22
51
19
8
14
6
17
6
21
8
25
10
43
10
29
11
432
203
343
298
22
51
19
8
16
6
21
8
24
10
27
11
30
11
33
13
495
254
406
362
25
57
22
12
19
6
24
8
29
10
32
13
35
13
38
14
495
305
483
432
25
57
22
12
21
6
27
8
33
11
38
14
43
14
48
17
495
356
533
476
29
64
25
12
22
8
29
10
35
11
40
16
46
17
(1)
(1)
495
406
597
540
29
64
25
16
24
8
32
10
38
13
43
17
51
19
(1)
(1)
495
457
635
578
32
70
29
16
25
8
35
11
40
14
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
495
508
699
635
32
70
29
20
29
8
38
11
43
14
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
495
610
813
749
35
76
32
20
32
8
41
13
51
17
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
495
22
762
984
914
35
76
32
28
38
10
51
14
60
21
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
495
914
1 168
1 086
38
89
38
32
51
11
57
17
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
495
1 067
1 346
1 257
38
89
38
36
54
11
67
21
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
495
1 219
1 511
1 422
38
89
38
44
57
13
75
22
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
495
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Hub reinforcement equals T/2; R = 1∕4 in. min. (6 mm min.).
(b) Above table is based on an alternate chopped strand mat/woven roving laminates.
(c) Integral flange required for sizes up to 24-in. (600-mm) diameter.
(d) Gaskets shall be 1∕8-in.-thick (3-mm-thick), full-face elastomeric material with a hardness of Shore A60 ±5.
NOTE: (1) The flange outside diameter and bolt circle must be modified for the design of these flanges. Flanges are to be calculated according to RD-1176.
ASME BPVC.X-2021
50
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Figure RD-620.3
Flange Tolerances
23
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Figure RD-620.4(a)
Plate‐Type Gussets
B
Reinforced
plastic
gusset
Size
B,
in. mm
1/ in.
4
60 deg
(6 mm)
11/2 in.
(38 mm)
2
3
4
6
11/2 in.
(38 mm)
50
75
100
150
No. of
Plies,
X
No. of
Gussets
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
Y,
in. mm
12
131/2
15
18
300
340
375
450
Y
Fill voids with
resin putty
X ply of 11/2 oz (450 gr)
mat overlay
GENERAL NOTE: Gussets shall be evenly spaced around nozzle. Gussets shall be added after complete assembly of nozzle on shell. Gussets are not
required on nozzles over 6 in. (150 mm).
Figure RD-620.4(b)
Typical Cone‐Type Gusset
3/16 in.
(5 mm)
60 deg
24
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Figure RD-620.5
Flush Nozzle Installation
ð21Þ
d
4tb
tb
Lb
4ti
hi
4ti
hi
Lp
tp
ti
4tp
Legend:
d =
hi =
Lb =
Lp =
tb =
ti =
tp =
inside diameter of nozzle
inside shear bond length
shear length
length of pad
overlay thickness on nozzle
inside overlay thickness
thickness of reinforcing pad
25
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Figure RD-620.6
Penetrating Nozzle Installation
ð21Þ
d
4tb
tb
Lb
tp
hi
4ti
hi
ti
4ti
Lp
4 tp
Legend:
d =
hi =
Lb =
Lp =
tb =
ti =
tp =
inside diameter of nozzle
inside shear bond length
shear length
length of pad
overlay thickness on nozzle
inside overlay thickness
thickness of reinforcing pad
26
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RD-7
BOLTED CONNECTIONS
laminate as specified in the Procedure Specification
and which will satisfy the specified design conditions in accordance with RD-160.
t = minimum required thickness of flat head, cover, or
flange, exclusive of corrosion allowance, in. (mm)
RD-700 FLAT HEADS, COVERS, AND BLIND
FLANGES
Flat heads, covers, and blind flanges shall be made of
either
(a) laminate materials covered in Article RM-1; or
(b) one of the metals listed in Section VIII, Division 1, for
plates, forgings, or castings.
RD-701 MINIMUM REQUIRED THICKNESS
The minimum required thickness of flat, unstayed,
circular heads, covers, and blind flanges shall be calculated
by the following equation:
RD-700.1 For Class I Vessels. Some acceptable types of
flat heads for Class I vessels are shown in Figure RD-700.1.
RD-700.2 For Class II Vessels. The only acceptable
types of bolted connection for Class II vessels shall be
the types listed in RD-620.
t = d (CP S)
(1)
RD-710 BOLTED FLANGED CONNECTIONS
RD-700.3 Nomenclature. The symbols used in this
Article and Figure RD-700.1 are defined as follows:
RD-711 FLANGES AND FLANGED FITTINGS
CONFORMING TO ANSI B16.5 AND B16.1
C = factor depending upon the method of attachment of
head, cover, or flange, dimensionless (see
Figure RD-700.1)
d = diameter as shown in Figure RD-700.1, in. (mm)
P = design pressure (see RD-111), psi (MPa)
S = allowable stress, psi (MPa). For metal flat heads, use
applicable table of maximum allowable stress
values in Section VIII, Division 1. For flat heads fabricated from laminated materials covered in
Article RM-1, use allowable stress of the specified
The dimensional requirements of flanges (except thickness) used in bolted flange connections to external piping
shall conform to ANSI B16.5‐1981, Steel Pipe Flanges and
Flanged Fittings, or ANSI B16.1, Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and
Flanged Fittings, for nozzles over NPS 24, unless otherwise
specified in the Design Report. Thickness of flanges shall
be determined in accordance with RD-100 and RD-160.
Figure RD-700.1
Acceptable Types of Flat Heads for Class I Vessels
27
ASME BPVC.X-2021
RD-712 FLANGES NOT CONFORMING TO ANSI
B16.5‐1981
RD-721 REINFORCEMENT REQUIREMENTS
(a) Flat heads that have an opening with a diameter
that does not exceed one‐half of the head diameter d
shall have a total cross‐sectional area of reinforcement
not less than that given by the equation
RD-712.1 For Class I Vessels. Flanges used for joining
sections of shells or for similar purposes shall be designed
using full-face gaskets or self‐energizing types, such as o‐
rings. Such flange designs may be used provided they are
proven adequate for the specified design conditions in
accordance with RD-160.
A = 0.5Bt
where B is the diameter of the finished opening in its
corroded condition and t is as defined in RD-700.3.
(b) Flat heads that have an opening with a diameter
that exceeds one‐half of the head diameter, as defined
in RD-700.3, shall be restricted to a metal material and
shall be designed in accordance with the rules for
bolted flange connections in Section VIII, Division 1, Mandatory Appendix 2.
(c) As an alternative to (b) above, the thickness of flat
heads may be increased to provide the necessary opening
reinforcement by using 2C in place of C in eq. RD-701(1).
RD-712.2 For Class II Vessels. Flanges used for joining
sections of shells or for similar purposes shall be designed
using full-face gaskets or self‐energizing types, such as o‐
rings.
RD-720 OPENINGS IN FLAT METALLIC HEADS,
METALLIC COVERS, AND METALLIC
BLIND FLANGES
Openings in flat heads, covers, and blind flanges shall
conform to the requirements of RD-721 for reinforcement
for all openings, except that single openings in flat heads,
covers, and blind flanges do not require reinforcement
other than that inherent in the construction under the
following conditions:
(a) welded or brazed connections to metal heads
attached in accordance with the applicable rules of
Section VIII, Division 1, and not larger than
(1) NPS 3 (DN 80) heads 3∕8 in. (10 mm) thick or less;
(2) NPS 2 (DN 50) heads over 3∕8 in. (10 mm) thick;
(b) threaded, studded, or expanded connections in
Class I vessels only in which the hole cut in the head
is not greater than NPS 2 (DN 50).
RD-730 WELDED OR BRAZED CONNECTIONS
TO METAL FLAT HEADS, COVERS, OR
BLIND FLANGES
(a) Connections to metallic flat heads, covers, or blind
flanges attached by welding shall meet the requirements
of Section VIII, Division 1, Part UW.
(b) Connections to metallic flat heads, covers, or blind
flanges attached by brazing shall meet the requirements of
Section VIII, Division 1, Part UB.
28
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RD-8
QUICK‐ACTUATING CLOSURES (FOR CLASS I VESSELS ONLY)
It is recognized that it is impractical to write detailed requirements to cover the multiplicity of devices used for
quick access or to prevent negligent operation or the
circumventing of safety devices. Any device or devices
that will provide the safeguards broadly described in
(a), (b), and this paragraph will meet the intent of the
Code. The design of the closure shall be verified as
part of the prototype qualification.
RD-800 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
Closures other than the multibolted type designed to
provide access to the contents space of a pressure
vessel shall have the locking mechanism or locking
device so designed that failure of any one locking
element or component in the locking mechanism
cannot result in the failure of all other locking elements
and the release of the closure. Quick‐actuating closures
shall be designed and installed so that it may be determined by visual external observation that the holding
elements are in good condition and that their locking
elements, when the closure is in the closed position,
are in full engagement. Such closures shall be limited
to Class I vessels and shall meet the requirements of
RD-100 and RD-160.
RD-801.1 Permissible Design Deviations for Manually Operated Closures. Quick‐actuating closures that
are held in position by a locking device or mechanism
that requires manual operation and are designated so
that there will be leakage of the contents of the vessel
prior to disengagement of the locking elements and
release of closure need not satisfy RD-801(a) and
RD-801(b). However, such closures shall be equipped
with an audible and/or visible warning device that will
serve to warn the operator if pressure is applied to
the vessel before the closure and its holding elements
are fully engaged in their intended position and,
further, will serve to warn the operator if an attempt
is made to operate the locking mechanism or device
before the pressure within the vessel is released.
RD-801 SPECIFIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
Quick‐actuating closures that are held in position by
positive locking devices, and that are fully released by
partial rotation or limited movement of the closure
itself or the locking mechanism, and any closure that is
other than manually operated, shall be designated so
that when the vessel is installed, the following conditions
are met:
(a) the closure and its holding elements are fully
engaged in their intended operating position before pressure can be built up in the vessel;
(b) pressure tending to force the closure clear of the
vessel will be released before the closure can be fully
opened for access;
In the event that compliance with (a) and (b) above is
not inherent in the design of the closure and its holding
elements, provision shall be made so that devices to
accomplish this can be added when the vessel is installed.
RD-802 REQUIRED PRESSURE‐INDICATING
DEVICES
All vessels having quick‐actuating closures shall be
provided with a pressure‐indicating device visible from
the operating station.
RD-803 QUALIFICATION
Quick‐actuating closures shall meet the proof of design
adequacy requirements of RD-160.
29
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RD-9
ATTACHMENTS AND SUPPORTS
RD-900 GENERAL
RD-910 QUALIFICATION
There are no mandatory rules in this Section governing
the design of attachments and supports for Class I vessels.
The designer is referred to Article AA-5 for suggested
procedures to be followed in establishing prototype
design.
Design of attachments and supports for Class II vessels
shall be in accordance with Article RD-11 and shall be
certified by a registered Professional Engineer in accordance with RD-1111.
(a) For Class I vessels, a prototype vessel complete with
attachments and supports designed for it shall be qualified
by cyclic pressure and hydrostatic qualification pressure
tests at the design pressure and temperature in accordance with RT-223.
(b) Class II vessels, complete with attachments and
supports, shall be tested as specified in Article RT-6.
(c) Any change in the design of the attachments and
supports shall be considered a change in the vessel
design, and the combination shall be requalified.
30
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RD-10
ACCESS AND INSPECTION OPENINGS
(c) Class I vessels over 36 in. (900 mm) inside diameter
shall have a manhole [see RD-1020(a)], except those
vessels whose shape or use makes one impracticable
shall have at least two handholes 4 in. × 6 in. (100
mm × 150 mm) or two equal openings of equivalent area.
(d) When handholes or pipe‐plug openings are
permitted for Class I vessels inspection openings in
place of a manhole, one handhole or one pipe‐plug
opening shall be in each head or in the shell near each head.
(e) Openings with removable heads or cover plates
intended for other purposes may be used in place of
the required inspection openings, provided they are
equal to at least the size of the required inspection openings and provided they are located so that adequate
internal inspection can be made.
(f) A single opening with removable head or cover plate
may be used in place of all the smaller inspection openings,
provided it is of such size and location to afford at least an
equal view of the interior.
(g) Accesses or inspection openings for Class II vessels
shall comply with RD-520 and RD-1174.
RD-1000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
All pressure vessels subject to internal corrosion or
having parts subject to erosion or mechanical abrasion
shall be provided with suitable manhole, handhole, or
other inspection openings for examination and cleaning.
RD-1001 REQUIREMENTS FOR VESSELS 12 in. (300
mm) IN DIAMETER9 AND SMALLER
For Class I vessels 12 in. (300 mm) or less in diameter,
openings for inspection only may be omitted if there are at
least two removable pipe connections not less than NPS 3∕4
(DN 20) that can be utilized for adequate internal inspection. Inspection openings for Class II vessels shall comply
with RD-520.
RD-1002 REQUIREMENTS FOR VESSELS OVER 12
in. (300 mm) BUT NOT OVER 16 in. (400
mm) IN INSIDE DIAMETER
Class I vessels over 12 in. (300 mm) but not over 16 in.
(400 mm) in diameter, that are to be installed so that they
must be disconnected from an assembly to permit inspection, need not be provided with additional openings for
inspection only, if there are at least two removable pipe
connections not less than NPS 11∕2 (DN 40), provided such
openings are so located that adequate internal inspections
can be made. Inspection openings for Class II vessels shall
comply with RD-520.
RD-1020 SIZE OF MANHOLE OPENINGS FOR
CLASS I VESSELS
When inspection or access openings are required, they
shall comply with at least the following requirements:
(a) Type and Minimum Size of Manhole. An elliptical or
obround manhole shall be not less than 12 in. × 16 in. (300
mm × 400 mm). A circular manhole shall be not less than
16 in. (400 mm) in inside diameter.
(b) Minimum Size of Handholes. A handhole opening
shall be not less than 2 in. × 3 in. (50 mm × 75 mm),
but should be as large as is consistent with the size of
the vessel and the location of the opening.
RD-1010 EQUIPMENT OF VESSELS
REQUIRING ACCESS OR INSPECTION
OPENINGS
Vessels that require access or inspection openings shall
be equipped as follows:9
(a) Class I vessels less than 18 in. (450 mm) and over 16
in. (400 mm) inside diameter shall have at least two handholes or two plugged, threaded inspection openings of not
less than NPS 11∕2 (DN 40).
(b) Class I vessels 18 in. (450 mm) to 36 in. (920 mm),
inclusive, inside diameter shall have a manhole or at least
two handholes or two threaded pipe‐plug inspection
openings of not less than NPS 2 (DN 50).
RD-1030 SIZE OF MANHOLE OPENINGS FOR
CLASS II VESSELS
When inspection or access openings are required for
Class II vessels, they shall comply with RD-520 and
RD-1174.
31
ASME BPVC.X-2021
between the moduli of elasticity of the materials of the
vessel and the plug and between the thermal coefficients
of expansion of those materials.
(b) A Class I vessel, with the threaded opening and
closure in place, shall be qualified by cyclic pressure
and hydrostatic qualification pressure tests in accordance
with RT-223.
(c) Any change in the design of openings shall be
considered a change in the design of the vessel, and
the vessel with new opening or openings shall be requalified.
RD-1031 DESIGN OF ACCESS AND INSPECTION
OPENINGS IN SHELLS AND HEADS
All access and inspection openings in a shell or unstayed
head of a Class I vessel shall be designed in accordance
with the suggested procedures of Nonmandatory
Appendix AA or their equivalent and shall be fabricated
into the prototype vessel or vessels used to qualify the
design in accordance with RD-160.
All access and inspection openings in Class II vessels
shall comply with the procedures of Article RD-11.
RD-1052 PERMISSIBLE TYPES OF THREADS
RD-1040 MINIMUM GASKET BEARING
WIDTHS FOR MANHOLE COVER
PLATES
The thread for threaded openings shall be a standard
taper pipe thread, except a straight thread of equal
strength may be used if additional sealing means to
prevent leakage are provided.
Manholes of the type in which the internal pressure
forces the cover plate against a flat gasket shall have a
minimum gasket bearing width of 11∕16 in. (17 mm).
RD-1060 THREADED OPENINGS IN CLASS II
VESSELS
RD-1050 THREADED OPENINGS IN CLASS I
VESSELS
Threaded openings are not permitted in any pressure‐
containing component of a Class II vessel. The only exception is a threaded opening, not to exceed 2 NPT (DN 50), in
a metallic flat cover for a flanged manway or nozzle.
RD-1051 MATERIALS FOR THREADED PLUGS AND
CAPS
(a) When a threaded opening is to be used for inspection or cleaning purposes, the closing plug shall be
designed with due consideration of the relationships
32
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RD-11
MANDATORY DESIGN RULES FOR CLASS II VESSELS10
(b) Vessels with diameters greater than 144 in. may be
designed using a combination of Methods A and B.
(c) Vessels designed by either Method A or B shall be
limited to an external pressure of 15 psi (100 kPa).
(d) Design temperature shall be as limited by RD-112.
(e) Vessels may be designed in their entirety by Method
B (discontinuity analysis).
RD-1100 GENERAL
Class II vessels and vessel parts shall be designed using
the stress analysis methods given in this Article. Class II
vessels are those whose designs are qualified by adherence to the mandatory design rules of this Article and are
acceptance tested individually as specified in Article RT-6.
The engineering constants for laminates used in the design
and fabrication of Class II vessels shall be determined in
accordance with Article RD-12.
RD-1130 DESIGN ACCEPTABILITY
Design acceptability shall be demonstrated by
comparing design stress and strain values with calculated
buckling values, allowable strain values, and the mechanical properties obtained from the physical test defined in
Article RT-7. The appropriate comparison will depend on
the governing criterion and is specified in RD-1170
through RD-1189.
RD-1110 DESIGN BASIS
Two methods of design are permitted under this Article:
(a) Method A — Design Rules: RD-1170
(b) Method B — Discontinuity Analysis: RD-1180
Specific design by either method shall be qualified by
acceptance testing as specified in Article RT-6. The
maximum strain theory of failure is used for Method A,
and the quadratic interaction criterion is used for
Method B.
RD-1140 LOADINGS
Loadings that shall be considered in the design of specific vessels under this Article are specified in RD-120.
RD-1111 CERTIFICATION OF DESIGN
RD-1150 VESSEL PARTS SUBJECT TO DESIGN
ANALYSIS
A Professional Engineer knowledgeable in the design of
reinforced plastics and registered in one or more of the
states of the United States or provinces of Canada shall
certify that the calculations contained in the Fabricator’s
Design Report are in compliance with the rules of this
Article and that the vessel design complies with this
Section for Class II vessels.
Design Calculations shall be provided for pressure‐
containing components and support members to
include but not be limited to:
(a) vessel shell;
(b) vessel heads;
(c) openings and their reinforcement;
(d) secondary bonds joining two or more vessel parts;
(e) internal and external attachments (e.g., packing
supports, vessel skirts, hold‐down lugs, support rings,
etc.).
RD-1120 DESIGN LIMITATIONS
The maximum design pressure and inside diameter of
Class II vessels shall be restricted as follows (see
Figure RD-1120.1).
(a) Vessels designed shall have pressure and diameter
restrictions as follows:
(1) the algebraic product of the internal pressure [psi
(kPa)] and the inside diameter [in. (mm)] shall not exceed
14,400 lb/in. (for Customary units, PD = 14,400 lb/in.; for
SI units, PD = 2 522 kPa·m);
(2) the maximum internal pressure shall not exceed
250 psi (1 724 kPa);
(3) the maximum inside diameter shall not exceed
192 in. (4.88 m).
RD-1160 LAMINATE COMPOSITION
RD-1161 SCOPE
Laminates acceptable under the Code for Class II vessels
are limited to those made from resin and fiber specified in
RM-100 and RM-120 by either contact‐molded or filament‐wound methods. No restrictions are placed on
the fiber form, the ply sequence, or ply orientations.
However, laminates used in Class II vessels shall
33
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Figure RD-1120.1
Design Limitations for Class II Vessels
1600
280
250
PD 5 14,400 lb/in. (2 522 kPa m)
Design Pressure, kPa
1000
800
Design Pressure, psig
220
190
Method A or Method B
160
130
Method A and Method B
100
70
100
< 144 in.
40
10
0
220
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
180
200
Diameter, in.
0
1
2
3
4
5
Diameter, m
satisfy the above rules and the Fabricator’s Procedure
Specification regarding fabrication of both vessel parts
and test coupons for determination of engineering
constants.
RD-1163.1 Laminate Theory. Laminate theory is a
mathematical treatment of the mechanics governing
the behavior of a unidirectional orthotropic lamina,
and the interrelation of multiple lamina forming a multidirectional laminate. Laminate theory requires that four
elastic constants and five strength constants for the orthotropic lamina be determined. The elastic constants are longitudinal, transverse, and shear modulus, and the major
Poisson’s ratio. The five strength constants are longitudinal tension and compression, transverse tension and
compression, and the in‐plane shear strength. Test
methods for elastic and strength constants of the unidirectional lamina are specified in Article RT-7. Alternatively,
the elastic constants of the lamina may be determined in
accordance with Nonmandatory Appendix AK. The mathematical treatment to calculate the resulting stiffness coefficients is specified in Article RD-12. An example of
laminate theory is given in Nonmandatory Appendix AD.
Method A requires that the laminate be treated as
homogeneous and, therefore, possessing effective laminate engineering properties. For balanced, symmetric
laminates, it is possible to express the effective engineering properties as a function of the stiffness constants
Aij and the laminate thickness. If the laminate is not
RD-1162 FABRICATION METHODS
Class II vessels using Method A or B as the design criteria
shall be limited to contact‐molded construction, filament‐
wound construction, or a combination of the two.
RD-1163 ENGINEERING CONSTANTS
Elastic constants for Class II vessel design shall be determined for the specific laminate specified in the Procedure
Specification. Elastic constants for the laminate shall be
determined by means of laminate theory using the orthotropic properties of the individual lamina in accordance
with Article RD-12. The lamina strength constants shall be
determined in accordance with Article RT-7. The lamina
elastic constants shall be determined in accordance with
Article RT-7 or Nonmandatory Appendix AK.
Laminate theory (Article RD-12) shall be used to determine the elastic constants of both contact‐molded and filament‐wound laminates.
34
ASME BPVC.X-2021
symmetric, the determination of effective engineering
properties is more complex, requiring the inversion of
the stiffness matrix to allow expression of the laminate
effective constants in terms of compliance (see
Nonmandatory Appendix AD).
(b) Elastic constants shall be determined as specified in
RD-1163.
(c) Design factor is 5 on all external pressure calculations.
(d) Design factor is 10 on internal pressure and reinforcement calculations. This factor is incorporated in the
0.001 strain limitation.
RD-1164 THICKNESS OF VESSEL PARTS
The design thickness of vessel parts shall be expressed
both as a numerical value with appropriate units, and as a
specific number of plies of specified orientation as designated in the Procedure Specifications. The Fabricator shall
document as part of the Procedure Specification that the
vessel part contains the specified number of plies and ply
orientation.
RD-1171 THICKNESS OF SHELLS
The thickness of vessel shells under internal pressure
shall not be less than that computed by the following equations. In addition, all of the loads listed in RD-120 shall be
provided when such loads are specified in the Design Specification. Rules for design of vessel shells under this
Section are limited to cylindrical and spherical shells.
Any shell or nozzle designed under this Article shall
have a minimum structural thickness of 1∕4 in. (6 mm).
RD-1165 RESIN–FIBER RATIO
The percent fiber for both vessel parts and test coupons
shall be within the range specified by the Procedure Specification. The fiber content, by weight, of the test coupon
shall be between 90% and 100% of the minimum fiber
content specified for the vessel part.
RD-1171.1 Cylindrical Shells Under Uniform Internal
Pressure. The minimum thickness of cylindrical shells
under internal pressure shall be the greater of (a) or
(b) below, but not less than 1∕4 in. (6 mm).
RD-1166 CHARACTERIZATION OF LAMINATES
t1 =
Filament‐wound laminates shall be defined in terms of
wind angle, number of plies, type of fiber with manufacturer’s designation, type of resin with manufacturer’s designation, and resin–fiber weight ratio as specified in the
Procedure Specification.
Contact‐molded laminates shall be defined in terms of
type of fiber with manufacturer’s designation, type of resin
with manufacturer’s designation, fiber orientation of each
ply with respect to longitudinal axis of vessel or vessel
part, number and sequence of various fiber configurations, and resin–fiber weight ratio as specified in the
Procedure Specification.
t2 =
PR
for longitudinal stress
2(0.001E1)
PR
for circumferential stress
0.001E 2
where
E1
E2
P
R
t1
t2
RD-1170 DESIGN RULES — METHOD A
RD-1170.1 Scope. Laminate strength is a function of the
loading combinations. The design equations specified in
Method A require that the directional dependency of the
laminate be considered and used. In addition, the stresses
and strains of any combination of loads listed in RD-120 or
the Design Specification shall be computed when such
loads are expected to occur simultaneously during operation or testing. Engineering constants used with the
various equations shall be consistent with the material
axis under consideration. The size or thickness of
vessel parts shall be such that the imposed strain does
not exceed the allowable strain for the laminate in that
axis.
=
=
=
=
=
=
tensile modulus in longitudinal direction
tensile modulus in circumferential direction
internal pressure
inside radius
structural wall thickness for longitudinal stress
structural wall thickness for circumferential stress
RD-1171.2 Spherical Shells Under Internal Pressure.
The minimum structural thickness of spherical shells
under internal pressure shall be computed as follows:
PR
t =
2(0.001E)
where
E
E1
E2
P
R
t
RD-1170.2 Design Parameters.
(a) Elastic constants at design temperature shall be
used for calculations.
35
=
=
=
=
=
=
lesser of E1 or E2,
modulus in meridional direction
modulus in circumferential direction
internal pressure
inside radius
thickness of structural laminate
ASME BPVC.X-2021
(b) γ = 0.9, if Zp > 100
where
RD-1172 VESSEL SHELLS UNDER EXTERNAL
PRESSURE
Rules for design of shells under external pressure given
in this section are limited to cylindrical shells, with or
without stiffening rings and spherical shells.
ð21Þ
Zp =
RD-1172.1 Cylindrical Shells Under External Pressure. The required minimum thickness of a cylindrical
shell under external pressure shall be determined by
the following procedure.
The maximum allowable external pressure between
stiffening elements shall be computed by the following:
Pa =
(1
3 4
)
x y
=
=
=
=
=
=
x =
L =
Pa
t
vx
vy
γ
=
=
=
=
=
(
)
x y
L2
( D2 t)
o
NOTE: The use of lamination theory for the prediction of
νx and νy is acceptable.
For alternative rules, see Nonmandatory Appendix AI.
RD-1172.1.1 The required moment of inertia Is of a
circumferential stiffener ring for cylindrical shells
under external pressure shall not be less than that determined by the following equation:
D 3 2
L o
F
2
( )
where
Do
Eat
Ehf
F
KD
x
Eaf 2
1 2
1
where Eaf is the axial flexural modulus, psi
Ehf 3 4 Eat1 4 t 5 2
KD 0.8531
Ehf 3 2Eat1 2
Is =
outside diameter of shell, in.
axial tensile modulus, psi
hoop flexural modulus, psi
design factor = 5
a knockdown factor
1.0 for laminates consisting of all chopped strand
mat and for laminates consisting of chopped
strand mat and woven roving
0.84 for all other laminates
design length of a vessel section, in., taken as the
largest of the following:
(a) the distance between head‐tangent lines
plus one‐third the depth of each formed head,
if there are no stiffening rings (excluding
conical heads and sections);
(b) the distance between cone‐to‐cylinder
junctions for vessels with cone or conical
heads, if there are no stiffening rings;
(c) the greatest center‐to‐center distance
between any two adjacent stiffening rings;
(d) the distance from the center of the first stiffening ring to the formed head tangent line plus
one‐third the depth of the formed head (excluding
conical heads and sections), all measured parallel
to the axis of the vessel;
(e) the distance from the first stiffening ring in
the cylinder to the cone‐to‐cylinder junction.
allowable external pressure, psi
wall thickness, in. (nominal)
flexural Poisson’s ratio in the axial direction
flexural Poisson’s ratio in the hoop direction
reduction factor developed to better correlate
theoretical predictions and test results
(a) γ = 1 − 0.001Zp, if Zp ≤ 100,
(PoLsDo3F)
(24 E2)
where
Do
E2
F
Ls
=
=
=
=
outside diameter
hoop tensile modulus
design factor = 5
one‐half the distance from the center line of the
stiffening ring to the next line of support on
one side, plus one‐half the center line distance
to the next line of support on the other side of
the stiffening ring, both measured parallel to
the axis of the cylinder. A line of support is:
(a) a stiffening ring that meets the requirements of this paragraph;
(b) a circumferential line on a head at one‐third
the depth of the head from the head tangent line.
Po = external pressure
RD-1172.2 Spherical Shells Under Uniform External
Pressure. The minimum thickness of spherical shells
under external pressure shall be computed as follows.
Step 1. Assume a value of t for the structural wall thickness and compute the allowable pressure:
PA =
0.41 (E F )(t )2
3 (1
2
1 2) (R o)
where
E = smaller of E1 and E2,
E1 = effective tensile modulus in meridional direction
E2 = effective tensile modulus in circumferential direction
F = design factor = 5
PA = allowable external pressure
Ro = outside spherical radius
t = structural wall thickness
36
ASME BPVC.X-2021
sphere of the same radius. The radius of curvature of
an ellipsoidal head varies along the meridian, allowing
an average or equivalent radius based on the major‐to‐
minor axis ratio to be used. A table of factors Ko for determining the equivalent spherical radius is given in
Table RD-1173.2.
The required thickness of an ellipsoidal head under
external pressure shall be determined in the same
manner as outlined in RD-1172.2 using the following
equation:
Table RD-1173.2
Values of Spherical Radius Factor Ko for Ellipsoidal
Heads With Pressure on Convex Side
Major‐to‐Minor Axis Ratio
Ko
2.0
0.9
1.8
0.81
1.6
0.73
1.4
0.65
1.2
0.57
1.0
0.50
PA =
ν1 = Poisson’s ratio in major direction
ν2 = Poisson’s ratio in minor direction
RD-1173.1 Thickness of Heads Under Internal Pressure. The required thickness of vessel heads under
internal pressure shall be computed by the appropriate
equation below.
PD
t =
for ellipsoidal head
2(0.001Ehd)
RD-1174 OPENINGS IN SHELLS AND HEADS
RD-1174.1 General. Openings in shells and heads of
Class II vessels designed using Method A shall be restricted
to those formed by the intersection of the shell or head
with a circular cylindrical nozzle neck. The ratio of the
longest chord length of the opening to the shortest
chord length shall not exceed 2.
(a) For vessel diameters 48 in. (1 200 mm) and less,
openings shall not exceed 50% of the vessel diameter.
(b) For vessel diameters greater than 48 in. (1 200
mm), openings shall not exceed 24 in. (600 mm).
PR s
for hemispherical head
2(0.001Ehd)
where
=
=
=
=
=
2
1 2) (Ko Do)
Do = outside radius of crown portion of head
F = design factor = 5
Ko = factor depending on ellipsoidal head proportions
RD-1173 THICKNESS OF HEADS
D
Ehd
P
Rs
t
3(1
where
Step 2. Assume successive values of t until PA equals or
exceeds the design external pressure.
t =
0.41 (E F ) (t )2
RD-1174.2 Reinforcement of Openings and Nozzle
Attachments. Attachment of nozzles to vessel shell or
head requires that consideration be given to both (c)
the reinforcement of the opening and (d) the secondary
overlay that attaches the nozzle to the shell. The requirements for both these considerations may be incorporated
into the same overlay provided the laminate comprising
the cutout reinforcement on the shell is projected onto and
becomes part of the secondary overlay attaching the
nozzle to the shell or head.
The reinforcing pad around a nozzle opening and the
projection of this overlay onto the nozzle serve two
purposes
(a) It provides a reinforcing pad of sufficient thickness
and length to reduce the stresses at the opening to an acceptable level.
(b) It provides sufficient shear area to secure the nozzle
to the vessel.
inside diameter
design modulus for the head
internal pressure
inside spherical radius
head wall thickness
RD-1173.2 Thickness of Heads Under External Pressure. Rules for design of end closures with pressure on the
convex side given in this Section are limited to: hemispherical heads, or ellipsoidal heads with major‐to‐minor axis
ratios not to exceed 2 to 1.
(a) Hemispherical Heads. The required thickness of a
hemispherical head having pressure on the convex side
shall be determined in the same manner as outlined in
RD-1172.2 for determining the thickness of a spherical
shell.
(b) Ellipsoidal Heads. The procedure for determining
the required thickness of an ellipsoidal head under
external pressure is based on the analogy between the
maximum allowable compressive stress in the crown
region of a head having an equivalent crown radius Ro,
and the maximum allowable compressive stress in a
NOTE: The secondary bond strength in shear for design purposes
shall not exceed 1,000 psi (7 MPa).
Reference is made to Figure RD-1174.2. For the reinforcing pad and the nozzle overlay to be fully defined, criteria
(c) through (f) below shall be met.
37
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Figure RD-1174.2
Dimensions of Reinforcing Pad and Nozzle Overlays
ð21Þ
4tb
Lb
tp
tb
Lp
4tp
Interior laminate (see Figures
RD-620.5 and RD-620.6)
Legend:
d =
hi =
Lb =
Lp =
tb =
ti =
tp =
inside diameter of nozzle
inside shear bond length
shear length
length of pad
overlay thickness on nozzle
inside overlay thickness
thickness of reinforcing pad
(c) Length of Secondary Overlay on Nozzle. The
secondary bond length Lb on the nozzle shall be sufficient
to withstand the internal pressure acting against the
cross‐sectional area of the nozzle.
Pr
Lb =
or 3 in. (75 mm), whichever is greater
2(Ss F )
where
E1 = effective tensile modulus of secondary laminate
parallel to nozzle axis
E2 = effective tensile modulus of secondary laminate
circumferential to nozzle
P = internal pressure
r = nozzle internal radius
Sa = allowable stress of secondary overlay, defined as
the lower of 0.001E1 or 0.001E2
tb = overlay thickness on nozzle
where
F
Lb
P
r
Ss
=
=
=
=
=
design factor = 10
shear length
internal pressure
inside radius of nozzle
secondary bond strength in shear [1,000 psi (6.995
MPa) max.]
(e) Thickness of Reinforcement Pad on Shell or Head. The
thickness tp of the reinforcing pad shall be the greater of
(1) and (2) below:
(1) a thickness of secondary overlay with strength
equivalent to the tensile strength in the circumferential
direction of the shell thickness removed:
PR
tp =
0.001E 2
(d) Thickness of Secondary Overlay on Nozzle. The
secondary overlay thickness tb on the nozzle shall be sufficient to withstand the nozzle internal pressure.
Pr
tb =
or 0.25 in. (6 mm), whichever is greater
Sa
where
38
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Figure RD-1174.3
Stress Concentration Factors for a Circular Hole in a Pressurized Cylindrical Shell
GENERAL NOTE: This figure is republished with permission of John Wiley & Sons, Inc., from Stress Concentration Factors: Charts and Relations
Useful in Making Strength Calculations for Machine Parts and Structural Elements by R. E. Peterson, Copyright © 1974; permission conveyed
through Copyright Clearance Center, Inc.
E2 = effective tensile modulus of secondary overlay in
circumferential direction
P = internal pressure
R = radius of shell
tp = thickness of reinforcing pad
R
r
t
β
ν1
ν2
(2) a thickness of secondary overlay, which when
added to the shell thickness, will reduce the bending
stress at the opening to an allowable level. The allowable
bending stress shall be defined as 0.1% of the flexural
modulus of the reinforcing laminate in its circumferential
direction. Compute as follows:
Step 1. Compute Beta factor
4
=
3(1
2
=
=
=
=
=
=
radius of shell
radius of nozzle
thickness of shell
Beta factor
Poisson’s ratio in major direction
Poisson’s ratio in minor direction
Step 2. From Figure RD-1174.3, determine the
stress concentration factor Kt for membrane plus bending.
Step 3. Compute maximum stress at opening
Smax = S2 K t
where
1 2) ijj r
zyz
jj
zz
Rt
k
{
E2 = effective tensile modulus of the shell laminate in
the circumferential direction
where
39
ASME BPVC.X-2021
S2 = allowable stress for the shell laminate in the
circumferential direction, defined as 0.001E2
(-a) For nozzles 6 in. (150 mm) diameter and less,
Lp shall be at least as great as Lc.
(-b) For nozzles greater than 6 in. (150 mm)
diameter, but less than or equal to 12 in. (300 mm)
diameter, Lp = 6 in. (150 mm) or 1∕2Lc, whichever is greater.
(-c) For nozzles greater than 12 in. (300 mm)
diameter, L p shall be at least as great as 1 ∕ 2 L c . See
Figure RD-1174.2.
Step 4. Determine the moment M associated with
the stress Smax being applied at the edge of the opening.
Assume a moment beam 1 in. (25 mm) wide and having a
thickness equal to the shell thickness, with the stress
decreasing away from the edge of the opening. These
assupmtions are not valid for SI units.
M =
Smax t 2
6
RD-1175 JOINING VESSEL PARTS
RD-1175.1 General. Joining of two or more vessel parts
by use of secondary overlay requires that the overlay laminate meet two criteria:
(a) the thickness of the overlay shall be sufficient to
withstand the stresses incurred by the stronger part; and
(b) the length of the overlay shall be sufficient to
provide a secondary bond shear strength equal to the longitudinal tensile modulus of the weaker part.
where
t = vessel shell thickness
Step 5. Determine the thickness of reinforcement
that will reduce the stress imposed by the moment M to the
allowable Sf, defined as 0.001Ef. Assume an effective
equivalent moment to be M/2.
tp =
6(M 2)
Sf
RD-1175.2 Head‐to‐Shell Joint Overlay Subject to
Internal Pressure (See Figure RD-1175.2).
t
(a) Thickness of Overlay. The thickness of the overlay to
shall be sufficient to withstand the circumferential stress
imposed on the shell due to internal pressure and specified hydrostatic loading.
where
Ef = flexural modulus of reinforcing laminate in the
circumferential direction
Sf = allowable stress, defined as 0.001Ef,
t = thickness of vessel shell
tp = thickness of reinforcing pad
to =
where
The thickness of the reinforcing pad shall be the
greater of the thicknesses computed for (1) and (2) above.
(f) Length of Reinforcing Pad. The reinforcing pad shall
project a distance Lp from the edge of the opening and
encompass a 360 deg arc around the opening. The distance
Lp shall be at least as great as the greater of (1) and (2)
below. The pad shall terminate in a taper over an additional distance six times the thickness of the pad.
(1) A secondary bond area on the shell shall provide
sufficient shear area to resist the internal pressure force
on the nozzle. By convention this area will be expressed in
terms of a distance Lp that the reinforcing pad will extend
out from the nozzle and shall be computed as follows:
Lc P
Lp =
4Ss F
E2 = effective tensile modulus of secondary laminate in
circumferential direction
R = radius of shell
t = thickness of shell
to = thickness of overlay
(b) Length of Overlay. The length of the secondary
overlay Lo shall be at least that given below. The total
length of the overlay extending on both sides of the
joint shall be at least 2Lo. The overlay shall terminate
as a taper over an additional distance at least four
times the thickness of the pad.
Sufficient secondary shear bond strength to resist
internal and hydrostatic pressure is given by:
PR
Lo =
2Ss F
where
F
Lc
Lp
P
Ss
=
=
=
=
=
P (R + t )
0.001E 2
where
design factor = 10
longest chord length of opening
length of pad
internal pressure
secondary bond shear strength
F
Lo
P
R
Ss
x
(2) Minimum Reinforcing Pad Requirements
40
=
=
=
=
=
=
design factor = 10
length of overlay on each side of joint
internal pressure at joint
radius of vessel at joint
secondary bond strength in shear
1,000 psi (7 MPa) max.
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Figure RD-1175.2
Head/Shell or Shell/Shell Overlay Dimensions
RD-1176 DESIGN OF FLANGES
RD-1176.1 Nomenclature. The following symbols are
used in the equations for the design of flat nozzle flanges
employing a full‐face gasket:
4to
Head or shell
A = outside diameter of flange, in. (mm)
AB = total cross‐sectional area of bolts at root
diameter of thread or section of least diameter
under stress, in. (mm)
Am = total required cross‐sectional area of bolts, the
greater of Wm1/Sb or Wm2/Sa, in.2 (mm2)
B = inside diameter of flange, in. (mm)
b = effective gasket width or joint‐contact‐surface
seating width, in. (mm)
C = diameter of bolt circle, in. (mm)
d = shape factor for integral type flanges
x = (U/V)hogo2
d1 = bolt hole diameter
e = shape factor
x = F/ho
F = shape factor (Figure RD-1176.3)
f = hub stress correction factor (Figure RD-1176.4)
x = 1 for calculated values less than 1
G = diameter of gasket load reaction
g0 = thickness of hub at small end
g1 = thickness of hub at back of flange
H = hydrostatic end force
h = length of hub, in.
HD = hydrostatic end force on area inside of flange
hD = radial distance from bolt circle to circle on which
HD acts
HG = difference between bolt load and hydrostatic
end force
hG = radial distance from bolt circle to circle on which
HG acts
h′G = radial distance from bolt circle to gasket load
reaction
h″G = flange lever arm
HGy = bolt load for gasket yielding
x = bπGy
H′Gy = compression load required to seat gasket
outside G diameter
Hp = total joint‐contact‐surface compression load
x = 2bπGmp
Hp′ = total adjusted joint‐contact‐surface compression for full‐face gasketed flange, lb
x = (hG hG)Hp
Lo
th
tgap
4th
4th
Lo
toffset
Shell
4to
ts
Legend:
Lo
tgap
tn
to
toffset
ts
=
=
=
=
=
=
overlay length
≤0.375 in. (10 mm)
structural head or shell thickness
overlay thickness
≥ ts/3
structural shell thickness
GENERAL NOTE: The interior of the joint shall be sealed to prevent
infusion of the vessel contents into the joint. In the case of a vessel with
an RTP liner and where possible, it is recommended that a seal bond of
a minimum of 3 in. (75 mm) (not including the taper) be used of the
same construction as the RTP liner in the vessel components. In those
cases where it is not possible to install a seal bond on the interior of an
RTP lined vessel, the joint shall be sealed.
HT = difference between total hydrostatic end force
and the hydrostatic end force area inside of
flange
x = H − HD
hT = radial distance from bolt circle to circle on which
HT acts
K = ratio of inside flange diameter to outside flange
diameter
41
ASME BPVC.X-2021
M
x
m
Ma
MD
MG
Mo
MT
N
p
Sa
Sb
SFa
SFo
SH
SR
SRAD
ST
T
t
U
V
Wa
Wm1
Wm2
Y
y
Z
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
unit load, operating, lb
Mmax/B
gasket factor
moment under bolt‐up conditions
component of moment due to HD
component of moment due to HG
total moment
component of moment due to HT
number of bolts
design pressure
allowable bolt stress at ambient temperature
allowable bolt stress at design temperature
allowable flange stress at ambient temperature
allowable flange stress at design temperature
longitudinal hub stress
radial flange stress
radial stress at bolt circle
tangential flange stress
shape factor (Figure RD-1176.5)
flange thickness
shape factor (Figure RD-1176.5)
shape factor (Figure RD-1176.2)
flange design bolt load
minimum bolt loading for design conditions
minimum bolt loading for bolt‐up conditions
shape factor (Figure RD-1176.5)
gasket unit seating load
shape factor (Figure RD-1176.5)
y = __________ (seating load)
m = __________ (gasket factor)
(d) Determine loads
H = G2 p 4
Hp = 2b Gmp
Hp =
HGy = b Gy
HGy = (hG hG)HGy
Wm2 = HGy + HGy
(e) Determine the bolting requirements
A1 = Wm1 Sb
A2 = Wm2 Sa
Am = greater of A1 and A2
AB = sum of cross‐sectional areas of bolts
Wa = 0.5 (A m + AB)Sa
RD-1176.3 Calculation Procedure. See Figures
RD-1176.1 through RD-1176.5.
(a) Determine design conditions, material properties,
and dimensions of flange, bolts, and gasket.
(b) Determine the lever arms of the inner and outer
parts of the gasket.
(C
)
h p Hp
Wm1 = Hp + H + H p
RD-1176.2 Allowable Flange Stress. The flange thickness shall be designed such that the allowable stress does
not exceed 0.001 times the modulus of the laminate used
to fabricate the flange. The design modulus shall be the
lower of the longitudinal and transverse moduli of the
flange laminate as determined by Article RT-7.
hG =
(hG
(f) Determine flange load, moments, and lever arms
HD =
HT = H
B)(2B + C)
6(B + C)
B2 p 4
HD
hD = R + 0.5g1
hG =
(A
C) (2A + C)
6 (C + A )
hT = 0.5 (R + g1 + hG)
(c) Determine the gasket dimensions
G = C
2hG
b = (C
B) 4
MD = HD hD
MT = HT hT
42
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Figure RD-1176.1
Design of Full‐Face Nozzle Flanges
Design Conditions
Gasket and Bolting Calculations
Design pressure, p
psi (kPa) Gasket details
G
C – 2hG
(C – B) /4
Design temp.
˚F (˚C)
b
Atmospheric temp.
˚F (˚C) Facing details
y
m
Flange material
Bolting material
A
B
Allowable Oper. temp.
bolt
Atm. temp.
stress
Allowable Oper. temp.
flange
stress Atm. temp
Bolting requirement
Am
(C – B)(2B + C)
6(B + C)
hG
C
Sb
psi (kPa) Hp
Sa
psi (kPa)
SFo
psi (kPa)
SFa
psi (kPa)
greater of
h ′G
2b Gmp
G
2
HGy
p
(A – C)(2A + C)
6(C + A)
b Gy
4
H ′Gy
hG
H
h ′G Gy
H ′p
hG
H
h ′G p
Wm 2
HGy + H ′Gy
Wm 1
Hp + H + H ′p
H
Wm 1
Wm 2
and
Sb
Sa
AB
Wa
0.5(Am + AB)Sa
Flange Moment at Operating Conditions
Flange Loads (Operating Condition)
Lever Arms
Flange Moments (Operating Condition)
HD
B 2p /4
hD
R + 0.5g 1
MD
HT
H – HD
hT
0.5(R + g 1 + hG)
HD
hD
MT
HT
hT
Mo
MD + MT
Flange Moment at Gasket Seating Conditions
Flange Load (Bolting-up Condition)
HG
Mmax
Wa – H
greater of Mo or Ma
Lever Arm
h ′′G
SFo
SFa
hGh ′G /(hG + h ′G)
Flange Moment (Bolting-up Condition)
MG
(Equivalent to checking for Mo at allowable flange
stress of SFo and separately for Ma at allowable
flange stress of SFa)
43
HG
h ′′G
M
Mmax
B
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Figure RD-1176.1
Design of Full‐Face Nozzle Flanges (Cont’d)
Longitudinal hub stress SH
Radial flange stress SR
Tangential flange stress ST
fM / g1
bM / lt
2
K
2
(MY /t 2) ZSR
Greater of 0.5 (SH + SR ) or 0.5(SH + ST)
Radial stress at bolt circle SRAD
6MG
t 2(p – d1)
A /B
T
h/ho
Z
F
Y
V
U
f
g1/go
e
d
2
U
hg
V o o
t (assumed)
44
ho
a
te + 1
b
4
g
a /T
d
t 3/d
l
g + d
N
d1
No. bolts
Dia. bolt holes
/3te + 1
Bgo
F/ho
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Figure RD-1176.2
Values of V
(Integral Flange Factor)
45
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Figure RD-1176.3
Values of F
(Integral Flange Factor)
46
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Figure RD-1176.4
Values of f
(Hub Stress Correction Factor)
47
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Figure RD-1176.5
Values of T, Z, Y, and U
(Terms Involving K)
SH = f M
g12 < allowable
SR =
t 2 < allowable
Mo = MD + MT
(g) Determine flange moment at gasket seating condition
HG = W
H
ST =
hG =
hG hG
hG + hG
M
(MY t 2)
ZSR < allowable
where
M = Mmax/B
MG = HGhG
RD-1180 DISCONTINUITY ANALYSIS —
METHOD B
(h) Assume a flange thickness t.
(i) Calculate stress and compare to allowable stress
6MG
SRAD = 2
< allowable
t ( C
Nd1)
RD-1180.1 Scope. Design to Method B requires detailed
stress analysis and evaluation of the results of this analysis
against the quadratic interaction strength criterion or the
quadratic interaction damage criterion. The stress
analysis and evaluation shall include the directional
48
ASME BPVC.X-2021
properties of the laminate and individual lamina and shall
take into account primary and secondary stresses caused
by gross structural discontinuities.
RD-1182.1 Discontinuity Analysis.
(a) The analysis of pressure vessels containing discontinuity areas shall be performed in a standard manner
similar to the analysis of any statically indeterminate
structure. The analysis is initiated by separating the
vessel into shell elements of simple geometry (such as
rings, cylinders, etc.) of which the structural behavior
is known. The pressure, mechanical, and thermal loads
acting on the structure shall be applied to the shell
elements with a system of forces required to maintain
the static equilibrium of each element. These loads and
forces cause individual element deformations, which in
general are not equal at the adjoining edges. The deformations at an element’s edge are defined as:
(1) radial displacement
(2) rotation of meridian tangent
A redundant moment and shear force must exist on the
edges of the elements in order to have compatibility of
deformations and restore continuity in the structure.
(b) At each juncture discontinuity, two equations shall
be written which express the equality of the combined
deformations due to all the applied loads and the redundant forces and moments.
One equation expresses the equality of rotation; the
other equation expresses the equality of displacement
of the adjacent elements. The resulting system of simultaneous equations shall be solved to obtain the redundant
moment and shear force at each juncture.
RD-1180.2 Design Parameters.
(a) Elastic constants at design temperature(s) shall be
used for calculations.
(b) Elastic constants of the laminate for use in Method B
shall be determined as specified in RD-1163.
(c) The lamina strength constants shall be determined
in accordance with Article RT-7. The lamina elastic
constants shall be determined in accordance with
Article RT-7 or Nonmandatory Appendix AK.
RD-1181 DEFINITIONS
(a) Gross structural discontinuity is defined as a source
of stress or strain intensification which affects a relatively
large portion of a structure and has a significant effect on
the overall stress or strain pattern or on the structure as a
whole.
Examples of gross structural discontinuities are head‐
to‐shell and flange‐to‐shell junctions, nozzles, and junctions between shells of different diameters or thickness.
(b) Local structural discontinuity is defined as a source
of stress or strain intensification which affects a relatively
small volume of material and does not have a significant
effect on the overall stress or strain pattern or on the structure as a whole.
Examples are small fillet radii and small attachments.
RD-1182.2 Procedure for Discontinuity Analysis. The
following are the basic steps to follow for determining the
redundant shear and moment that may exist at a pressure
vessel discontinuity.
(a) Separate the vessel into individual shell elements at
locations of discontinuity.
(b) Calculate the edge deformations of each element
caused by a unity shear force and a unit moment at
each edge. These values are known as influence coefficients.
The deformations due to local discontinuity shall be
included in the calculation of these coefficients as follows:
(c) Calculate the edge deformations of each element
caused by loads other than redundant loads.
(d) Calculate the edge deformations of each element
caused by the temperature distributions.
(e) At each juncture of two elements, equate the total
radial displacements and the total rotations of each
element.
(f) Solve the final system of simultaneous equations for
the redundant shears and moments.
RD-1182 STRESS ANALYSIS
A detailed stress analysis is required for all vessels
designed to Method B. The linear elastic stress analysis
shall include the effect of gross structural discontinuities.
Primary and secondary, normal and shear, and general
and local thermal stress shall be calculated for all
lamina. The effect of local structural discontinuities
need not be considered provided that all fillet radii are
1
∕2 in. (13 mm) or greater.
Analysis of the vessel under internal pressure is
required. In addition, the stresses and strains caused
by any combination of the loads listed in RD-120 and
in the Design Specification shall be computed when
such loads are expected to occur simultaneously
during normal operation or testing of the vessel. All
possible load combinations shall be considered. Stresses
and strains shall be determined from an analysis of the
vessel under combined loads or by superposition of
results from analyses of specific load combinations.
Stress analysis of pressure vessels is complex and will
normally require the use of a general‐purpose computer
program. Such programs will typically be based on finite
element, finite difference, or stiffness analysis techniques.
Such programs shall take into account the anisotropic
properties of the laminate.
RD-1182.3 Examples of Discontinuity Analysis.
Examples of discontinuity stress analysis for general
and specific geometries are contained in Articles AC-1
through AC-4. These examples are for vessels without
openings and fabricated from a single lamina of isotropic
material. For vessels with openings, complex geometries,
49
ASME BPVC.X-2021
or anisotropic materials of construction, hand calculations
become extremely difficult and computer-based analysis
methods are normally used.
During transient conditions, the temperature distribution and thermal stresses vary with time. The analysis,
therefore, requires consideration of the thermal stresses
as a function of time during the transient conditions.
RD-1183 EXTERNAL PRESSURE AND BUCKLING
RD-1186 ATTACHMENTS
The stress distributions resulting from external pressure or from loads which cause compressive stresses
shall satisfy the criteria of RD-1187 through RD-1189.
In addition, the calculated minimum buckling pressure
or load of the vessel shall be at least five times the
design external pressure or design load. The buckling
pressure shall be calculated using elastic properties at
the maximum specified operating temperature which
may occur when the external pressure is applied. For
domed heads and cylindrical and spherical shells fabricated of isotropic laminates, the minimum buckling
requirement shall be met by using the rules of
RD-1172 and RD-1173.
Many vessels are fabricated with anisotropic laminates.
Anisotropy has a strong influence on elastic stability and
shall be considered in Design Calculations.
Internal and external attachments [RD-1150(e)] shall
be designed by stress analysis. The effect of local structural discontinuities due to small attachments need not be
included in the stress analysis of the vessel if in the opinion
of the registered Professional Engineer they are not significant.
RD-1187 DESIGN ACCEPTABILITY
The requirements for an acceptable design are:
(a) the design shall be such that the stress at any point
in the vessel shall not exceed the limits stated in RD-1189;
(b) for configurations where compressive stress
occurs, design shall meet the requirements of RD-1183;
(c) the average shear stress between the vessel and
overlays (reinforcing pads, nozzle overlays, overlays
joining vessel parts, etc.) shall not exceed 200 psi (1.5
MPa);
(d) interlaminar shear between shell lamina need not
be considered.
RD-1184 OPENINGS AND JOINTS OF VESSEL
PARTS
Method B requires stress analysis of openings, nozzles,
and joints of vessel parts. Overlaps and reinforcing pads
shall be included in such analysis. Particular care shall be
taken to accurately determine shear stresses between the
vessel and overlaps, and between the vessel and reinforcing pads.
Reinforcement and overlays for nozzles and openings
may be designed according to the rules given in RD-1174,
provided that the openings meet the requirements of
RD-1174.1 and the design strain criteria requirements
of Method A. In this case the provisions of RD-1120(b)
shall apply.
RD-1188 BASIS FOR DETERMINING STRESSES
RD-1188.1 Quadratic Interaction Strength Criterion
and Quadratic Interaction Damage Criterion. The quadratic interaction criteria are used with the stiffness coefficients calculated according to Article RD-12 and the stress
resultants calculated according to RD-1180 through
RD-1186. The criteria determine whether the stress intensities at a point are within the permissible range.
Details of the quadratic interaction strength criterion
are given in RD-1188.2 through RD-1188.5, and details
of the quadratic interaction damage criterion are given
in RD-1188.6 through RD-1188.8.
RD-1185 THERMAL STRESSES
(a) Thermal stresses occur in a vessel, or part of a
vessel, when thermal displacements (expansions or
contractions) which would otherwise freely occur are
partially or completely restrained.
(b) Thermal displacements may be induced by
temperature distributions caused by heat transfer and
internal heat generation.
The modulus of elasticity and the coefficient of thermal
expansion for each lamina may be taken as constant at
their instantaneous values for the average temperature
range under consideration.
If the lower limit of the temperature range is ambient,
the instantaneous value of the coefficient of thermal
expansion for the average temperature coincides with
the mean coefficient of thermal expansion.
RD-1188.2 Mathematical Statement of the Quadratic
Interaction Strength Criterion. In general, a lamina has
five independent uniaxial ultimate strengths: tensile and
compressive strengths in the principal direction of greater
strength, tensile and compressive strengths in the direction of lesser strength, and shear strength with respect to a
pure shear stress in the principal directions. All mat
lamina are treated as isotropic and the strengths in all
directions are the same. In laminates containing unidirectional continuous roving, the principal direction of
greater strength is aligned with the continuous roving,
and the principal direction of lesser strength is perpendicular to the roving. Further, the five strength values may
be unequal.
50
ASME BPVC.X-2021
The quadratic interaction criterion defines the interactions between the five strengths in cases when more than
one component of stress is applied to the lamina, and it
defines allowable stress states in terms of the strengths.
The criterion is applied to each lamina separately, and if
one or more lamina fail the criterion, the corresponding
load on the vessel is not allowed. The criterion is applied
separately to each combination of stress or stresses and
moment resultants calculated by the rules of RD-1182. In
the following paragraphs it is assumed that the laminate
stiffness coefficients and stress and moment resultants
have already been calculated for all sections and load
combinations under consideration.
RD-1188.3 Nomenclature. In addition to the nomenclature defined in Article RD-12, the following symbols
are used:
Fxx, Fxy,
Fyy, Fss,
Fx, Fy = strength parameters defined in terms of the
five strengths
R = strength criterion stress ratio = 6
S = ultimate shear strength with respect to shear
stress in the x–y plane
Sij = the ij component of the compliance matrix
(the compliance matrix is the inverse of
the stiffness matrix)
w = parameter which equals 1 for the upper
surface of a lamina and −1 for the lower
X = ultimate tensile strength of a lamina in the x
(strong) direction
Xc = ultimate compressive strength of a lamina in
the x direction
Y = ultimate tensile strength of a lamina in the y
(weak) direction
Yc = ultimate compressive strength of a lamina in
the y direction
S11N1 + S12N2 + S13N6
S12N1 + S22N2 + S23N6
+ S24M1 + S25M2 + S26M6
(3)
K1 =
S14N1 + S24N2 + S34N6
+ S44M1 + S45M2 + S46M6
(4)
K2 =
S15N1 + S25N2 + S35N6
+ S45M1 + S55M2 + S56M6
(5)
K6 =
S16N1 + S26N2 + S36N6
+ S46M1 + S56M2 + S66M6
(6)
( 1)k = 1 +
(Zk +
Wt k
K1
2
(7)
( 2)k = 2 +
(Zk +
Wt k
K2
2
(8)
( 3)k = 3 +
(Zk +
Wt k
K6
2
(9)
)
)
)
Equations (7), (8), and (9) give strains at the upper
surface of the lamina when w = 1, and lower surface
strains when w = −1. The corresponding stresses are
then calculated from the strains and the reduced stiffnesses in the vessel coordinates, as follows:
(1)
( 1)k = Q11( 1)k + Q12( 2)k + Q16( 6)k
(10)
( 2)k = Q12( 1)k + Q 22( 2)k + Q 26( 6)k
(11)
( 6)k = Q16( 1)k + Q 26( 2)k + Q 66( 6)k
(12)
The final step in calculating the stresses is to express the
vessel coordinate lamina stress components in terms of
the principal material coordinate, in each of the lamina.
The so‐called on‐axis components of stress are given by
the usual transformation equations:
+ S14M1 + S15M2 + S16M6
2 =
S13N1 + S23N2 + S33N6
+ S34M1 + S35M2 + S36M6
The upper and lower surface strains in the vessel coordinate system are then obtained from:
RD-1188.4 Lamina Stresses and Strains. The first step
in using the quadratic interaction criterion is to compute
the upper and lower surface strains in each lamina. The
strains are computed from the reference surface strains
and curvatures, which are obtained from the force and
moment resultants by eqs. (1) through (6).
1 =
6 =
(2)
( x)k = ( 1)k mk2 + ( 2)k nk2
51
2( 6)k mk nk
(13)
ASME BPVC.X-2021
( y)
k
= ( 1)k mk2 + ( 2)k nk2 + 2( 6)k mk nk
( s)k =
ÄÅ
ÅÅ
ÅÅÇ
ÉÑ
( 1)k + ( 2)k ÑÑÑÑmk nk
Ö
+ ( 6)k mk2
nk2
(
the safety factor. The stress ratio is a generalization of
the safety factor when the lamina has orthotropic strength
properties.
(14)
RD-1188.6 Description of the Quadratic Interaction
Damage Criterion. The mathematical basis of the quadratic interaction damage criterion is the same as that given
in RD-1188.2 for the quadratic interaction strength
criterion.
The damage criterion uses the stress values determined
by Article RT-8 in place of the ultimate tensile, compressive, and shear stress values used for the strength
criterion. For contact-molded and filament-wound
lamina, the stress values shall be obtained according to
Article RT-8. For contact-molded lamina, flexural and
shear tests are required. The stress values for a filament-wound lamina are obtained from tests of a filament-wound cylinder. Tensile and compressive values
are assumed to have the same value for both contactmolded and filament-wound laminae.
The damage based design criterion corresponds to the
onset of significant structural damage in the laminate.
Tests have shown that onset of significant emission
from a laminate can be used as an approximate
measure of the endurance limit of the laminate under
the same loading. The damage based design criterion
is not the same as, and is not related to, the stress at
first cracking of the laminate.
Lamina stresses and strains shall be calculated as set out
in RD-1188.4.
(15)
)
RD-1188.5 The Quadratic Interaction Strength
Criterion. The quadratic interaction criterion required
by this Section is:
R2 Fxx x2 + 2Fxy x y + Fyy y2 + Fss s2
(
)
(
)
+ R Fx x + Fy y
(16)
1 = 0
where
1/S2
1/X − 1/Xc
1/XXc
Fxy FxxFyy , with Fxy taken to be −1∕2
Fy = 1/Y − 1/Yc
Fyy = 1/YYc
Fss
Fx
Fxx
Fxy
=
=
=
=
If the applied stress components lead to R = 1, then the
lamina will fail. If R > 1, the lamina will not fail. In the case
of a laminate isotropic in both strength and stiffness, R
reduces to the “safety factor” or the “design factor.”
The terms in the parentheses in eq. (16) contain the five
strength properties and the on‐axis stress components of a
lamina, which are known, and thus eq. (16) can be solved
for R. Let
RD-1188.7 Nomenclature. The following additional
symbols are used for the quadratic interaction damage
criterion.
G = Fxx x2 + 2Fxy x y + Fyy y2 + Fss s2
Rd = damage criterion stress ratio = 1.25
Sd = damage-based design value with respect to shear
stress in the x–y plane
Xd = tensile and compressive damage-based design
value in the x (strong) direction
Yd = tensile and compressive damage-based design
value in the y (weak) direction
Ψ = damage criterion design factor
H = Fx x + Fy y
Then the solution for R is the positive of the two values
given by
R =
H ±
H 2 + 4G
2G
(17)
RD-1188.8 The Quadratic Interaction Damage
Criterion. The quadratic interaction criterion required
by this Section is
l
2
2
2|
ij y yz
i y o
o
o
R d2 o
x y
oijj x yzz
jj zz + jjj s zzz o
(19)
j
z
m
+
}
1
j
z
j
z
j
z
o
2o
j
z
j
z
j
z
o
o
XdYd
Y
S
ok Xd {
o
k d{
k d{ ~
n
For each stress state under consideration, R shall be
equal to or greater than the value required by RD-1189.
As a special case for laminates which are isotropic in
both stiffness and strength, the quadratic interaction
criterion reduces to
X
R =
(18)
2
2
2 S2 2 1 2
x
x y + y + X
s
(
The damage criterion design factor compensates for
approximations in the test technique used to determine
damage based design values. The damage criterion design
factor shall be taken as 0.75.
)
Equation (18) computes R as a function of the stresses at
the point under consideration and the ultimate tensile
strength of the laminate. It will be recognized that R is
52
ASME BPVC.X-2021
The computation set out in RD-1188.5 and RD-1189(a)
through RD-1189(e) shall be performed. Each lamina shall
be evaluated against the criterion expressed by eq. (19).
defined value for each load combination required by
RD-1182, and at every point in the pressure‐containing
parts of the vessel.
The following computation shall be performed for each
set of superposed stress resultants required by RD-1182.
The referenced equations are given in RD-1188.
(a) Compute the reference surface strains, curvatures,
and twist using eqs. RD-1188.4(1) through RD-1188.4(6).
These are in the vessel coordinates.
(b) For the upper and lower surface of each lamina,
calculate the strains in vessel coordinates using
eqs. RD-1188.4(7) through RD-1188.4(9).
(c) Calculate the stresses in vessel coordinates at the
upper and lower surface of each lamina from the results of
(b) above using eqs. RD-1188.4(10) through
RD-1188.4(12).
(d) Transform the stresses computed in (c) above to
on‐axis coordinates using eqs. RD-1188.4(13) through
RD-1188.4(15). Each lamina may have a different k.
(e) Calculate the stress ratio for each lamina using
eqs. RD-1188.5(16) and RD-1188.5(17), or eq.
RD-1188.8(19).
RD-1189 PROCEDURE FOR CALCULATING THE
STRESS RATIO
For the quadratic interaction strength criterion, eqs.
RD-1188.5(16) and RD-1188.5(17) [and eq.
RD-1188.5(18) as a special case] in RD-1188.5 define
the stress ratio. For the quadratic interaction damage
criterion, eq. RD-1188.8(19) defines the stress ratio.
The stress ratio is an extension of the concept of
design factor to laminates which require five independent
constants to define their strength, rather than the single
independent strength of an isotropic material. If the state
of stress at any point in any lamina comprising a portion of
a pressure‐containing part of the vessel results in a stress
ratio of less than that defined in RD-1188.3 for design to
the quadratic interaction strength criterion, or RD-1188.7
for design to the quadratic interaction damage criterion,
then the state of stress is excessive and the corresponding
load is not allowed. The stress ratio shall be at least the
53
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RD-12
LAMINATE STIFFNESS COEFFICIENTS
Ef1 = effective flexural modulus of the laminate in
the longitudinal off‐axis direction
Ef2 = effective flexural modulus of the laminate in
the transverse (hoop) off‐axis direction
Es = shear modulus of an orthotropic lamina in the
principal coordinates
Ex = Young’s modulus of an orthotropic lamina in
the principal direction of the greater modulus
Ey = Young’s modulus of an orthotropic lamina in
the principal direction of the lesser modulus
Kx = midplane curvature in the x direction
Kxy = midplane twist
Ky = midplane curvature in the y direction
M1 = moment resultant about x axis (Figure
RD-1220.1)
M2 = moment resultant about y axis (Figure
RD-1220.1)
M6 = twisting resultant (Figure RD-1220.2)
N1 = force resultant in x direction (Figure
RD-1220.2)
N2 = force resultant in y direction (Figure
RD-1220.2)
N6 = in‐plane shear force resultant (Figure
RD-1220.2)
Qij = reduced stiffness transformed to the vessel
(x–y) axes (off‐axes directions); i, j = 1, 2, 6
Qxx, Qxy,
Qyy, Qss = reduced stiffness in the principal material
direction, defined by eqs. RD-1230(4)
through RD-1230(8) (on‐axis directions)
tk = thickness of the kth layer
Zk = distance from the reference surface to the
center of the kth layer
θ = angle between the x coordinate axis and the 1
coordinate axis (see Figures RD-1220.1,
RD-1220.2, and RD-1220.3)
νx = principal Poisson’s ratio of a lamina. It is the
negative of strain in the 2 direction from
stress in the 1 direction.
σi = normal stress in the i direction
σs, σ6 = shear stress in the i–j coordinate system
ϵi = normal strain of a layer in the i direction
= midplane normal strain in direction i of the
i
laminate
RD-1200 LAMINATE STIFFNESS
COEFFICIENTS
For purposes of this Section, laminate theory is a mathematical treatment of the mechanics of laminate
constructed of plies with unidirectional fiber reinforcement, plies of isotropic material, or an arbitrary combination of the two.
Article RD-12 provides a set of equations, derived by
laminate theory, which shall be used to compute the
elastic stiffness coefficients needed to perform design
by stress analysis, as specified in RD-1163.
Other valid statements of laminate theory may be used
in place of the equations herein, but it is the responsibility
of the registered Professional Engineer to show that the
equations reduce to the equations below.
The laminate analysis method consists of determining
the physical and mechanical properties of each layer of a
laminate and uses weighted averaging techniques to
determine the physical and mechanical properties of
the total laminate.
Calculation of laminate properties according to
Article RD-12 is required.
RD-1210 STIFFNESS COEFFICIENTS FOR
DESIGN BY METHOD B RULES
This Article gives the equations required for calculating
the stiffness coefficients needed to design vessel parts
according to Method B design rules.
Other valid statements of laminate analysis may be used
in place of the equations herein, but it is the responsibility
of the registered Professional Engineer to show that they
can be mathematically derived from the equations herein.
RD-1220 NOMENCLATURE
The symbols used in this Article are defined below.
(Qij)k = transformed reduced stiffness of the kth layer
Aij = extensional stiffness coefficients defined by
eq. RD-1240(28); i, j = 1, 2, 6
Bij = coupling stiffness coefficients defined by
eq. RD-1240(30); i, j = 1, 2, 6
Dij = bending stiffness coefficients defined by
eq. RD-1240(29); i, j = 1, 2, 6
54
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Figure RD-1220.1
Moment Resultants
Figure RD-1220.2
In‐Plane Force Resultants
55
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Figure RD-1220.3
Coordinate Systems
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) The 1–2 coordinates are called off-axis or vessel coordinates.
(b) The x–y coordinates are called on-axis or principal material coordinates.
ϵ6, ϵs = shear strain in the i–j coordinate system of a
layer
= midplane shear strain of the laminate
,
6 s
RD-1230 LAMINA REDUCED STIFFNESS
The stress–strain relations in the principal material
directions of an orthotropic lamina are as follows:
(1)
x = Q xx x + Q xy y
y = Q xy x + Q yy y
(2)
Q xx = mEx
(5)
Q xy = m yEx
(6)
Q yy = mE y
(7)
Q ss = Es
(8)
where νy = νx Ey/Ex.
In an isotropic lamina, Ex = Ey = E and νx = νy = ν. Then
(3)
s = Q ss s
G12 = G = E 2(1 +
(1
)
x y
1
(9)
The reduced stiffnesses in an isotropic layer are
computed from:
The reduced stiffnesses of a lamina are calculated from
the elastic properties, Ex, Ey, νx, and Es. These properties
shall be determined in accordance with Article RT-7 or
Nonmandatory Appendix AK. The required input information for each layer is the fiber weight per unit area, the
tensile modulus of the resin matrix, the type of roving, and
the fiber density.
A step‐by‐step procedure for lamina with unidirectional
roving is as follows:
m =
)
Q11 = Q 22 = E
Q12 =
(1
Q11
Q 66 = G
(4)
56
2
)
(10)
(11)
(12)
ASME BPVC.X-2021
The transformed reduced stiffnesses are the reduced
stiffnesses expressed in the 1–2 system. The relationship
between the x–y and 1–2 axis systems is shown in
Figure RD-1220.3. The 1–2 system is in the plane of
the laminate and is chosen for convenience. A typical
choice for a cylindrical vessel would be to align 1 with
the axial direction and 2 with the circumferential direction. The transformed reduced stiffnesses Qij are calculated from the reduced stiffnesses Qij and the angle θ.
Let m = cos θ and n = sin θ. Then the equations for
the transformed reduced stiffnesses are:
RD-1240 STIFFNESS COEFFICIENTS FOR THE
LAMINATE
The stiffness coefficients Aij, Bij, and Dij are required for
analysis. They are used to relate the resultant forces and
moments ( Figure RD-1220.1 and Figure RD-1220.2) to
the middle surface strains and curvatures.
N1 =
A11 1o + A12 2o + A16 o6
(22)
+ B11 K1 + B12 K2 + B16 K 6
Q11 = Q xxm4 + Q yyn4 + 2Q xym2n2 + 4Q ssm2n2 (13)
N2 =
A12 1o + A22 2o + A26 6o
(23)
+ B12 K1 + B22 K2 + B26 K 6
Q xx m2n2 + Q yy m2n2
Q12 =
+ Q xy m4 + n4
(
)
(14)
4Q ss m2n2
Q 22 = Q xxn4 + Q yym4 + 2Q xym2n2 + 4Q ssm2n2 (15)
N6 =
A16 1o + A26 2o + A 66 6o
+ B16 K1 + B26 K2 + B66 K 6
M1 =
B11 1o + B12 2o + B16 6o
(24)
(25)
+ D11 K1 + D12 K2 + D16 K 6
Q16 = Q xx m3n
mn3
(
Q yy mn3 +
(16)
m3n
)
Q 26 = Q xx mn3
m3n
(Q xy + 2Q ss)
Q yy m3n +
(
mn3
Q 66 =
2 2
(Q xy + 2Q ss)
(17)
)
Q xx m n
+ Q ss
m2
(
2 2
+ Q yy m n
B12 1o + B22 2o + B26 6o
+ D12 K1 + D22 K2 + D26 K 6
(26)
M6 =
B16 1o + B26 2o + B66 6o
+ D16 K1 + D26 K2 + D66 K 6
(27)
The extensional stiffness coefficients are calculated
from the transformed reduced stiffnesses for each
layer (Qij)k, the thicknesses tk, and the distance Zk. The
location of the reference plane in the z direction does
not affect the validity of the equations in the paragraph.
However, it shall coincide with the neutral axis, or the
plane to which the stress resultants and moments are
referred.
2 2
2Q xy m n
2
n2
M2 =
(18)
)
The stress–strain relations for the lamina in the 1–2
coordinates are:
(19)
1 = Q11 1 + Q12 2 + Q16 6
N
A ij =
k=1
2 = Q12 1 + Q 22 2 + Q 26 6
(20)
6 = Q16 1 + Q 26 2 + Q 66 6
(21)
(Q ij)k tk
where
i = 1, 2, 6
j = 1, 2, 6
N = number of layers
In an isotropic laminate, the reduced stiffnesses have
the same value for any value of θ, so that the stress–strain
relation for the 1–2 system has the same form as eqs. (1),
(2), and (3).
The coupling stiffnesses are obtained from:
57
(28)
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Figure RD-1250.1
Geometry of an N‐Layered Laminate
N
Bij =
k=1
(Q ij)k Zktk
(a) From the known layer thicknesses and laminating
sequence, calculate the N tk and Zk.
(b) For each layer, given (Ex)k, (Ey)k, (νx)k, and (Es)k,
compute the reduced stiffnesses (Qxx)k, (Qxy)k, and (Es)k
from eqs. RD-1230(4) through RD-1230(8). For isotropic
plies, use eqs. RD-1230(9) through RD-1230(12).
(c) Transform the reduced stiffness (Qij)k for each layer
from the principal material directions to the vessel directions, using eqs. RD-1230(13) through RD-1230(18), to
obtain the transformed reduced stiffness for each layer
(Qij)k. In the case of isotropic layers, the transformation
is not required, because eqs. RD-1230(1), RD-1230(2),
and RD-1230(3) are valid for all angles θ;
(d) Calculate the extensional stiffness coefficients Aij
for the entire laminate from the (Q i j ) k , t k , and
eq. RD-1240(28).
(e) Calculate the coupling stiffness coefficients Bij for
the laminate from the (Qij)k, tk, Zk, and eq. RD-1240(29).
(f) Calculate the bending stiffness coefficients Dij for the
laminate from the (Qij)k, tk, Zk, and eq. RD-1240(30).
(29)
where
i = 1, 2, 6
j = 1, 2, 6
The bending stiffnesses are obtained from:
N
Dij =
k=1
(Q ij)k (tkZk2
)
+ t k3 12
(30)
where
i = 1, 2, 6
j = 1, 2, 6
RD-1250 PROCEDURE FOR CALCULATING
THE STIFFNESS COEFFICIENTS11
The following is a step‐by‐step algorithm for calculating
the laminate stiffness coefficients (Figure RD-1250.1).
58
ASME BPVC.X-2021
PART RF
FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS
ARTICLE RF-1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
(c) The Procedure Specification for Class II vessels
(Form Q-120) requires that the Fabricator establish
the design of the vessel in accordance with Article
RD-11 based on the elastic and strength constants for
the specific combinations of fiber, resin, ply sequence,
and ply orientations used for the vessel laminate. Any
variation in materials used to fabricate the vessel or
vessel part from those materials used to determine the
elastic and strength constants upon which the Design
Calculations were based shall require that new elastic
constants be obtained and new Design Calculations
made. Any variation in the ply sequence or ply orientation
made in the fabrication of the vessel or vessel part that
differs from the ply sequence and orientation specified in
the qualified Procedure Specification and upon which the
Design Calculations were based shall require that new
calculations be made.
The new calculations shall satisfy the User’s Design
Specification and the requirements of this Section. The
Procedure Specification shall be amended to reflect the
actual fabrication and the Design Report amended to
reflect the design basis.
RF-100 SCOPE
This Part provides rules governing the fabrication of
fiber‐reinforced plastic pressure vessels. The fabrication
processes are limited to the bag‐molding, centrifugal‐
casting, contact‐molding, and filament‐winding processes
for Class I vessels, and limited to contact molding and filament winding for Class II vessels.
RF-110 PROCEDURE SPECIFICATIONS
(a) For every combination of fabrication method,
Design Specification, and material variation employed
in fabricating vessels to be marked with the Certification
Mark, the Fabricator shall prepare a Procedure Specification which shall be qualified in accordance with Part RQ of
this Section before it is used to fabricate vessels to be so
marked.
(b) Any essential variation from the Procedure Specification for Class I vessels (see RQ-200, RQ-300, RQ-400,
and RQ-500) shall require that the Procedure Specification be rewritten and requalified before being used to
fabricate vessels to be marked with the Certification Mark.
59
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RF-2
SPECIAL FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS FOR BAG‐MOLDING
PROCESS (FOR CLASS I VESSELS ONLY)
(b) The flat mats for cylindrical reinforcement shall be
laid up in a staggered pattern and rolled on a mandrel prior
to assembly into the mold (see Figure RF-210.1).
(c) The head or end preforms shall be made by depositing chopped fiber from an airstream with one of the resin
systems specified in RM-120 dispersed in the fiber (see
Figure RF-210.2).
RF-200 FIBER CONTENT
The composite structure shall consist of random short
length12 fiber filaments in a resin matrix. The weight of the
fiber reinforcement shall conform to that set forth in the
Procedure Specification (see Form Q-106) within a tolerance of +20% and −0%. Supplementary pads used to give
greater wall thickness at openings and attachments shall
have a fiber content not less than 35% by weight.
RF-211 RESIN SYSTEM
The resin system shall be one of the resin systems specified in RM-120 and as required for the particular service
conditions specified in the Design Specification and by the
qualified Procedure Specification. No filler, pigment, or
dye additions shall be used which will interfere with
the natural color of the resin except as permitted by
the Procedure Specification.
RF-201 FIBER COMPOSITION
One or more of the fiber types stipulated in RM-110 and
specified in the Procedure Specification shall be used for
reinforcement.
RF-210 FORM OF FIBER REINFORCEMENT
(a) The fiber reinforcement shall consist of mats or
preforms made from chopped fiber strands. The percentage of resin binder shall not exceed 10% by weight in mat
or preform.
RF-212 CURE
If other than ambient temperature cure is required, the
design and operation of the curing equipment shall assure
uniform heating over the entire surface of the pressure
Figure RF-210.2
Head or End Preform for Cylindrical Vessel
Figure RF-210.1
Fiber Side Wall Lay‐Up for Bag Molding
60
ASME BPVC.X-2021
vessel and vessel parts. The curing time and temperature
shall conform to those stipulated in the qualified Procedure Specification (see Form Q-106).
RF-230 LINERS
RF-231 LINER MATERIAL
Liners, when used, may be made of elastomeric or
plastic material. When such liner materials are used,
the liner may be used as the pressure bag. Alternatively,
liners may be applied to the completed vessel.
RF-220 MOLDS
RF-221 MOLD MATERIAL
The molds for pressure bag molding of pressure vessels
and vessel parts may be fabricated of any material or
combination of materials. The molds shall have sufficient
dimensional stability to withstand the bag pressure loads
during the forming and cure cycles.
RF-232 PROVISIONS IN LINERS FOR OPENINGS IN
VESSELS
Liners shall be designed so that they extend completely
through all access openings in the vessel.
RF-222 MOLD RELEASE AGENT
RF-240 OPENINGS IN VESSELS
The surface of the mold in contact with the vessel or
vessel part shall be treated with a suitable release
agent to facilitate removal of the vessel or part from
the mold. Such release agent shall not be detrimental
to the vessel or part.
RF-223 MOLD REMOVAL
The number, size, and location of openings in bag‐
molded vessels shall meet the requirements of the
Design Specification. The adequacy of reinforcement, if
any, for such openings shall be determined by the test
and design criteria required by RD-160 to prove
design adequacy.
The mold may be removed from the vessel, or vice versa,
by any technique which will not damage the vessel.
RF-250 MOLDED‐IN FITTINGS
Openings less than NPS 11∕2 (DN 40) may be fabricated
by molding around a removable insert form, provided the
molding operation is detailed in the Procedure Specification and subsequent proof of design adequacy is demonstrated in accordance with RD-160.
RF-224 PRESSURE BAGS
The pressure bags used to compress the fiber reinforcement mats and preforms and to hold the fiber and resin in
position during the curing cycle may be made of any flexible material that the molding resin will not attack, or
which can be protected from such attack by a suitable
material.
61
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RF-3
SPECIAL FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS FOR CENTRIFUGAL‐
CASTING PROCESS (FOR CLASS I VESSELS ONLY)
RF-300 FIBER CONTENT
RF-322 MANDREL RELEASE AGENT
The composite structure shall consist of random short
length12 fiber filaments in a resin matrix. The weight of the
fiber reinforcement shall conform to that set forth in the
Procedure Specification (see Form Q-106) within a tolerance of +10% and −0%. Supplementary pads used to give
greater wall thickness at openings and attachments shall
have a fiber content not less than 35% by weight.
The mandrel shall be treated with a suitable release
agent to facilitate removal of the cured cylinder. Such
release agent shall not be detrimental to the cylinder.
RF-323 MANDREL REMOVAL
The cylinder may be removed from the mandrel, or vice
versa, by any technique which will not damage the cylinder.
RF-301 FIBER COMPOSITION
One or more of the fiber types complying with the
composition stipulated in RM-110 and specified in the
qualified Procedure Specification shall be used for reinforcement.
RF-324 MATCHED‐DIE‐MOLDED HEADS
Matched‐die‐molded heads used as closures for centrifugally cast cylinders shall be fabricated in accordance
with the requirements of Article RF-6.
RF-310 FORM OF REINFORCEMENT
RF-330 LINERS
The fiber reinforcement for centrifugally cast cylinders
shall consist of chopped fiber strands or rovings. Fabrication of heads shall comply with RF-210(c).
RF-331 LINER MATERIAL
Liners, when used, may be made of elastomeric or
plastic material. The liner may be applied to the centrifugally cast cylinder after its heads are attached by adhesive bonding.
RF-311 RESIN SYSTEM
The resin system shall be one of the resin systems specified in RM-120 and as required for the particular service
conditions specified in the Design Specification and by the
Procedure Specification. No filler, pigment, or dye additions shall be used which will interfere with the
natural color of the resin except as permitted by the Procedure Specification.
RF-332 PROVISIONS IN LINERS FOR VESSEL
OPENINGS
Liners shall be designed so that they extend completely
through all access openings in the vessel.
RF-312 CURE
RF-340 OPENINGS IN VESSELS
If other than ambient temperature cure is employed, the
design and operation of the curing equipment shall assure
uniform heating over the entire cylinder. The curing times
and temperatures shall comply with the qualified Procedure Specification (see Form Q-106).
The number, size, and location of openings in centrifugally cast cylinders and attached heads shall meet the requirements of the User’s Design Specification and this
Section. The adequacy of reinforcement, if any, for
such openings shall be determined by the tests required
by RD-160 to prove design adequacy.
RF-320 MANDRELS
RF-321 MANDREL MATERIAL
The mandrel shall be fabricated of any material or
combination of materials of sufficient rigidity and dimensional stability to withstand the centrifugal‐casting loads
and the curing cycle.
62
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RF-4
SPECIAL FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS FOR
FILAMENT‐WINDING PROCESS (CLASSES I AND II)
natural color of the resin except as permitted by the Procedure Specification.
RF-400 FIBER CONTENT
The composite structure shall consist of fiber strands in
a resin matrix. The weight of the fiber reinforcement shall
comply with the qualified Procedure Specification (see
Form Q-107 for Class I vessels and Form Q-120 for
Class II vessels) with a tolerance of +10% and −0%.
RF-412 CURE
If other than ambient temperature cure is employed, the
design and operation of the curing equipment shall
provide uniform heating over the entire surface of the
vessel. Heating may be done from the inside or outside
of the pressure vessel or from both inside and outside.
The cure times and temperatures shall comply with
those stipulated in the qualified Procedure Specification
(see Form Q-107 for Class I vessels and Form Q-120 for
Class II vessels).
RF-400.1 Fiber Content in Supplementary Pads.
Supplementary pads used to give greater wall thickness
at openings and attachments shall have a fiber content not
less than 35% by weight.
RF-401 FIBER COMPOSITION
One or more of the fiber types complying with the
composition stipulated in RM-110 and specified in the
qualified Procedure Specification shall be used for reinforcement of filament‐wound pressure vessels.
RF-413 FILAMENT WINDING
(a) Tensioning. Tension on the strands of filaments
during the winding operation shall be controlled to
assure uniformly stressed filaments in the composite wall.
(b) Winding Speed. The speed of winding shall be
limited only by the ability to
(1) meet the tensioning requirements
(2) comply with the specified winding pattern
(3) ensure adequate resin impregnation
(c) Bandwidth and Spacing. The bandwidth and spacing
shall comply with those specified in the qualified Procedure Specification.
RF-410 FORM OF REINFORCEMENT
RF-410.1 Patterns. Specific winding patterns for the
continuous fiber strands shall be used as defined in
the qualified Procedure Specification (see Form Q-107
for Class I vessels and Form Q-120 for Class II
vessels). Any winding pattern which places the filaments
in the desired orientation and is designated in the Procedure Specification may be used.
RF-410.2 Alignment With Stresses. The patterns shall
be arranged so that the stressed filaments are aligned to
resist the principal stresses which result from internal
pressure and other loadings.
RF-420 MANDRELS
RF-421 MANDREL MATERIAL
RF-410.3 Wall Thickness. The wall thickness shall be
governed by the number of layers of wound strands of
filaments specified in the qualified Procedure Specification for the particular vessel.
The mandrel may be fabricated of any material or
combination of materials with sufficient rigidity and
dimensional stability to resist the winding loads and
the compressive loads on the mandrel which occur
during the cure cycle.
RF-411 RESIN SYSTEM
RF-422 MANDREL RELEASE AGENT
The resin system shall be one of the resin systems specified in RM-120 and as required for the particular service
conditions specified by the Design Specification and qualified Procedure Specification. No filler, pigment, or dye
additions shall be used which will interfere with the
The mandrel, if removed, may be treated with a suitable
release agent to facilitate its removal from the cured pressure vessel. Such release agent shall not be detrimental to
the finished vessel.
63
ASME BPVC.X-2021
(d) The design of metallic liners shall take into account
the pronounced difference in the modulus of elasticity of
the laminate and the metallic liner.
(e) For vessels used for potable water, as described in
RG-113 (Section IV Application), the liner materials may
be those listed in Section IV, HLW‐200 or shall be suitable
for potable water applications as demonstrated by
approval of the material by the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) in accordance with NSF Standard 14.
RF-423 MANDREL REMOVAL
The mandrel shall be removed by any technique which
shall not damage the filament‐wound composite or the
liner, if one is present.
RF-430 LINERS
RF-431 LINER MATERIAL
Liners, when used, may be made of elastomeric, plastic,
or metallic materials. The liner may be applied to the
mandrel prior to the start of the winding operation.
(a) If applied to the mandrel before the winding operation begins, the thickness and hardness of the liner material shall be such that the filament orientation and tension
will not be adversely affected by deflection or “flow” of the
liner material.
(b) Alternatively, the liner may be applied to the
completed filament‐wound pressure vessel, in which
case the restrictions on thickness and hardness do not
apply.
(c) If the liner is required to be bonded to the filament‐
wound composite, the outer liner surface shall be treated
to facilitate such bonding.
RF-432 PROVISIONS IN LINERS FOR VESSEL
OPENINGS
Liners shall be designed so that they extend completely
through all access openings in the vessel.
RF-440 OPENINGS IN VESSELS
The number, size, and location of openings in filament‐
wound pressure vessels classified by RG-404.1 shall meet
the requirements of the User’s Design Specification. If any
opening reinforcement is used, the design adequacy shall
be determined by RD-160 for Class I vessels. For Class II
vessels the reinforcement shall comply with the design
criteria of Article RD-11 and acceptance testing criteria
of Article RT-6.
64
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RF-5
SPECIAL FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS FOR
CONTACT‐MOLDING PROCESS (CLASSES I AND II)
fere with the natural color of the resin except as permitted
by the Procedure Specification.
RF-500 FIBER CONTENT
The composite structure shall consist of random short
length12 fiber filaments and roving (or biaxial fabric,
singular or in combination) in a resin matrix. The
weight of the fiber reinforcement shall comply with
the qualified Procedure Specification (see Form Q-108
for Class I vessels and Form Q-120 for Class II vessels)
within a tolerance of +10% and −0%. Supplementary
pads used to give greater wall thickness at openings
and attachments shall have a fiber content not less
than 35% by weight.
RF-512 CURE
The cure procedure and post cure if required shall
comply with those stipulated in the qualified Procedure
Specification (see Form Q-108 for Class I vessels and Form
Q-120 for Class II vessels).
RF-520 MOLDS
RF-521 MOLD MATERIAL
RF-501 FIBER COMPOSITION
The molds for contact molding of pressure vessels may
be fabricated of any material or combination of materials.
The molds shall have sufficient dimensional stability to
withstand the contact‐molding operation and cure or
post cure procedures.
One of the fiber types complying with the composition
stipulated in RM-110 and as specified in the qualified
Procedure Specification shall be used for reinforcement.
RF-510 FORM OF FIBER REINFORCEMENT
RF-522 MOLD RELEASE AGENT
(a) The fiber reinforcement shall consist of random
short length fiber filaments and roving (or biaxial
fabrics) as specified in RF-501.
(b) Flat mats for cylindrical reinforcement shall be laid
up as separate layers and overlapped in a staggered
pattern. Resin shall be applied to each layer in such a
manner as to wet out completely.
(c) On cylindrical components, the orientation of the
warp and weft fiber stands of woven roving (or biaxial
fabrics) shall be defined with respect to the circumferential (hoop) and longitudinal (axial) axis of the cylindrical
component.
(d) On elliptical or hemispherical shapes, the orientation of the warp and weft fiber stands of woven roving (or
biaxial fabrics) shall be defined with respect to the meridional and circumferential axis.
The surface of the mold in contact with the vessel shall
be treated with a suitable release agent to facilitate
removal from the mold. Such release agent shall not be
detrimental to the finished vessel.
RF-523 MOLD REMOVAL
The mold may be removed from the vessel, or vice versa,
by any technique which will not damage the vessel.
RF-530 LINERS
RF-531 LINER MATERIAL
(a) Liners for Class I vessels, when used, may be made
of metallic, elastomeric, thermoset, or thermoplastic
materials.
(b) Liners for Class II vessels, when used, may be made
of either thermoset or thermoplastic materials.
RF-511 RESIN SYSTEM
The resin system shall be one or more of the resins
specified in RM-120 and as required for the particular
service conditions specified in the Design Specification
and by the qualified Procedure Specification. No filler,
pigment, or dye additions shall be used which will inter-
RF-532 PROVISIONS IN LINERS FOR OPENINGS IN
VESSELS
Liners shall be designed so that they extend completely
through all access openings in the vessel.
65
ASME BPVC.X-2021
the design adequacy shall be determined by RD-160 for
Class I vessels. For Class II vessels the reinforcement shall
comply with the design criteria of Article RD-11 and the
acceptance criteria of Article RT-6.
RF-540 OPENINGS IN VESSELS
The number, size, and location of openings in contact‐
molded vessels shall meet the requirements of the User’s
Design Specification. If any opening reinforcement is used,
66
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RF-6
SPECIAL FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS FOR MATCHED
MOLDED HEADS (USED FOR CLOSURES FOR CENTRIFUGALLY
CAST VESSELS — FOR CLASS I VESSELS ONLY)
RF-600 CONTENT
RF-601 FIBER COMPOSITION
The composite structure shall consist of random short
length12 fiber filaments in a resin matrix. The weight of the
fiber reinforcement shall comply with the qualified Procedure Specification (see Form Q-106) within a tolerance
of +20% and −0%. Supplementary pads used to give
greater wall thickness at openings and attachments
shall have a fiber content not less than 35% by weight.
One or more of the fiber types complying with the
composition stipulated in RM-110 and as specified in
the qualified Procedure Specification shall be used for reinforcement.
RF-610 FORM OF FIBER REINFORCEMENT
(a) The fiber reinforcement shall consist of preforms or
preforms and inserts made from chopped fiber strands.
The percentage of resin shall not exceed 10% by weight in
the preforms or inserts.
(b) Inserts, if used, shall be tapered to a feather edge to
blend smoothly into the preform (see Figure RF-610.1).
(c) The head or end preforms shall be made by depositing chopped fibers from an airstream with a suitable
resin binder dispersed in the fiber.
(d) The insert may consist of one or more preforms to
obtain the required thickness. These inserts may or may
not be on the axis of the vessel, depending on port or
opening requirements (see Figure RF-610.2).
(e) Rings of continuous rovings molded into heads to
reinforce holes are permissible.
Figure RF-610.1
Fiber Preform and Insert for Head for Centrifugally Cast
Vessel
RF-611 RESIN SYSTEM
The resin system shall be one of the resin systems specified in RM-120 and as required for the particular service
conditions specified in the Design Specification and by the
qualified Procedure Specification. No filler, pigment, or
dye additions shall be used which will interfere with
the natural color of the resin except as permitted by
the Procedure Specification.
RF-612 CURE
If other than ambient temperature cure is employed, the
design and operation of the curing equipment shall assure
uniform heating over the entire surface of the head. The
curing times and temperatures shall conform to those
stipulated in the qualified Procedure Specification (see
Form Q-106).
67
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Figure RF-610.2
Fiber Head or End Preformed Inserts for Centrifugally
Cast Vessel Heads
RF-621 MOLD MATERIAL
The molds may be fabricated of any material or combination of materials. The molds shall have sufficient dimensional stability to withstand the pressure loads during the
forming and cure cycles.
RF-622 MOLD RELEASE AGENT
The surfaces of the mold in contact with the head shall
be treated with a suitable release agent to facilitate
removal of the head from the mold. Such release agent
shall not be detrimental to the heads.
RF-623 HEAD REMOVAL
The head may be removed from the mold by any technique which will not damage the head.
RF-624 PRESSURE BAGS
A pressure bag used in lieu of the male mold to compress
the fiber preform assembly and hold the fiber and resin in
position during the curing cycle may be made of any flexible material that the molding resin will not attack or
which can be protected from such attack by a suitable
material.
RF-620 MOLDS
RF-630 OPENINGS IN HEADS
Heads used as closures for centrifugally cast vessels
may be molded by either:
(a) matched molds in which both male and female are
rigid and uniformly heated; or
(b) matched molds in which the female mold is
uniformly heated and the male mold is a pressure bag.
The number, size, and location of openings in heads
shall meet the requirements of the User’s Design Specification. The adequacy of reinforcement, if any, for
such openings shall be determined by the tests required
by RD-160 to prove design adequacy.
68
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RF-7
SPECIAL FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS FOR JOINING
COMPONENTS
Specification, shall require requalification of the design
and the Procedure Specification.
(b) Longitudinal seams made by any joining method
are prohibited.
(c) Adhesive bonding of the type whereby mating
surfaces of two parts are joined by a thin adhesive or
glue joint shall be limited to Class I vessels (see Form
Q-115).
(d) Joining of Class II vessel parts shall be limited to
secondary overlay bonding as described in Article RD-11.
RF-700 PROCEDURE SPECIFICATIONS AND
QUALIFICATIONS
(a) When the fabricating process includes joining of
parts such as heads, or when it is desired to join two
or more cylinders to produce a long shell, the Procedure
Specification shall include full details of the joining
process. Any variation in the design of the joints being
bonded, outside of those inherent in the process of
forming the surfaces to be bonded, and any variation
in the method used as set forth in the qualified Procedure
69
ASME BPVC.X-2021
PART RQ
QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
ARTICLE RQ-1
SCOPE
RQ-100 RESPONSIBILITY FOR
QUALIFICATION
RQ-110 MAINTENANCE OF PROCEDURE
SPECIFICATION AND QUALIFICATION
RECORDS
Each Fabricator shall be responsible for qualifying the
designs and the Procedure Specifications used in fabricating fiber‐reinforced plastic pressure vessels and
parts of vessels.
The Fabricator shall maintain records of the procedures
used in fabricating vessels and vessel parts and in bonding
vessel parts together. For Class I vessels, the Fabricator
shall also maintain records of the tests and their results by
which the Procedure Specifications were qualified for use
in fabrication. For Class II vessels, the Fabricator shall
maintain the records of Design Calculations, coupon
tests from which elastic and strength constants were
obtained, the Procedure Specifications that detail the
materials used and the laminate ply sequence and ply
orientation, fabrication procedures and quality control
records, and the test results per Article RT-6. Such
records shall be dated and shall be certified by the Fabricator and verified by the Inspector (see RI-110). The Fabricator shall keep these records on file for at least 5 yr and in
the case of mass‐produced Class I vessels, the Fabricator
shall keep these records on file for at least 5 yr after the
production of such vessels has ceased.
RQ-101 FABRICATION PROCESSES
The fabrication processes which may be used under this
Section shall be restricted to bag molding,5 centrifugal
casting, contact molding, and filament winding for
Class I vessels, and contact molding and filament
winding for Class II vessels.
RQ-102 PRODUCTION WORK WITHOUT
QUALIFICATIONS
No fabrication shall be undertaken on vessels to be
stamped with the Certification Mark until a written Procedure Specification has been prepared and qualified by the
Fabricator. For Class I vessels the Procedure Specification
shall be qualified by the test of one or more prototype
vessels in accordance with RD-160.
For Class II vessels the Procedure Specification shall be
qualified in accordance with RF-110(c) and by subjecting
each vessel design to the mandatory stress analysis
required by Article RD-11. Both Design Calculations
and the fabrication of the specific vessel shall be for
the specific materials, ply sequence, and ply orientation
detailed in the Procedure Specification (Form Q-120).
Furthermore, no Code fabrication shall be undertaken
until the Fabricator has obtained a Certificate of Authorization from ASME.
RQ-120 PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION
QUALIFICATION FORMS
Recommended forms showing the information
required for qualifying the design and the Procedure Specification are as follows:
(a) Form Q-106 for fabrication by bag molding and
centrifugal casting — Class I vessels;
(b) Form Q-107 for fabrication by filament winding —
Class I vessels;
(c) Form Q-108 for fabrication by contact molding —
Class I vessels;
(d) Form Q-115 for fabrication by adhesive bonding —
Class I vessels;
(e) Form Q-120 for fabrication and assembly procedure — Class II vessels.
70
ASME BPVC.X-2021
RQ-130 MEANS TO BE USED IN QUALIFYING
CLASS I DESIGNS AND FABRICATING
PROCEDURES
RQ-140 MEANS FOR QUALIFYING CLASS II
VESSEL DESIGN AND FABRICATION
In qualifying Class I vessel designs and fabrication
procedures, the qualification checks listed in RQ-131
and the Qualification Tests listed in RQ-132 shall be used.
In qualifying Class II vessel designs and fabrication
procedures utilized, the qualification checks listed in
RQ-141 and the Acceptance Test listed in RQ-142 shall
be used.
RQ-131 QUALIFICATION CHECKS13
RQ-141 QUALIFICATION CHECKS
The following checks (see Articles RQ-2, RQ-3, and RQ-4
for special requirements) shall be applied to the prototype
vessels.
(a) The vessel shall be visually checked for imperfections in the laminate.
(1) The structural laminates shall conform to the
visual acceptance criteria given in Table 6-100.1.
(2) The criterion for inspection of the liner, if used,
shall be established by mutual agreement between the
Fabricator and the User.
(b) The thickness of the vessels at a minimum of 12
points shall be checked by mechanical gages and/or ultrasonic equipment (see RT-340).
(c) The percent of fiber and resin by weight, constituting the laminate, shall be determined (see RT-212).
(d) The weight (mass) of the whole vessel shall be
determined and shall not be less than 95% of that
stated in the Procedure Specification.
The following checks shall be applied to each vessel
designed in accordance with the mandatory design
rules of Article RD-11.
(a) Visual Checks. The vessel shall be visually checked
for imperfections in the laminate.
(1) The structural laminates shall comply with the
visual acceptance criteria given in Table 6-100.2.
(2) The criterion for inspection of the liner, if used,
shall be established by mutual agreement between the
Fabricator and the User.
(b) Thickness and Dimensional Checks. All stressed and
load bearing members shall be thickness checked in at
least 12 places to assure conformance with Design Calculations and Drawings. Thickness measurement shall be
consistent with the fiber–resin ratio and number and
thickness of individual lamina specified in the qualified
Procedure Specification.
Diameters, length, nozzle size and orientation, and
other physical dimensions shall be checked for compliance with the drawings as listed in the Design Report.
(c) Barcol Hardness Test. Barcol hardness tests shall be
taken on each separately fabricated laminate part to
assure proper cure. Tests shall be in accordance with
ASTM D2583. Results shall be within the tolerance specified by the resin manufacturer as listed in the qualified
Procedure Specification. Both the results and the tolerance shall be recorded in the qualified Procedure Specification.
(d) Thermoplastic Liner Integrity. If a thermoplastic
liner is used:
(1) the liner material shall be as specified in the qualified Procedure Specification;
(2) the liner shall be securely bonded to the vessel
structural part;
(3) the liner shall not show evidence of excessive
heating;
(4) all seams and joints shall have a conductive material between the liner material and the fiber–resin structural component to allow spark testing of the completed
vessel;
(5) all liner seams and joints shall be tested with a
20,000 V tester for imperfections. Any location that allows
electrical arcing between the voltage tester and the
conductive material under the liner shall be repaired.
RQ-132 QUALIFICATION TESTS13
The following tests shall be applied to the prototype
vessel or vessels or parts thereof:
(a) Barcol hardness test (see RT-221), to verify that the
laminate has been cured in accordance with the Procedure
Specification;
(b) volumetric expansion test, to verify that the laminate used has a modulus of elasticity within the range
specified by the designer;
NOTE: In lieu of measuring the volumetric change of the vessel by
determining the difference in volumes of fluid it will contain at
the design pressure and at atmospheric pressure, it is permissible to check the circumference of the vessel at a minimum of
three points evenly spaced along its length. The distance
between such reference points shall not exceed 5 ft (1.5 m).
The measurement shall be made at both atmospheric pressure
and design pressure and shall show no permanent distortion.
(c) cyclic pressure plus hydrostatic qualification pressure test (see RT-223);
(d) hydrostatic qualification pressure test, by which
the design pressure is determined [one‐sixth of qualification pressure for all vessel types, except one‐fifth for filament‐wound vessels with uncut filaments (RG-404.2)];
(e) suitable tests, utilizing loads simulating the
expected loadings of vessels subject to bending and
shearing caused by any expected combination of loadings
listed in RD-120.
71
ASME BPVC.X-2021
shall be determined in accordance with Article RT-6 of
this Section.
RQ-142 ACCEPTANCE TEST
The vessel shall be hydrostatically tested in such a
manner as to impose stress equal to at least 1.1 times
the design stress. Acoustic emissions from the vessel
72
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RQ-2
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR BAG‐MOLDING PROCEDURE
QUALIFICATION (CLASS I VESSELS)
RQ-200 ESSENTIAL VARIABLES14
Requalification of a procedure shall not be required
when an essential variable manufacturer's name
change is a result of a business merger, a corporate
name change, or a commercial event having no effect
on the manufacturing process or material chemistry.
No other changes in the material shall be permitted,
including manufacturing location. Material certificates
shall be identical, with the exception of the manufacturer's
name, and material traceability shall remain intact. It shall
be the Fabricator's responsibility to certify that these requirements have been satisfied and notify the Authorized
Inspector of the name change. The Procedure Specification
and Form Q-106 shall be revised to document the manufacturer's name change.
Essential variables listed in Form Q-106, deviation from
which shall require requalification of the bag-molding
procedure, are:
(a) fiber (manufacturer and designation);
(b) fiber surface treatment (manufacturer and designation);
(c) resin (type, manufacturer, and designation);
(d) curing agent (manufacturer and designation);
(e) curing schedule (i.e., time, temperature, or pressure), outside range specified in the qualified Procedure
Specification;
(f) post cure (time and temperature);
(g) percent of fiber (outside range specified in the qualified Procedure Specification);
(h) initial bag pressure;
(i) final bag pressure;
(j) weight of vessel (outside range specified in the qualified Procedure Specification);
(k) Barcol hardness (outside range specified in the
qualified Procedure Specification);
(l) volumetric expansion (outside range specified in the
qualified Procedure Specification).
RQ-201 NONESSENTIAL VARIABLES
Changes in variables other than those listed in RQ-200
are considered nonessential. They may be made without
requalification of the bag-molding procedure, provided
the Procedure Specification is modified to show the
changes.
73
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RQ-3
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CENTRIFUGAL‐CASTING
PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION (CLASS I VESSELS)
RQ-300 ESSENTIAL VARIABLES14
(m) mandrel speed.
Requalification of a procedure shall not be required
when an essential variable manufacturer's name
change is a result of a business merger, a corporate
name change, or a commercial event having no effect
on the manufacturing process or material chemistry.
No other changes in the material shall be permitted,
including manufacturing location. Material certificates
shall be identical, with the exception of the manufacturer's
name, and material traceability shall remain intact. It shall
be the Fabricator's responsibility to certify that these requirements have been satisfied and notify the Authorized
Inspector of the name change. The Procedure Specification
and Form Q-106 shall be revised to document the manufacturer's name change.
Essential variables listed in Form Q-106, deviation from
which shall require requalification of the centrifugalcasting procedure, are:
(a) fiber (manufacturer and designation);
(b) fiber surface treatment (manufacturer and designation);
(c) resin (type, manufacturer, and designation);
(d) curing agent (manufacturer and designation);
(e) curing schedule (i.e., time, temperature, or pressure), outside range specified in the qualified Procedure
Specification;
(f) post cure (time and temperature);
(g) percent of fiber (outside range specified in the qualified Procedure Specification);
(h) initial bag pressure;
(i) final bag pressure;
(j) weight of vessel (outside range specified in the qualified Procedure Specification);
(k) Barcol hardness (outside range specified in the
qualified Procedure Specification);
(l) volumetric expansion (outside range specified in the
qualified Procedure Specification);
RQ-301 NONESSENTIAL VARIABLES
Changes in variables other than those listed in RQ-300
are considered nonessential. They may be made without
requalification of the centrifugal-casting procedure,
provided the Procedure Specification is modified to
show the changes.
74
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RQ-4
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FILAMENT‐WINDING
PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION (CLASS I VESSELS)
RQ-400 ESSENTIAL VARIABLES14
Requalification of a procedure shall not be required
when an essential variable manufacturer's name
change is a result of a business merger, a corporate
name change, or a commercial event having no effect
on the manufacturing process or material chemistry.
No other changes in the material shall be permitted,
including manufacturing location. Material certificates
shall be identical, with the exception of the manufacturer's
name, and material traceability shall remain intact. It shall
be the Fabricator's responsibility to certify that these requirements have been satisfied and notify the Authorized
Inspector of the name change. The Procedure Specification
and Form Q-107 shall be revised to document the manufacturer's name change.
Essential variables listed in Form Q-107, deviation from
which shall require requalification of the filamentwinding procedure, are:
(a) fiber (manufacturer and designation);
(b) fiber surface treatment (manufacturer and designation);
(c) resin (type, manufacturer, and designation);
(d) curing agent (manufacturer and designation);
(e) manner of impregnation;
(f) percent of fiber in composite (outside range specified in the qualified Procedure Specification);
(g) variables of winding process;
(h) curing schedule (i.e., time or temperature), outside
range specified in the qualified Procedure Specification;
(i) liner (manufacturer, designation, thickness);
(j) pole pieces (material);
(k) weight (mass) of vessel (outside range specified in
the qualified Procedure Specification);
(l) Barcol hardness (outside range specified in the qualified Procedure Specification);
(m) volumetric expansion (outside range specified in
the qualified Procedure Specification).
RQ-401 NONESSENTIAL VARIABLES
Changes in variables other than those listed in RQ-400
are considered nonessential. They may be made without
requalification of the filament-winding procedure,
provided the Procedure Specification is modified to
show the changes.
75
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RQ-5
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTACT‐MOLDING PROCEDURE
QUALIFICATION (CLASS I VESSELS)
RQ-500 ESSENTIAL VARIABLES14
(m) length of secondary overlay.
Requalification of a procedure shall not be required
when an essential variable manufacturer's name
change is a result of a business merger, a corporate
name change, or a commercial event having no effect
on the manufacturing process or material chemistry.
No other changes in the material shall be permitted,
including manufacturing location. Material certificates
shall be identical, with the exception of the manufacturer's
name, and material traceability shall remain intact. It shall
be the Fabricator's responsibility to certify that these requirements have been satisfied and notify the Authorized
Inspector of the name change. The Procedure Specification
and Form Q-108 shall be revised to document the manufacturer's name change.
Essential variables listed in Form Q-108, deviation from
which shall require requalification of the contact-molding
procedure, are:
(a) fiber (type, form, manufacturer, and designation);
(b) resin (type, manufacturer, and designation);
(c) curing agent (manufacturer and designation);
(d) curing schedule (i.e., time, temperature, or pressure), outside range specified in the qualified Procedure
Specification;
(e) post cure (time and temperature);
(f) percent of fiber (outside range specified in the qualified Procedure Specification);
(g) weight of vessel (outside range specified in the
qualified Procedure Specification);
(h) Barcol hardness (outside range specified in the
qualified Procedure Specification);
(i) volumetric expansion (outside range specified in the
qualified Procedure Specification);
(j) total number of plies;
(k) ply sequence and orientation;
(l) surface preparation method and distance for
secondary overlays;
RQ-501 NONESSENTIAL VARIABLES
Changes in variables other than those listed in RQ-500
are considered nonessential. They may be made without
requalification of the contact-molding procedure,
provided the Procedure Specification is modified to
show the changes.
76
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RQ-6
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS II VESSELS
RQ-600 ESSENTIAL DESIGN VARIABLES15
(2) resin system (manufacturer, designation, and
type)
(3) surface preparation details for secondary overlay
(method and length)
(4) secondary overlay laminate construction
(-a) number of plies
(-b) ply orientation
(-c) ply sequence
(5) percent of fiber
(6) Barcol hardness
Requalification of a procedure shall not be required
when an essential variable manufacturer's name
change is a result of a business merger, a corporate
name change, or a commercial event having no effect
on the manufacturing process or material chemistry.
No other changes in the material shall be permitted,
including manufacturing location. Material certificates
shall be identical, with the exception of the manufacturer's
name, and material traceability shall remain intact. It shall
be the Fabricator's responsibility to certify that these requirements have been satisfied and notify the Authorized
Inspector of the name change. The Procedure Specification
and Form Q-120 shall be revised to document the manufacturer's name change.
Essential design variables listed in Form Q-120 shall be
established during the design of the vessel. Any deviation
during fabrication in either materials, laminate fabrication, or method shall require that new Design Calculations
be made. The new calculations shall satisfy the User’s
Design Specification and the requirements of this
Section (see RF-110). Deviation during fabrication from
any of the following shall require requalification of the
design.
(a) Part I — Fabrication
(1) fiber (manufacturer, designation, type, and form)
(2) resin (manufacturer, designation, and type)
(3) liner (material, manufacturer, designation, and
thickness)
(4) laminate fabrication (each separately fabricated
vessel part)
(-a) number of plies
(-b) ply orientation
(-c) ply sequence
(5) cure method
(6) Barcol hardness
(7) percent of fiber
(8) filament winding (bandwidth and spacing)
(9) use of fillers or pigments (material, use, and location)
(b) Part II — Assembly
(1) fiber reinforcement (manufacturer, designation,
type, and form)
RQ-601 NONESSENTIAL VARIABLES
Changes in variables other than those listed in RQ-600
are considered nonessential. They may be made without
requalification of the design, provided the Procedure
Specification is modified to show the changes.
77
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ð21Þ
PART RR
PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICES
All requirements previously in Part RR have been moved to Part ROP and Section XIII, Rules for Overpressure Protection. See Nonmandatory Appendix AM for a complete cross-reference list.
78
ASME BPVC.X-2021
PART ROP
OVERPRESSURE PROTECTION
ARTICLE ROP-1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
(c) If a pressure relief device is to be installed, it is the
responsibility of the user or the user’s designated agent to
size and select the pressure relief devices based on its
intended service. Intended service considerations shall
include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
(1) normal operation and upset conditions
(2) fluids
(3) fluid phases
(d) The overpressure protection system need not be
supplied by the vessel manufacturer.
ROP-100 GENERAL
(a) This Part provides the acceptable methods and requirements for overpressure protection for pressure
vessels constructed to the requirements of this Section.
Acceptable methods include pressure relief devices,
open flow paths, and overpressure protection by
system design. It establishes the type, quantity, and
settings of acceptable pressure relief devices and relieving
capacity requirements, including maximum allowed
relieving pressures. Unless otherwise specified, the
required pressure relief devices shall be constructed, capacity certified, and marked with the ASME Certification
Mark in accordance with Section XIII. In addition, this Part
provides requirements for the installation of pressure
relief devices.
(b) All pressure vessels within the scope of this Section
shall be provided with protection against overpressure in
accordance with the requirements of this Part.
(c) Heat exchangers and similar vessels shall be
protected against overpressure in case of an internal
failure.
(d) Vessels used for potable water, as described in
RG-113 (Section IV application), shall be equipped
with a breather valve directly connected to the inside
of the vessel to protect against external pressure.
ROP-130 DETERMINATION OF PRESSURERELIEVING REQUIREMENTS
(a) It is the responsibility of the user or the user’s designated agent to identify all potential overpressure
scenarios and the method of overpressure protection
used to mitigate each scenario.
(b) The aggregate capacity of the pressure relief
devices connected to any vessel or system of vessels
for the release of a liquid, air, steam, or other vapor
shall be sufficient to remove the maximum quantity
that can be generated or supplied to the attached equipment without permitting a rise in pressure within the
vessel of more than that specified in ROP-140.
(c) Vessels connected together by a system of adequate
piping not containing valves that can isolate any vessel,
and those containing valves in compliance with Section
XIII, Nonmandatory Appendix B, may be considered as
one unit in figuring the required relieving capacity of pressure relief devices to be furnished.
(d) Heat exchangers and similar vessels shall be
protected with a pressure relief device of sufficient capacity to avoid overpressure in case of an internal failure.
(e) The rated pressure-relieving capacity of a pressure
relief valve for other than steam, water, or air shall be
determined by the method of conversion given in
Section XIII, Mandatory Appendix IV.
(f) The relieving capacity of a pressure relief device for
compressible fluids may be prorated at any relieving pressure greater than 1.10p, as permitted under ROP-140, by
ROP-110 DEFINITIONS
Unless terms are otherwise defined in this Section, the
definitions relating to pressure relief devices in Section
XIII shall apply.
ROP-120 RESPONSIBILITIES
(a) It is the responsibility of the user or the user’s designated agent to determine the required relief rate, size and
select the device, and design the relief system.
(b) It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that the
required overpressure protection system is properly
installed prior to initial operation.
79
ð21Þ
ASME BPVC.X-2021
applying a multiplier to the official relieving capacity as
follows:
(1) For vessels with overpressure protection by
system design where the pressure is self-limited at or
below the vessel maximum allowable working pressure
(MAWP) (see Section XIII, 13.2), there shall be no credible
overpressure scenario in which the pressure exceeds the
MAWP of the pressurized equipment at the coincident
temperature.
(2) For vessels with overpressure protection by
system design where the pressure is not self-limited at
or below the vessel MAWP (see Section XIII, 13.3),
there shall be no credible overpressure scenario in
which the pressure exceeds 116% of the MAWP.
(U.S. Customary Units)
P + 14.7
1.10p + 14.7
(SI Units)
P + 101
1.10p + 101
ROP-160 PRESSURE-SETTING AND
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
where
P = relieving pressure, psig (kPa gage)
p = set pressure, psig (kPa gage)
(a) When a single pressure relief device is used, it shall
have a set pressure at a pressure that does not exceed the
design pressure of the vessel. When the required capacity
is provided in more than one pressure relief device, only
one device need be set at or below the design pressure, and
the additional devices may be set to open at higher pressures but in no case at a pressure higher than 105% of the
design pressure.
(b) The pressure at which any device is set to open shall
include the effects of static head and back pressure.
(c) Set pressure tolerance for pressure relief valves
bearing the Certification Mark with HV Designator
shall not exceed 3 psi (20 kPa) for pressure up to and
including 60 psi (400 kPa) and 5% for pressures
above 60 psi (400 kPa).
(d) The burst pressure tolerance for rupture disk
devices bearing the Certification Mark with UD Designator
at the specified disk temperature shall not exceed ±2 psi
(15 kPa) of marked burst pressure up to and including 40
psi (300 kPa) and ±5% of marked burst pressure above 40
psi (300 kPa).
(e) The set pressure tolerance for pin devices bearing
the Certification Mark with UD Designator shall not exceed
±2 psi (15 kPa) of marked set pressure up to and including
40 psi (300 kPa) and ±5% of marked set pressures above
40 psi (300 kPa) at specified pin temperature.
ROP-140 OVERPRESSURE LIMITS
(a) The combined capacity of the pressure relief
devices shall be sufficient to prevent overpressure in
excess of those specified below when the pressure
relief devices are discharging at full capacity.
(1) when the overpressure protection is provided by
a single pressure relief device, 110% of the design pressure or 3 psi (20 kPa) above design pressure, whichever is
greater
(2) when the overpressure protection is provided by
multiple pressure relief devices, 116% of the design pressure or 4 psi (28 kPa) above design pressure, whichever is
greater
(b) For Class II vessels, the overpressure protection
provision shall be established in the Design Specification.
(c) For vessels that utilize overpressure protection by
system design, the overpressure limits shall be per
ROP-150(f).
ROP-150 PERMITTED PRESSURE RELIEF
DEVICES
Protection against overpressure shall be provided by
one or a combination of the following devices and
methods in accordance with Section XIII:
(a) direct spring-loaded pressure relief valves bearing
the ASME Certification Mark with the UV or HV Designator
(b) pilot-operated pressure relief valves bearing the
ASME Certification Mark with the UV Designator
(c) rupture disks bearing the ASME Certification Mark
with the UD Designator
(d) breaking pin devices bearing the ASME Certification Mark with the UD Designator
(e) open flow paths or vents
(f) overpressure protection by system design in accordance with Section XIII, Part 13
ROP-170 INSTALLATION
(a) Number of Connections. Vessels shall have at least
one connection for mounting pressure relief devices
directly on the vessel or for connecting piping to pressure
relief devices.
(b) Size of Openings and Nozzles
(1) Openings and nozzles constituting the connections specified in (a) shall be designed to provide
direct and unobstructed flow between the vessel and
its pressure relief devices.
80
ASME BPVC.X-2021
(2) The area through the opening or nozzles and all
pipe fittings between a pressure vessel and its pressure
relief device shall be at least equal to the area of the pressure relief device(s) inlet and in all cases shall have sufficient area so as not to restrict the flow to the pressure
device.
(3) When two or more required pressure relief
devices are placed on one connection, the inlet internal
cross-sectional area of this connection shall be at least
equal to the combined inlet areas of the pressure relief
devices connected to it and in all cases shall be sufficient
to not restrict the combined flow of the attached devices.
(4) Connections for liquid relief valves shall be at
least NPS 1∕2 (DN 15).
(c) Location of Openings and Connections
(1) Openings and connections for pressure relief
purposes shall be located so that the nature of the
vessel’s contents will not hinder flow through such openings and connections.
(2) Connections for vapor pressure relief devices
shall be located in the vapor space.
(3) Connections for liquid relief valves shall be below
the normal liquid level.
(d) Stop Valves Between the Vessel and Pressure Relief
Device. There shall be no intervening stop valves between
the vessel and its pressure relief device or devices, or
between the pressure relief device or devices and the
point of discharge, except
(1) when the stop valves are so constructed or positively controlled that the closing of the maximum number
of stop valves possible at one time will not reduce the
pressure relief capacity provided by the unaffected
relieving devices below the required relieving capacity, or
(2) under the conditions set forth in Nonmandatory
Appendix AB
(e) Discharge Lines From Pressure Relief Devices.
Discharge lines from pressure relief devices shall be
designed to facilitate drainage or shall be fitted with
an open drain to prevent liquid lodging in the discharge
side of the pressure relief device, and such lines shall lead
to a safe place of discharge. The size of the discharge lines
shall be such that any pressure that may exist or develop
shall not reduce the relieving capacity of the relieving
devices below that required to protect the vessel (see
Nonmandatory Appendix AB).
81
ASME BPVC.X-2021
PART RT
RULES GOVERNING TESTING
ARTICLE RT-1
TESTING REQUIREMENTS
(2) fiber‐reinforced plastic pressure vessel construc-
RT-100 SCOPE
tion;
This Part specifies the requirements for tests to be made
during and after fabrication. For Class I vessels, such tests
shall consist of a Qualification Test (Article RT-2), Quality
Control Test (Article RT-3), and Production Test (Article
RT-4). For Class II vessels, such tests shall consist of an
Acceptance Test as specified in Article RT-6 and the Material Property Test specified in Article RT-7 to determine
the elastic and strength constants that serve as a basis for
design.
Hydrostatic tests for both Class I and Class II vessels
shall be as specified in Article RT-5.
(3) failure mechanisms of reinforced plastics;
(4) acoustic emission instrumentation;
(5) instrument checkout;
(6) vessel filling requirements;
(7) the provisions of ASTM E1067;
(8) characteristics of spurious emission;
(9) data collection and interpretation;
(10) test reports.
The experience level shall be that recommended by
SNT‐TC‐1A for Level II certification in acoustic emission
testing.
(b) Personnel who have attended the training
prescribed above, and passed a Level I examination
but not a Level II examination, may perform the test
but only to the instructions of, and with adequate supervision from, a person who meets the requirements of (a)
above.
RT-110 FABRICATOR’S RESPONSIBILITY
The Fabricator completing a vessel or vessel part has
the responsibility for conducting the tests stipulated in
this Part. The purpose of these tests is to assure that
such vessel or part is designed for the service condition
specified in the Design Specification and that the procedure for fabricating it is adequate.
ð21Þ
RT-112 TEST REPORTS
For Class I vessels, the Fabricator has the responsibility
of preparing and keeping on file for at least 5 yr (see
RG-321) a detailed report of the tests that were conducted
to prove the design of each vessel in order to be marked
with the Certification Mark, together with the qualified
Procedure Specification under which the prototype
vessel was fabricated. For Class II vessels, the Acceptance
Test Report shall be kept for 10 yr. This Acceptance Test
Report shall be certified by the Fabricator and verified by
the Inspector.
RT-111 CERTIFICATION OF COMPETENCY FOR
NONDESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION
PERSONNEL
(a) The Fabricator shall certify that each examiner
performing acoustic emission testing under this Article
has attended a dedicated training course on the
subject, passed a written examination, and has the recommended experience level. The training course shall be
appropriate for specific NDT Level II qualification
according to Recommended Practice No. SNT‐TC‐1A16
of the American Society for Nondestructive Testing and
should include, as a minimum, the following general
topics:
(1) basic technology and terminology of acoustic
emission;
RT-120 INSPECTOR’S DUTIES
See RI-130.
82
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RT-2
DESIGN AND PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION TEST
REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS I VESSELS
tion to RT-212 and RT-223 for all vessels in the series will
be by reference to the lengths tested.
RT-200 GENERAL
The tests and examinations stipulated in this Article are
intended to qualify both the design of a prototype vessel
and the Procedure Specification in accordance with which
it has been fabricated. Production vessels, which conform
in design to the prototype vessel and which are fabricated
in accordance with the same qualified Procedure Specification, may be marked with the Certification Mark
after the Inspector has ensured that the provisions of
this Code have been complied with (see RG-321 and
RI-130). The report of these tests shall be designated
as the Qualification Test Report and shall become part
of the Fabricator’s Design Report.
RT-202 OMITTED OR REDUCED-IN-SIZE NOZZLES
OR OPENINGS FOR FILAMENT-WOUND
VESSELS
Class I filament-wound vessels for internal pressure
uses only can be designed and qualified with any combination of nozzles or openings as allowed in the Code. This
does not apply to polar boss openings. To qualify a
reduced-in-size nozzle, the design of the reduced-insize nozzle shall be a scaled version of that used in the
qualified vessel, using the identical material, and
proper size opening for the reduced-in-size nozzle. No
changes to the winding pattern or structure are permitted.
The Fabricator can omit or reduce in size any of these
nozzles or openings in production vessels. Fabrication
of the production vessels shall be identical to the qualified
vessel in every way, with the exception of the nozzles or
openings that are omitted or reduced in size. Weight
allowances for each nozzle or opening that qualifies
for omission or reduction in size, inclusive of such
items as pad reinforcements that make up omitted or
reduced-in-size nozzles or openings, shall be added to
the weight determined in accordance with the requirements of RT-213. This total weight, inclusive of the
sum of weight reductions for all omitted or reducedin-size nozzles or openings, shall be at least 95% of
the weight specified and recorded in the Production
Test Requirements.
RT-201 ALTERNATIVE REQUIREMENTS
When a number of Class I vessels are identical in every
detail of design, materials, and fabrication except for a
difference in shell length, the entire group or series
may be qualified for RT-212 Weight of Resin and Fiber
and RT-223 Cyclic Pressure and Hydrostatic Pressure
Qualification Tests by subjecting only the longest and
shortest length vessels in the series to these tests.
To qualify for this alternative method, every vessel in
the series shall be identical in all essential variables (see
Part RQ) with the exception of vessel weight and volumetric expansion which may vary with shell length.
A vessel series that contains nozzles, or openings, or
both may also qualify for this alternative method. To
qualify as identical in axial position, nozzles or openings
located along the longitudinal axis of the shell shall remain
a fixed distance from the nearest vessel end for all vessels
in the series.
To qualify a vessel series for RT-223 Cyclic Pressure and
Hydrostatic Pressure Qualification Tests, the vessels
tested shall be supported so as to create the worst
case of loadings expected for the entire vessel series
(see RD-120). If the worst case nozzle/opening placement
is not tested with the longest and shortest length vessels,
additional vessels shall be tested.
Each vessel in the series shall have its own Fabricator’s
Design Report (RG-321.1) and shall be qualified individually with the exception of RT-212 and RT-223. Qualifica-
RT-210 QUALIFICATION CHECKS AND
EXAMINATIONS
Each prototype vessel shall be checked, examined, and
inspected in accordance with the requirements of RT-211
through RT-214, and the results shall be recorded in the
Fabricator’s Design Report.
RT-211 VESSEL THICKNESS
The thickness of each prototype vessel and vessel part
shall be determined at a minimum of three points along its
length on each of its four quadrants. When vessels are
longer than 5 ft (1.5 m), one additional determination
83
ASME BPVC.X-2021
shall be made for each additional 5 ft (1.5 m) or portion
thereof. The thickness determinations shall be made with
mechanical gages, ultrasonic gages, or other devices
having an accuracy of ±2% of true thickness.
Where visual indication of deviation from design thickness exists at points other than those at which measurements are required, thickness determinations in sufficient
number to properly locate and define the deviant area
shall be made.
RT-222 VOLUMETRIC EXPANSION TESTS
(a) Each prototype vessel shall be subjected to a volumetric expansion test using water or other appropriate
liquid, and the results recorded on the applicable
Form Q-106, Form Q-107, or Form Q-108.
(b) The volume of liquid used to fill the vessel at atmospheric pressure and temperature shall be compared with
that required to fill it at the design pressure and at the
same temperature.17 Care shall be taken to eliminate
air pockets to ensure accuracy. The volume of liquid
used in each instance shall be determined by any appropriate means, such as a weigh tank which has been calibrated to an accuracy of ±0.2%. The results of this test shall
be documented as part of the Qualification Test Report,
recorded on the applicable Form Q-106, Form Q-107, or
Form Q-108, and subsequently used in the quality control
volumetric expansion test.
(c) Alternatively, the volumetric expansion may be
determined by measuring the overall length of the
vessel and its circumference at 5 ft (1.5 m) intervals
along its length, with a minimum of three such determinations being made; all measurements shall be made with
instruments that have been calibrated to an accuracy
of ±0.05%. These measurements shall be taken with
the vessel filled with liquid at atmospheric pressure
and at design pressure, both at the same temperature.
The measurements thus made shall be documented as
part of the Qualification Test Report, recorded on the applicable Form Q-106, Form Q-107, or Form Q-108, and
subsequently used in the quality control volumetric
expansion test.
RT-212 WEIGHT OF RESIN AND FIBER
The percentage by weight of resin and fiber in each
prototype vessel or part shall be determined by means
of an ignition test per ASTM D2584 or matrix digestion
per ASTM D3171 of a sample taken from an undamaged
portion of the vessel used for the pressure qualification
test.
RT-213 VESSEL WEIGHT
Each prototype vessel shall be weighed within an accuracy of ±1%. The weight shall be recorded on the applicable Form Q-106, Form Q-107, or Form Q-108.
RT-214 VISUAL EXAMINATION OF VESSELS
The vessel shall be visually checked for imperfections in
the laminate. Classification and acceptance level of imperfections shall be according to Table 6-100.1. Fiberglass
laminates exposed to corrosive process fluids shall
comply with Table 6-100.1 for the pressure side, while
structural laminates shall comply with Table 6-100.1
for the nonpressure side.
RT-223 CYCLIC PRESSURE AND HYDROSTATIC
PRESSURE QUALIFICATION TESTS
RT-220 QUALIFICATION TESTS
Qualification tests shall be performed as required by
RT-221 through RT-223.
RT-223.1 Vessels Intended for Internal Pressure
Only. (See RT-223.5 for filament‐wound vessels with
uncut filaments.) At least one prototype vessel, intended
for internal pressure service only, shall be subjected to the
following tests:18
(a) A cyclic pressure test shall be performed in accordance with the following procedures:
(1) The test fluid shall be water or other appropriate
liquid.
(2) For vessels without liners, the pressure shall be
cycled from minimum19 pressure to the design pressure
and back 100,000 times (except for vessels per RG-404,
refer to RT-223.5). The temperature of the test fluid shall
be at least 150°F (65°C) or the maximum design temperature of the vessel, whichever is higher. Leakage during
cyclic testing is prohibited.
(3) For vessels with a liner, whether integral or not,
the pressure shall be cycled from minimum19 pressure to
the design pressure and back 10,000 cycles at the
minimum design temperature and for 90,000 cycles at
the maximum design temperature (except for vessels
RT-221 BARCOL HARDNESS TESTS
(a) Each prototype vessel and vessel part shall have at
least three Barcol hardness determinations made along its
length on each of its four quadrants. When vessels are
longer than 5 ft (1.5 m), one additional set of determinations shall be made for each additional 5 ft (1.5 m) or
portion thereof. A series of readings shall be taken at
each quadrant on smooth surfaces, properly oriented,
in accordance with ASTM D2583.
(b) The Barcol hardness values thus determined shall
be recorded in the Qualification Test Report and on the
applicable Form Q-106, Form Q-107, or Form Q-108, and
shall be used as reference values in subsequent Production Tests (see RT-440).
84
ASME BPVC.X-2021
(1) the test fluid shall be water or other appropriate
liquid;
(2) the temperature of the test fluid shall be 150°F
(65°C), minimum;
(3) the external hydrostatic test pressure shall be
twice the external design pressure;
(4) the prototype vessel shall show no evidence of
buckling.
(c) The prototype vessel, after being subjected to the
external hydrostatic pressure test required in (b) above
and to the cyclic pressure test required in (a) above, shall
then be subjected to a hydrostatic qualification pressure
test in accordance with the requirements of
RT-223.1(a)(3).
per RG-404, refer to RT-223.5). Leakage during cyclic
testing is prohibited
(4) For potable water usage, as described in RG-113
(Section IV application), the pressure shall be cycled
10,000 cycles at the minimum design temperature and
80,000 cycles at the maximum design temperature
followed by a final 10,000 cycles during which the
vessel is thermally shocked by flushing 80°F (27°C) or
less water so that the vessel reaches at least 90°F
(32°C) at the completion of the 10,000 cycles. Leakage
during cyclic testing is prohibited.
(b) After the cyclic pressure test, a hydrostatic pressure
test shall be performed, and the qualification pressure of
the vessel shall be determined in accordance with the
following procedures:
(1) The test fluid shall be water or other appropriate
liquid. The test fluid temperature shall be at least the
maximum design temperature of the vessel.
(2) The test pressure shall be applied at a uniform
rate so that six times the design pressure is reached in not
less than 1 min.
(3) The maximum pressure reached during the test is
called the qualification pressure. The qualification pressure shall be at least six times the design pressure. The use
of a flexible bladder to enable attainment of the qualification pressure is permissible. However, if the first vessel
tested fails to reach six times the design pressure, but does
reach 90% of this value, the Fabricator may test at least
two more vessels which have been subjected to cyclic
pressure tests in accordance with (a) and (b) above.
The average of the qualification pressures of these additional vessels, including that of the first vessel, shall be at
least six times the design pressure, and no others than the
first shall have a qualification pressure of less than six
times the design pressure.
RT-223.3 Vessels Intended for External Pressure
Only. At least one prototype vessel intended for external
pressure service only shall be tested in accordance with
RT-223.2, except that the internal design pressure shall be
not less than 15 psig (100 kPa gage).
RT-223.4 Vessels Having Bending and Shear Stresses
Inherent in Their Design. At least one prototype vessel of
types having bending and shear stresses inherent in their
design shall be subjected to a cyclic pressure test and a
hydrostatic qualification pressure test in accordance with
RT-223.1, RT-223.2, or RT-223.3, whichever is applicable,
except that, in addition, the prototype vessel(s) shall be
loaded to create the magnitude of bending and shear
stresses expected to occur under service conditions.
RT-223.5 Vessels Fabricated per RG-404.2 (Filament
Winding — Polar Boss Openings Only) That Are Intended
for Internal Pressure Only. At least one prototype vessel
shall be subjected to the following tests:18
(a) A cyclic pressure test shall be performed in accordance with the following procedures:
(1) The test fluid shall be water or other appropriate
liquid.
(2) For vessels without liners, the pressure shall be
cycled from minimum19 pressure to the design pressure
and back 33,000 times. The temperature of the test fluid
shall be at least 150°F (65°C) or the maximum design
temperature of the vessel, whichever is higher.
Leakage during cyclic testing is prohibited.
(3) For vessels with a liner, whether integral or not,
the pressure shall be cycled from minimum19 pressure to
the design pressure and back 3,000 cycles at the minimum
design temperature and for 30,000 cycles at the maximum
design temperature. Leakage during cyclic testing is
prohibited.
(b) After the cyclic pressure test, a hydrostatic pressure
test shall be performed, and the qualification pressure of
the vessel shall be determined in accordance with the
following procedures:
(1) The test fluid shall be water or other appropriate
liquid. The test fluid temperature shall be at least the
maximum design temperature of the vessel.
RT-223.2 Vessels Intended for Both Internal and
External Pressure. At least one prototype vessel intended
for both internal and external pressure service shall be
subjected to the following tests:
(a) A cyclic pressure test shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of RT-223.1, except that the
pressure shall be cycled from the external design pressure
to the internal design pressure and back 100,000 times.
During the cyclic testing no leakage shall occur. At the
Fabricator’s option, the cyclic pressure test may be
carried out in two steps, as follows:
(1) the pressure shall be cycled from the external
design pressure to atmospheric pressure and back
100,000 times without leakage;
(2) the pressure shall be cycled from atmospheric
pressure to the internal design pressure and back
100,000 times without leakage.
(b) The prototype vessel with any internal liner
installed shall be subjected to an external hydrostatic
pressure test, as follows:
85
ASME BPVC.X-2021
(2) The test pressure shall be applied at a uniform
rate so that 5 times the design pressure is reached in not
less than 1 min.
(3) The maximum pressure reached during the test is
called the qualification pressure. The qualification pressure shall be at least 5 times the design pressure. The use
of a flexible bladder to enable attainment of the qualification pressure is permissible. However, if the first vessel
tested fails to reach five times the design pressure, but
does reach 90% of this value, the Fabricator may test
at least two more vessels which have been subjected
to cyclic pressure tests in accordance with (a) and (b)
above. The average of the qualification pressures of
these additional vessels, including that of the first
vessel, shall be at least five times the design pressure,
and no other vessels than the first shall have a qualification
pressure of less than five times the design pressure.
86
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RT-3
QUALITY CONTROL TEST AND EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS
FOR CLASS I VESSELS
(c) If a Fabricator does not stamp with the Certification
Mark at least 24 vessels per year, then one vessel per year
shall be subjected to a cyclic pressure and hydrostatic
qualification pressure test.
RT-300 GENERAL
(a) The tests and examinations stipulated in this Article
are intended to provide evidence that the Procedure Specification, previously qualified in accordance with
Article RT-2, is being accurately followed and that no
deviations have been introduced.
(b) The results of the tests and examinations stipulated
in this Article shall be designated as Quality Control Tests
and shall be recorded and kept on file [see RG-321.1(f)].
They shall be made available to the Inspector for review
and acceptance.
RT-320 FREQUENCY OF DETERMINATION OF
WEIGHT OF RESIN AND FIBER
At least one determination of the weight of resin and
fiber shall be made for every 1,000 duplicate vessels, and
at least once a year. The determination shall be made in
accordance with RT-212, and the weight of the fiber shall
be that specified in the Procedure Specification and within
the range specified in RF-200, RF-300, RF-400, or RF-500,
as applicable. The vessel to be used for this test shall be
selected at random by the Inspector.
RT-301 REQUALIFICATION OF PROCEDURE
SPECIFICATION
If a qualified Procedure Specification has not been
utilized within the time frames detailed in RT-310, it
shall be requalified in accordance with the rules of
Article RT-2 before use in fabricating vessels to be
marked with the Certification Mark.
RT-330 FREQUENCY OF VOLUMETRIC
EXPANSION TESTS
For duplicate vessels a volumetric expansion test in
accordance with the requirements of RT-222 shall be
performed on one of every 10 vessels and at least
once a year. The results of these tests shall not be
greater than 105% of the values recorded in the original
Qualification Test Report and Procedure Specification.
The vessel to be used for this test shall be selected at
random by the Inspector.
RT-310 FREQUENCY OF CYCLIC PRESSURE
AND QUALIFICATION PRESSURE
TESTS
There are three ways for determining the frequency of
cyclic pressure and qualification pressure tests. All vessels
subject to requalification tests shall follow the requirements of RT-223. All vessels subject to requalification
testing shall be selected at random by the Inspector.
(a) Regardless of the time frequency, one vessel per
1,000 duplicate stamped with the Certification Mark pressure vessels shall be subjected to a cyclic pressure and
hydrostatic qualification pressure test.
(b) When a Fabricator of Class I vessels stamps with the
Certification Mark at least 24 vessels per year, the Fabricator, in collaboration with the Inspector, may increase
the time between the requalification of the Procedure
Specification, Qualification Cyclic Pressure, and Qualification Pressure Tests, from once a year up to every 3 yr.
RT-340 FREQUENCY OF THICKNESS CHECKS
Every vessel and vessel part shall be visually examined,
and when there is visual evidence of variation in thickness
from that specified in the Fabricator’s Design Report, the
areas in question shall be explored and their thicknesses
determined as required by RT-211. The under thickness
deviation shall not exceed 10% for a maximum distance of
0.5 Rt from the center of the area which is below the thickness specified in the Fabricator’s Design Report, where R is
the radius of the shell or head and t is the nominal specified
thickness.
87
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RT-4
PRODUCTION TEST REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS I VESSELS
RT-400 GENERAL
RT-412 REPAIRS OF IMPERFECTIONS
Each vessel shall be subjected to the inspections, examinations, and tests stipulated in this Article and shall
comply with the specified requirements, with results
recorded in Production Test Reports. The hydrostatic
tests shall not be conducted until other tests stipulated
in this Article have been conducted.
RT-412.1 Bag‐Molded Vessels and Centrifugally Cast
Vessels. The Inspector shall first verify that all requirements of Article RI-2 or Article RI-3, as applicable, are met
before permitting repair of imperfections.
(a) When required by the Fabricator’s Design Report,
all cut edges shall be coated with catalyzed resin and cured
so that no fibers are exposed and all voids are filled.
(b) When required by the Fabricator’s Design Report,
crevices between joined pieces shall be filled with catalyzed resin or thixotropic catalyzed resin paste and cured,
leaving a relatively smooth surface.
(c) If leaks or weeps are detected during the hydrostatic leakage test (see RT-450 and RT-451), the vessel
shall be dried completely before repairing. Catalyzed
resin or catalyzed thixotropic resin paste shall be
applied on the surface of the vessel over the area
which leaked and forced into the microvoids by air at pressure no more than the working pressure of the vessel.
Initial repair shall be followed as soon as practicable20
by complete curing. A retest shall be made for leakage.
(d) Superficial damage to exterior of vessels subsequent to testing may be repaired by patching with reinforced resin, which shall be adequate to restore the
original strength. The surface layer of resin shall be
ground to a dull finish over the entire area to be repaired
and extending a minimum of 2 in. (50 mm) beyond the
imperfection. Fiber reinforcement may be in the form
of chopped strand mat, woven fiber cloth, or woven
roving. Where more than one layer of fiber cloth or
woven roving is to be used, a layer of chopped strand
mat shall be placed as alternate layers. The repaired
area shall be cured to the Barcol hardness established
in the Fabricator’s Design Report (see RT-221 and
RT-440).
The repaired vessel shall be tested as per RT-450 or
RT-461, as applicable, and a record of the repair shall
be included in the Fabricator’s Design Report, and in
the Fabricator’s Data Report under remarks.
RT-410 VISUAL EXAMINATION
Each vessel shall be visually examined, using a suitable
light source, to determine whether there are any imperfections of the type specified in Table 6-100.1. This examination shall be carried out both before and after the
hydrostatic leakage test required by RT-450.
RT-411 ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS
RT-411.1 Design Dimensions. Vessels shall be
inspected for conformance with dimensions and tolerances shown on the Design Drawings. Any dimension
falling outside the specified limits shall be cause for rejection.
RT-411.2 Classification of Imperfections. Classification of visual imperfections in critical areas of fiberglass
laminates shall be made in accordance with Table 6-100.1
for the pressure side.
RT-411.3 Imperfections in Noncritical Areas. Imperfections in noncritical areas which by nature, content,
or frequency do not affect the serviceability of the
vessel shall not exceed the levels for the nonpressure
side in Table 6-100.1.
RT-411.4 Inserts, Nuts, Studs, and Lugs. Inserts, nuts,
studs, and lugs shall not be damaged in any way nor be
coated with laminate material in such a way as to impair
function or mechanical fit. Threads in molded‐in inserts
shall be clean, smooth, and free of nicks, tears, or other
damage. There shall be no laminate material or flash on the
threads. Molded‐in threads or cored holes shall be free of
visible defects such as chips, cracks, shorts, etc.
RT-412.2 Filament‐Wound Vessels [2,000 psi ð21Þ
(14 MPa) Maximum Operating Pressure; See RT-412.3]
RT-411.5 Repairable Imperfections. Imperfections which can be repaired without affecting the serviceability of the vessel may be repaired unless prohibited by
the Fabricator’s Design Report.
(a) When required by the Fabricator’s Design Report,
all cut edges shall be coated with catalyzed resin and cured
so that no fibers are exposed and all voids are filled.
88
ASME BPVC.X-2021
(b) When required by the Fabricator’s Design Report,
crevices between joined pieces shall be filled with catalyzed resin or thixotropic catalyzed resin paste and cured,
leaving a relatively smooth surface.
RT-450 HYDROSTATIC LEAKAGE TEST
RT-450.1 Vessels Without Welded Metal Components. Each completed vessel including production
heads shall be subjected to a hydrostatic leakage test
using water or other suitable liquid as the test fluid.
The test pressure at ambient temperature shall be 1.1
times the design pressure, whether internal or external,
and shall be maintained for at least one minute. The vessel
shall then be carefully examined for leakage, at design
pressure. Vessels that leak shall be rejected unless
they can be repaired in accordance with RT-412 and
provided that they then pass the stipulated hydrostatic
test without leakage.
RT-412.3 Filament‐Wound Vessels (For Both General
Vessels and Vessels With Polar Boss Openings Only).
The Inspector shall first verify that all requirements of
Article RI-4 are met before accepting repair of imperfections. Repair of imperfections shall be done in accordance
with RT-412.1(c) and/or RT-412.1(d), as applicable, with
the provision that after the repair is cured, the vessel shall
be pressurized to the required hydrostatic leakage test
(see RT-450.1 and RT-450.2) pressure and the repaired
area examined for any evidence of crazing or delamination.
RT-450.2 Vessels With Welded Metal Components.
Each completed vessel including production heads
shall be subjected to a hydrostatic leakage test using
water or other suitable liquid as the test fluid. The test
pressure at ambient temperature shall be 1.3 times the
design pressure, whether internal or external, and
shall be maintained for at least one minute. The vessel
shall then be carefully examined for leakage, at design
pressure. Vessels that leak shall be rejected unless
they can be repaired in accordance with RT-412 and
provided that they then pass the stipulated hydrostatic
test without leakage.
When welded metal components can be isolated from
the rest of the vessel, it is permitted to test the welded
metal components and the rest of the vessel separately.
In this specific case, the welded metal components may be
tested using RT-450.2 (1.3 times the design pressure) and
the rest of the vessel may be tested using RT-450.1 (1.1
times the design pressure).
RT-412.4 Contact‐Molded Vessels. The Inspector
shall first verify that all requirements of Article RI-5
are met before permitting repair of imperfections.
Repair of imperfections shall be done in accordance
with RT-412.1(c) and/or RT-412.1(d), as applicable,
with the provision that after the repair is cured, the
vessel shall be pressurized to the required hydrostatic
leakage test (see RT-450.1 and RT-450.2) pressure and
the repaired area examined for any evidence of
leakage, crazing, or delamination.
RT-413 VISUAL EXAMINATION OF REPAIRED
AREAS
Each repaired area shall be examined visually without
the aid of magnification. The repaired area shall have
translucency and surface finish comparable to the
remainder of the vessel.
RT-451 VESSELS WITH LINERS
RT-420 THICKNESS CHECK
Vessels having liners shall be tested with liners in place.
Each vessel shall be subjected to a thickness check in
accordance with the requirements of RT-340.
RT-452 EXCESSIVE HYDROSTATIC LEAKAGE TEST
PRESSURE
RT-430 VESSEL WEIGHT
When pressurizing vessels during hydrostatic tests, the
pressure shall not exceed the required hydrostatic leakage
test (see RT-450.1 and RT-450.2) pressure by more than
10%. Exceeding this maximum pressure during the test
shall be cause for rejection. To avoid this condition, it is
recommended that a properly set safety relief valve be
installed on the vessel or in the line supplying the test
fluid to it during the test.
Each vessel shall be weighed in accordance with the
weight requirements of RT-213. The weight of each
vessel shall be at least 95% of the weight specified
and recorded in the Fabricator’s Qualification Test
Report for the prototype vessels, after subtracting the
weights associated with those nozzles, or openings, or
both as described in RT-202.
RT-440 BARCOL HARDNESS TEST
Each vessel shall be subjected to a Barcol hardness test
in accordance with the requirements of RT-221. The
Barcol hardness value shall be within the range specified
by the resin manufacturer and recorded in the Qualification Test Report and the Procedure Specification.
89
ASME BPVC.X-2021
RT-461.1 When Vessels Are Pneumatically Tested
Under Water
RT-460 CONDITIONS UNDER WHICH
PNEUMATIC LEAKAGE TEST MAY BE
USED
(a) Leakage determination shall be made by testing the
vessels while totally submerged in water.
(b) The pressure shall be applied to the vessels only
while they are completely submerged in water.
(c) The pressure may be applied gradually in one increment or in increments at the Fabricator’s option.
(d) The test pressure shall be maintained for sufficient
time to permit examination for leakage of the entire
surfaces of the vessels. To accomplish this examination,
the vessels shall be slowly rotated so that the entire vessel
surfaces can be inspected.
The pneumatic test described herein may be used in lieu
of the hydrostatic leakage tests prescribed in RT-450 only
if the conditions of RT-460.1 or RT-460.2 apply.
NOTE: Air and gas are hazardous as testing media. It is recommended, therefore, that special precautions be taken when air or
gas is used for test purposes.
RT-460.1 When Vessels Cannot Be Safely Filled With
Water. Pneumatic testing may be used for vessels which
are so designed and/or supported that they cannot be
safely filled with water. The tests of such vessels may
be made with the vessels partially filled with water, if
specified in the Fabricator’s Design Report.
RT-461.2 When Vessel Is Freestanding (Not Under
Water)
(a) The pressure in the vessel shall be gradually
increased to not more than one‐half the test pressure,
after which the pressure shall be increased in increments
of one‐tenth the test pressure until the required test pressure has been reached.
(b) After the test pressure has been maintained for at
least 1 min, it shall be reduced to three‐fourths of the
design pressure and maintained at that pressure for sufficient time to permit examination for leakage of the entire
surface of the vessel and its attachments by means of soapsuds applied thereto.
RT-460.2 When Traces of Test Fluid Cannot Be Tolerated. Pneumatic testing may be used for vessels not
readily dried which are designed for use in services
where traces of testing liquid cannot be tolerated.
RT-461 REQUIRED PNEUMATIC TEST PRESSURE
AND HOLDING TIME
(a) The test pressure at ambient temperature shall be
at least 1.3 times the design pressure and shall be maintained for at least 1 min.
(b) When the test medium is air or gas instead of water
or other liquid, the requirements of RT-450 regarding
liners, repair of leaks, excessive test pressure, and rejection shall also apply.
90
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RT-5
HYDROSTATIC TESTING PROCEDURES AND EQUIPMENT FOR
CLASS I AND CLASS II VESSELS
is not readily visible to the operator controlling the pressure applied, an additional indicating gage shall be
provided where it shall be visible to the operator
throughout the duration of the test. For large vessels,
it is recommended that a recording gage be used in addition to indicating gages.
(b) Dial indicating pressure gages used in testing shall
be graduated over a range of about double the intended
maximum test pressure, but in no case shall the range be
less than 11∕2 nor more that 4 times that pressure. A digital
reading pressure gage having a wider range of pressure
may be used provided the readings give the same or
greater degree of accuracy as obtained with a dial pressure
gage which meets the above range requirement of 11∕2 to 4
times the maximum test pressure.
(c) All gages shall be calibrated against a standard
deadweight tester or a calibrated master gage. Gages
shall be recalibrated once every 6 months or at any
time that there is reason to believe that they are in error.
RT-500 PROVISION OF VENTS AT HIGH
POINTS
Vents shall be provided at all high points of the vessel in
the test position to purge possible air pockets while the
vessel is being filled with the test fluid.
RT-501 EXAMINATION OF TEST EQUIPMENT
Before applying pressure, the test equipment shall be
examined to see that it is leak tight and that all low-pressure filling lines and other appurtenances that should not
be subjected to the test pressure have been disconnected
or isolated by valves or other suitable means.
RT-502 RATE OF APPLYING TEST PRESSURE
The pressure in Class I vessels shall be gradually
increased to not more than one‐half the test pressure,
after which the pressure shall be increased in steps of
one‐tenth of the test pressure until the required test pressure has been reached. Class II vessels shall be pressurized
in accordance with Article RT-6.
RT-520 CALIBRATION OF ACOUSTIC
EMISSION EQUIPMENT
RT-510 TEST GAGES
Acoustic emission equipment used for acceptance tests
of Class II vessels shall be calibrated per Section V, Article
11, Acoustic Emission Examination of Fiber‐Reinforced
Plastic Vessels.
(a) An indicating pressure gage shall be connected
directly to the vessel or with a pressure line that does
not include intermediate valves. If the indicating gage
91
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RT-6
ACCEPTANCE TEST PROCEDURE FOR CLASS II VESSELS
of vessel size, at least two sensors shall be used so that
electromagnetic interference is easily detected by simultaneity of arrival.
(e) Data Acquisition. Test data shall be recorded for the
entire pressurization cycle. Data acquired during pressurization from 50% to 100% of the test pressure and from
the final 30-min pressure hold shall be recorded and used
to evaluate the vessel.
RT-600 GENERAL
The tests stipulated in this Article are intended to verify
that a vessel that was designed and fabricated according to
Article RD-11 is free of structural defects and is suitable for
the pressure and temperature for which it was designed.
Such tests are nondestructive and are intended to verify
individual vessels for specific services. Vessels which
comply with the Design Specification and pass the Acceptance Test may be marked with the Certification Mark
after the Inspector has ensured that the provisions of
this Code have been satisfied.
RT-620 ACCEPTANCE TESTS
Each Class II vessel shall be subjected to programmed
increasing stress levels to 1.1 times the internal design
pressure while being monitored by sensors that detect
acoustic emission (stress waves) caused by growing structural imperfections.
(a) The test fluid shall be water or other appropriate
liquid.
(b) The temperature of the test fluid shall be in the
following range:
(1) Minimum Value. The temperature that is sufficient to ensure that the vessel wall temperature is not
less than 40°F (5°C).
(2) Maximum Value. The design temperature. If the
design temperature is less than 100°F, the maximum value
shall be 100°F (38°C).
(c) External test pressure shall be 1.0 times the external
design pressure.
RT-610 ACCEPTANCE CHECKS AND
EXAMINATIONS
Each Class II vessel shall be checked and examined in
accordance with the requirements of RQ-140, and the
results recorded in the Acceptance Test Report, which
shall become part of the Fabricator’s Design Report.
(a) The acoustic emission examination shall be in
accordance with the requirements of this Article and
ASTM E1067. Where the provisions of this Article
differ from those of ASTM E1067, the provisions of
this Article shall govern.
(b) Vessel Conditioning. The internal pressure in the
vessel shall not exceed 10% of the test pressure for
12 hr prior to the acoustic emission examination and
110% of the test pressure any time before the acoustic
emission examination.
(c) Instrumentation shall be as detailed in ASTM
E1067, paragraph 7. The recommended and preferred
instrument features listed in paragraph 7.2 are required.
Peak‐amplitude detection for each input channel is
required. Time of arrival shall be measured to an accuracy
of 1 µsec. All test data, including time and pressure, shall be
recorded for post‐test playback and analysis. The data
acquisition threshold shall be at or below the threshold
of detectability defined in ASME E1067, paragraph A2.2.
(d) Sensor locations and spacing shall be according to
ASTM E1067, paragraph 9.3. The attenuation characterization shall be performed in the hoop and longitudinal
directions and at 45 deg to the axis of the vessel. Additional
lead breaks may be necessary to accurately determine the
maximum sensor spacing in each direction. The requirement that the attenuation characterization be performed
above the liquid line shall not apply to vessels. Regardless
NOTE: Attainment of external pressure as full vacuum by reducing the pressure inside of a vessel is not possible due to the limitations of evacuation equipment. Where vacuum tests are
required, the User or User’s Agent, the Authorized Inspector,
and the Fabricator shall agree on the maximum allowable absolute pressure to be achieved during the test. Such agreement
shall be reached prior to the start of fabrication and shall be
documented in the User's Design Specification and the pressure
test report.
(d) The loadings in RD-120(a) and RD-120(c) shall be
applied as part of the Acceptance Test procedure. Stressing to simulate external loads as per RD-120 should be
agreed upon by the User or User's Agent, the Authorized
Inspector, and the Fabricator prior to fabrication.
(e) Pressurization shall not exceed a rate of 2% of the
maximum test pressure per minute.
(f) The acoustic emission examination procedure shall
be in accordance with ASTM E1067.
92
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Table RT-620.1
Evaluation Criteria
Criteria
Emissions during pressure hold
First Loading
Not greater than five events per minute beyond 2 min
with an amplitude greater than AM [Note (1)]
Subsequent Loadings
No events beyond 2 min with an amplitude
greater than AM [Note (1)]
EH = 0 events
Felicity ratio
…
0.95
Cumulative duration, ND [Note (2)]
Less than ND
Less than ND/2
High amplitude hits [Note (3)]
≤10
≤5
GENERAL NOTE: All criteria in [Note (1)] through [Note (3)] are per channel.
NOTES:
(1) AM is the decibel level defined in ASTM E1067, paragraph A2.5.
(2) Cumulative duration value ND is defined in ASTM E1067, paragraph A2.5.
(3) High amplitude hits are those having amplitude equal to or greater than the Reference Amplitude Threshold defined in ASTM E1067,
paragraph A2.3.
(g) Evaluation and acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with Table RT-620.1 of this Section. An acceptable
vessel shall meet all the criteria listed in Table RT-620.1.
(h) The vessel shall be evaluated against the subsequent loading criteria after hydrostatic pressure
testing to 1.1 times the internal design pressure. The
vessel shall be conditioned prior to acoustic emission examination by holding at reduced pressure as required in
ASTM E1067. The vessel may be evaluated under first
loading with agreement between the User and Fabricator.
(i) If a vessel is unacceptable by the first loading
criteria, it may be retested and judged against the criteria
for subsequent loadings. Prior to retest, the vessel shall be
conditioned by holding at reduced pressure as required in
ASTM E1067. The pressure vessel stressing sequence for
the retest shall be as required in ASTM E1067.
(j) Leakage shall not occur during the Acceptance Test.
(k) The preferable test position is in the specified operating position.
RT-623 REPAIRED VESSELS
The following procedure shall be used to retest a vessel
that has been tested under the provisions of this Article
and has subsequently been repaired.
(a) Load the vessel as specified in this Article (AE monitoring not required).
(b) Hold the maximum load for at least 30 min.
(c) Condition the vessel by holding at reduced load as
required by ASTM E1067.
(d) Retest the vessel as required by this Article.
(e) The vessel shall be judged against the evaluation
criteria for subsequent loadings.
RT-630 PENETRANT EXAMINATION
If a vessel fails the acoustic emission test specified in this
Article, liquid penetrant examination may be used to assist
in determining the nature of the defect. Except as noted in
this paragraph, examination shall be in accordance with
Section V, Article 6.
(a) A water‐washable penetrant shall be used.
(b) The color of the penetrant shall be selected to
contrast with the color of the fiber‐reinforced plastic.
(c) The dwell time shall be a minimum of 20 min.
(d) A developer shall not be used.
(e) Interpretation shall be made within 1 hr of drying to
the requirements of Section V, Article 6, T‐674.
RT-621 VESSELS INTENDED FOR INTERNAL
PRESSURE ONLY
Vessels which are designed for internal pressure only
shall be pressurized in accordance with the sequence
shown in ASTM E1067.
ð21Þ
RT-622 VESSELS INTENDED FOR BOTH INTERNAL
AND EXTERNAL PRESSURE
Vessels intended for both internal and external pressure shall be pressurized in accordance with the sequence
shown in ASTM E1067.
93
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RT-7
DETERMINATION OF MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF LAMINA
FOR USE WITH CLASS II VESSELS
RT-702 LAMINATE ELASTIC PROPERTIES
RT-700 REQUIRED MECHANICAL
PROPERTIES OF THE LAMINA
Elastic properties of the laminate used to fabricate a
Class II vessel part shall be determined by the mathematical treatment of the individual lamina in accordance with
Article RD-12.
Longitudinal tensile strength X for a filament‐wound
layer shall be determined either by test of a flat plate
coupon in accordance with ASTM D3039 or by continuing
the pressure test of a filament‐wound cylinder per ASTM
D1180 (as described in RT-703.1) to fracture.
There are four elastic constants (Ex, Ey, Es, νx) and five
strength constants (X, Xc, Y, Yc, S) to be determined for a
lamina.
Es = in‐plane longitudinal shear modulus
Ex = modulus along the fiber direction
Ey = modulus transverse to the fiber direction; for a mat
layer, Ey is taken to be Ex
S = in‐plane shear strength
X = tensile strength along the fiber direction
Xc = compressive strength along the fiber direction
Y = tensile strength transverse to the fiber direction
Yc = compressive strength transverse to the fiber direction
νx = major Poisson’s ratio (it is the negative of the strain
transverse to the fiber direction divided by the
strain along the fiber direction when a uniaxial
stress is applied along the fiber direction)
RT-703 ELASTIC AND STRENGTH CONSTANTS
FOR MAT, KNITTED FABRIC, OR WOVEN
ROVING REINFORCED LAMINA
RT-703.1 Modulus, E x , and Tensile Strength, X.
Modulus and tensile strength shall be determined by
performing a tensile test to failure on a tensile coupon
according to ASTM D3039 or ASTM D638. The coupon
shall have a thickness variation not exceeding 15% of
the mean of the thickest and thinnest parts of the
coupon. The coupon shall have a degree of flatness
such that no straight‐line deviation of more than 0.020
in. per 12 in. (0.55 mm per 305 mm) length shall occur.
RT-701 LAMINA TEST
Test coupons for contact‐molded lamina shall be cut
from flat plate laminates of resin and fiber combinations
that represent the orthotropic lamina under consideration. Test coupons for filament‐wound lamina shall be
made from hoop‐wound filament cylinders. The test
coupons shall be made from the same materials (or combination of materials) so as to define each of the different
types of lamina specified in the Procedure Specification.
The test coupons shall be of sufficient thickness to give
representative test results from the specified ASTM procedures. The fiber content of the test coupon shall be
between 90% and 100% by weight of the minimum
fiber content of the vessel or vessel part laminate as specified in the Procedure Specification. Test methods for
determination of engineering properties are specified
in RT-703 and RT-704.
The results of the test shall be documented in a report
designated as the Material Property Test Report, which
shall become part of the Fabricator’s Design Report.
RT-703.2 Compressive Strength, X c . Compressive
strength shall be determined on a flat coupon according
to ASTM D3410 or ASTM D695.
RT-703.3 Modulus, E y , and Transverse Tensile
Strength, Y. Modulus and transverse tensile strength
shall be determined by performing a tensile test on a
flat coupon according to ASTM D3039 or ASTM D638.
RT-703.4 Transverse Compressive Strength, Y c .
Transverse compressive strength shall be determined
on a flat coupon according to ASTM D3410 or ASTM D695.
RT-703.5 Shear Modulus, Es, and Shear Strength, S.
Shear modulus for an all mat lamina shall be obtained
either from the longitudinal modulus and Poisson’s
ratio by the equation:
Ex
Es =
2(1 + x)
or according to ASTM D4255 or ASTM D7078.
94
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Shear modulus for a knitted matrix fabric or a woven
roving lamina shall be determined according to ASTM
D4255 or ASTM D7078.
Shear strength for an all mat lamina shall be determined
according to ASTM D3846, ASTM D4255, or ASTM D7078.
Shear strength for a knitted matrix fabric or a woven
roving lamina shall be determined according to ASTM
D4255 or ASTM D7078.
(h) The hoop‐wound cylindrical portion of the specimens shall have a thickness variation not exceeding
15% of the mean of the thickest and thinnest parts of
the cylinder.
(i) The cylinder shall be instrumented with three hoop
oriented unidirectional strain gages on the external
surface at the mid‐length of the cylinder. The three
strain gages shall be mounted 120 deg apart around
the circumference.
(j) In order to obtain a measure of the lamina tensile
strength, the final failure of the cylinder must be due to
fracture of the hoop‐wound fibers. To ensure that this type
failure occurs, the closures shall be designed so that they
do not cause failure of the specimen. This can be accomplished by adding a tapered buildup of mat, knitted fabric,
or woven roving to the end of the specimens.
(k) A flexible internal corrosion barrier may be used to
prevent circumferential cracking and failure in the
circumferential direction.
(l) A corrosion barrier or an elastomeric bladder may
be used to prevent excessive leakage that would prevent
application of pressure to a level that would cause fracture
of the hoop fibers.
(m) The contribution of a bladder or corrosion barrier
to the hoop strength of the cylinder shall be no more than
2%. The thickness of the corrosion barrier shall be ignored
in determination of the modulus.
RT-703.6 Flexural Modulus, E f , and Flexural
Strength, Sf. These shall be determined according to
ASTM D790.
RT-703.7 Major Poisson’s Ratio, vx. The major Poisson’s ratio shall be determined by measuring longitudinal
and transverse strain during the test specified in RT-703.1.
RT-703.8 Minor Poisson’s Ratio, vy. The minor Poisson’s ratio shall be determined by measuring longitudinal
and transverse strain during the test specified in RT-703.3,
or from the equation νy = Eyνx/Ex.
RT-704 ELASTIC AND STRENGTH CONSTANTS
FOR FILAMENT‐WOUND LAMINA
RT-704.1 Modulus, E x , and Tensile Strength, X.
Modulus and tensile strength for a filament‐wound
lamina shall be determined by performing a pressure
test to failure on a hoop‐wound cylinder in a manner
similar to that specified in ASTM D2992 and the underlying test methods. The following stipulations and additions shall apply:
(a) At least five specimens shall be tested for each test
condition.
(b) All specimens shall be hoop‐wound (approximately
90 deg) with a single tow and enough layers to meet the
minimum thickness criterion.
(c) The hoop‐wound cylindrical portion of the specimens shall meet the fiber content criteria of RT-701.
(d) Specimen end closures shall be restrained ends as
defined in 1.4.1 of ASTM D2992.
(e) The internal diameter of the cylinder shall be not
less than 4 in.
(f) The clear length of the cylinder between the structural buildup at the ends of the cylinder shall be not less
than five times the outside diameter of the cylinder.
(g) The thickness of the hoop‐wound portion of the cylinder shall be at least 0.1 in.
RT-704.2 Compressive Strength, X c. Compressive
strength for filament‐wound lamina along the fiber direction shall be taken as equal to the tensile strength.
RT-704.3 Modulus, E y , and Transverse Tensile
Strength, Y. Modulus and transverse tensile strength
shall be determined by performing a tensile test on a
hoop‐wound cylinder according to ASTM D5450.
RT-704.4 Transverse Compressive Strength, Y c .
Transverse compressive strength shall be determined
on a hoop‐wound cylinder according to ASTM D5449.
RT-704.5 Shear Modulus, E s , and In‐Plane Shear
Strength, S. Shear modulus and shear strength shall
be determined on a hoop‐wound cylinder loaded in
torsion according to ASTM D5448.
RT-704.6 Major Poisson’s Ratio, vx. The major Poisson’s ratio shall be determined according to ASTM D5450.
95
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RT-8
TEST METHODS FOR DETERMINING DAMAGE‐BASED DESIGN
CRITERION
ASTM D4255, Standard Test Method for In‐Plane Shear
Properties of Polymer Matrix Composite Materials by
the Rail Shear Method
ASTM D7078, Standard Test Method for Shear Properties
of Composite Materials by V-Notched Rail Shear Method
ASTM E1316, Standard Terminology for Nondestructive
Examinations
ASTM E2478, Standard Practice for Determining DamageBased Design Stress for Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic
(GFRP) Materials Using Acoustic Emission.
RT-800 SCOPE
This Article details the test methods for establishing the
direct stress and shear stress damage‐based design values
for use in the damage‐based design criterion. The method
uses data derived from acoustic emission monitoring of
four‐point beam bending tests and in‐plane shear tests.
The onset of lamina damage is indicated by the presence
of significant acoustic emission during the reload portion
of load/reload cycles. “Significant emission” is defined
with historic index.
RT-810 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS
RT-820 APPARATUS, LOADING PROCEDURE,
AND DATA ANALYSIS
ASTM D790, Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials
ASTM E2478 is adopted in its entirety.
96
ASME BPVC.X-2021
PART RI
INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS
ARTICLE RI-1
GENERAL
RI-100 SCOPE
RI-130 INSPECTOR’S DUTIES
The inspection and examination of all pressure vessels
and vessel parts shall comply with the general requirements set forth in this Article. The special requirements
for vessels made by the bag molding, centrifugal casting,
filament winding, and contact-molding processes are
provided in Articles RI-2, RI-3, RI-4, and RI-5.
RI-131 INSPECTOR’S DUTY RELATIVE TO
QUALIFICATION TESTS OF PROTOTYPE
VESSELS
The Inspector shall verify the cyclic pressure tests and
witness the hydrostatic qualification pressure tests (see
RT-223) of the prototype vessels by means of which the
vessel design and the fabrication procedure are qualified.
RI-101 FABRICATOR’S RESPONSIBILITY
The Fabricator who completes any vessel to be stamped
with the Certification Mark (see RS-110) has the responsibility of complying with all the requirements of this Code
and, through proper certification, of assuring that any
work performed by others also complies with all requirements of this Code including the required inspections by
an Authorized Inspector.
RI-132 INSPECTOR’S DUTY RELATIVE TO THE
FABRICATOR’S DESIGN REPORT
The Inspector shall determine that the Fabricator’s
Design Report is on file and shall examine it to verify that:
(a) the vessel conforms to the Design Drawings in all
respects;
(b) the materials being used and the fabrication procedures being employed are in strict compliance with the
requirements of the Procedure Specification;
(c) the Quality Control Program, prior to issuance of the
Certificate of Authorization, is being followed and that the
tests required by it confirm that the Procedure Specification requirements are being met;
(d) the vessel design, as demonstrated by the Test
Report for Class I vessels or by Design Calculations
and Acceptance Test for Class II vessels, meets the requirements of this Code.
RI-110 QUALIFICATION OF INSPECTORS
All references throughout this Section to Inspector mean
Authorized Inspector as defined in this paragraph. The
inspection required by this Article shall be carried out
by an Inspector employed by an ASME accredited Authorized Inspection Agency, as defined in QAI-1. The Inspector
shall not be in the employ of the Fabricator.
RI-120 ACCESS FOR INSPECTOR
The Fabricator of the vessel shall arrange for the
Inspector to have free access to such parts of all plants
as are concerned with the manufacture of materials for
the vessel, when so requested. The Inspector shall be
permitted free access, at all times while work on the
vessel is being performed, to all parts of the Fabricator’s
shop that concern the fabrication of the vessel, during the
period of assembly and testing of the vessel. The Fabricator shall keep the Inspector informed of the progress of
the work and shall notify the Inspector, reasonably in
advance, when vessels will be ready for any required
tests or inspections.
RI-133 INSPECTOR’S DUTY RELATIVE TO SPECIFIC
VESSELS
The Inspector of vessels to be marked with the Certification Mark has the duty to ensure that all requirements
of this Section have been met. The Inspector shall make all
required inspections and other such inspections as the
Inspector deems necessary in carrying out these duties.
97
ð21Þ
ASME BPVC.X-2021
(d) The Inspector shall verify that the required
stamping (or permitted marking) is applied to the nameplate and that the nameplate is attached to the proper
vessel.
RI-134 INSPECTOR’S DUTY RELATIVE TO
ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF CLASS II
VESSELS
The Inspector shall verify that
(a) the materials (resin, reinforcements, etc.) used to
fabricate the vessel laminate are as specified in the
required Procedure Specification;
(b) the laminates used for vessel fabrication meet the
same specifications as the laminates from which mechanical properties were determined for Design Calculations;
(c) the thickness of vessel parts and other fabrication
details conform to Design Calculations and vessel drawings;
(d) the hydrostatic stressing sequence and acoustic
emission response during stressing comply with the
required specifications.
RI-160 ALTERNATIVE INSPECTION FOR
MULTIPLE, DUPLICATE FABRICATION
During the fabrication of multiple, duplicate mass‐
produced pressure vessels, it may become impractical
for the Inspector to personally perform each of the
required inspections. For these specific cases, the Fabricator, in collaboration with the Inspector, may prepare an
alternative inspection and quality control procedure, set
forth in complete detail, and the method by which the requirements of this Section are maintained.
To qualify for this alternative method of inspection, the
following criteria shall be met:
(a) This procedure shall be included in the Fabricator’s
written quality control system (see RG-323).
(b) This procedure shall be submitted to and shall have
received the acceptance of the Authorized Inspection
Agency.
(c) This procedure shall then be submitted by the
Authorized Inspection Agency for written acceptance
from the local jurisdiction concerned (see RG-323) and
from the ASME Designee.
(d) The joint review required by RG-323 shall include
an ASME Designee.
(e) The inspection procedure shall be used in the plant
of the named Fabricator by the Authorized Inspection
Agency submitting it, and shall be carried out by an
Inspector in the employ of that Authorized Inspection
Agency.
(f) The degree of the Authorized Inspector's involvement shall be as defined during the joint review. Any
change requires another joint review.
(g) Any changes in this inspection and quality control
procedure that affect the requirements of this Section are
subject to review and acceptance by the parties required
for a joint review.
(h) The Data Report for such a vessel shall include
under “Remarks” the statement: “Constructed under
the provisions of RI-160.”
RI-140 INSPECTION OF MATERIAL
(a) The Inspector shall ensure that all materials used in
the fabrication of the vessel comply with the requirements
of this Section and the Design Specification.
(b) All parts to be incorporated into the completed
pressure vessel, whether or not produced by the Fabricator, shall be inspected before assembly into the
completed vessel for the purpose of detecting, as much
as possible, any imperfections which would not meet
the requirements of this Code.
RI-150 INSPECTION DURING FABRICATION
(a) The Inspector shall make inspections, including
making measurements, of each pressure vessel at such
stages of fabrication as are required plus such other
inspections as the Inspector deems are necessary to
ensure that fabrication is in accordance with the requirements of this Section.
(b) When conditions permit entry into the vessel, as
complete an examination as possible shall be made
before final closure.
(c) An inspection shall be made at the time of the hydrostatic leakage test or its permissible equivalent.
98
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RI-2
SPECIAL INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR BAG MOLDING
(CLASS I VESSELS)
RI-200 CHECK OF BAG‐MOLDING
PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION
QUALIFICATION
(b) A post cure, after removal of the vessel from the
mold, if required, shall be for the time and temperature
specified in the qualified Procedure Specification (see
Form Q-106) and shall be verified by the Inspector.
The Inspector shall examine the Fabricator’s Procedure
Specification and shall verify that the procedure for the
bag‐molding process has been properly qualified as
required by Part RQ.
RI-206 CHECK OF UNIFORMITY OF HEATING FOR
CURE OF VESSEL
The Inspector may require the Fabricator to demonstrate that operation of the heating system provides
uniform heating over the entire surface of the vessel
during curing. The temperature shall not differ by
more than ±10°F (±6°C) from the cure temperature specified in the qualified Procedure Specification used (see
Form Q-106).
RI-201 ADDITIONAL TESTS
At his discretion, the Inspector shall have the right to call
for and witness additional tests of the bag‐molding procedure and of the vessel as work progresses.
RI-202 CHECK OF FIBER WEIGHT
RI-210 VISUAL INSPECTION
The Inspector shall verify that the fiber weight of
preforms and of side wall mats complies with the requirements of RF-200 and RT-320.
The Inspector shall verify that the form of fiber reinforcement used in the shell and in the heads complies
with the requirements of RF-210.
Where possible, the Inspector shall inspect both the
inside and outside of the bag‐molded pressure vessel.
The Inspector shall examine the vessel for the following
defects: indentations, cracks, porosity, air bubbles,
exposed fibers, lack of resin, excess resin, thin areas,
wrinkling, uniformity of seal surface, and delamination
(see RT-411, RT-412, and RT-413).
RI-204 CHECK OF FABRICATION PROCEDURES
RI-211 TESTS AND RETESTS
The Inspector shall verify that the resin injection pressure, processing temperatures during lay‐up, and
pumping procedures correspond to those stipulated in
the qualified Procedure Specification used.
The physical property tests of specimens of material,
hydrostatic or pneumatic leakage tests, cyclic pressure
and hydrostatic qualification pressure tests, and any
permitted retests, all stipulated in Part RT, shall be documented and certified by the Fabricator and verified by the
Inspector.
RI-203 CHECK OF FORM OF REINFORCEMENT
RI-205 CHECK OF CURE
(a) The Inspector shall ensure by suitable hardness
tests or by other means that the bag‐molded composite
structure has been properly cured.
99
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RI-3
SPECIAL INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR CENTRIFUGAL
CASTING (CLASS I VESSELS)
RI-306 CHECK OF UNIFORMITY OF HEATING FOR
CURE OF THE VESSEL
RI-300 CHECK OF CENTRIFUGAL‐CASTING
PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION
QUALIFICATION
The Inspector may require the Fabricator to demonstrate that the mandrel heating system provides
uniform heating of the entire surface of the vessel
during cure. The temperature shall not differ by more
than ±10°F (±6°C) from the cure temperature specified
in the qualified Procedure Specification (see Form Q-106).
The Inspector shall examine the Procedure Specification and shall determine that the procedure for the centrifugal‐casting process has been properly qualified as
required by Part RQ.
RI-301 ADDITIONAL TESTS
RI-307 CHECK OF ATTACHMENT OF HEADS TO
CYLINDER
The Inspector shall have the right to call for and witness
additional tests of the centrifugal‐casting procedure and of
the vessel as fabrication progresses.
RI-307.1 Heads Attached by Adhesive Bonding. The
Inspector shall verify that the adhesive used, the preparation of the surfaces to be joined, and the application of the
adhesive conform to the Procedure Specification for qualification of adhesive bonding (Form Q-115).
RI-302 CHECK OF FIBER WEIGHT
The Inspector shall verify that the fiber weight of the
composite of fiber and resin complies with the requirements of RF-300 and RT-320.
RI-307.2 Cylinders Centrifugally Cast Into or Onto
Heads. If the alternative procedure of centrifugally
casting cylinders directly into or onto the head skirt is
used, the Inspector shall verify that it follows the qualified
procedure for such attachment.
RI-303 CHECK OF FORM OF REINFORCEMENT
The Inspector shall verify that the filament length of the
chopped strand is not less than 1 in. or more than 4 in., as
required by RF-300.
RI-310 VISUAL INSPECTION
RI-304 CHECK OF FABRICATION PROCEDURES
Where possible, the Inspector shall inspect both the
inside and outside of the centrifugally cast cylinder
and the bag‐ or matched‐die‐molded heads before
assembly. The Inspector shall examine the cylinder and
head for the following defects: surface crazing or cracking,
lack of resin, excess resin, thin areas, air bubbles, exposed
fibers, wrinkling, uniformity of sealing surface, and delamination (see RT-411, RT-412, and RT-413).
The Inspector shall verify that the speed of mandrel
rotation during buildup of the wall corresponds to that
stipulated in the qualified Procedure Specification (see
Form Q-106).
RI-305 CHECK OF CURE
(a) The Inspector shall ensure by suitable hardness
tests or by other means that the centrifugally cast cylinder
has been properly cured.
(b) A post cure, after removal of the vessel from the
mandrel, if required, shall be for the time and temperature
specified in the qualified Procedure Specification (see
Form Q-106) and verified by the Inspector.
RI-311 TESTS AND RETESTS
The physical property tests of specimens of material,
laminate hydrostatic or pneumatic leakage tests, cyclic
pressure and hydrostatic qualification pressure tests,
and any permitted retests, all stipulated in Part RT,
shall be documented and certified by the Fabricator
and verified by the Inspector.
100
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RI-4
SPECIAL INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR FILAMENT WINDING
RI-400 CHECK OF FILAMENT‐WINDING
PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION
QUALIFICATION
(b) A post cure, if required, after removal of the
mandrel, shall be for the time and temperature specified
in the qualified Procedure Specification (see Form Q-107)
and shall be verified by the Inspector.
The Inspector shall examine the Fabricator’s Procedure
Specification and shall verify that the procedure for the
filament‐winding process has been properly qualified as
required by Part RQ.
RI-406 CHECK OF UNIFORMITY OF HEATING FOR
THE CURE OF THE VESSEL
The Inspector may require the Fabricator to demonstrate that operation of the heating system provides
uniform heating over the entire surface of the vessel
during cure. The temperature shall not differ by more
than ±10°F (±6°C) from the cure temperature specified
in the qualified Procedure Specification (see Form Q-107).
RI-401 ADDITIONAL TESTS
The Inspector shall have the right to call for and witness
additional tests of the filament‐winding process.
RI-402 CHECK OF FIBER WEIGHT
RI-410 VISUAL INSPECTION
The Inspector shall verify that the fiber weight of the
combined fiber filaments and resin complies with requirements of RF-400 and RT-320.
The Inspector shall verify that the fiber, resin, and
curing agent being used are as described in the Procedure
Specification (see Form Q-107).
Where possible, the Inspector shall inspect both the
inside and outside of the filament‐wound pressure
vessel. The Inspector shall examine the vessel for the
following defects: indentations, cracks, porosity, air
bubbles, exposed fibers, lack of resin, excess resin,
thinned areas, wrinkling, pattern deviations, and delamination (see RT-411, RT-412, and RT-413).
RI-404 CHECK OF FABRICATION PROCEDURES
RI-411 TESTS AND RETESTS
The Inspector shall verify that the speed of winding,
uniformity of tension, and adherence to the predetermined patterns of the qualified Procedure Specification
(see Form Q-107) are closely followed.
The physical property tests of specimens of material,
hydrostatic or pneumatic leakage tests, cyclic pressure
and hydrostatic qualification pressure tests, and any
permitted retests, all stipulated in Part RT, shall be documented and certified by the Fabricator and verified by the
Inspector.
RI-403 CHECK OF MATERIALS
RI-405 CHECK OF CURE
(a) The Inspector shall ensure by suitable hardness
tests, or by other means, that the filament‐wound structure has been properly cured.
101
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RI-5
SPECIAL INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTACT MOLDING
RI-500 CHECK OF CONTACT‐MOLDING
PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION
QUALIFICATION
(b) A post cure, after removal of the vessel from the
mold, if required, shall be for the time and temperature
specified in the qualified Procedure Specification (see
Form Q-108) and shall be verified by the Inspector.
The Inspector shall examine the Fabricator’s Procedure
Specification and shall determine that the procedure for
the contact‐molding process has been properly qualified
as required by Part RQ.
RI-506 CHECK OF UNIFORMITY OF HEATING FOR
POST CURE OF VESSEL IF REQUIRED
The Inspector shall have the right to call for and witness
additional tests of the contact‐molding procedure and of
the vessel as fabrication progresses.
The Inspector may require the Fabricator to demonstrate that operation of the heating system provides
uniform heating over the entire surface of the vessel
during cure. The temperature shall not differ by more
than ±10°F (±6°C) from the cure temperature specified
in the qualified Procedure Specification (see Form Q-108).
RI-502 CHECK OF FIBER WEIGHT
RI-510 VISUAL INSPECTION
The Inspector shall verify that the fiber weight of the
composite structure and supplementary pads at openings
complies with the requirements of RF-500.
Where possible, the Inspector shall inspect both the
inside and outside of the pressure vessel. The Inspector
shall examine the vessel for the following imperfections:
indentations, cracks, porosity, air bubbles, exposed fibers,
lack of resin, excess resin, thin areas, wrinkling, uniformity
of seal surface, and delamination (see RT-411, RT-412, and
RT-413).
RI-501 ADDITIONAL TESTS
RI-503 CHECK OF FORM OF REINFORCEMENT
The Inspector shall verify that the fiber reinforcement
used in the shell and in the heads complies with the requirements of RF-510.
RI-511 TESTS AND RETESTS
RI-504 CHECK OF FABRICATION PROCEDURES
The physical property tests of specimens of material,
hydrostatic or pneumatic leakage tests, cyclic pressure
and hydrostatic qualification pressure tests, and any
permitted retests, all stipulated in Part RT, shall be documented and certified by the Fabricator and verified by the
Inspector.
The Inspector shall verify that the laminating sequence,
cure system, method of component attachments, and
overall quality correspond to those stipulated in the qualified Procedure Specification.
RI-505 CHECK OF CURE
(a) The Inspector shall ensure by suitable hardness
tests or by other means that the contact‐molded composite structure has been properly cured.
102
ASME BPVC.X-2021
PART RS
MARKING, STAMPING, AND REPORTS
ARTICLE RS-1
CONTENTS, METHODS, AND MEANS OF MARKING
RS-101 METHODS OF MARKING VESSELS WITH
TWO OR MORE INDEPENDENT CHAMBERS
RS-100 REQUIRED MARKING FOR VESSELS
Each pressure vessel shall be marked, by means other
than stamping directly on the vessel (see RS-130), with the
following:
(a) the official Certification Mark as shown in
Figure RS-100.1 with the RP Designator directly under
the Certification Mark;
(b) the words “Class I,” “Class II,” or “Class III,” as applicable, followed by the type of fabricating process, indicated by the letters BM, CC, CM, or FW;
(c) the Fabricator’s name, preceded by “Certified by”;
(d) the maximum allowable working pressure ____ at
maximum allowable temperature ____ ;
(e) maximum allowable external working pressure21
____ at maximum allowable temperature ____ ;
(f) the minimum allowable temperature [not less than
−65°F (−54°C)];
(g) the Fabricator’s serial number;
(h) the year built.
Either of the arrangements specified in RS-101.1 and
RS-101.2 may be used in marking vessels having two
or more independent pressure chambers designed for
the same or different operating conditions. Each detachable chamber shall be marked to identify it positively with
the combined unit.
RS-101.1 Markings Grouped in One Location. The
markings may be grouped in one location on the
vessel, provided they are arranged to indicate clearly
the data applicable to each chamber, including the
maximum differential pressure for the common elements,
when this pressure is less than the higher pressure in the
adjacent chambers.
RS-101.2 Marking Each Independent Chamber. The
complete required marking may be applied to each independent pressure chamber, provided additional marking,
such as stock space, jacket, tubes, or channel box, is used to
indicate clearly to which chamber the data applies.
NOTE: Section IV vessels that use reinforced polymer parts shall
be marked with the letters HLW, in accordance with Code Case
2411 or 2725.
RS-110 APPLICATION OF STAMP22 TO VESSEL
The Fabricator who completes the fabrication of the
vessel, or vessel parts, shall have a valid Certificate of Authorization for the use of the Certification Mark with RP
Designator. Except when the nameplate is to be molded in,
the Certification Mark shall be applied by the Manufacturer only with the acceptance of the Inspector after
the hydrostatic or pneumatic leakage test for Class I or
Class III vessels and the acoustic emission Acceptance
Test for Class II vessels has been satisfactorily made
and any other required inspection and testing have
been satisfactorily completed. Such application of the
Certification Mark together with final certification in
accordance with the rules of this Section shall confirm
that all applicable requirements of this Section have
been fulfilled.
Figure RS-100.1
Official Certification Mark to Denote the American
Society of Mechanical Engineers’ Standard
103
ð21Þ
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ð21Þ
Figure RS-132.1
Form of Stamping and Marking
RS-130 NAMEPLATE
The markings required in RS-100 shall be applied to a
separate nameplate permanently attached to the vessel by
suitable means. The marking shall not be stamped directly
on the vessel.
Certified by
..............................
(Name of Fabricator)
(Class I)
(Class II)
(Class III)
(BM)
(CC)
(FW)
(CM)
(HLW)
..............................
(Maximum allowable working pressure)
RS-131 STAMPING AND ATTACHMENT OF
NAMEPLATES
..............................
(Maximum allowable external working
pressure [if specified, see Note (1)])
(a) The Certification Mark and the Manufacturer’s
serial number shall be stamped on the nameplate with
“low stress” stamps, but the other required data may
be stamped, etched, cast, or impressed thereon. Alternatively, the other data may be printed or engraved on a
suitable material and then be molded as an integral
part of the vessel to serve as a nameplate. The arrangement of the data shall be substantially as shown in
Figure RS-132.1.
(b) The required data on a nameplate or a molded‐in
printed or engraved label shall be in characters not less
than 5∕16 in. (8 mm) high.
(c) Required nameplates shall be permanently
attached to the vessel, or a bracket permanently attached
to the vessel, in some conspicuous place, either by use of a
surface mat or by molding in as an integral part of the
vessel or by some other suitable means. If the nameplate
is molded in, it shall be done in a manner that will permit
the required marking to be visible on the finished vessel,
and the procedure for controlling such nameplates prior
to molding them into the vessel shall be clearly described
in the Fabricator’s Quality Control System.
(d) The Fabricator shall ensure that the nameplate with
the correct marking has been applied to the proper vessel,
and the Inspector shall verify that this has been done.
(e) Vessels intended for use with potable water as
described in RG-113 (Section IV application) shall bear
the letters HLW.
..............................
(Maximum allowable temperature)
..............................
(Minimum allowable temperature)
..............................
(Fabricator’s serial number)
..............................
(Year built)
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Abbreviations may be used for any of the required data.
(b) The maximum allowable pressure shall be equal to or less than
the design pressure. The maximum allowable temperature shall
be equal to or less than the maximum design temperature. The
minimum allowable temperature shall be equal to or greater than
the minimum design temperature.
NOTE: (1) The maximum allowable external working pressure is
required only when specified as a design condition.
RS-120 PART MARKING
Parts of pressure vessels for which Partial Data Reports
are required in RS-301 shall be marked as specified in
RS-100 by the parts’ fabricator and, in addition, the
word PART shall be applied under the Certification
Mark. In lieu of this marking of parts, other means of identification may be used. Such substitute markings shall be
clearly described in the parts’ fabricator’s Quality Control
Manual that has been accepted by ASME and the marking
shall remain legible until the part has been incorporated
into the finished vessel. This requirement does not apply
to such items as handhole covers, manhole covers, and
accessories.
RS-132 STAMPING AND MARKING OF
NAMEPLATES
The stamping and marking shall be arranged as shown
in Figure RS-132.1.
104
ð21Þ
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RS-2
USE OF CERTIFICATION MARK STAMP
RS-200 CERTIFICATION MARK STAMP
BEARING OFFICIAL MARK
RS-203 REGULATIONS CONCERNING ISSUANCE
AND USE OF STAMPS
Authorization to use the stamp bearing the official Certification Mark shown in Figure RS-100.1 will be granted by
ASME pursuant to the provisions of ASME CA-1, Conformity Assessment Requirements.
ASME may at any time make regulations concerning the
issuance and use of Certification Marks as it deems appropriate, and all such regulations become binding upon the
holders of any valid Certificates of Authorization. The
regulation and use of stamps shall be in accordance
with ASME CA-1, Conformity Assessment Requirements.
RS-201 APPLICATION FOR CERTIFICATION MARK
STAMP
RS-204 OBTAINING STAMPS
Application for the Certification Mark stamp shall be in
accordance with ASME CA-1, Conformity Assessment Requirements.
All stamps for applying the Certification Mark shall be
obtained from ASME.
RS-202 AUTHORIZATION TO USE CERTIFICATION
MARK STAMP
Authorization to use the Certification Mark stamp may
be granted, renewed, suspended, or withheld by ASME in
accordance with ASME CA-1, Conformity Assessment Requirements.
105
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE RS-3
REPORT FORMS
(b) Data Reports for those parts of a pressure vessel
that are furnished by a parts’ Fabricator to the user of
an existing Code vessel as replacement or repair parts
shall be executed on Form RP-2 or Form RP-4 by the
parts’ Fabricator and his Inspector in accordance with
the requirements of this Section. A copy of the parts’ Fabricator’s Partial Data Report shall be furnished to the user or
his designated agent and maintained in accordance with
RS-302.
(c) The parts’ Fabricator shall indicate under
“Remarks” the extent he has performed any or all of
the design functions. When the parts’ Fabricator performs
only a portion of the design, he shall state which portions
of the design he performed.
(d) Same day production of vessel parts may be
reported on a single Form RP-2 or Form RP-4, provided
all of the following are met:
(1) Vessel parts shall be identical.
(2) Fabricator’s serial numbers shall be in uninterrupted sequence.
(3) The Fabricator’s written Quality Control System
shall include procedures to control the development,
distribution, and retention of the Partial Data Reports.
(e) For guidance in preparing Partial Data Reports, see
Nonmandatory Appendix AI.
Sample Data Report Form RP-2 and Form RP-4 are
included at the end of this Section.
RS-300 FABRICATOR’S DATA REPORTS
A Fabricator’s Data Report shall be filled out on
Form RP-1 or Form RP-3, as applicable (sample forms
are included at the end of this Section), by the Fabricator
and shall be signed by the Fabricator and the Authorized
Inspector for each pressure vessel.
Same-day production of vessels may be reported on
Form RP-1 or Form RP-3, provided all of the following
requirements are met:
(a) Vessels shall be identical in design and manufacture.
(b) Vessels shall be manufactured for stock or for the
same user or his designated agent.
(c) Serial numbers shall be in uninterrupted sequence.
(d) The Fabricator’s written Quality Control System
shall include procedures to control the development,
distribution, and retention of the data reports.
RS-301 PARTIAL DATA REPORTS
(a) Partial Data Reports for those parts of a pressure
vessel requiring inspection under this Section, which are
furnished by other than the shop of the Fabricator responsible for the completed vessel, shall be executed by the
parts’ Fabricator and the Inspector in the parts’ Fabricator’s shop, in accordance with the requirements of this
Section, and shall be forwarded, in duplicate, to the Fabricator of the finished vessel. These Partial Data Reports,
together with the Inspector's own inspection, shall constitute the requirements for the Inspector to authorize and
witness the application of a Certification Mark to the
finished vessel (see RS-110). When Form RP-2 or Form
RP-4 is used, it shall be attached to the associated
Form RP-1 or Form RP-3 by the Fabricator of the
vessel to be marked with the Certification Mark.
RS-302 RETENTION OF DATA REPORTS
The Fabricator shall either keep a copy of the Data
Report on file for at least 5 yr for Class I vessels and
10 yr for Class II vessels, or register the vessel with
the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors, 1055 Crupper Avenue, Columbus, Ohio 43229. A copy
of the Data Report shall be sent to the User, Inspector, and
jurisdiction upon request.
106
ASME BPVC.X-2021
MANDATORY APPENDIX 1
QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM
(b) Organization. An organization chart shall be
included, showing the relationship between engineering,
quality control, purchasing, production, testing, inspection, and management.
(c) Drawings, Design Calculations, and Specifications.
The Quality Control System shall include procedures
that will ensure that the latest applicable drawings,
design calculations, specifications, and instructions
required by this Section as well as authorized changes
are used for fabrication, inspection, and testing. For
Class II and Class III vessels, the system shall also
include reference to the design documents prepared
and certified by a Professional Engineer, and shall also
ensure that all changes to such documents are approved
by a Professional Engineer.
(d) Production Flow and In‐Plant Inspection and Check‐
Off. A basic production flow procedure, including in‐plant
inspection and check‐off points and a means of recording
them, shall be included. These steps shall also ensure that
the Procedure Specifications specified on the drawings are
used for fabrication.
(e) Material Receiving Control and Identity. Prior to and
during fabrication operations, a system of material control
shall be maintained to ensure that material used complies
with the applicable specification.
(f) Nonconforming Material and Repairs. All nonconforming material and components (including fabrication
errors) shall be identified and recorded. Components that
fail to meet the required standards may be repaired if the
proposed repair is approved by the Design Engineer and
accepted by the Inspector prior to beginning the repair.
The system shall describe the location of the repair and
how the repair is controlled to meet Code requirements, or
the item shall be rejected.
(g) Resin Control. The system shall describe the control
of
(1) specification and mixing procedures;
(2) storage, issuance, handling, and disposal of
resins, catalysts, fillers, and pigments;
(3) method used to maintain identification of resins
during fabrication.
(h) Assembly, Fit‐Up, and Dimensions Control. The
system shall describe the control of
(1) assembly and fit‐up of the pressure vessel and
vessel parts to ensure compliance with fabrication drawings;
1-100 GENERAL
The Fabricator shall have and maintain a Quality
Control System which will establish that all Code requirements, including material, design, fabrication, examination by the Fabricator, and inspection (by the
Inspector), will be met. The System may include provisions for satisfying any requirements by the Fabricator
or User which exceed minimum Code requirements
and may include provisions for quality control of non‐
Code work. In such systems, the Fabricator may make
changes in parts of the system which do not affect the
Code requirements without securing acceptance by the
Inspector. Before implementation, revisions to Quality
Control Systems shall have been found acceptable to
the Authorized Inspector if such revisions affect Code requirements.
The system that the Fabricator uses to meet the requirements of this Section shall be suitable for his own circumstances. The necessary scope and detail of the system shall
depend on the complexity of the work performed and on
the size and complexity of the Fabricator’s or Assembler’s
organization. A written description of the system the
Fabricator will use to produce a Code item shall be available for review.
The written description may contain information of a
proprietary nature relating to the Fabricator’s processes.
Therefore, the Code does not require any distribution of
this information except for the Authorized Inspector and
ASME Designee as covered by 1-110(l). It is intended that
information learned about the system in connection with
the evaluation shall be treated as confidential and that all
loaned descriptions shall be returned to the Fabricator
upon completion of the evaluation.
1-110 OUTLINE OF SOME OF THE FEATURES
TO BE INCLUDED IN THE QUALITY
CONTROL SYSTEM
(a) Authority and Responsibility. The authority and
responsibility of those in charge of the Quality Control
System shall be clearly established. Persons performing
quality control functions shall have sufficient and well‐
defined responsibility, the authority and the organizational freedom to identify quality control problems and
to initiate, recommend, and provide solutions.
107
ASME BPVC.X-2021
(k) Self‐Auditing. Management shall regularly review
the status and adequacy of the Quality Control System.
(l) Authorized Inspector. The Quality Control System
shall include reference to the Authorized Inspector as
defined in RI-110. The Fabricator shall make available
to the Inspector a copy of the written Quality Control
System, and also all design documents and all other
data necessary for the Inspector to perform his duties
in accordance with this Section.
(m) Nondestructive Examination. The system shall
describe all nondestructive examinations and the procedures to be used by the Fabricator to fulfill the requirements of this Section.
(n) Records Retention. The Fabricator shall have a
system for the maintenance of Data Reports and other
records as required by this Section.
(o) Sample Forms. The forms used in the Quality Control
System and any detailed descriptions of their use shall be
available for review. The written description shall make
necessary reference to such forms.
(2) adhesive bonding and secondary lay‐up of
components to ensure compliance with fabrication drawings;
(3) dimensional checks as specified by the Code and
to ensure compliance with fabrication drawings.
(i) Calibration of Measurement and Test Equipment.
Establish and maintain a system for the calibration of
all examination, measuring, and test equipment used in
fulfillment of Code requirements. A written description
of this system shall be maintained and made available
to the Inspector upon request.
(j) Forms. Appropriate forms shall be included and
cross‐referenced with the items of this Appendix as applicable:
(1) process or traveler’s sheets;
(2) in‐plant inspection and check‐off forms;
(3) procedures and performance qualification
forms;
(4) Data Report Forms;
(5) Other appropriate forms.
108
ASME BPVC.X-2021
MANDATORY APPENDIX 2
CAPACITY CONVERSIONS FOR SAFETY VALVES
The information formerly in this Appendix has been moved to Section XIII, Mandatory Appendix IV.
109
ð21Þ
ASME BPVC.X-2021
MANDATORY APPENDIX 4
GLOSSARY OF TERMS RELATED TO FIBER‐REINFORCED
PLASTICS
accelerator: a material which, when mixed with a resin and
curing agent, will speed up the chemical reaction between
the resin and curing agent.
band thickness: in filament winding, the thickness of the
reinforcement as it is applied to the mandrel.
bandwidth: in filament winding, the width of the reinforcement as it is applied to the mandrel.
adhesive: substance capable of holding two surfaces
together.
batch: a quantity of material produced in a single, separate
production run which is identifiable by a unique number.
ambient conditions: prevailing environmental conditions,
such as the surrounding temperature, pressure, and relative humidity.
biaxial load: a loading condition whereby a laminate is
stressed in at least two different directions in the
plane of the laminate. The loading condition of a pressure
vessel under internal pressure and with unrestrained
ends.
angle ply laminate: possessing equal plies with positive
and negative angles. This bidirectional laminate is orthotropic. Typical examples of an angle ply laminate would be
cross‐ply [0∕90] or [±45].
biaxial winding: a type of winding in which the helical band
is laid in sequence, side by side, eliminating crossover of
the fibers.
anisotropy: material properties that vary with the orientation or direction of the reference coordinates. Having
different material properties in all directions.
bidirectional laminate: a reinforced plastic laminate with
the fibers oriented in various directions in the plane of the
laminate (see also unidirectional laminate).
aramid fiber: an aromatic polyamide fiber.
A‐stage: an early stage in the reaction of certain thermosetting resins, in which the material is still soluble in
certain liquids and fusible.
bladder: a flexible liner with independent burst strength
not greater than 10% of the vessel design pressure,
temporarily installed in a fiber‐reinforced pressure
vessel prototype in order to prevent leakage through
the wall (to facilitate attainment of the required qualification pressure).
ASTM ring: a parallel filament wound test ring made to the
requirements of ASTM D2291.
axial winding: in filament‐wound composites, a winding
with the filaments parallel to the longitudinal axis (0 deg
helix angle).
bleedout: in filament‐wound composites, the excess liquid
resin that migrates to the surface of a winding.
balanced design: in filament‐wound reinforced plastics, a
winding pattern designed to have equal stresses in all filaments.
B‐stage: an intermediate stage in the reaction of certain
thermosetting resins in which the material swells when in
contact with certain liquids and softens when heated, but
may not entirely dissolve or fuse. The resin in an uncured
prepreg or premix is usually in this stage.
balanced‐in‐plane contour: in a filament‐wound part, a
head contour in which the filaments are oriented
within a plane and the radii of curvature are adjusted
to balance the stresses along the filaments with the pressure loading.
bulk molding compound: a blend of resin and chopped
fibers used for compression and injection molding.
balanced laminate: where plies with positive angles are
balanced by equal plies with negative angles. A balanced
laminate is orthotropic in in‐plane behavior but may be
anisotropic in flexural behavior.
carbon filament: made from organic precursor filament
using a process of high temperature and mechanical
stretching in an oxygen-free environment.
band density: in filament winding, the quantity of fiber
reinforcement per inch of bandwidth, expressed as
strands (or filaments) per inch.
catenary: the tendency of some strands in a taut horizontal
roving to sag lower than the others; a measure of the evenness of length (of winding tension indirectly) of strands in
a specified length of roving. The distance between the
catalyst: see initiator.
110
ASME BPVC.X-2021
strands at the midpoint of a roving draped in a catenary in
a specified manner (see also strand length differential).
cure: to change the properties of a plastic by chemical reaction, which may be condensation, polymerization, or addition; usually accomplished by the action of heat or catalyst
or both, with or without pressure.
circs: see circumferential winding.
circuit: one complete traverse of the fiber feed mechanism
of a winding machine; in filament‐wound, fiber‐reinforced
plastics, one complete traverse of a winding band from one
arbitrary point along the winding path to another point on
a plane through the starting point and perpendicular to the
axis.
curing agent: substance mixed with resin, generally with
the addition of heat, that will chemically combine to form a
polymer by cross-linking.
deformation: alteration of shape or size of a component
part.
circumferential (circs) winding: in filament‐wound composites, a winding with the filaments essentially perpendicular to the axis (90 deg or level winding).
delamination: the physical separation or loss of bond
between laminate plies.
displacement angle: in filament winding, the advancement
distance of the winding ribbon on the equator after one
complete circuit.
compatibility: usually refers to the suitability of a sizing or
finish for use with certain general resin types (e.g., polyester compatible roving, epoxy compatible roving, etc.).
doubler: in a filament‐wound part, a local area with extra‐
wound reinforcement, wound integrally with the part, or
wound separately and fastened to the part.
compliance: measurement of softness as opposed to stiffness of a material. It is a reciprocal of the Young’s modulus,
or an inverse of the stiffness matrix.
dry laminate: a laminate containing insufficient resin for
complete bonding of the reinforcement.
composite: material that is made of two or more constituent materials.
dry spot: in a laminate, an area containing insufficient resin
for complete bonding of the reinforcement.
constituent materials: individual materials that make up
the composite material, such as glass fibers and epoxy.
dry winding: filament winding with dry strands of fiber;
often used to confirm the winding pattern.
contact molding: a process for molding reinforced plastics
in which reinforcement and resin are placed on a mold;
cure is either at room temperature using a catalyst–
promoter system or by heat in an oven, and no additional
pressure is used.
dwell: in filament winding, the time that the traverse
mechanism is stationary while the mandrel continues
to rotate to the appropriate point for the traverse to
begin a new pass.
coupling agent: in fibers for composites, the part of the
surface treatment or finish which is designed to
provide a bonding link between the surface and the laminating resin.
E-CR glass: an E-glass material formulated such that it has
improved corrosion resistance, particularly to acids.
E‐glass: a borosilicate glass; the type most used for glass
fibers for reinforced plastics. Suitable for electrical laminates because of its high resistivity.
crazing: in a composite, the appearance of fine cracks in
the resin, usually as a result of excessive resin shrinkage or
some external loading condition.
engineering constants: typical constants are the effective
Young’s modulus, Poisson’s ratio, and shear modulus.
Each constant is accompanied by letter or numerical
subscripts designating the direction associated with
the property. These are measured directly from uniaxial
tensile, compressive, and pure shear test applied to unidirectional as well as laminated composites.
creel: an apparatus for holding a number of packages of
strand, yarn, roving, tape, etc. Tensioning devices are
sometimes included in the creel.
creep: the special case of inelasticity that relates to the
stress‐induced time‐dependent deformation under
load. Small time‐dependent deformations may occur
after the removal of all applied loads.
epoxy: synthetic resin containing a reactive group in which
an oxygen atom is joined to each of two carbon atoms
which are already united in some other way (see
sketch below).
critical buckling stress: least value of stress that will cause
buckling.
cross‐ply laminate: special laminate that contains only 0
deg and 90 deg plies.
C‐stage: the final stage in the reaction of certain thermosetting resins in which the material is relatively insoluble
and infusible. The resin in a fully cured thermoset molding
is in this stage.
equator: in a filament‐wound pressure vessel, the line
described by the juncture of the cylindrical portion
and the end dome.
expansion stresses: stresses resulting from restraint of free
expansion and displacement of the piping system.
111
ASME BPVC.X-2021
external pressure: a condition where the absolute pressure
inside the vessel is less than the absolute pressure on the
outside of the vessel.
gel time: time lapsed as read on the actual exotherm curve
between 150°F and 10°F above the 180°F bath temperature (190°F). This definition applies for any desired reference (bath) temperature.
fabric: a planar structure produced by interlacing yarns,
rovings, etc.
geodesic: the shortest distance between two points on a
surface.
fiber: single filament, rolled or formed in one direction,
and used as the principal constituent of woven and
nonwoven composite materials. Most common fibers
are glass and carbon.
geodesic isotensoid: see geodesic ovaloid. Isotensoid refers
to constant stress level in any given filament at all points in
its path.
fiber content: percent by volume, or percent by weights, of
the fiber component in a composite material. See also loss‐
on‐ignition.
geodesic isotensoid contour: in filament‐wound, fiber‐reinforced plastic pressure vessels, a dome contour with
controlled and varying meridional and hoop curvatures
such that filaments placed on geodesic paths will
exhibit uniform tensions, balanced so that the resolved
loads lie in the fiber directions, throughout their length
under pressure loading.
fiber stress: in a filament‐wound part, usually a pressure
vessel, the stress calculated using the load and the cross‐
sectional area of the reinforcement only.
filament winding: a process for fabricating a composite
structure in which continuous reinforcements (filament,
tape, or other), either previously impregnated with a
matrix material or impregnated during winding, are
placed over a rotating and removable form or mandrel
in a previously prescribed way to meet certain stress conditions. Generally, the shape is a surface of revolution and
may or may not include end closures.
geodesic line: the shortest distance between two points on
a surface of revolution.
geodesic ovaloid: a contour for end domes, the fibers
forming a geodesic line. The forces exerted by the filaments
are proportioned to match the hoop and meridional
stresses at any point.
geodesic ovaloid contour: see geodesic isotensoid contour.
filler: a relatively inert nonfibrous material added to a
plastic to modify its strength, permanence, working properties, or other qualities, or to lower costs.
glass fiber: a glass filament that has been cut to a measurable length. Staple fibers of relatively short length and
suitable for spinning into yarn.
finish: a material applied to the surface of fibers used to
reinforce plastics and intended to improve the physical
properties of such reinforced plastics over that obtained
using glass reinforcement without finish (see surface
treatment).
glass filament: a form of glass that has been drawn to a
small diameter and extreme length.
graphite filament: made from carbon filament and
processed to a higher temperature, to a point where
the material is transformed into graphite, a crystalline
allotrope of carbon.
free end displacement: the relative motions that would
occur between an attachment and connected structure
or equipment if the two members were separated. Examples of such motions are those that would occur because of
relative thermal expansion of piping, equipment, and
equipment supports, or because of rotations imposed
upon the equipment by sources other than piping.
gross structural discontinuity: a source of stress or strain
intensification which effects a relatively large portion of a
structure and has a significant effect on the overall stress
or strain pattern or on the structure as a whole (e.g., head‐
to‐shell and flange‐to‐shell junctions, nozzles, and junctions between shells of different diameters or thicknesses).
fuzz: accumulation of short broken filaments after passing
fiber strands, yarns, or rovings over a contact point. Often
weighted and used as an inverse measure of abrasion
resistance.
hand lay‐up: the process of placing and working successive
plies of the reinforcing material or resin‐impregnated reinforcement in position on a mold by hand. See also
contact molding.
gap: in filament winding, the space between successive
windings, where windings are usually intended to lie
next to each other.
hardener: see curing agent.
head: the end closure(s) of a cylindrical container.
gel: the initial jellylike solid phase that develops during the
cure of a thermosetting resin.
helical winding: in filament‐wound composites, a winding
in which a filament band advances along a helical path, not
necessarily at a constant angle, except in the case of a cylinder.
gel coat: a resin applied to the surface of a mold and gelled
prior to lay‐up. The gel coat becomes an integral part of the
finished laminate and is usually used to improve surface
appearance, etc.
high pressure molding: a molding process in which the
pressure used is greater than 200 psi.
112
ASME BPVC.X-2021
hoop winding: see circumferential winding.
laminate: a product made by bonding together two or
more layers of material or materials.
hybrid: composite with more than two constituents (i.e.,
epoxy resin with two or more fibers), such as a carbon/
glass/epoxy composite hybrid.
laminate ply: one layer of a product made by bonding
together two or more layers of material.
impregnate: in fiber‐reinforced plastics, saturation of the
reinforcement with a resin.
lamination theory: the most common method for the
analysis and design of composite laminates; each ply
or ply group is treated as a quasi‐homogeneous material.
Linear strain across the thickness is assumed.
inelasticity: a general characteristic of material behavior in
which material does not return to its original (undeformed) shape and size after removal of all applied loads.
lap: in filament winding, the amount of overlay between
successive windings, usually intended to minimize
gapping.
inhibitor: a material added to a resin/hardener mixture to
slow down cure at approximately room temperature.
Usually used in prepreg or premix resins.
lay: in filament winding, the orientation of the ribbon with
some reference, usually the axis of rotation.
initiator: a material which, when mixed with a resin, will
react chemically with the resin to produce a cured thermoset.
lay‐up: see below
(a) a laminate that has been assembled, but not cured
(b) a description of the component materials,
geometry, etc., of a laminate
interface: on fibers, the contact area between fiber and
surface treatment (or finish). In a laminate, the contact
area between the fiber surface treatment, or finish,
and the laminating resin.
level winding: see circumferential winding.
liner: in a pressure vessel, an inner protective barrier of
metallic, elastomeric, thermoset or thermoplastic materials to protect the laminate from corrosive chemical
attack or prevent leakage under stress.
interlaminar shear strength: the maximum shear stress
existing between layers of a laminated material.
interlaminar stresses: the three stress components associated with the thickness direction of a plate. Interlaminar
stresses are significant if the thickness is greater than 10%
of the length or width of the plate. These stresses can also
be significant in areas of concentrated loads and abrupt
change in material and geometry. The effects of these
stresses are difficult to assess because three‐dimensional
stress analysis and the failure criterion are not well understood.
load stress: the stress resulting from the application of a
load, such as internal pressure or the effects of gravity, as
distinguished from thermal stress.
local primary membrane stress: a membrane stress
produced by pressure or other mechanical loading and
associated with a primary and/or a discontinuity effect
which would, if not limited, produce excessive distortion
in the transfer of load to other portions of the structure.
Conservatism requires that such a stress be classified as a
local primary membrane stress even though it has some
characteristics of a secondary stress. An example of a local
primary membrane stress is the membrane stress in a
shell produced by external load and moment at a permanent support or at a nozzle connection.
invariant: constant values for all orientations of the coordinate axis. Components of stress, strain, stiffness, and
compliance all have linear and quadratic invariants.
For composite materials they represent directionally
independent properties, and the bounds of stiffness
and strength of multidirectional laminates.
local structural discontinuity: a source of stress or strain
intensification which affects a relatively small volume of
material and does not have a significant effect on the
overall stress or strain pattern or on the structure as a
whole (e.g., small fillet radii and small attachments).
isotensoid: constant tension.
isotropic laminate: a laminate in which the strength properties are equal in the in-plane directions (see quasiisotropic).
knitted matrix fabric: a structure produced by inserting
reinforcing fibers into a knitted matrix. The matrix
fibers are non‐reinforcing and serve only to hold the reinforcing fibers in place.
longitudinal modulus: elastic constant along the fiber
direction in a unidirectional composite, such as longitudinal Young’s modulus.
longos: low‐angle helical or longitudinal windings.
knuckle area: the area in an end dome region near the
juncture with the cylindrical portion; in a filament‐
wound part, the area of transition between different
general shapes, e.g., the transition from a central cylindrical portion to the end dome.
loops and snarls: a place in a roving where one or more
short lengths of strand have doubled back on themselves.
loop order: the number of individual circuits required for a
winding path to begin repeating by laying down immediately adjacent to the initial circuit.
lamina: ply or layer of unidirectional composite or fabric.
113
ASME BPVC.X-2021
loss‐on‐ignition: weight loss, usually expressed in percent
of total, after burning off an organic surface treatment
from fibers or an organic resin from a fiber laminate.
Usually the distribution of normal stress is not uniform
through the thickness of a part, so this stress is considered
to be made up in turn of two components, one of which is
uniformly distributed and equal to the average value of
stress across the thickness of the section under consideration, and the other of which varies with the location across
the thickness.
low‐pressure molding: molding or laminating in which the
pressure used is between 15 psi and 200 psi.
mandrel: in filament winding, the mold on which the laminating material is wound.
off‐axis: not coincident with the symmetry axis; also called
off‐angle.
mat: a fiber material for composite laminates consisting of
randomly oriented chopped strands or swirled strands
with a binder and available in blankets of various
widths and lengths.
orthotropy: having three mutually perpendicular planes of
symmetry. Unidirectional plies, fabric, cross‐ply, and
angle‐ply laminates are all orthotropic.
mat binder: a resin which is applied to fiber strands and
cured during the manufacture of a mat to hold strands in
place and maintain the shape of the mat.
ovaloid: a surface of revolution symmetrical about the
polar axis which forms the end closure for a filament‐
wound cylinder (e.g., an elliptical head closure).
matrix: see resin.
part: a portion of a vessel that is fabricated by an operation
or process requiring inspection by the Inspector.
matrix: mathematical entity, consisting of rows and
columns of numbers. In two dimensions, stress and
strain are 1 × 3 matrices, and stiffness and compliance
are 3 × 3 matrices.
peak stress: a stress that may or may not be highly localized
and does not cause noticeable distortions. Examples of
peak stress are:
(a) the thermal stress in the wall of a vessel or pipe
caused by a rapid change in temperature of the contained
fluid;
(b) the stress at a local structural discontinuity.
matrix inversion: algebraic operation to obtain compliance
matrix from stiffness matrix, or vice versa. It is analogous
to obtaining the reciprocal of a number.
membrane stress: the component of normal stress which is
uniformly distributed and equal to the average value of
stress across the thickness of the section under consideration.
phenolic: synthetic condensation resins of aldehyde and
phenols. The common reactants are formaldehyde,
phenol, and cresol.
midplane: middle surface of a laminate thickness; usually
the z = 0 plane.
planar winding: a winding in which the filament path on
each dome lies on a plane that intersects the dome, while a
helical path over the cylindrical section is connected to the
dome paths.
modulus: elastic constants such as the Young’s modulus or
shear modulus.
plasticizer: a material added to a resin to facilitate
compounding and improve flexibility and other properties
of the finished product.
moment: stress couple that causes a plate or beam to bend
or twist.
multicircuit winding: in filament‐wound composites, a
winding that requires more than one circuit before the
band repeats by laying adjacent to the first band.
plied yarn: a yarn formed by twisting together two or more
single yarns in one operation.
multidirectional: having multiple ply orientations in a
laminate.
ply group: a group formed by contiguous plies with the
same angle.
netting analysis: the analysis of filament‐wound structures
which assumes that the stresses induced in the structure
are carried entirely by the filaments, and the strength of
the resin is not taken into account. Also, the filaments
possess no bending or shearing stiffness and carry
only axial loads.
ply strain: those components in a ply which, by the laminate plate theory, are the same as those in the laminate.
ply stress: those components in a ply which vary from ply
to ply depending on the materials and angles in the laminate.
polar piece: in a pressure vessel, the metal reinforcements
placed at both ends of the major axis of the vessel. Their
extension into the end dome depends on stress conditions.
NOL ring: a parallel filament‐wound test specimen used
for measuring various mechanical strength properties of
the material by testing the entire ring, or segments of it.
The ring is usually 5.750 in. (146 mm) in inside diameter
by 0.250 in. (6 mm) wide by either 0.060 in. (1.52 mm) or
0.125 in. (3.18 mm) in wall thickness.
polar winding: a winding in which the filament path passes
tangent to the polar opening at one end of the chamber,
and tangent to the opposite side of the polar opening at the
other end. A one‐circuit pattern is inherent in the system.
normal stress: the component of stress normal to the plane
of reference (this is also referred to as direct stress).
polyester: see below
114
ASME BPVC.X-2021
(a) basically a class of thermosetting resins produced
by esterification of polybasic organic acids (or anhydrides) with polyhydric alcohols;
(b) for Code purposes, polyester may be any type of
liquid resin which comprises a mixture of polymerizable
unsaturated ester and a copolymerizable monomeric
substance that contains at least one active ethylene
double bond; this liquid resin shall be capable of
gelling and curing to infusible polymer by free radical
initiation at ordinary temperatures with negligible
change in weight;
(c) commonly, the unsaturated ester is a polymer of
maleic anhydride, phthalic anhydride, and glycol; the
copolymerizable monomer (which also serves as
solvent) is styrene, and the free radical initiator is an
organic peroxide;
(d) any resin which is handled and cured in a similar
manner can be considered acceptable as polyester.
principal direction: specific coordinate axes orientation
when stress and strain components reach maximum
and minimum for the normal components and zero for
the shear.
principal stress: the stress component normal to the plane
on which the shearing stress is zero.
promoter: see accelerator.
quasi-isotropic: laminates exhibit isotropic (that is, independent of direction) in-plane response but are not
restricted to isotropic out-of-plane (bending) response.
Depending upon the stacking sequence of the individual
layers, the laminate may exhibit coupling between inplane and out-of-plane response.
random pattern: a winding with no fixed pattern. If a large
number of circuits is required for the pattern to repeat, a
random pattern is approached.
reinforced plastic: see composite.
post cure: additional oven cure, usually without pressure,
after initial cure to improve final properties of reinforced
plastic laminates.
reinforcement: material which is applied to a resin matrix
in order to strengthen and improve the properties of the
resin.
pot life: the length of time a resin system retains a viscosity
low enough to be used in laminating.
release agent: material which is applied in a thin film to the
surface of a mold to keep the laminating resin from
bonding to the mold.
preform: a matlike structure of chopped fibers bonded
together and approximating the shape of the structure.
resin: in composites, the material used to bind together the
reinforcement material; also known as matrix.
preform binder: a resin applied to the chopped strands of a
preform, usually during its formation, and cured so that
the preform will retain its shape and can be handled.
resin applicator: in filament winding, the device which
deposits the liquid resin onto the reinforcement band.
premix: see bulk molding compound.
resin content: the amount of resin in a laminate, expressed
as a percent of either total weight or total volume.
prepreg: in reinforced plastics, the mixture of resin, catalyst, reinforcements, fillers, etc., in web or filamentous
form, to provide a complete mix ready for molding.
resin flexibilizer: see plasticizer.
ribbonization: the degree of flattening of a sized roving,
expressed as the ratio of ribbon width to thickness.
pressure: unless otherwise defined, means gage pressure.
pressure bag molding: a process for molding reinforced
plastics in which a tailored flexible bag is placed over
the contact lay‐up on the mold, sealed, and clamped in
place. Fluid pressure (usually compressed air) is
placed against the bag, and the part is cured.
ribbon width: see bandwidth.
ring punchout shear strength: the interlaminar shear
strength of a filament‐wound cylinder at a predetermined
shear plane.
primary stress: a normal stress or a shear stress developed
by the imposed loading which is necessary to satisfy the
simple laws of equilibrium of external and integral forces
and moments. The basic characteristic of a primary stress
is that it is not self‐limiting. Primary stresses which
considerably exceed the stress at onset of cracking will
result in failure or, at least, in gross distortion. A
thermal stress is not classified as a primary stress. Examples of primary stress are:
(a) general membrane stress in a circular cylindrical or
a spherical shell due to internal pressure or to distributed
live loads;
(b) bending stress in the central portion of a flat head
due to pressure.
roving: an assemblage of a number of strands or ends,
roughly parallel and with very little twist.
roving ball: package, usually cylindrically wound, of
continuous roving.
roving ball build: the geometry of a roving ball, including a
description of the waywind.
roving integrity: the degree of bond between strands in a
roving.
S‐glass: magnesia–alumina–silicate glass, especially
designed to provide very high tensile strength glass filaments.
secondary bonding: the joining of two or more FRP subassemblies by adhesive bonding, laminate overlay, or other
suitable means to form a larger component.
115
ASME BPVC.X-2021
secondary stress: a normal stress or a shear stress developed by the constraint of adjacent parts or by self‐
constraint of a structure. The basic characteristic of a
secondary stress is that it is self‐limiting. Local inelastic
deformation and minor distortions can satisfy the conditions which cause the stress to occur. Examples of
secondary stress are:
(a) general thermal stress;
(b) bending stress at a gross structural discontinuity.
spray‐up: a process for laying up reinforced plastics in
which a special “gun” chops fiber roving and sprays
resin and a curing agent or catalyst–accelerator on the
mold. The lay‐up is then usually worked by hand (see
contact molding).
stacking sequence: ply ordering in a laminate. Stacking
sequence does not affect the in‐plane properties of a
symmetric laminate. Only the ply number and ply
angles are important. But stacking sequence becomes
critical for the flexural properties, and the interlaminar
stresses for any laminate, symmetric or not. Stacking
sequence is important for asymmetric and hybrid laminates.
sequential winding: see biaxial winding.
shakedown: in a structure, occurs during the first few
cycles of load application. The subsequent structural
response is elastic, and progressive incremental inelastic
deformation is absent. Elastic shakedown is the case in
which the subsequent response is elastic.
stiffness: ratio between the applied stress and the resulting
strain. Young’s modulus is the stiffness of a material
subjected to uniaxial stress. For composite materials, stiffness and other properties are dependent on the orientation of the material.
shear stress: the component of stress tangent to the plane
of reference.
shelf life: length of time a material can be stored under
specified environmental conditions without failure to
meet specifications.
strain: geometric measurement of deformation.
strand: an assembly of continuous filaments, without
twist. A loosely bonded assemblage of fibers or filaments;
the immediate product of the multifiber forming process.
Also known as tow.
shelling: a term applied to loops of roving falling to the base
of a roving ball as the roving is payed out from the ball on
end.
short beam shear strength: the interlaminar shear strength
of a parallel composite as determined by three‐point flexural loading of a short segment cut from a ring‐type
specimen.
strand count: the number of strands in a plied yarn; the
number of strands in a roving.
silicone: semiorganic polymers made up of a skeleton
structure of alternate silicon and oxygen atoms with
various organic groups attached to the silicon.
strand length differential: similar to catenary, a measure of
the difference in length of the strands or yarns in a roving,
the difference being caused by uneven tension, waywind,
etc. (see also catenary)
strand integrity: degree of bond between the filaments in a
strand.
single circuit winding: winding in which the filament path
makes a complete traverse of the chamber, after which the
following traverse lies immediately adjacent to the
previous one.
strand tensile strength: tensile strength of a fiber strand,
yarn, or roving, when tested as a straight specimen.
strength: maximum stress that a material can sustain. Like
the stiffness of a composite material, strength is highly
dependent on the direction and sign of the applied
stress, such as axial tensile as opposed to transverse
compression.
size: to apply compounds to a strand, which compounds
form a more or less continuous film around the strand and
individual fibers.
sizing content: the percent of the total strand weight made
up by the sizing, usually determined by burning off the
organic sizing (see also loss‐on‐ignition).
strength ratio: the ratio of the stress capacity of a single
layer relative to the stress generated by an applied loading
condition, as calculated using the stresses from RD-1188
and the appropriate quadratic interaction equation in
RD-1188.5.
sizing extractables: the percent of the total sizing weight
that can be extracted with acetone or some other applicable solvent, measured primarily on certain reactive
sizings to determine degree of cure.
stress: intensity of forces within a body.
stress concentration: increased ratio of a local stress over
the average stress.
skein: a continuous strand, yarn, roving, etc., wound up to
some measurable length and usually used to measure
various physical properties of the material.
stress intensity: the equivalent intensity of combined
stress, or in short, the stress intensity, is defined as
twice the maximum shear stress. In other words, the
stress intensity is the difference between the algebraically
largest principal stress and the algebraically smallest.
skirt: a nonpressurized shell of revolution supporting a
pressure vessel.
splice: the joining of two ends of glass fiber yarn or strand,
usually by means of an air drying glue.
116
ASME BPVC.X-2021
tow: an untwisted group of continuous fibers (see roving)
Tension stresses are considered positive and compression
stresses are considered negative.
transformation: variation of stiffness, strength, stress,
strain, and other material properties due to the coordinate
transformation or rotation of the reference coordinate
axes. Transformation follows strict mathematical equations. The study of composite materials relies heavily
on these transformation equations to correctly describe
the directional dependency of the materials.
stress–strain relationship: a linear relation is usually
assumed for calculating stress from strain or strain
from stress. For multidirectional laminates, it can be
generalized to include in‐plane stress–strain and flexural
stress– strain relations. All anisotropic relations are
simple extensions of the isotropic relation. Young’s
modulus is the quotient of stress divided by strain.
uniaxial load: a loading condition whereby a laminate is
stressed in only one direction.
surface mat: a very thin mat, usually 7 mils (0.18 mm) to 20
mils (0.51 mm) thick, or highly filamentized fiber.
unidirectional composite: having parallel fibers in a
composite. Compare with unidirectional laminate.
surface treatment: on fibers, the compounds which, when
applied to filaments at forming, provide a loose bond
between the filaments, and provide various desired handling and processing properties. For reinforcing plastics,
the surface treatment will also contain a coupling
agent. Also known as sizing.
unidirectional laminate: a composite laminate in which all
the fibers are oriented in the same direction.
veil: see surface mat.
symmetric laminate: possessing midplane symmetry.
vinyl ester: a thermoset resin with epoxy backbone, but
which cures by peroxide initiation like a polyester.
tack: with special reference to prepreg materials, the
degree of stickiness of the resin.
voids: air pockets that have been trapped and cured into a
laminate.
thermal stress: a self‐balancing stress produced by a nonuniform distribution of temperature or by differing thermal
coefficients of expansion. Thermal stress is developed in a
solid body whenever a volume of material is prevented
from assuming the size and shape that it normally
would under a change in temperature.
Two types of thermal stress are recognized, depending
on the volume or area in which distortion takes place, as
follows.
(a) General thermal stress, which is associated with
distortion of the structure in which it occurs. Examples
of general thermal stress are:
(1) stress produced by an axial temperature distribution in a cylindrical shell;
(2) stress produced by the temperature difference
between a nozzle and the shell to which it is attached.
(b) Local thermal stress, which is associated with
almost complete suppression of the differential expansion
and thus produces no significant distortion. Examples of
local thermal stress are:
(1) stress in a small hot spot in a vessel wall;
(2) thermal stress in layers of material which have
different coefficients of expansion.
volatiles: materials in a roving sizing or a resin formulation
which are capable of being driven off as a vapor at room or
slightly elevated temperature.
thermoplastic: a plastic which is capable of being repeatedly softened by increase of temperature and hardened by
decrease of temperature.
winding pattern: the path of the fiber laid down by the
winding machine, generally repeated within a layer,
leading to the eventual complete coverage of the liner
or mandrel. The term also applies to nonrepeating
paths such as transitions between layers wound at
different helical angles.
wall stress: in a filament‐wound part, usually a pressure
vessel, the stress calculated using the load and the entire
laminate cross‐sectional area (see also fiber stress)
waywind: the number of wraps or turns that roving or yarn
make from one side of the wound package back to the same
side.
wet lay‐up: a reinforced plastic which has liquid resin
applied as the reinforcement is being laid up.
wet‐out: the condition of an impregnated roving or yarn
wherein substantially all voids between sized strands and
filaments are filled with resin.
wet‐out rate: the time required for a plastic to fill the interstices of a reinforcement material and wet the surface of
the reinforcement fibers, usually determined by optical or
light transmission means.
wet winding: filament‐winding reinforced plastics when
the fiber reinforcement is coated with liquid resin just
prior to wrapping on the mandrel.
thermoset: a plastic which, when cured by application of
heat or chemical means, changes into a substantially infusible and insoluble material.
winding tension: in filament winding, the amount of
tension on the reinforcement as it makes contact with
a mandrel.
thixotropic: the capacity of a liquid material to have high
static shear strength (viscosity) and at the same time low
dynamic shear strength. Such a material can be mixed
(stirred), but will not flow under the force of gravity.
yardage: see yield.
117
ASME BPVC.X-2021
yield: the number of yards of yarn, roving strand, etc., per
pound of glass fibers; the reciprocal of weight per yard.
118
ASME BPVC.X-2021
MANDATORY APPENDIX 5
SPECIFIC GRAVITY OF LIQUID RESINS
This Article specifies the procedure that shall be used to
determine the specific gravity. This is accomplished by
weighing a standard volume of liquid at a specific
temperature and converting this weight to specific gravity.
(b) Tare weigh the empty cup and lid to ±0.1 g.
(c) Fill the cup to the brim with the resin sample, bubble
free.
(d) Place cover on lid and force down the seat firmly.
(e) Wipe the cup clean on the outside.
(f) Weigh the filled cup to ±0.1 g.
5-200 APPARATUS
5-500 CALCULATIONS
(a) laboratory balance (0.1 g sensitivity)
(b) weight per gallon cup (water capacity 83.2 mL) with
lid (Gardner catalog No. 9652 or equivalent)
(c) thermometer (ASTM No. 17C)
(a) Weight (lb/gal) = [weight of full cup (g) − tare
weight (g)]/10.
(b) Specific gravity = weight (lb/gal)/8.33.
5-100 INTRODUCTION
5-600 REPORT
5-300 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Record specific gravity determination in the Quality
Control Test Report.
See specification for material to be tested.
5-400 PROCEDURE
(a) Precondition the resin sample and weight per
gallon cup for 20 min at 25°C ± 0.1°C. Insert the cup
and the resin sample separately in a large beaker.
Place in a 25°C water bath.
119
ASME BPVC.X-2021
MANDATORY APPENDIX 6
STRUCTURAL LAMINATE VISUAL ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
6-100 STRUCTURAL LAMINATE VISUAL
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
For Class I pressure vessels, see Table 6-100.1. For Class
II pressure vessels, see Table 6-100.2.
120
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Table 6-100.1
Structural Laminate Visual Acceptance Criteria for Class I Pressure Vessels
Imperfection Name
Maximum Size and Cumulative
Sum of Imperfections Allowable
(After Repair) [Note (1)],
[Note (2)], [Note (3)]
Definition of Imperfection
Air bubble (void)
Air entrapment within and between the plies of
reinforcement, usually spherical in shape
1
Blister
Rounded elevation of the surface of the laminate with
boundaries that may be sharply defined, somewhat
resembling in shape a blister on the human skin
Pressure side: none; nonpressure
side: 1∕8 in. (3 mm) max. diam., max.
density 1 per ft2 (1 per 1 000 cm2),
none less than 2 in. (50 mm) apart
Burned areas from excessive
exotherm
Showing evidence of thermal decomposition through
discoloration or heavy distortion
None
Chips
Small pieces broken off an edge of the laminate that
includes fiber breakage
* 1∕16 in. (1.5 mm) diam. or 1∕4 in.
(6 mm) length by 1∕16 in. (1.5 mm)
deep max.
Cracks
Ruptures or debond of portions of the laminate
None: pressure or nonpressure side
Crazing
Fine cracks at the surface of the laminate
Max. 1 in. (25 mm) long by 1∕64 in.
(1 mm) deep, max. density 5 in any
square foot (1 000 cm2)
Delamination (internal)
Separation of the layers in a laminate
None
Delamination (edge)
Separation of the layers of material at the edge of
laminate
Max. dimension 1∕8 in. (3 mm) and
must not contact the process fluid
Dry spot
Area of incomplete surface film where the
reinforcement has not been wetted with resin
None
Edge exposure
Exposure of multiple layers of the reinforcing matrix
to the environment, usually as a result of
shaping or cutting a section of laminate
None
Foreign inclusion
Particles included in a laminate which are foreign
to its composition (not a minute speck of dust)
*Max. 1∕8 in. (3 mm) diam., never to
penetrate lamination to
lamination; must be fully resin
encapsulated
Fish‐eye
Small globular mass which has not blended completely
into the surrounding material and is particularly
evident in a transparent or translucent material
*Pressure side: none; nonpressure
side: 1∕8 in. (3 mm) diam. max.
Pimples (nonpressure side)
Small, sharp, conical elevations on the surface of a
laminate
No limit; must be fully resin filled and
wetted
Pit
Small crater in the surface of a laminate
* 1∕8 in. (3 mm) diam. max. by 1∕16 in.
(1.5 mm) deep max.; no exposed
fibers
121
∕8 in. (3 mm) max. diam., max. density
4 per sq in. (6 per 10 cm2); 1∕16 in.
(1.5 mm) max. diam., max. density
10 per in.2 (15 per 10 cm2)
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Table 6-100.1
Structural Laminate Visual Acceptance Criteria for Class I Pressure Vessels (Cont’d)
Imperfection Name
Definition of Imperfection
Maximum Size and Cumulative
Sum of Imperfections Allowable
(After Repair) [Note (1)],
[Note (2)], [Note (3)]
Porosity
Presence of numerous visible tiny pits (pinholes),
approximate dimension 0.010 in.
None shall fully penetrate the surface;
no more than 15 per in.2 (24 per
10 cm2); no exposed fibers
Scratches
Shallow marks, grooves, furrows, or channels
caused by improper handling
*Pressure side: none; nonpressure
side: none more than 6 in. (150
mm) long; no exposed fibers
Wrinkles and creases
Generally linear, abrupt changes in surface plane
caused by laps of reinforcing layers, irregular
mold shape, or polyester film overlap
Filament wound: none; others: max.
deviation 20% of wall or 1∕8 in.
(3 mm), whichever is less
Band width gap (filament winding)
The space between successive winding fiber bands
which are intended to lay next to each other
None
Band width overlap (filament
winding)
An area where the edge of a fiber band has laid on top
of a previous fiber band, although intended to lay
next to each other
2 strands max.
Band width splaying (filament
winding)
An unintended space between individual fibers in
a fiber band that results in a gap between fibers
None [Note (4)]
Strand drop-out (filament winding)
When one or more strands of a fiber band ceases
to be applied to the vessel shell being wound
due to breakage or inadequate supply
None
Allowable cumulative sum of
imperfections denoted by
an asterisk (*)
Maximum allowable in any square foot
5
Maximum allowable in any square yard
(square meter)
30 (36)
Maximum percent repairs
The maximum allowable area of repairs made in order
to pass visual inspection
3% to structural
GENERAL NOTE: Unless specifically called out, acceptance criteria applies to pressure and nonpressure sides.
NOTES:
(1) Above acceptance criteria apply to condition of laminate after repair and hydrotest.
(2) Noncatalyzed resin is not permissible to any extent in any area of the laminate.
(3) Imperfections subject to cumulative sum limitations are highlighted with an asterisk (*).
(4) Except as allowed by the manufacturing procedure specification and qualification test record to include gap spacing between fibers.
122
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Table 6-100.2
Structural Laminate Visual Acceptance Criteria for Class II Pressure Vessels
Imperfection Name
Maximum Size and Cumulative Sum of
Imperfections Allowable (After Repair)
[Note (1)], [Note (2)], [Note (3)]
Definition of Imperfection
Air bubble (void)
Air entrapment within and between the plies of
reinforcement, usually spherical in shape
1
∕8 in. (3 mm) max. diam., max. density 4 per in.2
(6 per 10 cm2); 1∕16 in. (1.5 mm) max. diam.,
max. density 10 per in.2 (15 per 10 cm2)
Blister (nonpressure side)
Rounded elevation of the surface of the laminate with
boundaries that may be sharply defined, somewhat
resembling in shape a blister on the human skin
1
∕4 in. (6 mm) max. diam. by 1∕8 in. (3 mm) high
max., max. density 1 per ft2 (1 per 1 000
cm2), none less than 2 in. (50 mm) apart
Burned areas from excessive
exotherm
Showing evidence of thermal decomposition through
discoloration or heavy distortion
None
Small pieces broken off an edge of the laminate that
includes fiber breakage
* 1∕4 in. (6 mm) diam. or 1∕2 in. (13 mm) length
by 1∕16 in. (1.5 mm) deep max.
Cracks
Ruptures or debond of portions of the laminate
None
Crazing (nonpressure side)
Fine cracks at the surface of the laminate
Max. 1 in. (25 mm) long by 1∕64 in. (0.4 mm)
deep, max. density 5 in any square foot
(1 000 cm2)
Delamination (internal)
Separation of the layers in a laminate
None
Delamination (edge)
Separation of the layers of material at the edge of
laminate
Max. dimension 1∕8 in. (3 mm) and must not
contact the process fluid
Dry spot
Area of incomplete surface film where the reinforcement
has not been wetted with resin
None
Edge Exposure
Exposure of multiple layers of the reinforcing matrix
to the environment, usually as a result of shaping or
cutting a section of laminate
None
Foreign inclusion
Particles included in a laminate which are foreign
to its composition (not a minute speck of dusk)
*Max. 3∕8 in. (10 mm) diam., never to penetrate
lamination to lamination; must be fully resin
encapsulated
Fish‐eye
Small globular mass which has not blended completely
into the surrounding material and is particularly
evident in a transparent or translucent material
* 1∕8 in. (3 mm) diam. max.
Pimples (nonpressure side)
Small, sharp, conical elevations on the surface of a
laminate
No limit; must be fully resin filled and wetted
Pit (nonpressure side)
Small crater in the surface of a laminate
* 1∕4 in. (6 mm) diam. max. by 1∕16 in. (1.5 mm)
deep max.; no exposed fibers
Porosity (nonpressure side)
Presence of numerous visible tiny pits (pinholes),
approximate dimension 0.010 in.
None shall fully penetrate the surface; no more
than 15 per in.2 (24 per 10 cm2); no exposed
fibers
Scratches (nonpressure side)
Shallow marks, grooves, furrows, or channels caused
by improper handling
*None shall be more than 6 in. long (150 mm);
no exposed fibers
123
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Table 6-100.2
Structural Laminate Visual Acceptance Criteria for Class II Pressure Vessels (Cont’d)
Imperfection Name
Maximum Size and Cumulative Sum of
Imperfections Allowable (After Repair)
[Note (1)], [Note (2)], [Note (3)]
Definition of Imperfection
Wrinkles and creases
Generally linear, abrupt changes in surface plane caused
by laps of reinforcing layers, irregular mold shape,
or polyester film overlap
Filament wound: none; others: max. deviation
20% of wall or 1∕8 in. (3 mm), whichever is
less
Band width gap (filament
winding)
The space between successive winding fiber bands
which are intended to lay next to each other
None
Band width overlap (filament
winding)
An area where the edge of a fiber band has laid on
top of a previous fiber band, although intended to lay
next to each other
2 strands max.
Band width splaying (filament
winding)
An unintended space between individual fibers in
a fiber band that results in a gap between fibers
None
Strand drop-out (filament
winding)
When one or more strands of a fiber band ceases to be
applied to the vessel shell being wound due to
breakage or inadequate supply
None
Allowable cumulative sum of
Maximum allowable in any square foot
imperfections denoted by an
asterisk (*)
Maximum percent repairs
5
Maximum allowable in any square yard
(square meter)
30 (36)
The maximum allowable area of repairs made in
order to pass visual inspection
3% to structural
NOTES:
(1) Above acceptance criteria apply to condition of laminate after repair and hydrotest.
(2) Noncatalyzed resin is not permissible to any extent in any area of the laminate.
(3) Imperfections subject to cumulative sum limitations are highlighted with an asterisk (*).
124
ASME BPVC.X-2021
MANDATORY APPENDIX 7
STANDARD UNITS FOR USE IN EQUATIONS
Table 7-100.1
Standard Units for Use in Equations
Quantity
U.S. Customary Units
Linear dimensions (e.g., length, height,
thickness, radius, diameter)
inches (in.)
Area
square inches (in.2)
Volume
Section modulus
cubic millimeters (mm3)
3
cubic millimeters (mm3)
cubic inches (in. )
4
Moment of inertia of section
inches (in. )
square millimeters (mm2)
3
cubic inches (in. )
4
SI Units
millimeters (mm)
millimeters4 (mm4)
Mass (weight)
pounds mass (lbm)
kilograms (kg)
Force (load)
pounds force (lbf)
newtons (N)
Bending moment
inch‐pounds (in.‐lb)
newton‐millimeters (N·mm)
Pressure, stress, stress intensity, and modulus
of elasticity
pounds per square inch (psi)
megapascals (MPa)
Energy (e.g., Charpy impact values)
foot‐pounds (ft-lb)
joules (J)
Temperature
degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
degrees Celsius (°C)
Absolute temperature
Rankine (°R)
kelvin (K)
Fracture toughness
ksi square root inches (ksi in. )
MPa square root meters (MPa m )
Angle
degrees or radians
degrees or radians
Boiler capacity
Btu/hr
watts (W)
125
ASME BPVC.X-2021
MANDATORY APPENDIX 8
CLASS III VESSELS WITH LINERS FOR HIGH PRESSURE FLUIDS IN
STATIONARY SERVICE
8-100.4 Nonload-Sharing Metallic Liner. The
nonload-sharing metallic liner shall comply with the requirements of Section VIII, Division 1, 2, or 3 as specified
by the Fabricator. Welding on metallic liners shall be made
by Fabricators holding a valid ASME Certification Mark
with U, U2, or U3 designator.
8-100 SCOPE
8-100.1 General Construction Description. This
construction method uses a laminate of continuous multidirectional filaments of a specified glass or carbon fiber
with a specified resin that is circumferentially and longitudinally wound in a systematic manner under controlled
tension over the cylindrical shell and heads of a metallic or
nonmetallic liner and cured in place. Hybrid designs incorporating both glass and carbon fiber within a layer or in
separate layers are allowed under this Appendix.
8-100.5 Liner Scope. The outside diameter of the
metallic or nonmetallic liner shall not exceed 100 in.
(2.5 m). The burst pressure of a nonload-sharing liner
shall be less than 10% of the nominal burst pressure
of the finished vessel.
The burst pressure of a load-sharing liner shall not
exceed 50% of the nominal burst pressure of the finished
vessel.
8-100.2 Construction Rules. Each Class III vessel for
high pressure fluid service shall comply with all existing
rules of this Section unless otherwise stated as additional
requirements and exemptions in this Appendix. All vessels
shall be fabricated with polar boss openings only and shall
meet the criteria of RG-404.2.
ð21Þ
8-100.6 Service Life. The service life of the Class III
vessel shall be as specified in the User’s Design Specification. Maximum service life for Class III vessels constructed
under the rules of this Appendix shall be limited to 20 yr
from the date of manufacture as noted on Form CPV-1.
8-100.3 Metallic Load-Bearing or Load-Sharing Pressure Parts. Metallic load-bearing or load-sharing pressure
parts shall comply with the applicable requirements of
Section VIII, Division 3. This includes all metallic liners
and end nozzles. Welding on load-bearing or loadsharing pressure parts shall be made by Fabricators
holding a valid ASME Certification Mark with U, U2, or
U3 designator. Code “Part” stamping of the welded
metallic pressure parts is required.
Work such as machining, forming, nondestructive examination, etc., may be performed by others. Analysis
to meet Section VIII, Division 3 requirements shall be
performed by a capable design engineer meeting the
criteria given in Section VIII, Division 3, Part KG, KG324.1. Metallic load-bearing or load-sharing pressure
parts for vessels in hydrogen service shall meet the requirements given in Section VIII, Division 3, Part KD,
Article KD-10. It is the vessel Fabricator’s responsibility
to ensure that all work performed complies with the applicable requirements. Nonwelded load-bearing or loadsharing pressure parts shall have material certification in
accordance with Section VIII, Division 3, Part KM, KM-101,
and shall be marked in accordance with Section VIII, Division 3, Part KM, KM-102.2 with the name or trademark of
the manufacturer and with other such markings as will
serve to identify the particular parts with accompanying
material certification.
8-100.7 Design Pressure. The internal design pressure
for the Class III vessel shall not be less than 3,000 psi (21
MPa) nor greater than 15,000 psi (103 MPa).
8-100.8 Permitted Fluids and Compatibility
(a) Fluids allowed include hydrogen, methane, natural
gas, helium, nitrogen, water, hydraulic oils, oil and gas
industry drilling fluids, or fluids that are inert.
(b) Toxic gas mixtures shall not be permitted.
(c) Contained fluids shall be compatible with the liner,
composite, and nozzle materials.
(d) If compatibility is not already demonstrated, testing
shall be conducted to confirm compatibility. Confirmation
of compatibility shall be reported in the remarks section of
the Fabricator's Data Report.
(e) The User is responsible for specifying the contained
fluids in the Design Specification.
126
ASME BPVC.X-2021
8-200 GENERAL
8-300 MATERIALS
8-200.1 Supplementary Fabricator’s Responsibilities.
8-300.1 General Materials Requirements.
(a) Metallic components used in the construction of the
Class III vessel shall meet the requirements of Section VIII,
Division 3.
(b) Laminates used in the construction of the Class III
vessel shall comply with the requirements listed in
8-300.2.
(c) All material used in the manufacture of the laminate
shall be traceable to material test reports or certificates of
compliance and shall be traceable to an individual Class III
vessel and documented in the Fabricator’s Construction
Records.
(a) The Fabricator shall be responsible for preparation
of a Manufacturing Specification to control essential variables during the manufacturing process.
(b) It shall be the Fabricator’s responsibility to conduct
Qualification Tests to qualify the Class III vessel in accordance with the requirements of this Appendix.
(c) The Fabricator shall be responsible to conduct
Production Examinations and Tests as required by this
Appendix. The test results shall be included in the Fabricator’s Construction Records.
8-200.2 Supplementary Inspector Qualifications.
Inspection of the materials and their application shall
be carried out by a qualified Inspector. The Inspector
shall have been qualified by a written examination
under the rules of the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors.
8-300.2 Laminates.
(a) Fiber-reinforced plastic materials are designated as
laminates. These materials shall be used, under the rules of
this Appendix, as a circumferential and longitudinal filament-wound outer layer for the Class III vessel.
(b) Laminates, as herein considered, are composite
structures consisting of glass or carbon fibers embedded
in a resin matrix.
(c) The Fabricator shall keep on file the published
specifications for all laminate materials used in each
Class III vessel manufactured, the material supplier’s recommendations for storage conditions and shelf life for all
laminate materials, and the material supplier’s certification that each shipment conforms to the published specification requirements. This data shall be part of the
Fabricator’s Construction Records.
8-200.3 Inspector’s Duties. It is the duty of the
Inspector to make the inspections required by the
rules of this Appendix and such other inspections and
investigations as are necessary in his judgment to
verify that
(a) the material and manufacturing procedures being
used conform to the requirements of the specified Manufacturing Specification, this Appendix, and the requirements of Section X and Section VIII, Division 3
(b) the examinations and tests required by this Appendix have been completed and that the results are acceptable
8-300.3 Fibers.
8-200.4 Codes and Standards Referenced. These
additional codes and standards not already referenced
in Table 1.1 are referenced in this Appendix.
(a) API 579-1/ASME FFS-1, Fitness-For-Service
(b) ASNT-CP-189, ASNT Standard for Qualification and
Certification of Nondestructive Testing Personnel
(c) ASNT Recommended Practice No. SNT-TC-1A, 2001
Edition, Recommended practice for Personnel Qualification and Certification in Nondestructive Testing
(d) ASTM D2196, Standard Test Methods for Rheological Properties of Non-Newtonian Materials by Rotational (Brookfield type) Viscometer
(e) ASTM D2344/D2344M, Standard Test Method for
Short-Beam Strength of Polymer Matrix Composite Materials and Their Laminates
(f) ASTM D4018, Standard Test Methods for Properties
of Continuous Filament Carbon and Graphite Fiber Tows
(g) ASTM D4052, Standard Test Method for Density
and Relative Density of Liquids by Digital Density Meter
(h) ASTM D4814, Automotive Spark-Ignition Engine
Fuel
(a) Glass Fibers
(1) Glass fibers used in any of the manufacturing
processes permitted by this Case shall be one or more
of the following glass compositions:
(-a) Type E glass
(-b) Type S glass
(-c) Type E-CR glass
(2) The material supplier shall certify that the fibers
conform to the Fabricator’s specifications for the product
and that the minimum strength and modulus, measured in
accordance with ASTM D2343, are not less than the specified minimum values for resin-impregnated strands.
(b) Carbon Fibers
(1) The carbon fibers used in any of the manufacturing processes permitted by this Appendix shall be polyacrylonitrile (PAN) based carbon fiber tows having
mechanical properties meeting the requirements of a
procurement document prepared by the Fabricator.
(2) The material supplier shall certify that the fibers
conform to the Fabricator’s specifications for the product
and that the minimum strength and modulus, measured in
accordance with ASTM D4018, or identified equivalent
standards accepted by the Inspector, are not less than
127
ASME BPVC.X-2021
and specific gravity for the resin alone shall be within the
limits of the supplier’s specification for that resin and as
listed in the Manufacturing Specification. The values
obtained for gel time and peak exotherm temperature
shall be for a particular resin/curing system test formulation and temperature, and shall be within the limits listed
in the Manufacturing Specification. The test formulation
and temperature shall be representative of the formulations used during Class III vessel manufacture. These test
results shall be certified by the Fabricator and shall be
included in the Fabricator’s Construction Records.
(c) The tolerance limits for the test formulation, as
listed in the Manufacturing Specification, may be established by either the resin supplier or the Fabricator.
The tolerance limits shall be established using formulation
components having Fabricator-specified material characteristics. The tolerance limits established shall be within a
sufficiently narrow range such that test results outside
this range would reflect deviations in component material
characteristics and alert the Fabricator of possible material irregularities.
(d) The Fabricator shall establish a maximum use
temperature for the resin/cure system used. This may
be in conjunction with the resin supplier or independent
laboratory, and may be based on heat distortion temperature or glass transition temperature. The Fabricator shall
reestablish and redocument the maximum use temperature at least every twelve months using current batches of
resin and curing agent. The maximum use temperature
shall be recorded on the Manufacturing Specification. A
record of these determinations shall become part of
the Fabricator’s Construction Records.
Table 8-300.4.1-1
Resin Systems: Required Certifications and Tests
Resin System
Required
Certifications and
Tests
Polyester/vinyl Viscosity
ester
Acid number
Epoxy
Applicable ASTM
Specification
ASTM D445/D2196
ASTM D1045
Specific gravity
Wt. per gallon cup or
ASTM D4052
Viscosity
ASTM D445/D2196
Epoxide equivalent
ASTM D1652
Specific gravity
Wt. per gallon cup or
ASTM D4052
the specified minimum values for resin-impregnated
strands.
(3) When carbon fibers are used, galvanic corrosion
protection is required for the metal components in contact
with the composite. An inner glass filament-wound and
resin layer may be used for metallic liners. A glass
cloth and resin layer may be used between a metallic
end nozzle and the laminate. Identified equivalent
methods accepted by the Inspector may be used as the
corrosion protection layer.
8-300.3.1 Fiber Surface Treatment. The surface of the
fiber shall be treated to provide a bond between the fiber
and resin matrix as needed.
8-300.4 Resin System. The resin system shall consist
of an epoxy, polyester or vinyl ester, plus the resin Fabricator’s recommended promoters and curing agents. No
filler, pigment, thixotrope, or dye that will interfere
with the natural color of the resin shall be used except
as permitted by the Manufacturing Specification. If
required in the User’s Design Specification, the Class III
vessel may be painted.
8-300.5 Curing Agents. The curing agents used, the
resin-to-curing-agent ratio and the curing procedure
followed in the Class III vessel manufacture shall be as
specified in the Manufacturing Specification. Each
curing agent shall be traceable by the supplier’s name,
the supplier’s designation, and the generic name.
8-300.4.1 Resin Material Requirements
8-300.5.1 Laminate Cure. The Fabricator shall ensure
that the resin applied to the Class III vessel is properly
cured using a test specimen. Proper cure shall be demonstrated by using the Barcol test in accordance with ASTM
D2583 or other appropriate method. Barcol readings shall
be within the tolerance specified by the resin supplier. If
the resin supplier does not provide Barcol specifications
for the resin/curing system used, the Fabricator shall
establish Barcol specifications. Barcol specifications
established by the Fabricator shall be documented.
Barcol specifications shall become part of the Fabricator’s
Construction Records.
(a) The resin materials used in the manufacture of the
Class III vessel shall be the same as those specified in the
Manufacturing Specification. Each resin shall be traceable
by the name of its supplier and the trade name or number
of that supplier. The resin supplier shall supply to the
Fabricator a Certificate of Analysis for each resin used.
It shall include the following information:
(1) resin identification
(2) batch number(s)
(3) date of manufacture
(4) shelf life
(b) The resin supplier shall certify, for each batch
shipped, the value and the limits required by the specification of the properties identified in Table 8-300.4.1-1.
Resin material outside the shelf life shall be either retested
by the resin manufacturer and certified to the original
properties or rejected. The values obtained for viscosity
8-300.6 Interlaminar Shear Strength. The laminates
used in manufacturing Class III vessel shall have
minimum interlaminar shear strengths of 2,000 psi
(13.8 MPa) for all resins, determined in accordance
with ASTM D2344. The test shall be performed following
128
ASME BPVC.X-2021
the boiling of the test sample in water for 24 hr. The test
results shall be included in the Fabricator’s Construction
Records. The measured interlaminar shear strength shall
be recorded on Form CPV-2.
8-400.4 Minimum Design Temperature. The
Minimum Design Temperature to which a Class III
vessel may be constructed under this Appendix shall
not be colder than −65°F (−54°C).
8-300.6.1 Nonmetallic Liner Materials. All nonmetallic liners shall be considered nonload sharing. The
liner shall be manufactured from a material suitable
for service with the contained fluid(s). The liner material
supplier shall verify that each batch of liners have the
specified material chemistry and mechanical properties
and provide a certificate of conformance to the Class
III vessel Fabricator documenting the verification.
8-400.5 Vessel Supports. Vessel supports shall be
designed to function without damaging the vessel considering all loads resulting from transportation and operation.
8-400.6 Protective Layer. An optional external layer of
laminate may be provided for protection of the structural
laminate layer from damage due to impact, ultraviolet
radiation, or other environmental exposure, fire or abrasive conditions, and in-service degradation of the laminate
for the life of the Class III vessel under the service conditions as specified in the User’s Design Specification. This
layer shall not be considered in the calculation on the
stress levels in the vessel and shall not be applied to
the vessel used for the qualification testing.
8-400 DESIGN
8-400.1 Allowable Stress Rules. Stress analysis shall
be carried out and documented in the Fabricator’s
Construction Records. The stresses in the laminate and
in the liner shall be calculated using appropriate analytical
methods that address the nonlinear behavior. The thickness and material properties used in stress calculations
shall be chosen to give accurate results, and analysis
results shall be confirmed with strain gages or similar
methods during testing.
The circumferential and longitudinal stresses generated in the laminate layer shall be used to resist loads
due to internal pressure, thermal expansion, and all
other circumferential and longitudinal loads, including
bending loads caused by the contained fluid.
The maximum fiber stress at any location in the laminate shall not exceed 67% of the tensile strength of the
fiber during the autofrettage pressure load for vessels
with load-sharing liners.
The maximum fiber stress at any location in the laminate layer shall not exceed 28.5% for glass fibers and
44.4% for carbon fibers of the tensile strength of the
fiber at design conditions.
The calculation of stresses shall consider the least favorable effects of geometric irregularities (e.g., out-of-roundness), weld peaking, reinforcement, and offsets as well as
mismatches of Categories A and B welded liners.
8-400.7 Hybrid Designs. Hybrid construction (using
more than one type of reinforcing fiber) is permitted.
The strength of the individual types of fibers used in
hybrid construction may be verified by testing of
vessels reinforced with a single type of fiber. The test
can be performed on subscale vessels. In a hybrid
construction, the applicable Stress Ratio requirements
must be met in one of the two following ways:
(a) If load sharing between the various fiber reinforcing materials is considered a fundamental part of the
design, each fiber must meet the stated Stress Ratio requirements.
(b) If load sharing between fibers is not considered as a
fundamental part of the design, then one of the reinforcing
fibers must be capable of meeting the Stress Ratio requirements even if all other fiber reinforcing materials are
removed.
8-500 FABRICATION
8-500.1 Manufacturing Specification.
(a) The Manufacturing Specification shall specify, as a
minimum, all pertinent material properties data, the
means by which the laminate is applied to the liner,
and all other significant process data associated with
the laminate and the Class III vessel design. The Manufacturing Specification shall include tolerance limits for all
appropriate material properties, process conditions
such as time and temperature, acceptable test result
values, compositions of resins, fibers, and curing
agents, etc., as further defined by the rules of this Appendix. The Manufacturing Specification shall form part of the
Fabricator’s Construction Records.
(b) As a minimum, the essential variables provided
below shall be held within tolerances as specified in
the Manufacturing Specification.
(1) Essential variables for liner and nozzles
8-400.2 Design Pressure. The design pressure of the
Class III vessel shall be specified in the User’s Design Specification. The maximum design pressure for Class III vessel
shall not be less than 3,000 psi (21 MPa) or greater than
15,000 psi (103 MPa).
8-400.3 Maximum Design Temperature. The
Maximum Design Temperature of the laminate shall be
the same as the Maximum Design Temperature of the
Class III vessel and shall be specified in the User’s
Design Specification. The Maximum Design Temperature
shall be at least 35°F (19°C) below the maximum use
temperature of the resin as documented in the Manufacturing Specification, but in no case shall it exceed 185°F
(85°C).
129
ASME BPVC.X-2021
(-a) material(s) including limits of chemical
analysis
(-b) dimensions, minimum thickness, straightness, and out-of-roundness with tolerances
(-c) process and specification of manufacture
(-d) heat-treatment, temperatures, duration, and
tolerances
(-e) inspection procedures (minimum requirements)
(-f) material properties
(-g) dimensional details of nozzle threads and any
other permanent features
(-h) method of sealing nozzle to nonload-sharing
liner for bonded bosses
(-i) autofrettage procedure for metallic lined
vessels
(2) Essential variables for laminate materials
(-a) fiber material, specification, and mechanical
properties requirements
(-1) the fiber content in the laminate shall
conform to that set forth in the Specification
(-b) resin system, components, curing agent, and
accelerators
(-c) laminate construction including the number
of strands used, the allowable gap between bands, the
allowable gap within bands, overlap in the laminate,
and details of prestressing where applicable
(-d) curing process, temperatures, duration, and
tolerances
(-1) If other than ambient temperature cure is
employed, the design and operation of the curing equipment shall provide uniform heating over the entire surface
of the vessel. Heating may be done from the inside or
outside of the vessel, or from both inside and outside.
The cure times and temperatures shall conform to
those required by the Manufacturing Specification.
Heat up and cool down times shall be excluded.
(3) Essential variables for laminate manufacture
(-a) Patterns. Specific winding patterns for the
continuous fiber strands shall be used as defined in
the qualified Manufacturing Specification. Any winding
pattern that places the filaments in the desired orientation
and is designated in the Manufacturing Specification may
be used.
(-b) Filament Winding
(-1) Tensioning. Tension on the strands of filaments during the winding operation shall be controlled to
ensure a uniform application of the composite reinforcement onto the liner.
(-2) Winding Speed. The speed of winding shall
be limited only by the ability to meet the tensioning requirements, to conform to the specified winding pattern,
and to ensure adequate resin impregnation.
(-3) Bandwidth and Spacing. The bandwidth and
spacing shall conform to those specified in the Manufacturing Specification.
8-500.2 Variation From Manufacturing Specification.
Any variation in the essential variables from the tolerances provided in the Manufacturing Specification shall
result in rejection of the Class III vessel.
8-600 EXAMINATION
8-600.1 Qualification of Nondestructive Examination
Personnel. The Fabricator shall certify that each examiner
performing visual tests according to the Appendix has
been qualified to the requirements of Section V, Article 9.
8-600.2 Supplementary Examination Requirements.
(a) The Fabricator completing a Class III vessel or
vessel part shall be responsible for conducting the examinations required by this paragraph. Examination shall be
carried out after the hydrostatic test.
(b) Each Class III vessel shall be subjected to the examinations required by this paragraph and shall conform to
the specified requirements, with results recorded in
Production Test Reports. The Class III vessel Production
Test Report shall become part of the Fabricator’s
Construction Records.
8-600.2.1 Visual Examination. Each Class III vessel
shall be visually examined, using a suitable light
source, to determine whether there are any imperfections
of the type specified in Table 8-600.2.1-1 or Table
8-600.2.1-2. If an external protective layer or paint is
applied, the laminate shall be examined as required
during winding, or prior to application of the protective
layer or paint, to ensure that there are no unacceptable
defects.
130
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Table 8-600.2.1-1
Visual Acceptance Criteria for FRP Laminate (U.S. Customary Units)
Imperfection Name
Maximum Size and Cumulative Sum of
Imperfections Allowable (After Repair)
[Note (1)], [Note (2)], [Note (3)]
Definition of Imperfection
Burned areas from excessive
exotherm
Showing evidence of thermal decomposition through
discoloration or heavy distortion
None
Chips *
Small pieces broken off an edge of the laminate that
includes fiber breakage
1
∕16 in. dia. or 1∕4 in. length by 1∕16 in. deep max.
Cracks
Actual ruptures or debond of portions of the laminate
None
Foreign inclusion *
Small globular mass that has not blended completely into
the surrounding material and is particularly evident in a
transparent or translucent material
1
Pimples
Small, sharp, conical elevations on the surface of a laminate No limit; must be fully resin filled and wetted
Pit *
Small crater in the surface of a laminate
1
Porosity
Presence of numerous visible tiny pits (pinhole),
approximate dimension 0.010 in.
None to fully penetrate the surface; no more than
15/in.2 ; no exposed fibers
Scratches *
Shallow marks, grooves, furrows, or channels caused by
improper handling
None more than 6 in. long; no exposed fibers
Wrinkles and creases
Generally linear, abrupt changes in surface plane caused by None
laps of reinforcing layers, irregular mold shape, or
polyester film overlap
Allowable cumulative sum of Maximum allowable in any square foot
imperfections denoted by an Maximum allowable in any square yard
asterisk (*)
Band width gap (filament
winding)
∕8 in. dia. max.
∕8 in. dia. max. by 1∕16 in. deep max.; no exposed
fibers
5
30
The space between successive winding fiber bands which None [Note (4)]
are intended to lay next to each other
Band width overlap (filament An area where the edge of a fiber band has laid on top of a 2 strands max. [Note (4)]
winding)
previous fiber band, although intended to lay next to each
other
Band width splaying (filament An unintended space between individual fibers in a fiber None [Note (4)]
winding)
band that results in a gap between fibers
NOTES:
(1) Above acceptance criteria apply to condition of laminate after repair and hydrostatic test.
(2) Noncatalyzed resin is not permissible to any extent in any area of the laminate.
(3) Imperfections subject to cumulative sum limitation are highlighted with an asterisk (*).
(4) Except as allowed by the manufacturing specification.
131
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Table 8-600.2.1-2
Visual Acceptance Criteria for FRP Laminate (SI Units)
Imperfection Name
Maximum Size and Cumulative
Sum of Imperfections Allowable
(After Repair)
[Note (1)], [Note (2)], [Note (3)]
Definition of Imperfection
Burned areas from excessive
exotherm
Showing evidence of thermal decomposition through
discoloration or heavy distortion
None
Chips *
Small pieces broken off an edge of the laminate that includes fiber 1.6 mm dia. or 6.4 mm length by 1.6 mm
breakage
deep max.
Cracks
Actual ruptures or debond of portions of the laminate
None
Foreign inclusion *
Small globular mass that has not blended completely into the
surrounding material and is particularly evident in a
transparent or translucent material
3.2 mm dia. max.
Pimples
Small, sharp, conical elevations on the surface of a laminate
No limit; must be fully resin filled and
wetted
Pit *
Small crater in the surface of a laminate
3.2 mm dia. max. by 1.6 mm deep max.;
no exposed fibers
Porosity
Presence of numerous visible tiny pits (pinhole), approximate
dimension 0.25 mm
None to fully penetrate the surface; no
more than 15∕650 mm2 ; no exposed
fibers
Scratches *
Shallow marks, grooves, furrows, or channels caused by improper None more than 15.2 cm long; no
handling
exposed fibers
Wrinkles and creases
Generally linear, abrupt changes in surface plane caused by laps of None
reinforcing layers, irregular mold shape, or polyester film
overlap
Allowable cumulative sum of
imperfections denoted by an
asterisk (*)
Maximum allowable in any 930 cm2
5
Maximum allowable in 0.84 m2
30
Band width gap (filament
winding)
The space between successive winding fiber bands which are
intended to lay next to each other
None [Note (4)]
Band width overlap (filament
winding)
An area where the edge of a fiber band has laid on top of a previous 2 strands max. [Note (4)]
fiber band, although intended to lay next to each other
Band width splaying (filament
winding)
An unintended space between individual fibers in a fiber band that None [Note (4)]
results in a gap between fibers
NOTES:
(1) Above acceptance criteria apply to condition of laminate after repair and hydrostatic test.
(2) Non-catalyzed resin is not permissible to any extent in any area of the laminate.
(3) Imperfections subject to cumulative sum limitation are highlighted with an asterisk (*).
(4) Except as allowed by the manufacturing specification.
8-600.2.2 Design Dimensions Examination. Each Class
III vessel shall be examined for conformance with dimensions and tolerances shown on the design drawings.
content, and protective capabilities of the unrepaired
protective layer.
8-600.2.4 Visual Examination of Repaired Areas. Each
repaired area shall be examined visually and shall meet all
the acceptance requirements of Table 8-600.2.1-1 or Table
8-600.2.1-2. The repaired area shall have translucency
and surface finish comparable to the remainder of the
vessel.
8-600.2.3 Repair of Imperfections. In the event that
any of the unacceptable imperfections listed in
Table 8-600.2.1-1 or Table 8-600.2.1-2 extend into the
structural layer or the structural fibers are cut or in
any way damaged, the imperfection shall be deemed unrepairable and the Class III vessel shall be rejected. If the
unacceptable imperfections listed in Table 8-600.2.1-1
or Table 8-600.2.1-2 extend only into the nonstructural,
protective layer of the laminate, the layer may be repaired,
unless prohibited by the Manufacturing Specification. The
repaired area shall maintain the minimum thickness, fiber
8-600.2.5 Thickness Check. Visual evidence of variation in thickness shall be explored and the thickness shall
be verified to meet the minimum required thickness in the
Fabricator’s Design Report. Thickness less than the value
specified in the Fabricator’s Design Report shall not be
permitted.
132
ASME BPVC.X-2021
8-600.2.6 Surface Examination. After the production
hydrotest, the metallic pressure parts meeting the requirements of Section VIII, Division 3 shall be subject
to a surface exam in accordance with Section VIII, Division
3, Part KE, KE-400 by the vessel Fabricator. Only the accessible portions of these parts shall be examined by liquid
penetrant or magnetic particle examination with acceptance criteria per Section VIII, Division 3, Part KE, KE233.2.
beyond the time when no further AE activity is detected,
but no more than 10 min, and then depressurize to zero
pressure. Record events for 2 min at zero pressure and
save the data. Then conduct a post-test performance check
and save data. The manufacturer shall establish the pressurization rate, and tolerance, in order to adequately characterize the MAE during pressurization. The
pressurization rate shall be not lower than 5 psi/sec
(34.5 kPa/s) nor higher than 200 psi/sec (1380
kPa/s). Test temperature shall be between 50°F (10°C)
and 120°F (49°C).
For the first pressurization during the initial hydrostatic
test, use a threshold of 80 dBAE (0 dB = 1 μV at the sensor).
The repressurization at 98% of hydrostatic test pressure
and load hold shall use a threshold of 60 dBAE. Record
waveforms during all pressurizations, pressure holds,
and depressurizations. Recording shall be suspended
during the time personnel and technicians are in
contact with the vessel during the hydraulic expansion
test per 8-700.5.2 and the leak test per 8-700.5.8.
(b) When an autofrettage pressurization is conducted,
pressurize the vessel to the autofrettage pressure, hold at
this pressure for 5 min beyond the time when no further
AE activity is detected, but no more than 30 min, then
depressurize to the design pressure and hold for 10
min. to check for leaks per 8-700.5.1. After the leak
test, depressurize to 10% of the hydrostatic test pressure
and hold for 2 min, repressurize to the hydrostatic test
pressure and hold for 5 min beyond the time when no
further AE activity is detected, but no more than 10
min, then depressurize to zero pressure. Record events
for 2 min. at zero pressure and save the data. Then
conduct a post-test performance check and save data.
The manufacturer shall establish the pressurization
rate and tolerance to adequately characterize the MAE
during pressurization. The pressurization rate shall be
not lower than 5 psi/sec (34.5 kPa/s) nor higher than
200 psi/sec (1380 kPa/s). Test temperature shall be
between 50°F (10°C) and 120°F (49°C).
For the first pressurization during the initial autofrettage pressurization, use a threshold of 80 dBAE (0 dB = 1 V
at the sensor). The repressurization at the hydrostatic test
pressure and load hold shall use a threshold of 50 dBAE.
Record waveforms during all pressurizations, pressure
holds, and depressurizations. Recording shall be
suspended during the time personnel and technicians
are in contact with the vessel during the hydraulic expansion test per 8-700.5.2 and the leak test per 8-700.5.8.
(c) Additional Requirements: First and Second Loading
(1) The first loading is defined as the first pressurization of the vessel to a pressure greater than 80% of the
required first loading test pressure. A preload is not
permitted.
(2) The second loading is defined as the pressurization of the vessel to a pressure greater than 80% of the
required section loading test pressure.
8-600.2.7 Acoustic Emission Examination
8-600.2.7.1 Use and Test Objectives. All Class III
production vessels shall be subject to an acoustic emission
examination to detect hidden flaws in the laminate. Any
two vessels used for the design qualification, and any one
vessel used for qualification of a design variant change,
shall be subject to an acoustic emission examination to
detect hidden flaws in the laminate. This method may
be used in conjunction with the initial hydrostatic pressure test per 8-700.5.1 and volumetric expansion test per
8-700.5.2 of the vessel, including an autofrettage pressurization.
All analysis shall be done on the waveforms. The waveforms of interest are the E (extensional mode) and F (flexural mode) plate waves. The velocities of the earliest
arriving frequency in the E wave and the latest arriving
frequency in the F wave shall be measured in the circumferential direction in order to characterize the material
and set the sample time (the length of the wave
window). The E and F waves must be digitized and
stored for analysis. The test pressure shall be recorded
simultaneously with the AE events. Permanent storage
of the waveforms is required.
All personnel conducting the examination shall be certified per the guidelines of ASNT SNT-TC-1A or CP-189 AE
Level II or Level III. A technician performing this test
should have training in and experience with measuring
the extensional and flexural velocities, Ce and Cf, in composites and identifying wave modes.
8-600.2.7.2 Test Procedure. Couple sensors to
vessel and connect to the testing equipment per
Section V, Article 11. Connect pressure transducer to
the recorder. Conduct sensor performance checks prior
to test to verify proper operation and good coupling to
the vessel. The E and F waveforms shall be observed
by breaking pencil lead at approximately 8 in. (20 cm)
and 16 in. (40.6 cm) from a sensor along the fiber direction.
All calibration data shall be recorded.
(a) When an autofrettage is not conducted, pressurize
vessel to hydrostatic test pressure, hold at test pressure
for 5 min beyond the time when no further AE activity is
detected, but no more than 30 min, depressurize to design
pressure and hold for 10 min to check for leaks per
8-700.5.1. After the leak test, depressurize to 10% of
test pressure and hold for a minimum of 2 min, repressurize to 98% of the test pressure and hold for 5 min
133
ASME BPVC.X-2021
(3) The second loading shall follow the first loading
without any intermediate loadings. An intermediate
loading is defined as any pressurization of the vessel
to a pressure greater than 80% of the required second
loading test pressure. A second autofrettage loading is
not permitted.
(4) Except as noted below, if the first and second
loading conditions as defined in (1) and (2) are not
met, the vessel shall be considered to have failed the test.
(d) Interruption in Pressurization or Load Hold on First
Loading. During the first loading it may be necessary to
halt pressurization, if the pressure has not exceeded 80%
of the test pressure, a temporary suspension of data acquisition is permissible. The pressure may be reduced or held
constant during the pressurization hold. If the pressure
has exceeded 80% of test pressure, data acquisition
shall not be suspended for more than 15 min. If a
longer suspension of data acquisition is required, the
vessel shall be unloaded and held for 12 hr or longer
at less than 10% of test pressure. The vessel shall then
be retested.
(e) Interruption in Pressurization or Load Hold on
Second Loading
(1) During the second loading, data acquisition shall
not be suspended for more than 2 min during loading and
during the thirty minute pressure hold.
(2) If (1) is violated, the second loading shall be
repeated after the vessel has been unloaded and held
for 12 hr or longer at 10% or less of the second
loading test pressure. This provision applies to all
second loading, regardless of whether the first loading
is an autofrettage load or the hydrostatic test load.
(3) When an autofrettage load is applied to a vessel,
the hydrostatic load is the second loading and under (1)
the AE test cannot be suspended. Accordingly, the volumetric expansion test shall be delayed until after the 30
min pressure hold.
(4) The first loading is not as critical as the second
loading and it is not necessary to wait until the end of the
30 min hold if the volumetric expansion test is conducted
as part of the first loading (autofrettage or hydrostatic).
data during the test. The computer program shall be
capable of detecting the first arrival channel. This is critical
to the acceptance criteria below.
Sensors and recording equipment shall be checked for a
current calibration sticker or a current certificate of calibration.
8-600.2.7.3.2 Sensor and Sensor Calibration.
Calibration shall be in volts/meter of displacement
over a specified frequency range. This shall be done by
the manufacturer with a Michelson interferometer
setup such as that used at National Institute of Standards
and Technology. Sensors shall have at least 100 V/μm
sensitivity over about 300 kHz bandwidth.
Sensors shall be placed at equal distances around the
circumference of the cylinder on its cylindrical portion
adjacent to the tangent point of the dome such that
the distance between sensors does not exceed 24 in.
(0.61 m). Adjacent rings of sensors shall be offset by
half a cycle. For example, if the first ring of sensors is
placed at 0 deg, 120 deg, and 240 deg, the second ring
of sensors is placed at 60 deg, 180 deg, and 300 deg.
This pattern shall be continued along the length of the
cylinder at evenly spaced intervals until the other end
of the cylinder is reached. However, if the attenuation
is measured, it is permitted to increase the distance
between the sensors by using the attenuation method.
Attenuation is usually largest across the hoop fibers and
smallest along the hoop fibers. Two attenuation distances
shall be measured, one for the axial direction distance, da,
and one for the circumferential direction distance, dc, on
the type of composite cylinder to be tested. Attenuation
distance in each direction shall be measured by determining the maximum straight-line distance at which
the 400 kHz component of either the extensional or flexural wave produced by a suitable source such as an ultrasonic pulser, can be observed with a signal-to-noise ratio
of at least 1.4. The positioning between corresponding
sensor positions shall not exceed 2 × da in the axial direction and 2 × dc in the circumferential direction.
For smaller cylinders, a minimum of two sensors shall
be used for each cylinder, with a sensor installed at each
end. The sensor shall be located on the cylindrical section
within 2 in. (50 mm) from the dome-to-shell transition
area.
8-600.2.7.3 Equipment.
8-600.2.7.3.1 Testing System. A testing system
shall consist of
(a) sensors
(b) preamplifiers
(c) high pass and low pass filters
(d) amplifier
(e) A/D (analog-to-digital) converters
(f) a computer program for the collection of data
(g) computer and monitor for the display of data
(h) a computer program for analysis of data
Examination of the waveforms event by event must
always be possible and the waveforms for each event
must correspond precisely with the pressure and time
8-600.2.7.3.3 Preamplifiers and Amplifiers. See
ASME Section V, Article 11.
8-600.2.7.3.4 Filters. A high pass filter of 5 kHz
shall be used. A low pass filter shall be applied to prevent
digital aliasing that occurs if frequencies higher than the
Nyquist frequency (half the Sampling Rate) are in the
signal.
8-600.2.7.3.5 A/D. The sampling speed and
memory depth (wave window length) are dictated by
the test requirements and calculated as follows:
134
ASME BPVC.X-2021
vessel length = L in. (m)
(b) Use only events that have clean front ends (defined
above in 8-600.2.7.3.5) and in which first arrival channel
can be determined. Clean means having a pre-trigger
energy of less than 0.01 V2/μsec. Energy is computed
by the integral of the voltage squared over time.
(c) Plot first arrival cumulative events versus time.
Plots shall always show the pressure data.
(d) Apply exponential fits by channel for pressure hold
time and display both data and fit. The values are determined by the fit to
Use CE = 0.2 in./μs (5 080 m/s) and CF = 0.05 in./μs
(1 270 m/s), the speeds of the first arriving frequency
in the E wave and last arriving frequency in the F
wave, respectively, as a guide. The actual dispersion
curves for the material shall be used if available.
L/CE = T1 μs is when the first part of the direct E wave
will arrive.
L/CF = T2 μs is when the last part of the direct F wave will
arrive.
(T2 − T1) × 1.5 is the minimum waveform window time
and allows for pretrigger time.
The recording shall be quiescent before front end of the
E wave arrives. This is called a “clean front end.” “Clean” is
defined in 8-600.2.7.4.2(b) below.
The sampling rate, or sampling speed, shall be such that
aliasing does not occur.
y = Ae Bt + C
The B value is the shape factor of the cumulative curves.
C is an intercept and A is a scale factor. The time t shall be
equal intervals during the hold with events binned by time
interval. Record exponents and goodness of fit (R2). Plot
energy decay curves. One-third or one-fourth of hold time
shall be used for event energy binning (cumulative
energy). The equation is
8-600.2.7.4 Analysis.
y = Ae Bt
8-600.2.7.4.1 Theory of AE Monitoring of High
Pressure Composite Pressure Vessels. A stable vessel will
exhibit cumulative curves with exponentially decaying
curvature. The shape of the cumulative events curve is
similar for pressure vessels made of fiberglass, aramid,
and carbon fiber that exhibit a fiber dominated failure
mode. This is essentially a shakedown test that demonstrates the composite is not progressing to failure at the
hold pressure.
The sequence of energy values must monotonically
decrease. This is similar to using other energy criteria,
such as Historic Index. A sequence that is not properly
decreasing will be indicated by a low R2 value.
(e) Save all plots (all channels) to report document.
(f) Repeat plots for second pressure hold and save to
report document.
(g) Record exponents and R2 values.
(h) Vessel B values shall be tracked and compiled in
order to develop a statistically significant database.
(1) B is the critical value that measures the frequency
of occurrence of events during pressure hold.
(2) Not every vessel will have the exact same B value.
(3) Data on B values should cluster.
8-600.2.7.4.2 Analysis Procedure. Data will
include matrix splits, matrix cracks, fiber breaks, and
matrix chirps due to fracture surface fretting, and
fiber/matrix debonding.
(a) Filter data to eliminate any external noise such as
electromagnetic interference (EMI), mechanical rubbing,
flow noise, etc. Identify noise events by their shape, spectral characteristics, or other information known about the
test such as a temporally associated disturbance due to the
pressurization system or test fixturing. EMI is characterized by a lack of any mechanical wave propagation characteristics, particularly a lack of dispersion being
apparent. EMI can be further identified by simultaneity
of arrival on more than one channel. The two criteria
shall be considered together to ensure it is not simply
an event that happened to be centered between the
sensors. Mechanical rubbing frequencies are usually
very low and can be determined by experiment. There
should be no flow noise. If the vessel, or a fitting,
leaks, this will compromise the data as AE is very sensitive
to leaks. Leak noise is characterized by waves that look
uniform across the entire length of the waveform window.
If a leak occurs during the load hold, the test must be
redone. Flow noise is characterized by waves that fill
the waveform window. It can be filtered out by setting
a pre-trigger/post-trigger energy ratio.
8-600.2.7.5 Acceptance Criteria. The qualification
vessel provides the initial B values for events and energy
from the load hold data from the initial pressurization and
the repressurization, if the vessel burst pressure is satisfactory. The criteria are as follows:
Criterion
Pass
Cumulative Event Decay Rate
−0.1 < B < −0.0001, R2 ≥ 0.80
Cumulative Energy Decay Rate
−0.2 < B < −0.0001, R2 ≥ 0.80
If these criteria are not met, the vessel does not pass. The
vessel may be retested. An AE Level III technician must
review the data from the initial testing and the subsequent
loading test before the vessel can be passed. Retest loadings shall follow the original pressurization rates and
pressures and use a threshold of 60 dBAE. If the vessel
fails the criteria again, the vessel shall not be certified
by the Inspector as meeting the provisions of this Section.
135
ASME BPVC.X-2021
(d) Each Class III Prototype Vessel used for qualification testing shall be fabricated and examined in accordance with the Manufacturing Specification, the design,
and the additional specific requirements below, and
the results shall be documented in the Qualification
Test Report. The Class III vessel used for qualification
testing shall not have a protective layer.
8-700 TESTING
The Fabricator completing a Class III vessel or vessel
part shall be responsible for conducting the tests required
by this Appendix.
8-700.1 Production Testing Requirements. Each Class
III vessel shall be subjected to the tests required by this
paragraph and shall conform to the specified requirements, with results recorded on Production Test
Reports. The Class III vessel Production Test Report
shall become part of the Fabricator’s Construction
Records.
A hydraulic pressure test and a hydraulic volumetric
expansion test as defined in 8-700.5.1 and 8-700.5.2
shall be performed on each vessel. Both tests may be
performed during one pressurization cycle of the
vessel. An acoustic emission examination per 8-600.2.7
shall be done during the hydraulic pressure test and
subsequent repressurization. During the time the
hydraulic volumetric expansion test is performed
during the initial pressurization, the AE examination
shall be suspended due to personnel coming into
contact with the vessel during the required measurements.
8-700.2.2 Specific Requirements.
(a) Weight of Resin and Fiber. The percentage by weight
of resin and fiber in each Class III Prototype Vessel shall be
determined. The weight of resin and fiber may be determined by calculation following the measurement of the
laminate and used fiber weights or by means of an ignition
test using ASTM D2584 or ASTM D3171 on a sample taken
from an undamaged portion of the CPV used for qualification testing.
(b) Imperfections in the Laminate. Each prototype Class
III vessel shall be visually checked for imperfections in the
laminate. Classification and acceptance level of imperfections shall be according to Table 8-600.2.1-1 or Table
8-600.2.1-2.
(c) Resin Cure. The resin cure shall be determined on a
sample taken from an undamaged portion of the Class III
vessel used for qualification testing. The resin cure may be
verified by a glass transition test using differential scanning calorimetry or dynamic mechanical analysis.
8-700.2 Qualification Testing.
8-700.2.1 General Requirements.
8-700.3 Production Testing of Completed Vessel. The
Fabricator shall, as a minimum, burst test the first Class III
vessel in accordance with 8-700.5.3 from each production
run of the same geometry. The vessel used for production
testing shall not have a protective layer.
One vessel per every 200 finished vessels shall be
subjected to a burst test in accordance with 8-700.5.3.
The Fabricator, as a minimum, shall burst test one
vessel per year in accordance with 8-700.5.3 if production
rates are less then 200 vessels per year.
One vessel per every 200 finished vessels shall be
subjected to a fatigue test to the requirements of
8-700.5.4. All pressure cycles may be at ambient temperature for the production testing. The Fabricator, as a
minimum, shall fatigue test one vessel per year in accordance with 8-700.5.4 if production rates are less then 200
vessels per year.
(a) It shall be the Fabricator’s responsibility to qualify
the Class III vessel design. The vessels shall be fabricated
per the requirements of the Manufacturing Specification
and the design.
(b) The results of the testing and examinations
required in this paragraph shall be documented in the
Qualification Test Report. The Qualification Test Report
shall be prepared and certified by the Fabricator and
accepted by the Inspector. The results of these tests
shall be documented on Form CPV-2 and together with
all test documents shall be designated the Qualification
Test Report and shall be included in the Fabricator’s
Construction Records.
(c) The Class III vessel subject to these tests and examinations shall be designated as “Class III Hydrogen Prototype Vessels.” Class III Prototype Vessels that are used for
qualification testing shall meet all the requirements of this
Case but shall not be Code stamped. For new designs, a
sufficient number of prototype vessels shall be fabricated
to complete the qualification testing. For Class III vessels
with allowable design variant to the original design, as
provided in Table 8-700.2.1-1, a reduced number of qualification tests as outlined in Table 8-700.2.1-1 are acceptable for vessel qualification with the Inspector’s approval.
For design variations in diameter and design pressure, the
wall thickness must be scaled in proportion to the
diameter and pressure change increase to achieve a
stress ratio equal to or less than the original design.
8-700.4 Failure of Production Tests. In the event of
failure to meet test requirements during a production
run, an investigation into the cause of failure and retesting
shall be carried out.
If there is evidence of a fault in carrying out a test, or an
error of measurement, a second test shall be performed on
a vessel selected at random from the production run. If the
results of this test are satisfactory, the first test shall be
ignored.
136
Table 8-700.2.1-1
Qualification Tests
Design Variant Changes
Diameter
Test
New
Design
Length
≤20%
[Note(1)] [Note (1)]
Design Pressure
>20%
≤50%
Liner
Thickness or
Manufacture
Equivalent
Fiber
[Note (2)]
≤20%
[Note
(1)]
>20%
≤60%
Composite
Thickness
or Pattern
Nozzle
Equivalent
Matrix
[Note (3)] Threads
8-700.5.1
Hydraulic pressure
[Note (4)]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
8-700.5.2
Hydraulic expansion
[Note (4)]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
8-700.5.3
CPV burst
X
X
X
X
L
X
X
X
X
X
X
8-700.5.4
Fatigue
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X [Note (5)]
8-700.5.5
Creep [Note (6)]
X
X
8-700.5.6
Flaw
X
X
L
8-700.5.7
Permeability
X
X
X
8-700.5.9
Torque [Note (9)]
X
X
L
X
8-700.5.11 Environmental
X
X [Note (7)]
X [Note (8)]
X
X
X
137
Legend:
X = Tests required for nonload-sharing and load-sharing liners.
L = Test required for load-sharing liners only.
NOTES:
(1) These tests may be performed with one prototype vessel.
(2) Fiber manufactured from the same nominal raw materials, using the same process of manufacture and having the same physical structure and the same nominal physical properties, and where
the average tensile strength and modulus is within ±5% of the fiber properties in an approved vessel design.
(3) Matrix material (i.e., resin, curing agent) are different but are chemically equivalent to the original.
(4) The acoustic emission examination per 8-600.2.7 shall be performed during the hydraulic pressure test and hydraulic expansion test, and any autofrettage procedure.
(5) Required if nozzle/liner interface changes.
(6) Leak test per 8-700.5.8 and burst test per 8-700.5.3 shall follow creep test.
(7) Not required for wind pattern changes.
(8) Required if nozzle/liner/composite interface changes.
(9) The torque test is not required for CPVs having a seamless metallic liner and port openings with straight threads.
ASME BPVC.X-2021
8-700.5.10 Penetration
X [Note (7)]
ASME BPVC.X-2021
8-700.5.3.3 Criteria. The burst pressure or pressure at failure shall be not less than
(a) 3.5 × Design Pressure: Glass Fiber
(b) 2.25 × Design Pressure: Carbon Fiber
If the test has been carried out in a satisfactory manner,
the cause of failure shall be identified and the vessel Fabricator shall take corrective action, up to removal from
service, of all vessels manufactured since the previous
production test.
8-700.5.4 Fatigue Test.
8-700.5 Qualification and Production Tests.
8-700.5.4.1 Procedure. Multiple vessels shall be
subjected to a hydraulic pressure cycle test between
no greater than 10% of design pressure to the design pressure for N pressure cycles as defined below.
If a minimum operating pressure is specified in the User
Design Specification (UDS) that is greater than 10% of the
design pressure for all or part of the cycles, the vessels may
be cycled between the minimum operating pressure and
the design pressure for that portion of the required
number of cycles. The number of full-range cycles specified in the UDS shall also be addressed, with pressure
cycling between 10% of design pressure and the
design pressure conducted accordingly. The minimum
operating pressure shall be included on the nameplate
in accordance with Part RS.
The total number of required test cycles is a function of
the number of tests. The frequency of reversals shall not
exceed 0.25 Hz (15 cycles/min). The temperature on the
outside surface of the vessel shall not exceed 120°F (50°C)
during the test. It is recommended that no air be trapped
within the system prior to the commencement of the test.
As a minimum, 10% of the cycles, to a limit of 5000 cycles,
shall be performed at the minimum design temperature
and the remaining cycles may be at ambient conditions.
8-700.5.1 Hydraulic Proof Pressure Test.
8-700.5.1.1 Procedure. This test requires that the
hydraulic pressure in the vessel be increased gradually
and regularly to 1.25 times design pressure. The vessel
test pressure shall be held for 30 min followed by a reduction to the design pressure and held for 10 min to ascertain
that there are no leaks and no failure. If leakage occurs in
the piping or fittings, the vessels may be retested after
repair of such leakages.
8-700.5.1.2 Criteria. The vessel shall be rejected if
there are leaks, failure to hold pressure, or visible permanent deformation after the vessel is depressurized.
8-700.5.2 Hydraulic Volumetric Expansion Test.
8-700.5.2.1 Procedure. This test requires that the
hydraulic pressure in the vessel increase gradually and
regularly to 1.25 times design pressure. The elastic expansion shall be measured between 10% of the test pressure
and the full test pressure and recorded.
8-700.5.2.2 Criteria.
(a) For qualification testing, the vessel shall be rejected
if it shows an elastic expansion in excess of 110% of the
elastic expansion for the most recent qualification burst
test.
(b) For production testing, the vessel shall be rejected if
it shows an elastic expansion in excess of 110% of the
elastic expansion for the most recent production burst
test.
N = required test cycles
x = Kn × service life × C
where
C = required cycles per year as defined in the
UDS
Kn = fatigue design margin (minimum value =
2.6)
n = number of fatigue test (minimum value =
2.0)
8-700.5.3 Burst Test.
8-700.5.3.1 Procedure. Three vessels shall be
tested hydraulically, to destruction, by pressurizing at
a rate of no more than 200 psi/sec (14 bar/s). If the pressurization rate exceeds 50 psi/sec (3.5 bar/s) at pressures
above 80% of the design burst, either the vessel shall be
located between the pressure source and the pressure
measurement device, or the test pressure shall be held
at the vessel's design burst pressure for 5 sec prior to
resuming the test. The test shall be carried out under
ambient conditions. Prior to the commencement of the
test, it is recommended that no air is trapped within
the system.
n
Kn
2
4
3
3.5
4
3
5
2.6
8-700.5.4.2 Parameters to Monitor and Record.
(a) temperature of the vessel
(b) number of cycles achieving upper cyclic pressure
(c) minimum and maximum cyclic pressures
(d) cycle frequency
(e) test medium used
(f) mode of failure, if appropriate
8-700.5.3.2 Parameters to Monitor and Record.
(a) burst pressure
(b) pressure/time curve
138
ASME BPVC.X-2021
8-700.5.4.3 Criteria. The vessel shall withstand N
pressurization cycles to design pressure without failure by
burst or leakage.
8-700.5.6.2 Parameters to Monitor and Record.
(a) dimensions of flaws
(b) temperature of the vessel
(c) number of cycles achieving upper cyclic pressure
(d) minimum and maximum cyclic pressures
(e) cycle frequency
(f) test medium used
(g) mode of failure, if appropriate
8-700.5.5 Temperature Creep Test
8-700.5.5.1 Procedure. Two vessels shall be
hydraulically pressurized to 1.25 times Design Pressure
and shall be maintained at this pressure for 2,000 hr. The
test shall be conducted at 185°F (85°C) of the vessel and a
relative humidity of less than 50%. After this test, the
vessels shall be subjected to the leak test in accordance
with 8-700.5.8 and the burst test in accordance with
8-700.5.3. This test may be conducted on a subscale
vessel that is the same diameter and wall construction,
but shorter in length. A minimum length to diameter
ratio of 2:1 shall be used for the subscale vessel.
8-700.5.6.3 Criteria.
(a) First vessel: burst pressure shall be equal to or
greater than 2 × Design Pressure.
(b) Second vessel: the vessel shall withstand at least
1,000 pressure cycles to the Design Pressure without
leakage. If the vessel fails by leakage after 1,000 cycles,
it shall be deemed to have passed the test. However,
should failure during this second half of the test be by
burst, then the vessel shall have failed the test.
8-700.5.5.2 Parameters to Monitor and Record.
(a) measurement of the water capacity before and after
testing
(b) temperature and relative humidity at least twice a
day
(c) vessel pressure at least twice a day
8-700.5.7 Permeability Test.
8-700.5.7.1 General. This test is only required for
Class III vessels with nonmetallic liners or welded metallic
liners.
8-700.5.5.3 Criteria.
8-700.5.7.2 Procedure.
(a) The vessel shall not exhibit any visible deformation
or loose fibers (unraveling).
(b) The vessel shall satisfy the criteria of the Leak Test
and the Burst Test.
(a) One vessel shall be preconditioned with the boss
subjected to twice the installation torque specified for
the fittings. The container shall then be filled with the
5% hydrogen/95% nitrogen mixture to the design pressure, placed in an enclosed sealed container at ambient
temperature, and monitored for 500 hr to establish a
steady state permeation rate. Acceptable test methods
include the use of mass spectrometer testing, or other
appropriate methods accepted by the Inspector.
(b) Alternatively, a vessel used to contain a fluid other
than hydrogen may be tested for permeation using the
fluid to be contained, or by using an alternate fluid
with adjustment in rate made by considering relative
molecular weight or by using relative viscosity, as appropriate.
8-700.5.6 Flaw Test
8-700.5.6.1 Procedure. Two vessels shall be tested
in accordance with the following procedure:
(a) One longitudinal flaw is cut into each vessel, in the
mid-length of the cylindrical wall of the vessel. The flaw
shall be made with a 0.039 in. (1 mm) thick cutter to a
depth equal to at least 0.050 in. (1.27 mm) or as
defined in the Manufacturing Specification of the composite thickness and to a length between the centers of the
cutter equal to five times the composite thickness.
(b) A second transverse flaw of the same dimensions is
cut into each vessel in the midlength of the cylindrical wall
approximately 120 deg around the circumference from
the other flaw.
(c) One vessel shall be subjected to the burst test specified in 8-700.5.3.
(d) The other vessel shall be subjected to the fatigue
test specified and the test shall be suspended after
5,000 cycles if the vessel has not failed.
(e) This test may be conducted on a subscale vessel that
is the same diameter and wall construction, but shorter in
length. A minimum length to diameter ratio of 2:1 shall be
used for the subscale vessel.
8-700.5.7.3 Parameters to Monitor and Record.
Environmental temperatures at least twice a day.
8-700.5.7.4 Criteria.
(a) The steady-state permeation rate for hydrogen
from this mixture shall be less than 0.15 standard cc
per hour per liter water capacity of the vessel.
(b) The steady-state permeation rate for methane or
natural gas shall be less than 1.0 standard cc per hour
per liter water capacity of the vessel.
(c) If a vessel is tested with a fluid to be contained other
than hydrogen, methane, or natural gas, the allowable
permeation rate shall be established in the User
Design Specification and reported in the remarks
139
ASME BPVC.X-2021
section of the Fabricator's Data Report. The rate established in the User Design Specification shall take into
account the location of the vessel, and ensure that no
unsafe condition would result from the permeation.
(b) Leakage greater than 1 bubble/2 min in the bubble
leak test or failure of the permeability test described in
8-700.5.7 shall constitute a failure of the test.
8-700.5.10 Penetration Test.
8-700.5.8 Leak Test.
8-700.5.10.1 Procedure. A vessel pressurized to
design pressure with the in-service gas or with nitrogen
shall be impacted by an armor-piercing bullet. The bullet
shall impact the vessel sidewall at an angle of 90 deg. This
test may be conducted on a subscale vessel that is the same
diameter and wall construction but shorter in length. The
minimum length-to-diameter ratio of 2:1 shall be used for
the subscale vessel. The penetration test shall be
conducted with the vessel at a maximum distance of
50 yd (46 m) from the gun muzzle.
8-700.5.8.1 Procedure.
(a) Leak testing shall be conducted on the completed
vessel.
(b) Acceptable methods for leakage testing include, but
are not limited to, bubble testing using dry air or gas or
measurement of trace gases using a mass spectrometer.
(c) Leak testing of completed vessels shall be
performed at the design pressure.
8-700.5.8.2 Criteria. No leakage in excess of the
permeation rate specified in 8-700.5.7 shall be permitted.
8-700.5.10.2 Armor-Piercing Bullet. An armorpiercing (AP) bullet is a jacketed, hard-core (nondeformable) projectile; the AP bullet used for this test shall be
nominal 30 caliber (7.62 mm). The cartridge used for this
test shall be a 308 Winchester AP or 7.62 × 51 mm NATO
AP round.
8-700.5.9 Torque Test on Vessel Nozzle Neck.
8-700.5.9.1 Procedure.
(a) The body of the vessel shall be held in such a
manner as to prevent it from rotating except where
the Fabricator specifies that the vessel is to be held by
the neck for valve insertion. In this case, the Fabricator’s
directions shall be used.
(b) The vessel shall be fitted with a corresponding valve
and tightened to 150% of the maximum torque recommended by the Fabricator.
(c) The valve shall be removed after the first installation and the neck thread and boss inspected. The valve
shall then be reinstalled as specified above.
(d) A test for leaks (bubble test) in the vessel neck area
or the permeability test in 8-700.5.7 shall be conducted.
(e) A test for leaks (bubble test) shall be conducted as
follows:
(1) pressurize the vessel to the design pressure with
air or nitrogen
(2) maintain pressure in the vessel at the design
pressure for no less than 2 hr
(3) conduct a bubble leak test for at least 10 min
(f) This test may be conducted on a subscale vessel that
is the same diameter and wall construction, but shorter in
length. A minimum length to diameter ratio of 2:1 shall be
used for the subscale vessel.
8-700.5.10.3 Acceptance Criteria. Bullet penetration of the sidewall is expected but not required. The
vessel is unacceptable if there is fragmentation of the sidewall.
8-700.5.11 Environmental Test.
8-700.5.11.1 Procedure.
(a) One vessel shall be tested, including coating and
protective layer if applicable. The upper section of the
vessel is to be divided into five distinct areas and
marked for pendulum impact preconditioning and fluid
exposure as shown in Figure 8-700.5.11.1-1. The areas
shall be nominally 4 in. (100 mm) in diameter. While
convenient for testing, the areas need not be oriented
along a single line but shall not overlap.
(b) Although preconditioning and other fluid exposure
is performed on the cylindrical section of the vessel, all of
the vessel should be as resistant to the exposure environments as the exposed areas.
(c) The impact body of the pendulum shall be of steel
and have the shape of a pyramid with equilateral triangle
faces and a square base, the summit and the edges being
rounded to a radius of 0.12 in. (3 mm). The center of
percussion of the pendulum shall coincide with the
center of gravity of the pyramid, its distance from the
axis of rotation of the pendulum shall be 39.37 in.
(1 m). The total mass of the pendulum referred to, its
center of percussion shall be 33 lb (15 kg). The energy
of the pendulum at the moment of impact shall be not
less than 22.1 ft-lb (30 N·m) and as close to that value
as possible.
8-700.5.9.2 Parameters to Monitor and Record.
(a) type of valve/plug material
(b) valving procedure
(c) applied torque
8-700.5.9.3 Criteria.
(a) The neck thread and boss shall show no significant
deformation and shall remain within drawing and gauge
tolerance.
140
ð21Þ
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Figure 8-700.5.11.1-1
Pendulum Impact Test
(d) During pendulum impact, the vessel shall be held in
position by the end bosses or by the intended mounting
brackets. Each of the five areas identified in
Figure 8-700.5.11.1-1 shall be preconditioned by
impact of the pendulum body summit at the center of
the area. The container shall be unpressurized during
preconditioning.
(e) Each marked area is to be exposed to one of five
solutions. The five solutions are
(1) sulfuric acid — 19% solution by volume in water
(2) sodium hydroxide — 25% solution by weight in
water
(3) methanol/gasoline — 5%/95% concentration of
M5 fuel meeting the requirements of ASTM D4814, Automotive Spark-Ignition Engine Fuel
(4) ammonium nitrate—28% by weight in water
(5) windshield washer fluid (50% by volume solution of methyl alcohol and water)
(f) When exposed, the test sample will be oriented with
the exposure area uppermost. A pad of glass wool approximately 1∕64 in. (0.5 mm) thick and between 3.5 in. and
4.0 in. (90 mm and 100 mm) in diameter is to be
placed on the exposure area. Apply an amount of the
test fluid to the glass wool sufficient to ensure that the
pad is wetted evenly across its surface and through its
thickness for the duration of the test, and to ensure
that the concentration of the fluid is not changed significantly during the duration of the test.
(g) Vessels shall be hydraulically pressure cycled
between less than or equal to 10% of design pressure
and 125% of design pressure for a total of 3,000
cycles. The maximum pressurization rate shall be 400
psi (2.75 MPa) per second. After pressure cycling,
vessels shall be pressurized to 125% of design pressure,
and held at that pressure until the elapsed exposure time
(pressure cycling and pressure hold) to the environmental
fluids equals 48 hr.
(h) This test may be conducted on a subscale vessel that
uses the same materials and is tested to the same stress
levels as the Class III Prototype Vessels.
8-800 STAMPING AND NAMEPLATES
8-800.1 Stamping Requirements. Stamping requirements are as follows:
(a) The year of vessel expiration shall be shown on the
Fabricator’s Data Report and the vessel nameplate.
(b) The nameplate shall be marked per Part RS of
Section X with “RP Class III” designating Section X,
Class III construction type.
(c) Nameplates may be attached to the composite reinforcement portion of the vessel. Nameplates attached to
the composite reinforcement portion of the vessel shall be
attached in accordance with the requirements of RS-130.
8-900 QUALITY PROGRAM
8-900.1 Fabricator’s Certifications.
(a) The Fabricator shall prepare, implement, and use a
quality program that includes the specific technical issues
related to the manufacture of Class III vessels. The level of
detail shall be sufficient to satisfy all requirements listed in
Mandatory Appendix 1.
(b) The Fabricator shall be accredited to apply the
ASME Certification Mark with RP Designator (Section X).
8-900.2 Records. The Fabricator’s Construction
Records supplied to the User shall also include
(a) material supplier’s certifications and specification
sheets for resin, fiber reinforcement, promoters, catalyst,
and other components used in laminate construction
(b) the records of the laminate material tests
8-900.3 Report Forms.
(a) a Fabricator’s Data Report shall be completed for
each Class III vessel constructed under this Appendix on
Form CPV-1, instead of Form RP-1, and shall be signed by
the Fabricator and the Authorized Inspector. A sample
Form CPV-1 and instructions for completing the form
are included in the Forms section.
(b) a Qualification Test Report Form CPV-2 shall be
used for the record of qualification (or requalification)
for the laminate design and Laminate Procedure Specification as part of the Qualification Test Report.
8-700.5.11.2 Criteria. Vessels shall not leak or
rupture during the test.
141
ASME BPVC.X-2021
(c) the latest applicable Qualification Test Report shall
be referenced on the Data Report and Form CPV-1 for each
Class III vessel constructed per this Appendix.
8-1000 RETENTION OF DATA REPORTS
The Fabricator shall keep a copy of the Fabricator’s Data
Report until the date of expiration of the Class III vessel or
register the vessel with the National Board of Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Inspectors, 1055 Crupper Avenue,
Columbus, Ohio 43229. See RS-302.
142
ASME BPVC.X-2021
FORM CPV-1
FABRICATOR’S DATA REPORT FOR COMPOSITE REINFORCED PRESSURE VESSELS (CLASS III)
(Revision A — 2017)
As Required by the Provisions of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
1
F
1. Fabricated and Certified by
(Name and Address of Fabricator)
2
F
2. Fabricated for
(Name and Address of Purchaser)
3
F
3. Location Operating
4. Type
(Name and Address)
4
F
5
F
(Horiz. or Vertical)
6
F
(Manufacturer’s Serial No.)
7
F
(National Board No.)
(CRN)
8
F
Drawing No.
10
F
5. User’s Design Specification No.
Date
11
F
6. Procedure Specification No.
12
F
7. Qualification Report No.
Date
Date
Latest Requalification Date
13
F
8. ASME Section X
(Edition and Addenda Date, if Applicable)
(Code Case No.)
14
F
9. Service
15
F
10. Restrictions and Warnings
16
F
17
F
11. Shell: Construction
Size and Configuration
18
F
19
F
(ID)
20
F
(Length)
21
F
(Thickness)
(Shape)
22
F
12. Heads : Construction
Size and Configuration
23
F
24
F
(ID)
25
F
(Attachment)
15. Minimum Allowable Temperature
30
F
(Shape)
27
F
28
F
14. Fabrication for MAWP
26
F
(Thickness)
13. Liner Construction, Thickness and Material
16. Test Pressure
(Year Built)
9
F
Prepared by
psi (kPa) at Maximum Allowable Temperature
29
F
29
F
ºF (ºC) at
30
F
psi (kPa)
(Hydro./Pneum./Combination)
17. Performed in the
31
F
31
F
position using
(Horizontal/Vertical)
(Fluid(s) Used in the Test)
32
F
18. Connections or Provisions for Overpressure Relief
33
F
19. Supports and Attachments
(07/17)
143
ºF (ºC)
psi (kPa)
30
F
at
28
F
ºF (ºC)
ASME BPVC.X-2021
FORM CPV-1 (Back)
(Revision A — 2017)
34
F
20. Reinforcement Type and Resin for Structural Laminate
35
F
21. Barcol Hardness
36
22. Nozzles F
Purpose
Size
Type
Material
Thickness
Reinforcement
Material
How Attached
23. Manufacturer’s Partial Data Reports, properly identified and signed by commissioned inspectors, have been
37
F
furnished for the following components
38
F
24. Remarks
39
F
25. Year of Expiration of Vessel
CERTIFICATE OF SHOP COMPLIANCE
We certify that the statements in this Data Report to be correct and that all details of design, material, construction, and
workmanship of this vessel conform to the ASME BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE, Section X.
RP Certification of Authorization No.
Date
Co. Name
Expires
40
F
40
F
Signed
(Fabricator)
,
(Date)
(Authorized Representative)
CERTIFICATE OF SHOP INSPECTION
I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Inspectors and/or the State or Province of
of
Report on
and employed by
, have inspected the vessel described in this Fabricator’s Data
,
, and state that, to the best of my knowledge and belief, the
Manufacturer has constructed this part in accordance with the ASME BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE, Section X,
Class III. By signing this certificate, neither this inspector nor his employer makes any warranty, expressed or implied,
concerning the part described in this Fabricator’s Data Report. Furthermore, neither the Inspector nor his employer shall
be liable in any manner for any personal injury or property damage or a loss of any kind arising from or connected with
this inspection.
Date
41
F
Signed
(Authorized Inspector)
Commissions
42
F
(National Board Authorized Inspector Number)
(07/17)
144
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Table 8-900.3-1
Guide for Completing Fabricator’s Data Report CPV-1
Reference
to Circled
Numbers in
the Form
Description
(1)
Name and street address of Fabricator (i.e., maker of all components not covered by Partial Data Reports).
(2)
Name and address of Purchaser and/or Owner.
(3)
Name and street address of USER, where the vessel is to be installed. If not known, so indicate: e.g., not known—built for
stock.
(4)
Type of vessel, such as vertical or horizontal vessel, including method of support.
(5)
Fabricator’s serial number (one vessel on one report).
(6)
Canadian registration number where applicable.
(7)
Where applicable, National Board Number from Fabricator's Series of National Board Numbers. National Board
Number shall not be used for owner-inspected vessels.
(8)
Indicate drawing numbers, including revision numbers, which cover general assembly and list of materials. For
Canadian registration, also include the number of the drawing approved by Provincial authorities.
(9)
Organization that prepared the drawing.
(10)
To be completed by the Fabricator to show the number of the User's Design Specification.
(11)
To be completed by the Fabricator to show the number of the laminate procedure qualification.
(12)
To be completed by the Fabricator to show the number and date for the qualification test record for the vessel and date
of any requalification.
(13)
ASME Code, Section X, Edition (e.g., 2007) and Addenda (e.g., A09, A10, etc., if applicable) used for fabrication.
(14)
Describe contents or service of the vessel.
(15)
Additional comments, including any Code restrictions on the vessel or any unusual Code or jurisdictional requirements
that have been met.
(16)
Show need for start-up or shutdown temperature and/or controlled rate of heating or cooling, maximum temperature
of any part.
(17)
Specify method of shell laminate application such a filament winding or centrifugal casting.
(18)
State inner diameter of the structural portion of the shell excluding any liner (e.g., liner outer diameter would be the
inner diameter of a lined vessel).
(19)
State tangent length of the cylindrical portion of the shell.
(20)
State nominal thickness of the structural portion of the shell excluding any outer protective layer.
(21)
State principal shape of vessel shell such as cylindrical or spherical.
(22)
State the method of head laminate application such as filament winding or resin transfer molding.
(23)
State the inner diameter of the structural portion of the heads excluding any liner.
(24)
Indicate the attachment method for the head to the shell, such as integrally wound.
(25)
State the nominal thickness of the structural portion of the head excluding any outer protective layer.
(26)
State shape of the head such as hemispherical or elliptical.
(27)
State method of construction of the liner such as welded, cast, forged, swaged, thickness, and material of
construction.
(28)
State the maximum allowable working pressure at the maximum allowable temperature for which the vessel is
constructed and is marked on the nameplate.
(29)
Show minimum allowable temperature at coincident pressure. List if more than one set.
(30)
State the test pressure, type of test such as hydrostatic or pneumatic, test temperature.
(31)
Indicate position of the vessel during the pressure test and test fluid.
(32)
Indicate nozzle or other opening that is designated for pressure relief.
(33)
Indicate provisions for support of the vessel and any attachments for superimposed equipment.
(34)
Indicate reinforcement type such as glass or graphite and manufacturer's resin type and specification.
(35)
Record the average Barcol hardness of the shell and heads.
(36)
Show nozzles by size, type, and purpose.
(37)
List any part such as nozzles for which another manufacturer has furnished partial data reports. Provide the part name,
name of the manufacturer, and the serial number of the part.
(38)
Under “Remarks”, list any pertinent information not otherwise provided for in the rest of the data report. Information
such as outer protective layer type and thickness, and operating and service conditions stated by the purchaser.
145
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Table 8-900.3-1
Guide for Completing Fabricator’s Data Report CPV-1 (Cont’d)
Reference
to Circled
Numbers in
the Form
Description
(39)
Indicate the year of expiration for the vessel based on the qualification tests performed on the prototype vessel.
(40)
The Certificate of Compliance block is to show the name of the Fabricator as shown on the ASME Certificate of
Authorization. This should be signed by the chief inspector, Manager of Quality Control, or a like person.
(41)
The Certificate of Shop Inspection is to be completed by the Fabricator and signed by the Authorized Inspector who
performs the shop inspection.
(42)
The Authorized Inspector's National Board commission number must be shown when the vessel is stamped “National
Board”, otherwise show only this State or Province commission number.
GENERAL NOTE: Any quantity to which units apply shall be entered on the Fabricator’s Data Report with the chosen units.
146
ASME BPVC.X-2021
FORM CPV-2
RECOMMENDED FORM FOR QUALIFYING THE LAMINATE DESIGN
AND THE LAMINATE PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION USED IN THE FABRICATION
OF COMPOSITE REINFORCED PRESSURE VESSELS (CLASS III)
(Revision A — 2017)
As required by the Provisions of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
Qualification Test Report No.
Laminate Procedure Specification No.
A change in any of the essential variables denoted by an asterisk below requires a new Laminate Procedure Specification.
*Fiber
(Manufacturer and Designation)
*Sizing or Finish
(Manufacturer and Designation)
*Resin
(Type, Manufacturer, and Designation)
*Curing Agent
(Type, Manufacturer, and Designation)
Curing Agent/Resin Ratio
Viscosity of Resin System
cP (min.) to
cP (max.) @
°F (°C)
*Manner of Impregnation
(Prepregnation, Wet Wind, Postpregnation)
*Percent Fiber by Weight in Composite
[See Note (1)]
*Variables of Winding Process [See Note (2)]
Helix Angle
(Measured on Cylinder Between Axis and Band Path)
Circumferential Band Density
end/in. (mm)
Circumferential Band Width
in. (mm)
Tension: Per Strand (End), Roving, or Band (Specify Which)
Method of Control
lb. (kg) per
Program
Layer Sequence
[See Note (2)]
*Primer
(Type, Manufacturer, and Designation)
Primer Application Method
*Primer Curing Schedule
°F (°C) for
hr
min
NOTES:
(1) Where a range of values or a tolerance applies, state the applicable range or tolerance.
(2) Use “O” to indicate full layer of circumferential windings (down and back), include number of passes.
Use “o” to indicate half layer of circumferential windings (single pass).
(07/17)
147
ASME BPVC.X-2021
FORM CPV-2 (CONT’D)
(Revision A — 2017)
Exterior Treatment (Non-Structural, Describe)
Fiber Type
Fiber Form
Manufacturer
Manufacturer No.
Material No. 1
Material No. 2
*Inner Liner
(Material, Grade, and Thickness [see Note (1)].)
*Liner Size and Configuration
(OD)
(Length)
Laminate Strength
(Cylindrical, Spherical, Other)
psi (kPa) Method of Measurement
(If Other Than ASTM D 2290)
Interlaminar Shear Strength
Acoustic Emission Examination Report Number
*Laminate Curing Schedule
°F (°C) for
hr
min
°F (°C) for
hr
min
°F (°C) for
hr
min
°F (°C) for
hr
min
°F (°C) for
hr
min
Manner of Measuring Temperature: Oven Air
Vessel Head
Wrong Surface
Other (Describe)
*Barcol Hardness
(Use a separate sheet to record individual readings and their location [see Note (1)].)
Laminate Thickness
(Use a separate sheet to record individual readings and their location [see Note (1)].)
*Volumetric Expansion
Gel Time
min
Minimum Temperature Cycle Test:
Peak Exothermic Temperature
from
psi (kPa) to
°F (°C)
psi (kPa) at
(No. of Cycles)
°F (°C) maximum test temperature
Maximum Temperature Cycle Test:
from
psi (kPa) to
psi (kPa) at
(No. of Cycles)
°F (°C) minimum test temperature
Burst Pressure
psi (kPa)
Qualification Pressure
Mode of Failure
(07/17)
148
psi (kPa)
ASME BPVC.X-2021
FORM CPV-2 (CONT’D)
(Revision A — 2017)
ASME BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE, Section X
(Year)
[Addenda (if applicable) Date]
(Case No.)
We certify that the statements in this Specification are correct:
Date
,
Signed
(Fabricator)
By
Certificate of Authorization Number
Expires
CERTIFICATION BY SHOP INSPECTOR
OF QUALIFICATION OF LAMINATE DESIGN AND LAMINATE PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION
Laminate Procedure Specification of
at
For
process of fabricating vessel(s) described in
User’s Design Specification Number
and
Fabricator’s Design Report Number
I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors
and/or the State or Province of
and employed
by
of
have inspected the pressure vessel and witnessed tests described in the Qualification Test Report of the Laminate Design
and Procedure Specification and state that to the best of knowledge and belief, the Fabricator has constructed this part in
accordance with the ASME BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE, Section X, Class III and the Laminate Design and
Procedure Specification being qualified. By signing this certificate, neither the inspector nor his employer makes any
warranty, expressed or implied, concerning the design or procedure covered by this Qualification Test Report.
Furthermore, neither the inspector nor his employer shall be liable in any manner for any personal injury or property
damage or loss of any kind arising from or connected with this inspection.
Date
Signed
Commissions
(Authorized Inspector)
(07/17)
149
(National Board Authorized
Inspector Number)
ASME BPVC.X-2021
MANDATORY APPENDIX 9
ESTABLISHING GOVERNING CODE EDITIONS, ADDENDA, AND
CASES FOR FRP PRESSURE VESSELS
(c) It is permitted to provide a replacement part “in
kind” (i.e., identical in fit and material to the part
being replaced) for an existing pressure vessel and to
certify the part as meeting the Code Edition and
Addenda to which the existing pressure vessel is certified.
The material may be produced in accordance with the
material specification revision referenced in the Code
Edition and Addenda to which the existing pressure
vessel is certified or to any subsequent revision to that
material specification.
9-100 GENERAL
After Code revisions are approved by ASME, they may
be used beginning with the date of issuance shown on the
Code. Except as noted below, revisions become mandatory
6 months after the date of issuance. Code Cases are permissible and may be used beginning with the date of approval
by ASME. Only Code Cases that are specifically identified
as being applicable to this Section may be used. At the time
a Code Case is applied, only the latest revision may be used.
Code Cases that have been incorporated into this Section
or have been annulled may not be used.
Changes to the Code and Code Cases related to design,
material, fabrication, examination, inspection, testing,
overpressure protection and field assembly made prior
to completion of the pressure vessel or replacement
part may be critical to the intended service conditions
of the pressure vessel. These changes must be considered
by the Fabricator. Application of such changes shall be a
matter of agreement between the Fabricator and the user.
As used in this Appendix, the term “Inspector” shall be
considered to include “Authorized Inspector,” “Qualified
Inspector,” and “Certified Individual,” as applicable.
9-300 MATERIALS
For pressure-containing parts, the Fabricator shall use
material conforming to the Procedure Specification
meeting the qualification requirements of the Edition
and Addenda specified for design.
Also the material specification edition must be listed as
approved for use in Section II, Part A, Mandatory Appendix
II, Table II-100 or Table II-200; or Section II, Part B, Mandatory Appendix II, Table II-100 or Table II-200.
For replacement parts provided “in kind,” the material
shall be produced in accordance with the material specification revision listed in Section II as described above at
the time the part is certified.
9-200 DESIGN
The Fabricator of the completed pressure vessel shall
establish the Code Edition, Addenda and Code Cases to be
used for design of a pressure vessel, including parts
thereof, or a replacement part to be stamped with the
ASME certification mark required by this Section.
(a) Except as provided in (b) and (c), the Code Edition
and Addenda used to design a pressure vessel, parts
thereof, and replacement parts shall be either those
that are mandatory on the date the vessel or replacement
part is contracted, or those that have been approved and
issued by ASME prior to the contract date but are not yet
mandatory (refer to 9-100 above).
(b) Existing pressure parts that have been stamped and
certified to an earlier or later Edition and Addenda than
those used for design, and that have never been placed in
service, (i.e., placed in stock for future use) may be used
provided they are acceptable to the Manufacturer.
9-400 FABRICATION
The Edition and Addenda used to govern fabrication
shall be either those governing design or the Edition
and Addenda approved and issued at the time the activity
is performed.
9-500 EXAMINATION
Examination refers to activities performed by the Fabricator that include nondestructive examination. The
Edition and Addenda used to govern examination shall
be either those governing design or the Edition and
Addenda approved and issued at the time the activity
is performed.
150
ASME BPVC.X-2021
9-600 INSPECTION
9-900 FIELD ASSEMBLY
Inspection refers to activities performed by the
Inspector. The Code Edition and Addenda used to
govern inspection shall be the same as those governing
design.
The Edition and Addenda used to govern field assembly
shall be either those governing design or the Edition and
Addenda approved and issued at the time the activity is
performed.
9-700 TESTING
9-1000 CERTIFICATION
The Code Edition and Addenda used to govern testing of
the item shall be the same as those governing design.
The Edition and Addenda used to govern Code certification shall be the same as those governing design.
9-800 OVERPRESSURE PROTECTION
The Code Edition and Addenda used to govern overpressure protection shall be the same as those governing
design.
151
ASME BPVC.X-2021
MANDATORY APPENDIX 10
LAMINATES WITH LOAD-SHARING METALLIC SHELLS FOR
HIGH PRESSURE SERVICE
10-100 SCOPE
10-200 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
10-101 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
General requirements for the manufacture of CPRVs are
specified in 10-201 through 10-203.
Composite Reinforced Pressure Vessels (CRPVs) are
metallic vessels (Section VIII, Division 3) with fiber-reinforced plastic laminate wrapped around the cylindrical
shell and are designed to contain fluids at high pressure.
A laminate of continuous filaments of a specified glass or
carbon fiber with a specified resin system is circumferentially wound on the shell in a systematic manner under
controlled tension and cured in place. The heads are not
wrapped, and openings are not permitted in the laminate.
Each completed vessel shall comply with the requirements of Section VIII, Division 3, except the laminate shall
comply with the requirements of this Appendix.
10-201 SCOPE
CRPVs consist of a laminate of continuous unidirectional filaments of a specified glass or carbon fiber
with a specified resin circumferentially wound in a
systematic manner under controlled tension over a cylindrical metallic shell and cured in place. Openings are not
permitted in the laminate. Metallic ends and nozzles
complete the construction (see Figures 10-201-1,
10-201-2, and 10-201-3).
10-202 PROTECTIVE LAYER
10-102 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
(a) The User’s Design Specification shall state if a
protective layer for the laminate is needed and, if so,
shall specify the performance requirements for that
layer. The User’s Design Specification shall state if the
CRPV will be exposed to sunlight in service. If so, the Manufacturer shall apply a UV barrier coating to the laminate.
(b) In addition to (a), all laminates shall be sealed with a
waterproof barrier as required in 10-408.
This Appendix defines the requirements for the materials, design (composite properties), fabrication, qualification, examination, and testing of laminates to be
applied as part of the construction of a Section VIII, Division 3 composite pressure vessel. Design of the vessel,
including the laminate, shall be performed by the
Section VIII, Division 3 Manufacturer.
Figure 10-201-1
General Arrangement
Laminate layer
Metallic shell
Metallic head
Laminate stops
Vessel support
152
Wear protection
material
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Figure 10-201-2
Laminate Termination
Laminate layer
Metallic shell
Metallic head
Figure 10-201-3
Laminate Step
Load transfer surface
Metallic layer
Laminate layer
Wear protection material
Laminate stop
Support bracket
CRPV-2A and, together with all test documents, shall
be designated the Qualification Test Report and be
included in the Manufacturer’s Construction Records.
(c) The Manufacturer shall be responsible for
conducting laminate production examinations and tests
as required by 10-400. The test results shall be included
in the Manufacturer’s Construction Records.
10-203 MANUFACTURER’S RESPONSIBILITIES
(a) The Manufacturer shall be responsible for preparation and qualification of a Laminate Procedure Specification to apply the laminate. The Laminate Procedure
Specification shall specify all pertinent material properties data, the means by which the laminate is applied to the
metallic shell, and all other significant process data associated with the laminate on the completed CRPV. It shall
include tolerance limits for all appropriate material properties; process conditions such as time and temperature;
acceptable test result values; and compositions of resins,
fibers, and curing agents, etc., as further defined by the
rules of this Appendix. It shall make provisions for protection of the structural laminate from damage due to impact;
ultraviolet radiation; or other environmental exposure,
fire, abrasive conditions, and in-service degradation of
the laminate for the life of the CRPV under the service
conditions as specified in the User’s Design Specification.
The Laminate Procedure Specification shall be qualified
per the requirements of this Appendix and shall be
part of the Manufacturer’s Design Report.
(b) It shall be the Manufacturer’s responsibility to
conduct Laminate Qualification Tests to qualify and requalify the Laminate Procedure Specification per the requirements of this Appendix and to record the result
thereof. Using the procedures established in this Appendix, a report of tests contained in 10-600, Laminate Procedure Qualification, shall be prepared and certified by the
Manufacturer and the Inspector. The results of these tests
shall be documented on Section VIII, Division 3, Form
10-300 MATERIALS
10-301 GENERAL MATERIALS REQUIREMENTS
(a) Laminates used in the construction of a CRPV shall
comply with the requirements listed in 10-302.
(b) All materials used in the manufacture of the laminate shall be traceable to material test reports, or certificates of compliance; shall be traceable to an individual
CRPV vessel; and shall be documented in the Manufacturer’s Construction Records.
(c) Materials used in fabricating laminates shall be
(1) fibers and a resin system (combined by vessel
manufacturer at time of application to the metallic shell).
(2) fibers pre-impregnated with resin by a third
party before shipping to vessel manufacturer (prepreg). Only epoxy resin shall be used for fiber pre-impregnation.
153
ASME BPVC.X-2021
trope, or dye that will interfere with the natural color
of the resin shall be used except as permitted by
10-402, Laminate Procedure Specification.
10-302 LAMINATES
(a) Fiber-reinforced plastic materials are designated as
laminates. These laminates, which are used as the outer
structural layer of CRPVs, shall be fabricated in accordance
with the requirements of this Appendix.
(b) Laminates are composite structures consisting of
glass or carbon fibers embedded in a resin system.
(c) The Manufacturer shall retain the published specifications for all materials used in the laminate of each
CRPV, the material supplier’s recommendations for
storage conditions, shelf life, and the material supplier’s
certification that each shipment conforms to the published
specification requirements. These data shall be part of the
Manufacturer’s Construction Records.
(d) The maximum design temperature of the laminate
shall be the same as the design temperature of the CRPV
and shall be specified in the User’s Design Specification,
but in no case shall it exceed 150°F (66°C).
(e) The laminate minimum design temperature shall
not be colder than −65°F (−54°C) (see Section VIII, Division 3, Part KD, KD-1313).
10-305.1 Resin Material Requirements
(a) The resin materials used in the manufacture of
laminates shall be the same as the materials specified
in the Laminate Procedure Specification. Each resin
shall be traceable by the name of its supplier and
trade name or number of that supplier. The resin supplier
shall furnish the Manufacturer a Certificate of Analysis for
each resin. The Certificate of Analysis shall include the
following information:
(1) resin identification
(2) batch number(s)
(3) date of manufacture
(4) shelf life
(b) The resin supplier shall certify for each batch the
value and limits stipulated in his specification for the properties identified in Table 10-305.1-1. Resin material
outside the shelf life shall be either retested by the
resin manufacturer and certified to the original properties
or rejected.
The Manufacturer shall test each batch of resin for the
properties listed in Table 10-305.1-2 to ensure the material characteristics of the resin have not changed from
values specified in the Laminate Procedure Specification.
The values obtained for viscosity and specific gravity for
resin alone shall be within the limits stated in the
supplier’s specification for that resin and as listed in
the Laminate Procedure Specification. Resin testing
shall be performed at first usage and at subsequent intervals of not more than 1∕4 of the resin shelf life. The resin
shall be maintained in accordance with the resin manufacturer’s recommendations.
The values obtained for gel-time and peak exothermic
temperature shall be for a particular resin/curing system
test formulation and temperature and shall be within the
limits listed in the Laminate Procedure Specification. The
test formulation and temperature shall be representative
of the formulations used during laminate fabrication.
These test results shall be certified by the Manufacturer
10-303 FIBERS
10-303.1 Glass Fibers
(a) Glass fibers shall be one or more of the following
glass compositions:
(1) Type S glass
(2) Type E-CR glass
(b) The material supplier shall certify the fibers
conform to the Manufacturer’s specifications for the
product and that the minimum strength and modulus,
measured per ASTM D2343, are not less than the specified
minimum values for resin-impregnated strands.
10-303.2 Carbon Fibers
(a) Carbon fibers shall be Polyacrylonitrile (PAN)
based carbon fiber tows having mechanical properties
meeting the requirements of a procurement document
prepared by the Manufacturer.
(b) The material supplier shall certify the fibers
conform to the Manufacturer’s specifications for the
product and that the minimum strength and modulus,
measured in accordance with ASTM D4018 or ASTM
D2585, are not less than the specified minimum values
for resin-impregnated strands.
Table 10-305.1-1
Resin Supplier Certifications
10-304 FIBER SURFACE TREATMENT
Resin System
The surface of the fiber shall be treated to provide a
bond between the fiber and resin system as needed.
Required Certifications
Polyester/vinyl ester
10-305 RESIN SYSTEM
Viscosity
ASTM D445 or D2116
Specific gravity
Section X, Mandatory Appendix 5
Epoxy
The resin system shall consist of an epoxy, polyester, or
vinyl ester plus the resin manufacturer’s recommended
promoters and curing agents. No filler, pigment, thixo154
Viscosity
ASTM D445 or D2196
Epoxide equivalent
ASTM D1652
Specific gravity
Section X, Mandatory Appendix 5
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Table 10-305.1-2
Tests by Laminate Manufacturer
Resin System
10-307 PRE-IMPREGNATED FIBERS
(a) Fibers used for making pre-impregnated fibers
shall be one of the fibers listed in 10-303, and the
resin shall be limited to epoxy.
(b) Fiber Requirements
(1) The pre-preg supplier shall certify the fibers
conform to the Manufacturer’s specifications for the
product and that the minimum strength and modulus,
measured per ASTM D2343, are not less than the specified
minimum values for resin-impregnated strands.
(2) Carbon fibers shall be Polyacrylonitrile (PAN)
based carbon fiber tows having mechanical properties
meeting the requirements of a procurement document
prepared by the Manufacturer.
(3) The pre-preg supplier shall certify the fibers
conform to the Manufacturer’s specifications for the
product and that the minimum strength and modulus,
measured in accordance with ASTM D4018 or ASTM
D2585, are not less than the specified minimum values
for resin-impregnated strands.
(c) Resin Material Requirements. The epoxy resin used
in the pre-preg shall be the same as the resin specified in
the Laminate Procedure Specification. Each epoxy resin
shall be traceable by the name of its supplier and
trade name or number of that supplier. The pre-preg
supplier shall furnish the Manufacturer a Certificate of
Analysis for each epoxy resin. The Certificate of Analysis
shall include the following information:
(1) resin identification including separate curing
agents, if applicable
(2) batch number(s) for each pre-preg lot
(3) date of manufacture
(4) pre-preg is within resin shelf life. Pre-preg not
within the resin shelf life shall be rejected.
(d) The pre-preg supplier shall certify for each batch
the value and limits required by the specification of the
properties identified in Table 10-307-1. The values
obtained for viscosity and specific gravity for the resin
alone shall be within the limits of the supplier’s specification for that resin and as listed in the Laminate Procedure Specification. The values obtained for gel time shall
be for a particular resin curing system test formulation
and temperature and shall be within the limits listed
in the Laminate Procedure Specification.
Required Tests
Polyester/vinyl ester
Viscosity
ASTM D445 or D2196
Gel time and peak exothermic
temperature
ASTM D2471
Specific gravity
Section X, Mandatory
Appendix 5
Epoxy
Viscosity
ASTM D445 or D2196
Gel time
ASTM D2471
Specific gravity
Section X, Mandatory
Appendix 5
and shall be included in the Manufacturer’s Construction
Records.
(c) The tolerance limits for the test formulation, as
defined in the Laminate Procedure Specification, may
be established by the resin supplier or the Manufacturer.
The tolerance limits shall be established using formulation
components having Manufacturer-specified material
characteristics. The tolerance limits established shall
be within a sufficiently narrow range such that test
results outside this range will reflect deviations in component material characteristics and alert the Manufacturer
of possible material irregularities.
The Manufacturer shall establish and document a
maximum use temperature for the resin/cure system.
This may be in conjunction with the resin manufacturer
or independent laboratory and may be based on heat
distortion temperature or glass transition temperature.
The resin maximum use temperature shall be a
minimum 35°F (19°C) below the heat distortion temperature, or the glass transition temperature, but shall be equal
to higher than the laminate design temperature. The
Manufacturer shall re-establish and redocument the
maximum use temperature at least every 12 months
using current batches of resin and curing agent. The
maximum use temperature shall be recorded in the Laminate Procedure Specification. A record of these determinations shall be included in the Manufacturer’s
Construction Records.
10-306 CURING AGENTS
The curing agents used, the resin-to-curing-agent ratio,
and the curing procedure used for laminate fabrication
shall be as specified in the Laminate Procedure Specification. Each curing agent shall be traceable by the supplier’s
name, supplier’s designation, and generic name.
Table 10-307-1
Pre-Preg Supplier Certifications
Item
Required Certifications
Resin
Viscosity: ASTM D445 or D2196
Gel time: ASTM D2471
Specific gravity: Section X, Mandatory Appendix 5
Pre-preg
Resin content: D3529
Resin flow: D3531
155
ASME BPVC.X-2021
sion 3, Form CRPV-2A as part of the Laminate Procedure
Qualification Record.
(b) The interlaminar shear strength shall be determined for each laminate before initial use. Subsequent
determinations of interlaminar shear strength are
required only when there is a change in the laminate
formulation.
Table 10-307-2
Pre-Preg Systems Tests by CRPV Manufacturer
Item
Required Tests
Resin content
ASTM D3529
Resin flow
ASTM D3531
(e) The Manufacturer shall test each batch of pre-preg
per Table 10-307-2 to ensure the material characteristics
of the pre-preg resin have not changed from specified
values listed in the Laminate Procedure Specification.
The test formulation and temperature shall be representative of the formulation used during CRPV fabrication.
These test results shall be certified by the Manufacturer
and shall be included in the Manufacturer’s Construction
Records. The pre-preg supplier shall specify pre-preg shelf
life requirements and storage temperature and include a
copy of the fiber certification from the fiber manufacturer
as part of the pre-preg certification package.
10-400 FABRICATION
10-401 SCOPE
This item provides rules governing the fabrication of
fiber-reinforced plastic laminates for use in the construction of CRPVs. The fabrication process is limited to circumferential (hoop-oriented) filament-winding processes
with a winding angle deviation of no more than 10 deg
from the circumferential direction.
10-402 LAMINATE PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION
(a) For every combination of fabrication method,
Design Specification, and material variation employed
in fabricating laminate for a CRPV, the Manufacturer
shall prepare a Laminate Procedure Specification that
shall be qualified in accordance with 10-600 before it
is used for laminate fabrication in the construction of
CRPVs. The Laminate Procedure Specification shall
provide, as a minimum, all information concerning material properties and manufacturing procedures as required
on Section VIII, Division 3, Form CRPV-2A. The Qualification Test Report and Section VIII, Division 3, Form CRPV2A shall be part of the Manufacturer’s Construction
Records. A new Laminate Qualification Test Report
shall be prepared whenever qualification is required
by this Appendix.
(b) Any variation in the essential variables from the
Laminate Procedure Specification for CRPVs shall
require the Laminate Procedure Specification to be
rewritten, the design analysis to be reperformed, and
the specification to be requalified before using it to fabricate laminates.
(c) Production laminates shall be fabricated per a Laminate Procedure Specification. As a minimum, the following
essential variables shall be within tolerances as specified
in the Laminate Procedure Specification:
(1) fiber (manufacturer and designation)
(2) fiber mechanical properties
(3) fiber surface treatment (manufacturer and designation)
(4) resin (type, manufacturer, and designation)
(5) curing agent (manufacturer and designation)
(6) method of impregnation
(7) percent of fiber in laminate (outside range specified in Procedure Specification)
(8) variables of winding process
(9) curing schedule
10-308 LAMINATE CURE
The Manufacturer shall ensure the resin used in fabricating laminate is correctly cured. The degree of cure shall
be demonstrated by the Barcol hardness test per ASTM
D2583. Barcol hardness readings shall be within the tolerance specified by the resin supplier. If the resin supplier
does not provide Barcol hardness specifications for the
resin/curing system used, the Manufacturer shall establish Barcol hardness specifications. Barcol hardness specifications established by the Manufacturer shall be
documented in the Manufacturer’s Construction Records.
10-309 LAMINATE TENSILE STRENGTH
(a) The Manufacturer shall determine the tensile
strength and modulus of elasticity of the laminate used
in the manufacture of a CRPV.
(b) ASTM D2343 shall be used to determine the tensile
strength and modulus of elasticity of the laminate.
(c) The measured laminate tensile strength and
modulus of elasticity shall be part of the Laminate Procedure Specification and shall be recorded on Section VIII,
Division 3, Form CRPV-2A as part of the Laminate Procedure Qualification Record.
10-310 INTERLAMINAR SHEAR STRENGTH
(a) The laminates used in manufacturing a CRPV shall
have minimum interlaminar shear strengths of 3,000 psi
(20.7 MPa) for vinyl ester, 2,000 psi (13.8 MPa) for polyester, and 5,000 psi (34 MPa) for epoxy resins as determined by ASTM D2344. The test results shall be
included in the Construction Records. The interlaminar
shear strength shall be part of the Laminate Procedure
Specification and shall be recorded on Section VIII, Divi-
156
ASME BPVC.X-2021
10-403.5.3 Bandwidth and Spacing. The bandwidth
and spacing shall conform to those specified in the Laminate Procedure Specification.
(10) weight (mass) of laminate (outside range specified in Procedure Specification)
(11) Barcol hardness (outside range specified in
Procedure Specification)
10-404 VARIATION FROM LAMINATE PROCEDURE
SPECIFICATION
10-403 PRODUCTION LAMINATE REQUIREMENTS
10-403.1 Fiber Content. The laminate shall consist of
fiber strands in a resin matrix. The weight percent of fiber
in the laminate shall conform to that denoted in the Laminate Procedure Specification with a tolerance of +6% and
−0%. The weight percent of fiber in the laminate shall be
determined for 1 of every 300 CRPVs produced. The
weight (mass) of laminate applied to the metallic shell
shall be determined for 1 of every 100 CRPVs produced.
The Inspector shall select the CRPV for examination.
A variation in any essential variable from the tolerances
stated in the Laminate Procedure Specification shall result
in rejection of the CRPV.
10-405 GALVANIC CORROSION
When carbon fibers are used, the outer surface of the
metallic shell shall be protected from any galvanic corrosion that may occur due to dissimilar materials (steel or
aluminum) in contact with carbon fibers. Acceptable
methods for this purpose include a suitable polymer
coating, a glass-fiber/epoxy composite layer, or a
polymer film wrap that separates the galvanically dissimilar materials interface surfaces.
10-403.2 Fiber Application. In general, winding
patterns shall be so arranged that stressed fibers are
aligned to resist circumferential stress. Specific
winding patterns for the continuous fiber strands shall
be used as defined in the Laminate Procedure Specification. Any winding pattern that places the filaments in the
circumferential orientation (maximum 10-deg deviation
from the circumferential direction) and is designated in
the Laminate Procedure Specification may be used.
10-406 REPAIRS OF IMPERFECTIONS
In the event any of the unacceptable imperfections
listed in Table 10-503-1 or Table 10-503-1M extends
into the structural layer, or the structural fibers are
cut or damaged, the imperfections or damaged fibers
shall be deemed not repairable and the CRPV rejected.
If the unacceptable imperfections listed in Table
10-503-1 or Table 10-503-1M are contained in the
nonstructural, protective layer of the laminate, the
layer may be repaired, unless prohibited by the Laminate
Procedure Specification. The minimum thickness, fiber
content, and protective capabilities of the repaired protective layer shall be the same as the unrepaired protective
layer.
10-403.3 Resin System. The resin system shall be one
of the systems specified in 10-300 and is appropriate for
the particular service conditions specified in the User’s
Design Specification.
10-403.4 Cure. If other than ambient temperature cure
is employed, the design and operation of the curing equipment shall provide uniform heating over the entire surface
of the CRPV. Heating may be done from inside or outside of
the CRPV or from inside and outside. The cure times and
temperatures shall conform to those specified in the Laminate Procedure Specification. The surface of the laminate
shall be at the cure temperature for the minimum time
required for post cure. Heat-up and cool-down times
shall be excluded.
10-407 REPLACEMENT OF LAMINATE
If a CRPV is rejected because the structural layer is
damaged, or there is an unacceptable variation in any
essential variable, the laminate may be completely
removed from the metallic shell before there is any pressure testing of the vessel. Care shall be taken to ensure the
metal shell outside diameter surface is not damaged
during laminate removal. Damage to the metallic shell,
caused by removal of the laminate, shall be repaired
per the requirements of Section VIII, Division 3, Part
KE. Laminate may then be reapplied per the Laminate
Procedure Specification.
10-403.5 Filament Winding Process
10-403.5.1 Tensioning. Tension on the strands of filaments during the winding operation shall be controlled to
ensure a uniform application of the composite reinforcement onto the metallic shell and shall be as specified in the
Laminate Procedure Specification.
10-403.5.2 Winding Speed. Winding speed shall be
limited only by the ability to
(a) meet the tensioning requirements
(b) conform to the specified winding pattern
(c) ensure adequate resin impregnations
The winding speed shall be as specified in the Laminate
Procedure Specification.
10-408 SEALING OF LAMINATE
The exterior surface of the laminate and the laminate/
metallic interface shall be sealed with a waterproof barrier
after all testing and examinations of the laminate are
completed. The Manufacturer shall include the life expectancy of the waterproof barrier in the Design Report.
157
ASME BPVC.X-2021
be made with mechanical gages, ultrasonic gages, or other
devices having an accuracy of ±2% of true thickness.
(5) Visual Thickness Check. Where visual indications
of deviation from design thickness exist at points other
than those at which measurements are required, thickness
determinations shall be made in sufficient quantity to
correctly locate and define the deviant areas. Thicknesses
less than the value specified in the Manufacturer’s Design
Report are prohibited.
(6) Hydrostatic Pressure Test. For vessels that are
subjected to hydrostatic pressurization that is designed
to provide an initial stress in the metallic shell and laminate, the initial pressure shall be applied before the hydrostatic test and acoustic emission examination.
(7) Acoustic Emission Examination.
(-a) An acoustic emission examination shall be
performed during pressurization of each CRPV. The examination shall follow the hydrostatic test and shall be in
accordance with the requirements of this Appendix
and ASTM E1067. Where the provisions of this Appendix
differ from those of ASTM E1067, the provisions of this
Appendix shall govern.
(-b) Vessel Conditioning. The internal pressure in
the vessel shall not exceed 10% of the hydrostatic test
pressure for 12 hr prior to the acoustic emission examination.
(-c) The test fluid shall be water or another appropriate liquid. The minimum liquid temperature shall be
sufficient to ensure that the vessel wall temperature is
not less than 40°F (5°C) and not greater than the
lesser of the design temperature or 100°F (38°C).
(-d) Instrumentation shall be as detailed in ASTM
E1067, paragraph 7. The recommended and preferred
instrument features listed in ASTM E1067, paragraph
7.2 are required. Peak-amplitude detection for each
input channel is also required. Time of arrival shall be
measured to an accuracy of 1 μsec. All test data, including
time and pressure, shall be recorded for post-test playback
and analysis. The data acquisition threshold shall be at or
below the threshold of detectability defined in ASTM
E1067, paragraph A2.2.
(-e) Sensor locations and spacing shall be
according to ASTM E1067, paragraph 9.3. The attenuation
characterization shall be performed in the hoop and longitudinal directions and at 45 deg to the axis of the vessel.
Additional lead breaks may be necessary to accurately
determine the maximum sensor spacing in each direction.
The requirement that the attenuation characterization be
performed above the liquid line shall not apply to vessels.
Regardless of vessel size, at least two sensors shall be used
so that electromagnetic interference is easily detected by
simultaneity of arrival.
(-f) Pressurization Cycle. The pressure shall be held
at 10% of the hydrostatic test pressure for a minimum of
10 min, then raised to 98% of the hydrostatic test pressure, and held constant for 30 min. The initial hold period
10-409 PAINTING OF LAMINATE
If specified in the User Design Specification, the laminate may be painted following all required inspections and
certifications by the Inspector.
10-500 EXAMINATION AND TESTING
REQUIREMENTS
10-501 SCOPE
The following paragraphs provide examination and
testing requirements for laminates.
10-502 QUALIFICATION OF NONDESTRUCTIVE
EXAMINATION PERSONNEL
(a) The Manufacturer shall certify that each examiner
performing visual tests per this Appendix has been qualified to the requirements of Section V, Article 9.
(b) The Manufacturer shall certify that each examiner
performing acoustic emission testing per this Appendix
has attended a dedicated training course on the
subject, passed a written examination, and has the recommended experience. The training course shall be appropriate for specific NDT Level II qualification per ASNT
SNT-TC-1A.
10-503 EXAMINATIONS AND TESTS
(a) Each laminate shall be subjected to the examinations required by this Appendix and shall conform to
the specified requirements with results recorded in
Production Test Reports. Examinations detailed in (1)
through (5) shall be performed before the hydrostatic
test detailed in (6). A final visual examination, in accordance with (1), shall follow the acoustic emission examination. The laminate Production Test Report shall
become part of the Manufacturer’s Construction Records.
(1) Visual Examination. Each laminate shall be
visually examined with a suitable light source to the specified requirements in Table 10-503-1 or Table 10-503-1M.
(2) Design Dimensions Examination. Each CRPV shall
be examined for conformance to dimensions and tolerances shown on the design drawings.
(3) Visual Examination of Repaired Areas. Each
repaired area shall be visually examined and shall
comply with all acceptance requirements of Table
10-503-1 or Table 10-503-1M. The repaired area shall
have translucency and surface finish comparable to the
remainder of the laminate.
(4) Thickness Check. The thickness of each production laminate shall be determined at a minimum of
three points along its length on each of four quadrants.
When laminates are longer than 5 ft (1.5 m), one additional
determination shall be made for each additional 5 ft (1.5
m) or portion thereof. The thickness determinations shall
158
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Table 10-503-1
Visual Acceptance Criteria for FRP Laminate (U.S. Customary Units)
Imperfection
Type
Air bubble (void)
Definition
Air entrapped within and between piles of reinforcement,
usually spherical in shape
Maximum Size and Cumulative
Sum of Imperfections Allowed
After Repair [Note (1)], [Note (2)]
For maximum diameter of 1∕8 in.,
maximum density 4 per square inch
For maximum diameter 1∕16 in.,
maximum density 10 per square
inch
Blister
Rounded elevation of laminate surface with boundaries
that may be sharply defined, resembles blister on
human skin
For maximum diameter of 1∕8 in.,
density 1 per square foot
Burned areas from excessive
exotherm
Shows evidence of thermal decomposition through
discoloration or heavy distortion
None
Chips
Small pieces broken off an edge of the laminate that includes
fiber breakage
Maximum diameter 1∕16 in., or
maximum length 1∕4 in. and
maximum depth 1∕16 in. [Note (3)]
Cracks
Actual rupture or debond of portions of laminate
None, except circumferential through
thickness cracks in the laminate are
acceptable. Cracks shall not deviate
from wind angle by more than 2
deg, and crack width shall not
exceed 1∕32 in.
Crazing
Fine cracks at the surface of the laminate
For maximum length of 1 in. and
maximum depth of 1∕64 in.,
maximum density 5 in any square
foot
Delamination (edge)
Separation of layers in laminate
None
Dry spot
Area of incomplete surface film where the reinforcement
was not wetted with resin
None
Edge exposure
Exposure of multiple layers of reinforcing matrix to the
environment, usually the result of shaping or cutting a
section of laminate
None
Fish-eye
Particles included in laminate that are foreign to its
composition (not a minute speck of dust)
Maximum diameter 1∕8 in., never to
penetrate lamination to
lamination; must be fully resin
encapsulated [Note (3)]
Foreign inclusion
Small globular mass that has not blended completely
into the surrounding material and is particularly
evident in a transparent or translucent material
Maximum 1∕8 in. diameter [Note (3)]
Pimples
Small, sharp, conical elevations on the surface of laminate
No limit; must be fully resin filled and
encapsulated
Pit
Small crater in surface of laminate
Maximum diameter 1∕8 in. and
maximum depth 1∕16 in.; no exposed
fibers [Note (3)]
Porosity
Presence of numerous visible tiny pits (pinholes),
approximate dimension 0.010 in.
None to fully penetrate surface; no
more than 15 per square inch; no
exposed fibers
Scratches
Shallow marks, grooves, furrows, or channels caused by
improper handling
None more than 6 in. long; no exposed
fibers [Note (3)]
Wrinkles and creases
Generally linear, abrupt changes in surface plane caused by
laps of reinforcing layers, or polyester film overlap
None
Band width gap
The space between successive winding fiber bands that are
intended to lay next to each other
None
Band width overlap
An area where the edge of a fiber band has laid on top of a
previous fiber band, although intended to lay next to
each other
2 strands max.
Band width splaying
An unintended space between individual fibers in a fiber
band that results in a gap between fibers
None
159
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Table 10-503-1
Visual Acceptance Criteria for FRP Laminate (U.S. Customary Units) (Cont’d)
Imperfection
Type
Strand dropout [Note (4)]
Definition
When one or more strands of a fiber band ceases to
be applied to the CRPV shell being wound due to
breakage or inadequate supply
Maximum Size and Cumulative
Sum of Imperfections Allowed
After Repair [Note (1)], [Note (2)]
<2% of strands
NOTES:
(1) Above acceptance criteria apply to condition of laminate after repair and hydrostatic test.
(2) Noncatalyzed resin is not permissible to any extent in any area of the laminate.
(3) This type of imperfection is subject to cumulative sum limitations as follows:
(a) Maximum number allowable in any square foot is 5.
(b) Maximum number allowable in any square yard is 30.
(4) In the filament winding process, it is common practice to wind many fiber strands simultaneously. These strands are gathered together sideby-side to form the band of fiber that is wound around the metallic shell. As the shell is rotated, these strands are run through a resin bath, fiber
placement guides, and rollers that may cause a strand to break; called strand dropout. Many times, strand dropout is corrected before
continuing, but it may be desirable to complete the winding pattern with the dropped fiber strands.
160
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Table 10-503-1M
Visual Acceptance Criteria for FRP Laminate (SI Units)
Imperfection
Type
Air bubble (void)
Definition
Air entrapped within and between piles of reinforcement,
usually spherical in shape
Maximum Size and Cumulative
Sum of Imperfections Allowed
After Repair [Note (1)], [Note (12)]
For maximum diameter of 3.2 mm,
maximum density 4 per 650 mm2
For maximum diameter of 1.6 mm,
maximum density 10 per 650 mm2
Blister
Rounded elevation of laminate surface with boundaries that
may be sharply defined, resembles blister on human skin
For maximum diameter of 3.2 mm,
density 1 per 930 cm2
Burned areas from excessive
exotherm
Shows evidence of thermal decomposition through
discoloration or heavy distortion
None
Chips
Small pieces broken off an edge of the laminate that includes
fiber breakage
Maximum diameter 1.6 mm, or
maximum length 6.4 mm and
maximum depth 1.6 mm [Note (3)]
Cracks
Actual rupture or debond of portions of laminate
None, except circumferential through
thickness cracks in the laminate are
acceptable. Cracks shall not deviate
from wind angle by more than 2
deg, and crack width shall not
exceed 0.794 mm
Crazing
Fine cracks at the surface of the laminate
For maximum length of 0.25 mm and
maximum depth of 0.4 mm,
maximum density 5 in. any
930 cm2
Delamination (edge)
Separation of layers in laminate
None
Dry spot
Area of incomplete surface film where the reinforcement
was not wetted with resin
None
Edge exposure
Exposure of multiple layers of reinforcing matrix to the
environment, usually the result of shaping or cutting
a section of laminate
None
Fish-eye
Particles included in laminate that are foreign to its
composition (not a minute speck of dust)
Maximum diameter 3.2 mm, never to
penetrate lamination to
lamination; must be fully resin
encapsulated [Note (3)
Foreign inclusion
Small globular mass that has not blended completely into
the surrounding material and is particularly evident
in a transparent or translucent material
Maximum diameter 3.2 mm [Note (3)]
Pimples
Small, sharp, conical elevations on the surface of laminate
No limit; must be fully resin filled and
encapsulated
Pit
Small crater in surface of laminate
Maximum diameter 3.2 mm and
maximum depth 1.6 mm; no
exposed fibers [Note (3)]
Porosity
Presence of numerous visible tiny pits (pinholes),
approximate dimension 0.254 mm
None to fully penetrate surface; no
more than 15 per 650 mm2; no
exposed fibers
Scratches
Shallow marks, grooves, furrows, or channels caused by
improper handling
None more than 15.2 cm long; no
exposed fibers [Note (3)
Wrinkles and creases
Generally linear, abrupt changes in surface plane caused by
laps of reinforcing layers or polyester film overlap
None
Band width gap
The space between successive winding
fiber bands that are intended to lay next to each other
None
Band width overlap
An area where the edge of a fiber band has laid on top of a
previous fiber band, although intended to lay next to
each other
Maximum two strands
Band width splaying
An unintended space between individual fibers in a fiber band
that results in a gap between fibers
None
161
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Table 10-503-1M
Visual Acceptance Criteria for FRP Laminate (SI Units) (Cont’d)
Imperfection
Type
Strand dropout [Note (4)]
Maximum Size and Cumulative
Sum of Imperfections Allowed
After Repair [Note (1)], [Note (12)]
Definition
When one or more strands of a fiber band ceases to be
applied to the CRPV shell being wound due to breakage
or inadequate supply
<2% of strands
NOTES:
(1) Above acceptance criteria apply to condition of laminate after repair and hydrostatic test.
(2) Noncatalyzed resin is not permissible to any extent in any area of the laminate.
(3) This type of imperfection is subject to cumulative sum limitations. Maximum number allowable in any square meter is 36.
(4) In the filament winding process, it is common practice to wind many fiber strands simultaneously. These strands are gathered together sideby-side to form the band of fiber that is wound around the metallic shell. As the shell is rotated, these strands are run through a resin bath, fiber
placement guides, and rollers that may cause a strand to break; called strand dropout. Many times, strand dropout is corrected before
continuing, but it may be desirable to complete the winding pattern with the dropped fiber strands.
(b) Records. The results of the preceding examinations
shall be included in the Manufacturer’s Construction
Records.
and pressurization from 10% to 50% of the hydrostatic
test pressure shall be used to identify and eliminate background noise. The last 5 min of the initial hold period shall
not begin until evaluation and minimization of background have been completed. In order to assess the
effect of fill rate on background noise, the pressurization
rate specified in ASTM E1067, paragraph 11.1.1, may be
varied for the pressurization from 10% to 50% of the
hydrostatic test pressure. For pressurization above
50% of the hydrostatic test pressure, the provisions of
ASTM E1067, paragraph 11.1.1, shall apply.
(-g) Data Acquisition. Test data may be recorded
for the entire pressurization cycle. Data acquired during
the last 5 min of the initial pressure hold, during pressurization from 50% to 98% of the hydrostatic test pressure,
and from the final 30-min pressure hold shall be recorded
and used to evaluate the vessel.
(-h) Evaluation and acceptance criteria shall be in
accordance with ASTM E1067. An acceptable vessel shall
meet all of the criteria listed in Table 10-503-2. Background noise shall be discounted when applying acceptance criteria.
10-600 LAMINATE PROCEDURE
QUALIFICATION
10-601 GENERAL
The tests and examinations required in this paragraph
are intended to qualify the design of a prototype laminate
as applied to a Section VIII, Division 3 shell and the Procedure Specification to which it was fabricated. The report of
these tests shall be designated the Laminate Qualification
Test Report and shall become part of the Manufacturer’s
Design Report.
10-602 RESPONSIBILITY FOR QUALIFICATION
Each Manufacturer shall be responsible for qualifying
the Procedure Specifications used in fabricating laminates
for Section VIII, Division 3 vessels. The fabrication process
is limited to circumferential filament-winding processes
Table 10-503-2
Acoustic Emission Evaluation Criteria
Criteria
First Loading
Subsequent Loadings
Emissions during pressure hold
Not greater than 5 events per minute beyond
2 min with an amplitude greater
than AM [Note (1)]
Not greater than 1 event per minute beyond
2 min with an amplitude greater than
AM [Note (1)]
Cumulative duration
Less than ND [Note (2)]
Less than ND/2 [Note (2)]
High amplitude hits
[Note (3)]
Less than or equal to 10
Less than or equal to 5
NOTES:
(1) AM = the decibel level defined in ASTM E1067, paragraph A2.5.
(2) ND = cumulative duration value defined in ASTM E1067, paragraph A2.5.
(3) High amplitude hits are those having amplitude equal to or greater than the Reference Amplitude Threshold defined in ASTM E1067,
paragraph A2.3.
162
ASME BPVC.X-2021
with a winding angle of no more than 10 deg from the
circumferential direction.
10-609 WEIGHT OF RESIN AND FIBER
The percentage of weight of resin and fiber in each
prototype laminate shall be determined by means of
an ignition test per ASTM D2584-68 (1985) or matrix
digestion per ASTM D3171 of a sample taken from an undamaged portion of the laminate used for the pressure
qualification test.
10-603 PRODUCTION WORK WITHOUT
QUALIFICATIONS
No fabrication shall be undertaken on vessels to be
stamped with the Certification Mark before a written
Procedure Specification has been prepared and qualified
by the Manufacturer. The Procedure Specification shall be
qualified by testing one or more prototype vessels as
defined in 10-614, 10-615, and 10-616. A single prototype
vessel shall meet the requirements of all tests and examinations specified in 10-600.
10-610 WEIGHT
Each prototype laminate shall be weighed within an
accuracy of ±1% and the results recorded on the Qualification Test Report.
10-611 VISUAL EXAMINATION
10-604 MAINTENANCE OF QUALIFICATION
RECORDS
Each prototype laminate shall be visually examined for
imperfections. Classification and acceptance level of
imperfections shall be per Table 10-503-1 or Table
10-503-1M.
The Manufacturer shall maintain records of procedures
employed in fabricating laminates. The Manufacturer shall
also maintain records of the tests and their results by
which his Procedure Specifications were qualified for
use in fabrication. The Manufacturer shall keep these
records on file for a minimum of 5 yr after production
of laminates has ceased.
10-612 BARCOL HARDNESS TESTS
(a) Each prototype laminate shall have a minimum of
three Barcol hardness determinations made along its
length on each of its four quadrants. When the laminate
length exceeds 5 ft (1.5 m), one additional set of determinations shall be made for each additional 5 ft (1.5
m) or portion thereof. A series of readings shall be
taken at each quadrant on smooth, correctly oriented
surfaces per ASTM D2583.
(b) The Barcol hardness values shall be recorded in the
Qualification Test Report and shall be used as reference
values in subsequent production tests.
10-605 ESSENTIAL VARIABLES
The Procedure Specification shall address each of the
essential variables listed in 10-402(c). The prototype
laminate(s) shall be fabricated within the tolerances
specified in the Procedure Specification.
10-606 NONESSENTIAL VARIABLES
Changes in variables other than those listed in 10-605
are considered nonessential. Changes may be made to
nonessential variables without requalification of the
procedure provided the Procedure Specification is
revised to show the changes.
10-613 ACOUSTIC EMISSION EXAMINATION
(a) Acoustic emission examination shall be conducted
in accordance with 10-503(a)(7). The acoustic emission
examination shall be carried out after all tests and examinations indicated in 10-608 through 10-612 have been
completed. All repairs that are required as a result of
the other tests and examinations shall be completed
prior to the acoustic emission examination.
(b) The acoustic emission examination report shall be
included in the Qualification Test Report and referenced
on Section VIII, Division 3, Form CRPV-2A.
10-607 ALTERNATIVE REQUIREMENTS
When a number of laminates are identical in every detail
of design, materials, and fabrication except for a difference
in shell length, the entire group or series may be qualified
by subjecting the longest and shortest length laminates to
these tests. To qualify for this alternative method, every
laminate in the series shall be identical in all essential variables.
10-614 CYCLIC PRESSURE QUALIFICATION TEST
One or more CRPV prototype vessels shall be subjected
to a cyclic pressure test as defined in Section VIII, Division
3, Part KF, KF-1212(b).
10-608 LAMINATE THICKNESS
The thickness of each prototype laminate shall be determined as required in 10-503(a)(4).
163
ASME BPVC.X-2021
10-615 HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE
QUALIFICATION TEST
10-618 CRPV PROTOTYPE VESSELS
(a) CRPV(s) subject to these tests and examinations
shall be designated as CRPV Prototype Vessels. CRPV
Prototype Vessels that are used to qualify or requalify
a Laminate Procedure Specification shall comply with
all requirements of this Appendix but shall not be
Code stamped.
(b) Each CRPV Prototype Vessel used for qualifying or
requalifying the Laminate Procedure Specification shall be
fabricated and examined in accordance with the requirements above, and the results shall be documented in a
separate Section VIII, Division 3, Form CRPV-2A and Qualification Test Report.
One or more CRPV prototype pressure vessels shall be
subjected to a hydrostatic pressure qualification test as
defined in Section VIII, Division 3, Part KF, KF-1212(b).
For vessels that are subjected to hydrostatic pressurization that is designed to provide an initial stress in the
metallic shell and laminate, the pressure shall be applied
before the hydrostatic test and acoustic emission examination.
10-616 LAMINATE DISBONDMENT TEST
The CRPV prototype vessel used for the hydrostatic
pressure qualification test shall be examined for holidays23 using Method B of ASTM G62 in areas not affected
by the burst with the following additions:
(a) After the specified testing, using abrasive cutting
wheels, radial cuts shall be made through the laminate
to the metallic shell extending at least 0.75 in.
(220 mm) from the center of the holiday. Using a levering
action, the laminate shall be chipped off, continuing until
the laminate demonstrates a definite resistance to the
levering action.
(b) The disbonded distance from the original holiday
center along the radial cuts shall be measured and averaged for each specimen.
(c) The acceptance criteria for laminate/primer/
metallic bond shall be the same as for the fusionbonded epoxy as specified in ASTM G62.
The CRPV laminate is tougher to cut/gouge with the tip
of a utility knife than coatings applied for corrosion
protection. Therefore, larger equipment and more
force are required to force/pry/chip pieces of the laminate.
10-700 INSPECTOR’S DUTIES
10-701 INSPECTOR’S DUTIES RELATIVE TO
QUALIFICATION TESTS OF PROTOTYPE
LAMINATE
The Inspector shall verify the cyclic pressure and
acoustic emission tests and witness the hydrostatic qualification pressure tests of the prototype laminate by means
of which the laminate procedure qualification procedure
is qualified.
10-702 INSPECTOR’S DUTIES RELATIVE TO
SPECIFIC LAMINATES
The Inspector has the duty of making all required
inspections, plus such other inspections he deems necessary to assure himself compliance with all requirements of
this Appendix.
10-703 INSPECTION OF MATERIAL
The Inspector shall assure himself that all materials
used in the fabrication of the laminate comply with the
requirements of this Appendix and the Design Specification.
10-617 REQUALIFICATION OF LAMINATE
PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION
(a) A qualified Laminate Procedure Specification shall
be requalified at least every 1,000 CRPVs produced per
Procedure Specification or at a minimum of once per
year before further use in manufacturing CRPVs. The
CRPV to be used for requalification shall be selected at
random by the Inspector.
(b) The laminate requalification shall follow the same
procedures as those outlined in the Laminate Procedure
Specification Qualification. The tests and examinations
required by this paragraph shall be designated as the Requalification Test Report, shall be documented on Section
VIII, Division 3, Form CRPV-2A, appended to the original
Qualification Test Report, and included in the Manufacturer’s Construction Records.
10-704 INSPECTION DURING FABRICATION
The Inspector shall make inspections, including making
measurements of each laminate at such stages of fabrication as are required, plus such other inspections as he
deems necessary to assure himself that fabrication is
in accordance with the requirements of this Appendix.
10-705 SPECIFIC INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS
(a) Check of Laminate Weight. The Inspector shall
verify that the weight of the combined fiber filaments
and resin conforms to requirements of 10-610.
(b) Check of Fabrication Procedures. The Inspector shall
verify that the speed of winding, uniformity in tension, and
adherence to the predetermined pattern of the qualified
Procedure Specification is followed (see 10-503).
164
ASME BPVC.X-2021
(c) Check of Cure. The Inspector shall satisfy himself by
suitable hardness tests, or by other means, the laminate
has been properly cured (see 10-612).
(d) Visual Inspection. The Inspector shall examine the
laminate for indentations, cracks, porosity, air bubbles,
exposed fibers, lack of resin, excess resin, thinned
areas, wrinkling, pattern deviations, and delaminations.
Results shall be documented as required in 10-503(b).
Acceptance criteria are defined in Table 10-503-1 or
Table 10-503-1M.
(e) The physical property tests of specimens of material, hydrostatic tests, cyclic pressure and hydrostatic
qualification pressure tests, and any permitted retests
shall be verified by the Inspector.
165
ASME BPVC.X-2021
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX AA
SUGGESTED METHODS OF PRELIMINARY DESIGN
FOR CLASS I VESSELS
ARTICLE AA-1
GENERAL
(b) Design procedures other than those given in this
Appendix may be used at the Fabricator’s option, as
there are no mandatory design rules for Class I vessels.
(c) The suggested methods in this Appendix are not
sufficient for the design of Class II vessels.
AA-100 SCOPE
(a) Section X provides two basic methods for qualifying
the design adequacy of a fiber‐reinforced plastic pressure
vessel. To assist the designer in establishing the thickness
of Class I vessels, the design of which must be qualified by
test of prototype vessels (see Article RT-2), this Appendix
gives suggested methods of arriving at a tentative thickness for principal pressure parts of Class I vessels. Additionally, this Appendix indicates the type of end closures
which have been found satisfactory when fabricated of or
attached to fiber‐reinforced plastic pressure vessels.
AA-101 CAUTIONS TO BE USED IN DESIGN
Since fiber‐reinforced plastic laminates may fail when
subjected to cyclic bending stresses, the designer is
cautioned to avoid design details in which bending
stresses will be developed by internal or external pressure
or other loadings.
166
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE AA-2
SHELLS OF REVOLUTION UNDER INTERNAL PRESSURE
AA-200 GENERAL
The tentative thicknesses and design pressures of cylindrical and spherical shells under internal pressure may
be estimated by means of the equations given in
Article AA-2.
t =
tα =
AA-200.1 Nomenclature. The symbols used in
Article AA-2 are defined as follows:
t α′ =
D = inside diameter of a head skirt or inside length of
the major axis of an ellipsoidal head, in. (mm)
Nα = required number of layers of laminates in which
the filaments are oriented in the direction of the
helix angle α
NH = required number of layers of laminates in which
the filaments are oriented in the hoop direction
P = design pressure, psi (kPa)
R = inside radius of cylinder or sphere, or inside spherical or crown radius of a hemispherical head
S = tentative design stress in a circumferential direction in the wall of a bag‐molded or centrifugally
cast cylinder or sphere. May be approximated by
dividing the stress at the qualification pressure of a
similarly constructed pressure vessel by 6.
Sα = allowable design stress of the helix‐oriented filaments, psi (kPa) [normally less than the allowable
design stress for hoop‐oriented filaments due to
unavoidable crossovers, discontinuities, etc.; with
400,000 psi (2 760 MPa) E‐glass filaments, using
the one‐sixth design factor required by this
Section and applying an efficiency of 70%, Sα
would be 47,000 psi (324 MPa)]. For vessels fabricated per RG-404.2 that are intended for internal
pressure only, a one-fifth design factor shall be
used as required by RT-223.5. For example,
using a typical value for E-glass filaments of
400,000 psi (2 760 MPa), the allowable design
stress would be 56,000 psi (386 MPa).
SH = allowable design stress in hoop‐oriented filaments, psi (kPa) [with 400,000 psi (2 760 MPa)
E‐glass filaments, using the one‐sixth design
factor required by this Section and applying an
efficiency of 90%, SH would be 60,000 psi (410
MPa)]. For vessels fabricated per RG-404.2 that
are intended for internal pressure only, a onefifth design factor shall be used as required by
tH =
t H′ =
Vα =
α =
RT-223.5. For example, using a typical value for Eglass filaments of 400,000 psi (2,760 MPa), the
allowable design stress would be 72,000 psi
(496 MPa).
required thickness, in. (mm)
thickness of the required number of layers of laminates in which the filaments are oriented in the
plus and minus α direction, in. (mm)
equivalent thickness of the helix‐oriented filaments per unit of width of a layer of bands at
plus and minus α, in. (mm)
thickness of the required number of layers of laminates in the hoop direction, in. (mm)
equivalent thickness of the hoop‐oriented filaments per unit of width of a layer composed of
two band thicknesses, in. (mm) [for a typical
band density of 6 strands of 225 yield24 fiberglass
rovings per in., tH′ = 2 × 1.125 × 6∕225 = 0.06 in. (1.5
mm) at 70% glass content using 1.2 sp gr resin]
volume fraction of helix‐oriented filaments. [This
may range from about 0.45 for low (small) helix
angles wound at low tension with high viscosity
resin on large diameter mandrels to about 0.65 for
high (e.g., above 25 deg) helix angles wound at high
tension with low viscosity resin on small diameter
mandrels.]
filament helix angle for filament‐wound vessels,
measured relative to a line on the shell surface
parallel to the axial center line, deg
AA-201 BAG‐MOLDED, CENTRIFUGALLY CAST,
AND CONTACT‐MOLDED SHELLS
AA-201.1 Cylindrical Shells. The thicknesses of bag‐
molded, centrifugally cast, and contact‐molded cylindrical
shells may be estimated by the following equations:25
PR
St
t =
or P =
S
R
AA-201.2 Spherical Shells. The thicknesses of bag‐
molded, centrifugally cast, and contact‐molded spherical
shells may be estimated by the following equations:25
PR
2St
t =
or P =
2S
R
167
ASME BPVC.X-2021
composites, highly stressed in tension. For more rigorous
analyses, refer to:
(a) “Structural Behavior of Composite Materials,” 1964 NASA
Contract 7‐215, S. Tsai, available from the Office of Technical
Services, Dept. of Commerce, Washington, D.C. 20230.
(b) Journal of Composite Materials, Technical Publishing Co.,
Stamford, CT 06902.
AA-202 FILAMENT‐WOUND SHELLS
AA-202.1 Cylindrical Shells. The thicknesses of filament‐wound cylindrical shells may be estimated by the
following equations:
t = tH + t
where
tH =
NH =
AA-210 DIE‐FORMED HEADS, PRESSURE ON
CONCAVE SIDE
NH × tH
V
P × R ijj
j1
tH × SH jk
tan 2
2
The thickness at the thinnest point of an ellipsoidal or
hemispherical head under pressure on the concave side
(plus heads) may be estimated by the equations in
AA-210.1 or AA-210.2.
yz
zz
z
{
AA-210.1 Ellipsoidal Heads. The thickness and the
design pressure of a 11∕2:1 ratio head may be estimated
by the following equations:25
PR
St
t =
or P =
S
R
and
t
N
=
=
N × t
V
AA-210.2 Hemispherical Heads. The thickness and the
design pressure of a hemispherical head, in which t does
not exceed 0.356R or P does not exceed 0.665S, may be
estimated by the following equations:25
PR
2St
t =
or P =
2S
R
P × R
2 × t
× S cos2
NOTE: The above equations are based on the netting analysis
which assumes that the resin carries no load. This is a workably
correct assumption of the actual condition in filament‐wound
168
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE AA-3
SHELLS OF REVOLUTION UNDER EXTERNAL PRESSURE
(b) the fact that the material is not isotropic;
(c) the orientation of filaments in filament‐wound
vessels;
(d) lack of uniformity in centrifugal castings and the
different distributions and concentrations of glass
fibers attainable in centrifugal castings, some of which
are not suitable for external pressure.
NOTE: Jacketed vessels are excluded from this Section.
AA-300 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
No firm rules or equations can be given for vessels
under external pressure. However, the following must
be considered in the design of the vessel:
(a) the low modulus of elasticity of the material;
169
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE AA-4
REINFORCEMENT OF OPENINGS IN VESSELS
A1 = (t
AA-400 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
tr )d
where
(a) All openings in fiber‐reinforced plastic pressure
vessels should have additional reinforcement in the
form of mats, pads, etc.
(b) Opening reinforcement should be provided in
amount and distribution such that the area requirements
for adequate reinforcement are satisfied for all planes
through the center of the opening and normal to the
vessel surface. For a circular opening in a cylindrical
shell, the plane containing the axis of the shell is the
plane of greatest loading due to pressure.
A1 = area in excess thickness in the vessel wall available
for reinforcement, in.2 (mm2)
d = diameter of the opening in the reinforced plastic
wall, in. (mm)
t = actual thickness of the reinforced plastic wall, in.
(mm)
tr = required thickness of shell, in. (mm)
AA-414 ADJUSTMENT FOR LOWER STRENGTH OR
LOWER MODULUS REINFORCEMENT
MATERIAL
AA-410 REINFORCEMENT FOR INTERNAL
PRESSURE
Suggested methods of predetermining the required reinforcement are given in AA-411 through AA-415.
(a) Material used for reinforcement, if of lower
strength than the material in the vessel wall, shall
have its area increased in inverse proportion to the
ratio of the minimum strength values of the two materials
to compensate for its lower strength. The strain should be
compatible with the material having the lower modulus of
elasticity.
(b) Where reinforcement material is attached to the
vessel wall by an adhesive bonding rather than being
cured integral with the vessel, the adhesive‐bonded
area shall be sufficient to develop the full tensile strength
of the element of reinforcement.
AA-411 REQUIRED CROSS‐SECTIONAL AREA OF
REINFORCEMENT
The total cross‐sectional area of reinforcement A
required in any given plane for a vessel under internal
pressure should be not less than
A = d × tr
where
d = diameter in the given plane of the opening in the
reinforced plastic structure
tr = estimated thickness of a seamless shell or head
computed in accordance with Article AA-2
AA-415 REINFORCEMENT OF MULTIPLE
OPENINGS
(a) When two adjacent openings are spaced less than
two times their average diameter, so that their limits of
reinforcement overlap, the two openings should be reinforced as required by RD-510 with a combined reinforcement that has a strength equal to the combined strength of
the reinforcement that would be required for the separate
openings. No portion of the cross section should be considered as applying to more than one opening or be evaluated
more than once in the combined area.
(b) Any change in which the size of openings is
increased or in which the spacing of openings is decreased
should be considered a change in the design of the vessel,
which, so modified, should be requalified.
AA-412 LIMITS OF REINFORCEMENT
The limits of wall thickness reinforcement, measured
parallel to the vessel wall, should be at a distance on
each side of the axis of the opening equal to the diameter
of the opening in the reinforced plastic structure.
AA-413 AVAILABLE REINFORCEMENT IN WALL
Extra thickness in the vessel wall over and above the
thickness estimated to be required for a shell in accordance with Article AA-2 may be considered as reinforcement. The area in the vessel wall available as
reinforcement is given by the equation
170
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE AA-5
ATTACHMENTS AND SUPPORTS
AA-500 GENERAL
AA-522 SUPPORTS FOR HORIZONTAL VESSELS
(a) Attachments and supports invariably impose localized stresses in tension, torsion, shear, bending, or
compression at their point or line of contact with the
shell of a pressure vessel.
(b) Because of the low modulus of elasticity and
shearing strengths of fiber–resin structures, they are especially vulnerable to localized compressive flexural buckling, torsion, and shear stresses.
(c) Hence, the designer should use special care to avoid
as much as possible any unnecessary attachments and to
ensure that supports apply the least possible restraint to
the pressure vessel (see Article RD-9).
(a) When horizontal vessels must be supported by a
saddle‐type support (see Figure AA-522.1), the vessel
wall thickness may be increased at the point of
contact, blending this thicker section smoothly and gradually into the more highly stressed adjacent area. This
increased thickness should extend uniformly around
the complete circumference. The vessel should preferably
be isolated from rigid supporting saddles by a very low
modulus‐of‐elasticity cushioning material. If two or more
such saddles are required for a long vessel, special provision for avoiding restraint of sliding due to longitudinal
expansion and contraction may be required at all except
one of the supports.
(b) Increasing the bearing area of the supports so that
the weight per square foot imposed by the vessel on the
supports is low may eliminate the need to reinforce the
vessel wall.
AA-510 ATTACHMENTS
The practice of using a pressure vessel as a structural
member to support related auxiliary equipment, piping,
etc., should be avoided.
AA-523 VERTICAL VESSELS SUPPORTED BY A
RING OR FLANGE
AA-511 ATTACHMENTS REQUIRING
REINFORCEMENT
When a ring‐ or flange‐type support is used to support a
vertical vessel, the vessel wall at the base of the ring or
flange should be blended in gradually with a smooth taper
to a thickened section and generous fillet radius at the
transition to the flange section itself (see Figure
AA-523.1).
Where a nozzle or the vessel wall must be used for
attachments, local reinforcement should be provided to
distribute the consequent applied stresses to provide
the required safety. This reinforcement should be such
as to minimize the total resulting stress. The extra material
of the reinforcement should be smoothly blended into the
surrounding area.
AA-524 VESSELS SUPPORTED BY METAL
ATTACHMENT IN VESSEL END
AA-520 SUPPORTS
Vessels may often be supported by metal attachments
embedded in a thickened material at the axial center line of
the heads (see Figures AA-524.1 and AA-524.2).
Exact rules for the design of supports are not given here
due to the very large range of essential variables that must
be considered. Details should conform to good structural
practice and be carefully analyzed for stresses.
AA-525 PROVISION FOR EXTERNAL FORCES
AA-521 AVOIDANCE OF DIRECT CONTACT WITH
METAL SUPPORTS
Due consideration must be given to wind, earthquake,
snow, and any other external forces when designing
supports.
Direct contact of metal supports with highly stressed
areas of a fiber‐reinforced plastic pressure vessel
should be avoided, as dangerously high, local, flexural,
and shearing stresses may be generated in the wall of
the vessel when it expands or contracts upon changes
in its pressure or temperature.
171
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Figure AA-522.1
Saddle‐Type Supports
Figure AA-523.1
Ring or Flange Support
172
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Figure AA-524.1
Metal Attachment in Vessel End
Figure AA-524.2
Metal Attachments in Thickened Ends
173
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ð21Þ
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX AB
INSTALLATION AND OPERATION
from pressure relief valves, which can only be general
in nature because the Design Engineer must fit the
arrangement and proportions of such a system to the particular requirements of the operation of the equipment
involved.
AB-100 INTRODUCTION
(a) The rules in this Appendix are for general information only, because they pertain to the installation and
operation of pressure vessels, which are the prerogative
and responsibility of the law enforcement authorities in
those states and municipalities which have made provision for the enforcement of Section X.
(b) It is permissible to use any deviations suggested
herein from provisions in the mandatory parts of this
Section when granted by the authority having legal jurisdiction over the installation of pressure vessels.
AB-104 STOP VALVES BETWEEN PRESSURE
RELIEF DEVICE AND VESSEL
(a) A vessel, in which pressure can be generated
because of service conditions, may have a full‐area
stop valve between it and its pressure relief device for
inspection and repair purposes only. When such a stop
valve is provided, it should be so arranged that it can
be locked or sealed open, and it should not be closed
except by an authorized person who should remain
stationed there during that period of the vessel’s operation within which the valve remains closed, and who
should again lock or seal the stop valve in the open position before leaving the station.
(b) A vessel or system [see ROP-100(d)] for which the
pressure originates from an outside source exclusively
may have individual pressure relief devices on each
vessel, or connected to any point on the connecting
piping, or on any one of the vessels to be protected.
Under such an arrangement, there may be a stop valve
between any vessel and the pressure relief devices,
and this stop valve need not be locked open, provided
it also closes off that vessel from the source of pressure.
AB-101 ACCESS FOR INSPECTION
(a) Vessels subject to external degradation (see
RD-140) should be so installed that there is sufficient
access to all parts of the exterior to permit proper inspection of the exterior, unless adequate protection against
degradation is provided or unless the vessel is of such
size and is so connected that it may be readily
removed from its permanent location for inspection.
(b) Vessels having manholes, handholes, or cover
plates to permit inspection of the interior should be so
installed that these openings are accessible.
(c) In vertical cylindrical vessels subject to chemical
degradation from their contents, the bottom head, if
dished, should preferably be concave to pressure to
ensure complete drainage.
AB-102 MARKING ON THE VESSEL
AB-105 STOP VALVES ON THE DISCHARGE SIDE
OF A PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICE
The marking required by the Code should be so located
that it will be accessible after installation, and when
installed should not be covered with insulation or
other material that is not readily removable (see
Article RS-1).
A full‐area stop valve may be placed on the discharge
side of a pressure relief device [see ROP-170(d)] when its
discharge is connected to a common header with other
discharge lines from other pressure relief devices on
nearby vessels that are in operation, so that this stop
valve when closed will prevent a discharge from any
connected operating vessels from backing up beyond
the valve so closed. Such a stop valve should be so
arranged that it can be locked or sealed in either the
open or closed position, and it should be locked or
sealed in either position only by an authorized person.
When it is to be closed while the vessel is in operation,
an authorized person should be present, and he should
remain stationed there; he should again lock or seal
AB-103 PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICES
The general provisions for the installation of pressure
relief devices are fully covered in Part ROP. The following
paragraphs contain details in arrangement of stop valves
for shutoff control of pressure relief devices that are sometimes necessary for the continuous operation of processing equipment of such a complex nature that the
shutdown of any part of it is not feasible. There are
also rules in regard to the design of discharge piping
174
ASME BPVC.X-2021
the stop valve in the open position before leaving the
station. Under no condition should this valve be closed
while the vessel is in operation, except when a stop
valve on the inlet side of the pressure relief device is
installed and is first closed.
(c) All discharge lines should be run as direct as is practicable to the point of final release for disposal. For the
longer lines, due consideration should be given to the
advantage of long‐radius elbows, avoidance of close‐up
fittings, and the minimizing of excessive line strains by
expansion joints and well known means of support to
minimize line‐sway and vibration under operating conditions.
AB-106 DISCHARGE LINES FROM PRESSURE
RELIEF DEVICES
NOTE: It is recognized that no simple rule can be applied generally to fit the many installation requirements, which vary from
simple short lines that discharge directly into the atmosphere to
the extensive manifolded discharge piping systems where the
quantity and rate of the product to be disposed of requires
piping to a distant safe place.
(a) Where it is feasible, the use of a short discharge pipe
or vertical riser, connected through long‐radius elbows
from each individual device, blowing directly to the atmosphere, is recommended. Such discharge pipes should be
at least of the same size as the pressure relief valve outlet.
Where the nature of the discharge permits, telescopic
(sometimes called “broken”) discharge lines, whereby
condensed vapor in the discharge line, or rain, is collected
in a drip pan and piped to a drain, are recommended.26
(b) When discharge lines are long, or where outlets of
two or more pressure relief valves having set pressures
within a comparable range are connected into a common
line, the effect of the back pressure that may be developed
therein when certain pressure relief valves operate must
be considered [see ROP-170(e)]. The sizing of any section
of a common‐discharge header downstream from each of
the two or more pressure relief valves that may reasonably be expected to discharge simultaneously should be
based on the total of their outlet areas, with due allowance
for the pressure drop in all downstream sections. Use of
specially designed valves suitable for use on high or variable back‐pressure service should be considered.
AB-107 GENERAL ADVISORY INFORMATION ON
THE CHARACTERISTICS OF PRESSURE
RELIEF VALVES DISCHARGING INTO A
COMMON HEADER
Because of the wide variety of types and kinds of pressure relief valves, it is not considered advisable to attempt
a description in this Appendix of the effects produced by
discharging them into a common header. Several different
types of pressure relief valves may conceivably be
connected to the same discharge header, and the effect
of back pressure on each type may be radically different.
Data compiled by the Manufacturers of each type of pressure relief valve used should be consulted for information
relative to its performance under the conditions anticipated.
175
ASME BPVC.X-2021
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX AC
DISCONTINUITY STRESSES FOR CLASS II, METHOD B VESSELS
ARTICLE AC-1
EXAMPLES OF DISCONTINUITY STRESSES
thickness t = 6 in.
Material properties assumed:
E = 106 psi
ν = 0.3
AC-100 EXAMPLE ILLUSTRATING THE
APPLICATION OF DISCONTINUITY
ANALYSIS
Given
A pressure vessel as shown in Figures AC-100.1 and
AC-100.2. It is constructed of all mat RTP and subjected
to an internal pressure of 15 psi at 300°F. The vessel
consists of:
(a) a hemispherical head
inside radius R = 30 in.
thickness t = 0.5 in.
(b) a cylindrical shell
inside radius R = 30 in.
thickness t = 0.5 in.
length L = 10 in.
(c) a flat head
outside radius R = 30.5 in.
Required
To calculate the discontinuity stresses at the locations of
structural discontinuity.
Solution
Step 1. Separate the vessel at locations of discontinuity
into individual elements.
Step 2. Calculate the influence coefficients.
(a) Element A, Hemispherical Head:
From Article AC-3, the lateral displacement and rotation at juncture O due to edge loads Qo and Mo are given as:
wAO
Figure AC-100.1
= AO =
AO
=
2R m
2 2
Qo +
M
Et
Et o
2 2
4 3
Qo +
M
Et
R mEt o
NOTE: For this case of a hemispherical shell, the lateral force H
and the radial force Q are equal. Similarly, the lateral displacement δ and the radial displacement w are equal.
Substituting the given dimensions and material properties gives:
wAO = AO =
AO =
0.000121 Q o + 0.000 Mo
0.0004 Q o + 0.0002644 Mo
(b) Element B, Cylindrical Shell:
From Article AC-2, AC-230, the radial displacements
and rotations at the edges O and L due to edge loadings Qo,
Mo, QL, and ML are given as:27
176
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Figure AC-100.2
WBO = 1 2 3D Q o +
(
)
(1
2 2 D Mo
)
CL =
)
wBL = 1 2 3D Q L +
(
)
(1
2 2D ML
)
Substituting given dimensions and material properties gives:
4
wo =
4
BO = (3.9984962 Q o + 2.6431369 Mo) × 10
WBL = (12.097725 Q L + 3.9984962 ML) × 10
2F3
ER2(t
R )3
ML
Step 3. Calculate the edge deformations due to the
internal pressure.
(a) Element A, Hemispherical Shell (See Figure
AC-100.3):
The lateral displacement of point O, at the midsurface
(r = Rm) of a hemispherical shell subjected to internal pressure is given by the expression:
)
wBO = (12.097725 Q o + 3.9984962 Mo) × 10
QL
CL = 0.0004356 Q L + 0.0017424 ML
2
BL = 1 2 D Q L + (1 2 D)ML
(
ER(t
R )2
Substituting given dimensions and material properties gives:
wCL =
0.0001452 Q L + 0.0004356 ML
2
BO = 1 2 D Q o + (1 2 D)Mo
(
F3
2
o = pR (1
) 2Et
Substituting the dimensions, pressure, and material
properties gives:
wAO(pressure) = 0.009767625 in.
4
There is no rotation resulting from the internal pressure and membrane forces as shown.
BL = (3.9984962 Q L + 2.6431369 ML) × 10
4
AO(pressure) = 0
(b) Element B, Cylindrical Shell (see Figure AC-100.4):
The radial displacement of the midsurface of a closed
end cylindrical shell subjected to internal pressure is given
by the expression:
(c) Element C, Flat Head:
From Article AC-4, AC-431.1(b), the radial displacement and rotation at juncture L due to edge loadings QL
and ML are given as:
2F3
F3
wCL =
QL +
ML
3E(t R )
ER(t R )2
i
wBO = jjj1
k
yz RR m
zz p
2 { Et
Substituting the dimensions, pressure, and material
properties gives:
177
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Figure AC-100.3
Figure AC-100.4
wBO(pressure) = wBL(pressure) = 0.02314125 in.
wCL(pressure) =
There is no rotation resulting from internal pressure
and the membrane forces shown.
BO(pressure) =
6.0190092 × 10
3 in.
Step 4. Calculate the free deformations of the edges of
each element caused by temperature distributions.
In this example all parts of the vessel are at the same
temperature and are of the same material; therefore,
temperature deformations need not be considered.
Step 5. Equate the total lateral displacements and rotations of adjacent elements at each juncture.
(a) Juncture O
wAO(total) = wBO(total)
BL(pressure) = 0
(c) Element C, Flat Head (See Figure AC-100.5):
In Article AC-4, AC-431.1, the rotation of a flat head at
point L due to internal pressure is given by AC-431.1(a):
F1
=
p
E(t R )3
(
Substituting the dimensions, pressure, and material
properties gives:
CL(pressure) = 2.006336 × 10
t
CL =
2
12.097725 Q o + 3.9984962 Mo + 97.67625)
× 10 4 = (12.097725 Q o + 3.9984962 Mo
3 rad
+ 231.4125) × 10 4
The radial displacement at juncture L is given by
AC-431.1(b):
178
(1)
ASME BPVC.X-2021
3.9634062 Q L + 2.6548335 ML = 20.063361
Figure AC-100.5
(8)
Step 6. Solve the above equations for Qo, Mo, QL, and ML.
The results are:
Qo =
5.52733 lb in.
Mo = 0
QL =
50.98251 lb in.
ML = 83.669186 in.-lb/in.
NOTE: A negative sign indicates that the actual direction of the
loading is opposite to that chosen in Step 1.
Step 7. Compute the discontinuity stresses at each juncture due to the redundants Qo, Mo, QL, and ML.
To illustrate the procedure, these stresses will be
computed in the cylindrical shell (element B) at both junctures O and L.
From AC-240:
AO(total) = BO(total)
3.9984962 Q o + 2.6431369 Mo) × 10 4
(
=
(
3.9984962 Q o
)
2.6431369 Mo × 10
(2)
(x) = ± 6M(x) t 2
4
(b) Juncture L
wBL(total) = wCL(total)
t (x) = Ew(x) (R + t
(12.097725 Q L + 3.9984962 ML + 231.4125)
× 10 4 = (
0.014036001 Q L + 0.03509 ML
)
60.90082 × 10
(3)
r = 0
4
(a) Juncture O. At juncture O, M(x) = Mo and w(x) = wo.
NOTE: When computing σt(x) only the radial displacement due to
the redundant shear forces and moments should be used. The
free displacements from Steps 3 and 4 should not be included.
BL(total) = CL(total)
4
(3.9984962 Q L + 2.6431369 ML) × 10
(
= 0.03509 Q L
2) ± 6vM(x) t 2
(4)
wBO = (12.097725 Q o + 3.9984962 Mo) × 10 4
0.01169668 ML + 20.063361 × 10 4
)
=
Combining like terms and multiplying through by 104
results in the following system of simultaneous equations
which express compatibility at the junctures:
(5)
24.19545 Q o =
133.73625
0.006686812 in.
EwBO =
6686.81 lb in.
Mo = 0
(6)
5.2862738 Mo = 0
12.238085 Q L + 3.9634062 ML =
(1) Inside surface
292.31332
= 6(0) (0.5)2 = 0
(7)
179
ASME BPVC.X-2021
6, 686.81
+ 6(0.3)(0) (0.5)2 =
30.25
t =
(d) The discontinuity stresses in the flat head may be
computed using the expressions given in AC-431.2.
Step 8. Compute the total stresses. The total stresses
may be computed in any element at any juncture by
combining the stresses due to the redundant shear
forces and moments, as computed in Step 7, with the
stresses resulting from all other loadings. In this case
the stresses in the cylindrical shell, hemispherical shell,
and flat head due to internal pressure may be computed
by the expressions given in AC-211, AC-321, and AC-431.2,
respectively. To illustrate the procedure, the total stresses
in the cylindrical shell at junctures O and L will be
computed.
The stresses in the cylindrical shell due to internal pressure may be computed from the expressions given in
AC-211.
221.05 psi
r = 0
(2) Outside surface
6(0) (0.5)2 = 0
=
6, 686.81
30.25
t =
6(0.3)(0) (0.5)2 =
221.05 psi
r = 0
= pR 2t
(b) Juncture L. At juncture L, M(x) = ML and w(x) = wL.
wBL
= (12.097725 Q L + 3.9984962 ML) × 10
=
4
t = pR
0.028222
EwBL =
28,222.1 lb in.
r = 0
ML = 83.669186 in.-lb/in.
(a) Juncture O
(1) Inside surface
(1) Inside surface
=
t
R = 30.25 in.
6(83.669186)
= 2,008.1 psi
2
(0.5)
p = 15 psig
t =
6(0.3)(83.6692)
28,222.1
+
=
30.25
(0.5)2
330.54 psi
= 453.8 psi
t = 907.5 psi
r = 0
(2) Outside surface
=
t =
6(83.6692)
2
(0.5)
=
r = 0
2,008.1 psi
The stresses due to the redundant shear forces and
moments were computed in Step 7 as:
6(0.3)(83.6692)
28,222.1
+
=
30.25
(0.5)2
= 0
2,941.02 psi
t =
221.05 psi
r = 0
r = 0
NOTE: E = 106 psi.
(c) The discontinuity stresses in the hemispherical
shell may be computed by using the expressions given
in AC-331 and AC-333.
The total stresses are:
= 453.8 + 0 = 453.8 psi
180
ASME BPVC.X-2021
t = 907.5
221.05 = 686 psi
106 2.8222 × 10 2
(
t =
6(0.3)(83.6692)
(0.25)2
r = 0
(2) Outside surface
From pressure:
The total stresses are:
= 453.8 + 2,008 = 2,462 psi
=
907.5 + 1,476 = 2,383.5 psi
t
r = 0
= 453.8 psi
t = 907.5 psi
(2) Outside surface
The stresses due to the internal pressure are the
same as at juncture O.
r = 0
= 453.8 psi
The stresses due to the redundant shear forces and
moments were computed as:
= 0
t = 907.5 psi
r = 0
221.05 psi
The stresses due to the redundant shear forces and
moments are:
r = 0
6(83.669)
=
The total stresses are:
= 453.8 psi
t = 907.5
+
30.25
= 1,476 psi
r = 0
t =
)
(0.5)2
=
106 2.8222 × 10 2
221.05 = 686 psi
t
=
=
r = 0
(b) Juncture L
(1) Inside surface
The stresses due to the internal pressure are the
same as at juncture O.
= 453.8 psi
(
)
2,008 psi
6(0.3)(83.669)
(0.25)2
30.25
3,342.6 psi
r = 0
The total stresses are:
= 453.8
t = 907.5
t = 907.5 psi
2,008 =
3,342.6 =
1.554 psi
2,435.1 psi
r = 0
r = 0
The stresses due to the redundant shear forces and
moments are:
Step 9. When evaluating the stresses in accordance
with RD-1188.2, the stress intensities at each location
should be computed from the total principal stresses
determined in Step 8.
=
6(83.669)
(0.5)2
= 2,008 psi
181
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE AC-2
EXAMPLES OF STRESS ANALYSIS OF CYLINDRICAL SHELLS
x = axial distance measured from the reference
end of cylinder, in.
Y = ratio of outside radius to inside radius
Z = ratio of outside radius to an intermediate
radius
1
β = [3(1 − ν2)/(R + t/2)2t2] ∕4, in.−1
θ = rotation of cylinder wall, rad
x = dw/dx
ν = Poisson’s ratio
σr = radial stress component, psi
σt = tangential (circumferential) stress component, psi
σℓ = longitudinal (meridional) stress component,
psi
AC-200 SIGN CONVENTION AND
NOMENCLATURE
The symbols and sign convention (see Figure AC-200)
adopted in this Appendix for the analysis of cylindrical
shells are defined as follows:
B11
x
B12
x
B22
x
D
E
f1(βx)
f2(βx)
f3(βx)
f4(βx)
F11(βx)
F12(βx)
F13(βx)
F14(βx)
G11
x
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
G12
x
G22
x
=
=
=
=
L =
M =
o =
p =
Q =
R
S
t
w
=
=
=
=
B11(βL)
(sinh 2βL − sin 2βL) /2(sinh2 βL − sin2 βL)
B12(βL)
(cosh 2βL − cos 2βL) /2(sinh2 βL − sin2 βL)
B22(βL)
(sinh 2βL + sin 2βL)/(sinh2 βL − sin2 βL)
Et3/12 (1 − ν2), lb-in.
modulus of elasticity, psi
e−βx cos βx
e−βx (cos βx − sin βx)
e−βx (cos βx + sin βx)
e−βx sin βx
(cosh βx sin βx − sinh βx cos βx)/2
sinh βx sin βx
(cosh βx sin βx + sinh βx cos βx)/2
cosh βx cos βx
G11(βL)
−(cosh βL sin βL − sinh βL cos βL)/(sinh2 βL −
sin2 βL)
G12(βL)
−2 sinh βL sin βL/(sinh2 βL − sin2 βL)
G22(βL)
−2 (cosh βL sin βL + sinh βL cos βL)/
(sinh2 βL − sin2 βL)
length of cylinder, in.; subscript to denote
evaluation of a quantity at end of cylinder
removed from reference end
longitudinal bending moment per unit length
of circumference, in.-lb/in.
subscript to denote evaluation of a quantity at
reference end of cylinder, x = 0
internal pressure, psi
radial shearing forces per unit length of
circumference, lb/in.
inside radius, in.
stress intensity, psi
thickness of cylinder, in.
radial displacement of cylinder wall, in.
Figure AC-200
Symbols and Sign Convention
GENERAL NOTE: The sign convention arbitrarily chosen for the
analysis of cylindrical shells in this Appendix is as indicated in
this figure. Positive directions assumed for pertinent quantities
are indicated.
182
ASME BPVC.X-2021
AC-210 PRINCIPAL STRESSES AND STRESS
INTENSITIES DUE TO INTERNAL
PRESSURE
AC-230 DISPLACEMENTS, BENDING
MOMENTS, AND SHEARING FORCES
IN TERMS OF CONDITIONS AT
REFERENCE EDGE, x = 0
The equations for principal stresses and stress intensities presented in this paragraph include the loading
effects of internal pressure only and exclude the effects
of all structural discontinuities.
(a) The radial displacement w(x), the angular displacement or rotation θ(x), the bending moments M(x), and the
radial shearing forces Q(x)at any axial location of the cylinder are given by the following equations in terms of wo,
θo, Mo, and Qo:
AC-211 PRINCIPAL STRESSES
The principal stresses developed at any point in the wall
of a cylindrical shell due to internal pressure are given by
the equations:
1 =
(
t = p 1 + Z
2 =
3 =
2
)
= p (Y 2
r = p(1
(Y 2
1)
(1)
1)
(Q o 2 3D)F11( x)
+ (Mo 2 2D)F12( x)
+(o
(2)
1)
Z 2) (Y 2
w(x) =
(x )
=
(3)
(1)
)F13( x) + woF14( x)
(Q o 2 3D)F12( x)
+ 2(Mo 2 2D)F13( x)
+(o
)F14( x)
(2)
2woF11( x)
AC-212 STRESS INTENSITIES
M(x) 2 2D =
(a) The general primary membrane stress intensity
developed across the thickness of a cylindrical shell
due to internal pressure is given by the equation:
pR
p
(1)
S =
+
t
2
(o
(b) The maximum value of the primary‐plus‐secondary
stress intensity developed at any point across the thickness of a cylindrical shell due to internal pressure occurs at
the inside surface and is given by the equation:
S = 2pY 2 (Y 2
1)
(Q o 2 3D)F13( x)
+ (Mo 2 2D)F14( x)
Q (x) 2 3D =
)F11( x)
woF12( x)
2 3D F14( x)
(Q o
)
2 Mo 2 2D F11( x)
(
(o
(2)
(3)
)
)F12( x)
(4)
2woF13( x)
(b) In the case of cylinders of sufficient length, the equations in (a) above reduce to those given below. These equations may be used for cylinders characterized by lengths
not less than 3/β. The combined effects of loadings at the
two edges may be evaluated by applying the equations to
the loadings at each edge, separately, and superposing the
results.
(c) Note that in evaluating the general primary
membrane stress intensity, the average value of the
radial stress has been taken as (−p/2). This has been
done to obtain a result consistent with burst pressure
analyses. On the other hand, the radial stress value
used in (b) is (−p), the value at the inner surface, since
the purpose of that quantity is to control local behavior.
w(x) =
AC-220 BENDING ANALYSIS FOR UNIFORMLY
DISTRIBUTED EDGE LOADS
The equations in this paragraph describe the behavior
of a cylindrical shell when subjected to the action of
bending moments M, in.-lb/in. of circumference, and
radial shearing forces Q, lb/in. of circumference, uniformly
distributed at the edges and acting at the mean radius of
the shell. The behavior of the shell due to all other loadings
must be evaluated independently and combined by superposition.
(x )
183
=
(Q o 2 3D)f1 ( x)
+ (Mo 2 2D)f2 ( x)
(Q o 2 3D)f3 ( x)
2(Mo 2 2D)f1 ( x)
(1)
(2)
ASME BPVC.X-2021
M(x) 2 2D =
Q (x) 2 3D =
(Q o 2 3D)f4 ( x)
+ (Mo 2 2D)f3 ( x)
(3)
(Q o 2 3D)f2 ( x)
2(Mo 2 2D)f4 ( x)
(4)
(2) In the case of cylindrical shells characterized by
lengths not less than 3/β, the influence functions, B’s and
G’s, are sufficiently close to the limiting values that the
limiting values may be used in the equations, (a)
above, without significant error.
(c) In the case of sufficiently short cylinders, the influence functions, B’s and G’s, appearing in the equations, (a)
above, are, to a first approximation, given by the following
expressions:
B11 = 2
AC-231 EDGE DISPLACEMENTS AND ROTATIONS
IN TERMS OF EDGE LOADS
(a) The radial displacements wo and wL and rotations θo
and −θL developed at the edges of a cylindrical shell
sustaining the action of edge loads Qo, Mo, QL, and ML
are given by the following equations:
wo =
L=
B12 = 3 ( L)2
B22 = 6 ( L)3
2
(B11 2 D)Q o + (B12 2 D)Mo
+ (G11 2 3D)Q L + (G12 2 2D)ML
o =
wL =
3
(B12 2 2D)Q o +
+ (G12 2 2D)Q L
(B22 2 D)Mo
L
(1)
G11 =
1
L
G12 =
3 ( L)2
G 22 =
6 ( L)3
(2)
+ (G 22 2 D)ML
(G11 2 3D)Q o + (G12 2 2D)Mo
+ (B11 2 3D)Q L + (B12 2 2D)ML
(3)
(G12 2 2D)Q o +
+ (B12 2 2D)Q L
(4)
(G22 2 D)Mo
Introducing these expressions for the influence functions, B’s and G’s, into the equations, (a) above, yields
expressions identical to those obtained by the application
of ring theory. Accordingly, the resultant expressions are
subject to all of the limitations inherent in the ring theory,
including the limitations due to the assumption that the
entire cross‐sectional area of the ring, t × L, rotates about
its centroid without distortion. Nevertheless, in the
analysis of very short cylindrical shells characterized
by lengths not greater than 0.5/β, the expressions may
be used without introducing significant error.
+ (B22 2 D)ML
(b) The influence functions, B’s and G’s, appearing in
the equations, (a) above, rapidly approach limiting
values as the length L of the cylinder increases. The
limiting values are:
B11 = B12 = 1
AC-240 PRINCIPAL STRESSES DUE TO
BENDING
The principal stresses developed at the surfaces of a
cylindrical shell at any axial location x due to uniformly
distributed edge loads (see Figure AC-200) are given by
the equations:
B22 = 2
1 =
t (x ) =
Ew(x) (R + t 2)
(1)
± 6vM(x) t 2
G11 = G12 = G 22 = 0
(1) Thus for cylindrical shells of sufficient length, the
loading conditions prescribed at one edge do not influence
the displacements at the other edge.
2 =
184
(x) = ± 6M(x) t 2
(2)
ASME BPVC.X-2021
3 =
r = 0
(3)
In these equations, where terms are preceded by a
double sign (±), the upper sign refers to the inside
surface of the cylinder and the lower sign refers to the
outside surface.
185
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE AC-3
EXAMPLES OF STRESS ANALYSIS OF SPHERICAL SHELLS
U = ratio of inside radius to an intermediate
radius
w = radial displacement of midsurface, in.
x = length of arc for angle α, measured from reference edge of hemisphere
x = Rmα, in.
Y = ratio of outside radius to inside radius
Z = ratio of outside radius to an intermediate
radius
ℓ = subscript to denote meridional direction
α = meridional angle measured from the reference edge, rad
É1 4
β = ÄÅÅ
2 R 2 t 2ÑÑÑ
ÅÅ3 1
, 1/in.
m ÑÑÑÖ
ÅÅÇ
−1
γo = tan (−k1), rad
δ = lateral displacement of midsurface, perpendicular to center line of spherical shell, in.
θ = rotation of midsurface, rad
λ = βRm
ν = Poisson’s ratio
σr = radial stress component, psi
σt = tangential (circumferential) stress component, psi
σℓ = longitudinal (meridional) stress component,
psi
ϕ = meridional angle measured from center line
of sphere, rad
ϕL = meridional angle of second edge, rad
ϕo = meridional angle of reference edge where
loading is applied, rad
AC-300 SCOPE
(a) In this Article, equations are given for stresses and
deformations in spherical shells subjected to internal or
external pressure.
(b) Equations are also given for bending analysis of
partial spherical shells under the action of uniformly distributed edge forces and moments.
AC-310 NOMENCLATURE AND SIGN
CONVENTION
The symbols and sign convention adopted in this Article
are defined as follows:
(
Ao =
1 + k12
B(at α) = [(1 + ν2)(K1 + K2) − 2K2]
C(at α) = sin
)
o sin ( o
D = flexural rigidity, in.-lb
x = Et3/12(1 − ν2)
E = modulus of elasticity, psi
F(at α) = sin ( ) sin (
)
o
o
H = force per unit length of circumference, perpendicular to center line of sphere, lb/in.
1
2v
K1 = 1
cot ( o
)
2
k1 = 1
K2 = 1
k2 = 1
1
2v
cot o
2
1 + 2v
cot ( o
2
1 + 2v
cot o
2
)
)
The sign convention is listed below and shown in
Figure AC-310 by the positive directions of the pertinent
quantities.
M = meridional bending moment per unit length
of circumference, in.-lb/in.
N = membrane force, lb/in.
o = subscript to denote a quantity at reference
edge of sphere
p = uniform pressure, internal or external, psi
Q = radial shearing force per unit of circumference, lb/in.
R = inside radius, in.
Rm = radius of midsurface of spherical shell, in.
S = stress intensity, psi
t = as a subscript, used to denote circumferential
direction
t = thickness of spherical shell, in.
H, Ho = force perpendicular to Ⱡ, positive outward
M, Mo = moment, positive when causing tension on the
inside surface
Nt, Nℓ = membrane force, positive when causing
tension
p = pressure, positive radially outward
δ = lateral displacement, perpendicular to Ⱡ of
sphere, positive outward
θ = rotation, positive when accompanied by an
increase in the radius or curvature, as
caused by a positive moment
186
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Figure AC-310
AC-321 PRINCIPAL STRESSES RESULTING FROM
INTERNAL PRESSURE
The principal stresses at any point in the wall of a spherical shell are given by the following equations:
= p Z3 + 2
)
2(Y 3
1)
(1)
3
)
2(Y 3
1)
(2)
(
1 =
(
2 =
t = p Z
3 =
r = p(1
+ 2
Z3) (Y 3
(3)
1)
AC-322 STRESS INTENSITIES RESULTING FROM
INTERNAL PRESSURE
(a) The average primary stress intensity in a spherical
shell resulting from internal pressure is given by the equation:
Savg = 0.75p Y 3 + 1
(
)
(Y 3
1)
(b) The maximum value of the stress intensity in a
spherical shell resulting from internal pressure occurs
at the inside surface and is given by the equation:
Smax = 1.5pY 3 (Y 3
1)
AC-323 PRINCIPAL STRESSES RESULTING FROM
EXTERNAL PRESSURE
The principal stresses at any point in the wall of a spherical shell resulting from external pressure are given by the
following equations:
1 =
=
pY 3 U3 + 2
)
2(Y 3
1)
(1)
2 =
t =
pY 3 U3 + 2
)
2(Y 3
1)
(2)
3 =
AC-320 PRINCIPAL STRESSES AND STRESS
INTENSITIES RESULTING FROM
INTERNAL OR EXTERNAL PRESSURE
(
(
3 3
r = pY U
(
1
)
(Y 3
1)
(3)
AC-324 STRESS INTENSITIES RESULTING FROM
EXTERNAL PRESSURE
(a) The average primary stress intensity in a spherical
shell resulting from external pressure is given by the equation:
In this paragraph equations are given for principal
stresses and stress intensities resulting from uniformly
distributed internal or external pressure in complete
or partial spherical shells. The effects of discontinuities
in geometry and loading are not included and should
be evaluated independently. The stresses resulting
from all effects must be combined by superposition.
Savg = 0.75 p Y 3 + 1
(
)
(Y 3
1)
(b) The maximum value of the stress intensity in a
spherical shell resulting from external pressure occurs
at the inside surface and is given by the equation:
187
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Smax = 1.5 pY 3 (Y 3
1)
M
NOTE: The equations in AC-323 and AC-324 may be used only if
the applied external pressure is less than the critical pressure
which would cause instability of the spherical shell. The value of
the critical pressure must be evaluated in accordance with the
rules given in Article RD-3.
AC-330 BENDING ANALYSIS FOR UNIFORMLY
DISTRIBUTED EDGE LOADS
N
(a) The equations in this paragraph describe the behavior of partial spherical shells of the types shown in
Figure AC-310, when subjected to the action of meridional
bending moment Mo (in.-lb/in. of circumference) and
forces Ho (in.-lb/in. of circumference), uniformly distributed at the reference edge and acting at the mean radius of
the shell. The effects of all other loading must be evaluated
independently and combined by superposition.
(b) The equations listed in this paragraph become less
accurate and should be used with caution when Rm/t is
less than 10 and/or the opening angle limitations shown in
Figure AC-310 are exceeded.
|
l
o1
o
= Mom
[K1 cos ( ) + sin ( )]}
o k C(at )e
o
n 1
~
l
(3)
o Rm
+ Hom
o 2 k Ao sin o C(at )e
n 1
× [K1 cos (
+ o) + sin (
+ o)]}
=
Nt =
l
o 2
Mom
o R k C(at )e
n m1
l
o1
Hom
o k Aocot( o
n 1
× sin(
+ o)}
K2 sin(
|
o
)]o
}
o
o
~
|
o
)}
o
o
~
)
l
o
+ Hom
o k Ao sin o C(at )e
n 1
ÅÄÅ
K1 + K2
ÅÅ
ÅÅ cos( + o)
Å
2
× ÅÇ
sin( + o)]}
(
ÑÉÑ|
o
)ÑÑÑÑo
}
ÑÖ~
(5)
)
AC-332 DISPLACEMENT AND ROTATION OF
REFERENCE EDGE IN TERMS OF LOADING
CONDITIONS AT REFERENCE EDGE
(a) At the reference edge α = 0, and ϕ = ϕo. The equations for the displacement and rotation (see AC-331)
simplify to those given below:
(1)
o = Mo
+ o)]}
l
o 4 3
= Mom
C(at )e
cos (
o
o
n R mEtk1
l
o2 2
+ Hom
o Etk Ao sin o C(at )e
o
n 1
× cos (
+ o)}
(4)
)sin o C(at )e
(
The displacement δ, rotation θ, bending moments Mℓ
and Mt, and membrane forces Nℓ and Nt at any location
of sphere are given in terms of the edge loads Mo and Ho by
the following equations:
|
o
)}
o
~
)cot( o
l
o2 2
Moo
C(at )e
m
o
n R mk1
ÅÄÅ
K1 + K2
× ÅÅÅÅcos ( )
sin (
ÅÇ
2
AC-331 DISPLACEMENT, ROTATION, MOMENT,
AND MEMBRANE FORCE IN TERMS OF
LOADING CONDITIONS AT REFERENCE
EDGE
l2 2
o
= Mom
[cos ( )
o Etk F(at )e
o
n 1
l
o Rm
+ Hom
o Etk Ao sin o F(at )e
n 1
× [cos (
+ o)
K2 sin (
sin(
yz
2 2 sin o
R m sin 2 o ij 1
jj
+ Ho
+ k2zzz
j
jk
z
Etk1
Et
k 1
{
(1)
2 2 sin o
4 3
+ Ho
R mEtk1
Etk1
(2)
o = Mo
(2)
(b) In the case where the shell under consideration is a
full hemisphere, eqs. (a)(1) and (a)(2) above reduce to
those given below:
188
o = Mo
2R
2 2
+ Ho m
Et
Et
(1)
o = Mo
4 3
2 2
+ Ho
R mEt
Et
(2)
ASME BPVC.X-2021
AC-333 PRINCIPAL STRESSES IN SPHERICAL
SHELLS RESULTING FROM EDGE LOADS
(x) =
2
The principal stresses at the inside and outside surfaces
of a spherical shell at any location, resulting from edge
loads Mo and Ho, are given by the following equations:
N
6M
(1)
(at ) =
±
1 =
t
t2
2 =
t(at ) =
Nt
6Mt
±
t
t2
M (x ) =
1 =
2 =
3
2 D
2 D + Mo 2
2
2 2 D + Mo
D
f1 ( x) +
f2 ( x)
Rm = (
(6)
2 Mof4 ( x)
2
)R m
Mo sin
D
f2 ( x)
2 2D
(at x) = ± 6M(at x) t 2
t(at x) = E (x) R m ± v 6M(at x) t
3 =
r(at x) = 0
(1)
2
(2)
(3)
In these equations, where terms are preceded by a
double sign (±), the upper sign refers to the inside
surface of the hemisphere and the lower sign refers to
the outside surface.
AC-341 DISPLACEMENT ROTATION, MOMENT,
AND SHEAR FORCES IN TERMS OF
LOADING CONDITIONS AT EDGE
Ho sin 2
(5)
The principal stresses in a hemispherical shell, due to
edge loads Mo and Ho, at the inside and outside surfaces of a
hemispherical shell at any meridional location, are given
by the equations:
If a less exacting but more expedient analysis of hemispherical shells is required, equations derived for cylindrical shells may be used in a modified form. The equations
listed in this paragraph describe the behavior of a hemispherical shell as approximated by a cylindrical shell of the
same radius and thickness when subjected to the action of
uniformly distributed edge loads Mo and Ho at α = 0, x = 0,
and ϕo = 90 deg = π/2 rad.
(x) =
f4 ( x) + Mof3 ( x)
AC-342 PRINCIPAL STRESSES IN A
HEMISPHERICAL SHELL DUE TO EDGE
LOADS
AC-340 ALTERNATE BENDING ANALYSIS OF A
HEMISPHERICAL SHELL SUBJECTED
TO UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTED EDGE
LOADS
o = Ho
Ho sin
(4)
where f1, f2, f3, and f4 are defined in Article AC-2 and
In these equations, where terms are preceded by a
double sign (±), the upper sign refers to the inside
surface of the shell and the lower sign refers to the
outside surface.
o = Ho
D
Mo
f ( x)
D1
f3 ( x) +
(3)
r(at ) = 0
3
2
Q (x) = Ho sin
(2)
x =
3 =
Ho sin
AC-343 LAYERED SPHERICAL SHELL AND HEAD
FORMULAS
The equations developed for solid wall spherical shells
or heads as expressed in this Article may be applied to
layered spherical shells or heads provided that the
shell or head is constructed to prevent slip between
the layers in the area of discontinuity.
(1)
(2)
(3)
189
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ARTICLE AC-4
EXAMPLES OF STRESS ANALYSIS OF FLAT CIRCULAR HEADS
AC-421 PRESSURE LOADS ON SIMPLY
SUPPORTED FLAT PLATES
AC-400 SCOPE
(a) In this Article, equations are given for stresses and
displacements in flat circular plates used as heads for
pressure vessels.
(b) Equations are also given for stresses and displacements in these heads due to forces and edge moments
uniformly distributed along the outer edge and uniformly
distributed over a circle on one face. The radius of this
circle is intended to match the mean radius of an adjoining
element such as a cylinder, cone, or spherical segment.
The principal stresses and deformations for a flat plate,
simply supported at its periphery and loaded in the
manner shown in Figure AC-421, are given for a radial
location r at any point x in the cross section by the
following equations.
Radial bending stress
É
3(x) ÄÅÅÅ
2
2 ÑÑÑ
(1)
(3
+
v
)
R
r
Å
ÑÑ
r = p
Å
ÑÖ
4t 3 ÅÇ
(
AC-410 NOMENCLATURE AND SIGN
CONVENTION
Tangential bending stress
3(x) ÄÅÅ
2
t = p 3 ÅÅÅÇ(3 + v)R
4t
The symbols and sign conventions adopted in this
Article are defined as follows:
E
F
M
p
Q
R
r
t
ts
w
x
θ
ν
σr
σt
σℓ
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
)
ÉÑ
(1 + 3v)r 2 ÑÑÑÑ
Ö
(2)
Longitudinal stress
elastic modulus, psi
geometry constant given in Table AC-440.1
radial bending moment, in.-lb/in. of circumference
pressure, psi
radial force, lb/in. of circumference
outside radius of plate, in.
radial distance from center of plate, in.
thickness of plate
thickness of connecting shell at the head junction,
in.
radial displacement, in.
longitudinal distance from midplane of plate, in.
rotation, rad
Poisson’s ratio
radial stress, psi
tangential (circumferential) stress, psi
longitudinal stress, psi
=
p ij
jjx
tk
t yz
zz
2{
Rotation of the midplane
3(1
v) ÄÅÅ 3
ÅÅr (1 + v)
=
p
Å
3
4t E Ç
(3)
ÉÑ
rR2(3 + v)ÑÑÑÑ
Ö
(4)
Rotation of the midplane at the outer edge
= + p
3(1
v) ij R yz3
jj zz
2E
kt{
(5)
Radial displacement
(6)
w = + (x )
AC-422 EDGE LOADS ON FLAT PLATES
Tensile stresses are positive. The positive directions of
the coordinates, radial forces, moments, and displacements are shown in Figure AC-410. The pressure is
assumed to act on the surface where x = −t/2.
The principal stresses and deformations of a flat plate
subjected to uniformly distributed edge loads, as shown in
Figure AC-422, are given for radial location r at any point x
in the cross section by the following equations:
Radial and tangential stresses
AC-420 PRESSURE AND EDGE LOADS ON
CIRCULAR FLAT PLATES
r =
In the following paragraphs equations are given for the
principal stress and the deformations of flat plates under
axisymmetric loading conditions.
190
t =
Q
t
12(x)
t3
M
(1)
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Rotation of the midplane
Figure AC-410
12(1
=
v)(r )
M
(2)
v)(r )
Q + (x)
Et
(3)
Et 3
Radial displacement
w =
(1
AC-430 FLAT PLATE PRESSURE VESSEL
HEADS
Flat plates used as pressure vessel heads are attached to
a vessel shell in the manner shown by the typical examples
in Figure AC-430.
Since the support conditions at the edge of the plate
depend upon the flexibility of the adjoining shell, the
stress distribution in the plate is influenced by the
shell thickness and geometry. The structure formed by
the head and the shell may be analyzed according to
the principles of discontinuity analysis described in
Article AC-1. In the following paragraph equations are
given for the quantities necessary to perform a discontinuity analysis.
Figure AC-421
AC-431 DISPLACEMENTS AND PRINCIPAL
STRESSES IN A FLAT HEAD
The head is assumed to be separated from the adjoining
shell element and under the action of the pressure load.
Figure AC-431 illustrates this condition. The effects of
the adjacent shell are represented by the pressure reaction force, the discontinuity force Q, and the discontinuity
moment M. These act at the assumed junction point (a).
The pressure acts on the left‐hand face over a circular area
defined by the inside radius of the adjacent shell. The
support point lies on this same face at the midradius
of the adjacent shell. The equations in this paragraph
Figure AC-422
Figure AC-430
191
ASME BPVC.X-2021
(a) For a plate simply supported at point (a), the radial
stress σr for a radial location r less than (R − ts) at any point
x due to pressure p acting over the area defined by the
radius (R − ts) is given by the following equation:
ÄÅ
ÉÑ
xp ÅÅÅÅ
3(3 + v)r 2 ÑÑÑÑ
(1)
ÅÅF2
ÑÑ
r =
ÑÑ
t (t R )2 ÅÅÅÇ
4R2
ÑÖ
Figure AC-431
(b) For these same conditions, the tangential stress σt
and the axial stress σℓ are given by the following equations:
ÄÅ
ÉÑ
xp ÅÅÅÅ
3(1 + 3v)r 2 ÑÑÑÑ
(2)
ÅÅF2
ÑÑ
t =
ÑÑ
t(t R )2 ÅÅÅÇ
4R2
ÑÖ
i
= jjjx
k
are given in terms of the head dimensions R and t and
multiplying factors F1 to F4. These factors reflect the
extent of the pressure area and the location of the junction
point. The numerical values for F1 to F4 are given in Table
AC-440.1. These are functions of the ratio of the shell thickness ts to the head radius R.
(a) For a plate simply supported at a point (a), the rotational displacement θp and the radial displacement wp of
point (a) due to pressure p acting over the area defined
by the radius (R − t s ) are given by the following
equations:
F1
(1)
p
p = +
E(t R )3
t
p
2
AC-440 GEOMETRY CONSTANTS
The geometry constants F1 through F4 are functions of
Poisson’s ratio and ts/R. These are:
w =
3E(t R )
Q +
M
ER(t R )2
v) 2
F3 =
3
(1
8
)
f )2 [8
{
f (4
3
(1
8
f )(1
v)]
f)
f )2 (1
v) 2
ÄÅ
ÅÅ
i 2
+ 4(1 + v) ÅÅÅÅ1 + 2jjjjln
ÅÅÇ
k 2
F4 =
(4)
f 2 (1
16(2
F2 =
(2)
F3
(
3(1
F1 =
(b) The rotational displacements θ and the radial displacement w of point (a) due to a uniformly distributed
radial force Q and moment M acting at point (a) are given
by the following equations:
F3
2F3
(3)
=
Q +
M
2
2
ER(t R )
ER (t R )3
2F3
(3)
(c) The radial stress σr and the tangential stress σt for
any radial location at any point x in the cross section, due to
uniformly distributed radial force Q and a uniformly distributed moment M acting at point (a), are given by the
equation:
Ä
É
F4 ÅÅÅÅ
12F4(x)
6(x) ÑÑÑÑ
(4)
ÅÅ1
ÑÑQ
M
r = t =
Å
Ñ
t ÅÅÇ
t ÑÑÖ
t3
AC-431.1 Displacements of a Flat Head.
wp =
t yz p
zz
2{ t
(
f2
)
ÉÑ
o
f yzÑÑÑ|
zzÑÑo
}
o
2f z{ÑÑÑÖo
~
v)(2
f )[8
f (4
f )(1
1
[8
8
f (4
f )(1
v) ]
v)]
In these expressions
AC-431.2 Principal Stresses in a Flat Head. When the
values of the discontinuity force Q and the moment M have
been determined by a discontinuity analysis, the principal
stresses in a flat plate can be calculated as follows:
f = ts R
Table AC-440.1 lists these functions for various values
of ts/R. These tabular values have been computed using 0.3
for Poisson’s ratio.
192
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Table AC-440.1
AC-450 STRESS INTENSITIES IN A FLAT
PLATE
ts/R
F1
F2
F3
F4
0.00
1.0500
2.4750
4.2000
1.0000
0.02
1.0113
2.4149
4.1290
0.9930
0.04
0.9730
2.3547
4.0589
0.9861
0.06
0.9350
2.2943
3.9897
0.9793
0.08
0.8975
2.2339
3.9214
0.9726
0.10
0.8604
2.1734
3.8538
0.9659
0.12
0.8238
2.1129
3.7872
0.9593
0.14
0.7878
2.0524
3.7213
0.9527
0.16
0.7523
1.9920
3.6563
0.9462
0.18
0.7174
1.9316
3.5920
0.9398
0.20
0.6831
1.8713
3.5286
0.9335
The principal stresses due to pressure p, discontinuity
force Q, discontinuity moment M, and other coincident
loadings should be combined algebraically and the
stress differences determined according to the procedures of RD-1182. The calculated stress intensity
values should not exceed the allowable values given in
RD-1187.
193
ASME BPVC.X-2021
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX AD
LAMINATE THEORY
As an illustrative example, a twelve ply laminate, having
the lamina properties, ply orientation, stacking sequence,
and imposed loads shown in Figure AD-500, shall be examined.
AD-100 SCOPE
Laminate theory is defined as a mathematical treatment
of the mechanics governing the behavior of a unidirectional orthotropic lamina, and the interrelation
between multiple lamina as they act together to form a
multidirectional laminate. As addressed in this Appendix,
laminate theory shall be used to:
(a) determine the in‐plane and flexural modulus
components that define the stress–strain and moment–
curvature relationships for laminates;
(b) examine the strength of the laminate based on the
strain state of individual lamina reacting to imposed
moment and stress resultants;
(c) determine the effective engineering constants of the
laminates.
AD-200 STANDARD NOTATION
The following conventions are observed for ply
numbering and reference axis.
AD-201 LOCATION AND NUMBERING OF PLIES
A multidirectional general laminate is represented
diagrammatically in Figure AD-201. Ply numbering is
from Z = −h/2 to Z = h/2, with ply No. 1 at the bottom.
AD-202 REFERENCE AXIS
Coordinate reference axis designation is illustrated in
Figure AD-202.
Figure AD-201
194
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Figure AD-202
Reference Coordinates
AD-400 LAMINA (PLY) PROPERTIES
Laminate theory as applied in this Section requires that
four elastic constants and five strength constants be determined for the orthotropic lamina. The strength constants
shall be determined by the appropriate ASTM standard
listed in Article RT-7. The elastic constants shall be determined in accordance with Article RT-7 or Nonmandatory
Appendix AK. For the illustrative example, they shall be
assumed to be as shown in Table AD-500.
(a) Elastic constants required are:
Es
Ex
Ey
νx
=
=
=
=
longitudinal shear modulus
longitudinal tensile modulus
transverse tensile modulus
longitudinal Poisson’s ratio
(b) Strength constants required are:
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) x, y are on-axis coordinates.
(b) 1, 2 are laminate (off-axis) coordinates.
S
X
Xc
Y
Yc
on‐axis: refers to the principal orientation of the fibers of a
specific laminate and is referenced as the x–y axis: x being
parallel to the fibers, y being transverse to the fibers.
=
=
=
=
=
longitudinal shear strength
longitudinal tensile strength
longitudinal compressive strength
transverse tensile strength
transverse compressive strength
(c) Physical constants required are:
off‐axis: refers to the principal material axis of the laminate
and is referenced as the 1–2 axis. As referenced in this
Appendix, the 1 axis is the vessel or nozzle longitudinal
axis, and the 2 axis is the hoop or circumferential axis.
h = laminate thickness
tk = thickness of each layer
Zk = distance from laminate midplane to ply surface
AD-300 BASIC ASSUMPTIONS
AD-500 ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLE
In the application of laminate theory as used in this
Section, certain assumptions are made:
(a) interlaminar or transverse shear is not addressed;
(b) laminate stress resultants and moment resultants
are taken as averages of ply stresses across the thickness
of the laminate;
(c) ply stress is based on homogeneity within each ply
where the fiber and matrix are not recognized as distinct
phases;
(d) the laminate is assumed to consist of perfectly
bonded lamina, i.e., displacements are continuous
across laminate boundaries and no lamina slips relative
to another;
(e) since the stress distribution across a multidirectional laminate is not constant due to the variation in
ply modulus, the stress–strain relationship is defined
in terms of an average stress.
Figure AD-500 and Table AD-500 describe a general
laminate, with core, to be used for this example.
The loads applied to the laminate are taken to be the
equivalent of a 50 psi internal pressure on a 30 in. inside
diameter cylindrical shell.
Stress Resultants
Moment Resultants
N1 = 375 lb/in.
M1 = 0
N2 = 750 lb/in.
M2 = 0
N6 = 0
M6 = 0
AD-501 DETERMINATION OF STIFFNESS MATRIX
The modulus components that define the stress–strain
and moment–curvature relationships for a general laminate are expressed in general terms as follows:
A ij =
AD-310 NOMENCLATURE
Q ijdz
(1)
Q ijz dz
(2)
Refer to Article RD-12.
Bij =
195
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Figure AD-500
Table AD-500
Assumed Lamina Elastic and Strength Properties
Property
Q yx = E yvx
Assumed Value
Ex
5.100 × 106 psi
Ey
1.525 × 106 psi
Es
0.439 × 106 psi
νx
0.281
tk
0.020 in.
X
119,000 psi
Y
10,000 psi
XC
119,000 psi
YC
10,000 psi
S
5,220 psi
νy [Note (1)]
0.084
Q ijz 2 dz
)
= 5.223 × 106 psi
(4)
)
= 1.561 × 106 psi
(5)
vxvy
Q yy = E y
(1
vxvy
(6)
(7)
Q ss = Es = 0.439 × 106 psi
(8)
+ Q yy sin4 + 2Q xy cos 2 sin 2
+ 4Q sscos2 sin 2
Q12 = Q xx cos 2 sin 2
+ Q xy cos4
(
AD-501.1 Determine On‐Axis Modulus Components of
the Lamina. From the lamina elastic constants:
(1
= 0.438 × 106 psi
Q xy = Q yx = 0.438 × 106 psi
Q11 = Q xx cos4
(3)
The following outline may be used to solve for the integrals and determine the modulus components of an anisotropic laminate from the orthotropic properties,
orientation, and stacking sequence of the individual
lamina.
Q xx = Ex
)
vxvy
AD-501.2 Determination of Transformed Modulus
Components. Based on the orientation of each ply, calculate the transformed modulus components of each lamina
using the transformation equations shown below and the
on‐axis modulus components determined in AD-501.1.
The transformed modulus components in terms of their
power functions and on‐axis components are shown
below.
NOTE: (1) νy = Eyνx/Ex
Dij =
(1
196
+ Q yy cos2 sin 2
+ sin4
)
4Q sscos2 sin 2
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Q16 = Q xx cos3 sin
Q yy cos sin3
3
(
+ 2Q ss (cos
3
+ Q xy cos sin
cos
sin3
)
sin )
sin
cos3
1
Q xx + Q yy + 6Q xy
8
6
(
4 =
Q 21 = Q12
=
0.957 × 10 psi
5 =
1
Q xx + Q yy
8
6
(
=
)
4Q ss
)
2Q xy + 4Q ss
(12)
(13)
0.957 × 10 psi
The substitution of the trigonometric identities into the
transformation relations yields the following values for
ply No. 1.
Q 22 = Q xx sin4 + Q yycos4 + 2Q xycos2 sin 2
+ 4Q sscos2 sin 2
Q11 =
1 +
2 cos 2
6
+
3 cos 4
(14)
= 1.55 × 10 psi
Q xx cos sin3
Q 26 =
Q yy cos3 sin
+ Q xy cos3 sin
(
+ 2Q ss (cos3
cos sin3
sin
cos
)
sin3 )
Q12 =
4
3 cos 4
Q16 =
1
sin 2
2 2
Q 61 = Q16
+ Q yy cos2 sin 2
sin 2
(
Q 22 =
=
=
1
8
(3Q xx
)
+ 3Q yy + 2Q xy + 4Q ss
Q 26 =
(
)
3 =
=
(
= 1.83 × 106 psi
2Q xy
+
3 cos 4
(18)
)
4Q ss
1
sin 2
2 2
3 sin 4
(19)
= 0.907 × 10 psi
(9)
(10)
Q 61 = Q16 = 0.0083 × 106 psi
(20)
Q 62 = Q 26 = 0.907 × 106 psi
(21)
Q 66 =
1
Q xx + Q yy
8
6
2 cos 2
6
2.87 × 10 psi
Q yy
1
(17)
)
6
1
2 = 2 Q xx
(16)
= 4.72 × 106 psi
However, by the substitutions of certain trigonometric
identities, multiple angle functions can be developed that
offer certain advantages in the calculations. These will be
used in the illustrative example:
1
3 sin 4
Q 21 = Q12 = 0.698 × 106 psi
2Q xy cos2 sin 2
+ Q ss cos 2
+
(15)
= 0.0083 × 106 psi
Q 62 = Q 26
Q 66 = Q xx cos 2 sin 2
= 0.698 × 106 psi
5
3 cos 4
= 0.698 × 106 psi
(22)
The transformed modulus components for all 12 plies
are determined in similar fashion and listed in
Table AD-501.
(11)
0.518 × 10 psi
AD-501.3 Determination of In‐Plane Modulus
Components. The in‐plane modulus components A ij
that couple stress to strain are determined from an
197
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Table AD-501
Transformed Modulus Components, 106
psi
Ply No.
Q11
Q12
Q16
Q21
Q22
Q26
Q61
Q62
Q66
1
1.547
0.698
0.0083
0.698
4.718
0.907
0.0083
0.907
0.698
2
1.547
0.698
−0.0083
0.698
4.718
−0.907
−0.0083
−0.907
3
4.718
0.698
0.907
0.698
1.547
0.0083
0.907
0.0083
0.698
0.698
4
4.718
0.698
−0.907
0.698
1.547
−0.0083
−0.907
−0.0083
0.698
5
2.354
1.476
0.915
1.476
2.354
0.915
0.915
0.915
1.476
1.476
6
2.354
1.476
−0.915
1.476
2.354
−0.915
−0.915
−0.915
7
2.354
1.476
−0.915
1.476
2.354
−0.915
−0.915
−0.915
1.476
8
2.354
1.476
0.915
1.476
2.354
0.915
0.915
0.915
1.476
9
4.718
0.698
−0.907
0.698
1.547
−0.0083
−0.907
−0.0083
0.698
10
4.718
0.698
0.907
0.698
1.547
0.0083
0.907
0.0083
0.698
11
1.547
0.698
−0.0083
0.698
4.718
−0.907
−0.0083
−0.907
0.698
12
1.547
0.698
0.0083
0.698
4.718
0.907
0.0083
0.907
0.698
A 62 =
arithmetic summation of the off‐axis modulus of each
lamina as a function of the distance of each lamina
from the laminate midplane.
A11 =
(Q11) (Zk
k
= (Q11)01(Z1
Zk
A11 =
(Q11) (Zk
k
Zk
A 66 =
Z 0)
+ (Q11)02 (Z 2
+ (Q11) (Z12
012
1)
(23)
(Q 66) (Zk
(Q12) (Zk
k
A16 =
A21 =
A22 =
(Q16) (Zk
k
(Q 21) (Zk
k
(Q 22) (Zk
k
A26 =
A 61 =
Zk
Zk
Zk
(Q 26) (Zk
k
(Q 61) (Zk
k
Zk
1) = 0
5
1) = 2.30 × 10 lb in.
AD-501.4 Determination of Coupling Modulus
Components. The coupling modulus components B ij
that couple moment to strain and stress to curvature
are determined from a summation of the off‐axis
modulus of the individual lamina as a function of the
square of the distance of the lamina from the laminate
midplane.
Z1) + …
Z11)
5
1) = 6.90 × 10 lb in.
5
1) = 2.30 × 10 lb in.
Zk
Zk
k
B11 =
A12 =
(Q 62) (Zk
k
1
2
(Q11)k Zk2
(
ÅÄÅ
2
ÅÅ(Q )
ÅÅÅ 11 1 Z1
Ç
Z 02
+ (Q11)
Z2
2 2
Z12
1
2
(
(
2
+ (Q11) 12 (Z12
1) = 0
Zk2
)
1
)
)
(24)
+ …
É
2 ÑÑÑ
Z11
ÑÑ
ÑÖ
)
5
1) = 2.30 × 10 lb in.
B11 =
1
2
(Q11)k Zk2
Zk2
1
B12 =
1
2
(Q12)k Zk2
(
Zk2
1
B16 =
1
2
(Q16)
(Zk2
Zk2
1
(
)
= 0 lb
)
= 0 lb
)
= 0 lb
5
1) = 6.90 × 10 lb in.
Zk
Zk
1) = 0
1) = 0
198
k
ASME BPVC.X-2021
B21 =
1
2
(Q 21)k Zk2
Zk2
1
B22 =
1
2
(Q 22)k Zk2
Zk2
1
(
(
)
= 0 lb
)
= 0 lb
D21 =
1
3
(Q 21)
D22 =
1
3
(Q 22)k (Zk3
Z3
k k
= 8.38 × 102 lb-in.
Zk3
1
Zk3
1
Zk3
1
Zk3
1
Zk3
1
Zk3
1
)
)
= 4.39 × 103 lb-in.
1
B26 =
2
(Q 26) Zk2
k
Zk2
(
)
1
= 0 lb
D26 =
1
B61 =
2
B62 =
(
1
2
(Q 61) Zk2
k
(
Zk2
1
Z2
k( k
Zk2
1
(Q 62)
)
= 0 lb
)
= 0 lb
1
3
(Q 26)
k
2
(Zk3
)
= 1.75 × 10 lb-in.
D61 =
1
3
(Q 61)
k
2
(Zk3
)
= 1.18 × 10 lb-in.
B66 =
1
2
(Q 66)
k
(Zk2
Zk2
)
1
= 0 lb
AD-501.5 Determination of Flexural Modulus
Components. The flexural modulus components D ij
that couple moments to curvature are determined
from a summation of the off‐axis modulus of the individual
lamina as a function of the cube of the distance of the
lamina from the laminate midplane.
1
3
1
=
3
D11 =
(Q11)k (Zk3
ÄÅ
ÅÅ
ÅÅ(Q11) Z13
ÅÅÇ
1
+ (Q11)
Z 23
(
2(
3
+ (Q11) 12 (Z12
D11 =
=
1
3
Zk3
=
)
(
Z3
k k
2
(Q16)
(
Zk3
Zk3
(
)
)
It is often convenient to work with normalized units. For
this example, the stiffness matrix, stress resultants, and
moment resultants will be normalized. (Superscript *
denotes normalized unit.
(25)
+ …
É
3 ÑÑÑ
Z11
ÑÑ
ÑÖ
(Q12) Zk3
k
= 8.38 × 102 lb-in.
1
3
(Q 66)
(
AD-502 NORMALIZED MODULUS COMPONENTS
)
)
Zk3
1
3
)
1
A11
= A11 h = 2.87 × 106 psi
A12
= A12 h = 9.58 × 105 psi
A16
1
D12 =
3
D16 =
)
Z13
(
(Q 62)
Z3
k k
= 8.38 × 102 lb-in.
D66 =
1
Z 03
Z3
k k
2.76 × 103 lb-in.
(Q11)
1
3
Z3
k k
= 1.75 × 102 lb-in.
D62 =
= A16 h = 0
)
1
)
1
A21
= A21 h = 9.58 × 105 psi
A22
= A22 h = 2.87 × 106 psi
1.18 × 10 lb-in.
A26
199
= A26 h = 0
ASME BPVC.X-2021
A 61
A 62
A 66
D21
= 12D21 h3 = 7.27 × 105 psi
D22
= 12D22 h3 = 3.81 × 106 psi
D26
= 12D26 h3 = 1.52 × 105 psi
D61
= 12D61 h3 = 1.02 × 105 psi
D62
= 12D62 h3 = 1.52 × 105 psi
D66
= 12D66 h3 = 7.27 × 105 psi
= A 61 h = 0
= A 62 h = 0
= A 66 h = 9.58 × 106 psi
B11
B12
B16
= 2B11 h2 = 0
= 2B12 h2 = 0
= 2B16 h2 = 0
N1 = N1 h = 1,562 psi
B21
2
= 2B21 h
= 0
N2
B22
2
= 2B22 h
= N2 h = 3,125 psi
= 0
N6
B26
= 2B26 h2 = 0
B61
= 2B61 h2 = 0
B62
= 2B62
h2 = 0
= 2B66
h2 = 0
B66
= N6 h = 0
M1 = M1
(h2 6)
= 0
M2
= M2
(h2 6)
= 0
M6
= M6
(h2 6)
= 0
AD-503 STIFFNESS MATRIX FORMAT
The stiffness matrix will take one of the formats shown
in Figure AD-503, depending on whether the matrix is
normalized or not.
D11 = 12D11 h3 = 2.40 × 106 psi
D12
D16
= 12D12 h3 = 7.27 × 105 psi
AD-504 DETERMINATION OF COMPLIANCE
= 12D16 h3 = 1.02 × 105 psi
Compliance is the reciprocal of modulus and is obtained
from a matrix inversion of the stiffness matrix. The matrix
inversion is best done using a digital computer, but
complies with the following inversion process.
In‐plane compliance
= A 1 + A 1B (D
200
1
BA 1B) BA 1
ASME BPVC.X-2021
AD-507.1 Determination of Off‐Axis Strains. From the
normalized compliance matrix, determine the laminate
strains and curvatures resulting from the imposed
loads. (The choice of compliance or normalized compliance is the designer’s option.)
Figure AD-503
0
1
=
11 N1 + 12 N2 + 16 N6
T
T
T
1
1
1
+ 11 M1 + 12 M2 + 16 M6
3
3
3
=
0
2
0.000204
=
21 N1 + 22 N2 + 26 N6
T
T
T
1
1
1
+ 21 M1 +
M2 +
M6
22
26
3
3
3
Coupling compliance
=
1
BA 1B) BA 1
A 1B (D
(26)
=
0.001019
=
61 N1 + 62 N2 + 66 N6
T
T
T
1
1
1
+ 61 M1 + 62 M2 + 66 M6
3
3
3
(27)
Flexural compliance
= (D
0
6
1
BA 1B)
AD-505 COMPLIANCE MATRIX FORMAT
=
The compliance matrix will take one of the formats
shown in Figure AD-505, depending on whether the
matrix is normalized or not.
0.0
T
k1
=
11 N1
AD-506 MATRICES FOR ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLE
AD-507 STRAIN ANALYSIS
T
+
+ 11 M1 +
0.0
=
The complete stiffness and compliance matrices for the
illustrative example are listed in Table AD-506.
T
k2
It is necessary to determine both on‐axis and off‐axis
interlaminar strains resulting from imposed loads on the
laminate. Begin by assuming a linear strain variation
across the laminate thickness and calculate the off‐axis
strains at the lower and upper surface of each ply. On‐
axis strains at the ply surfaces are then determined
from the off‐axis strains using the transformation relations.
=
21 N1
T
=
=
61 N1
T
12 N2
+
16 N6
12 M2
+
16 M6
22 N2
+
26 N6
22 M2
+
26 M6
+
66 N6
T
+
+ 21 M1 +
0.0
=
k6
(28)
T
T
+
+ 61 M1 +
0.0
62 N2
62 M2
(29)
(30)
T
+
66 M6
(31)
AD-507.2 Off‐Axis Mechanical Strains. For each ply,
determine the longitudinal, transverse, and shear
strains at both lower and upper surfaces of the ply in
accordance with the general equation:
Figure AD-505
i =
0
i
+ Zk i , i = 1, 2, 6
(32)
where Z is the distance from the laminate midplane to the
ply surface in question, divided by the midplane dimension.
For the lower surface of ply No. 1:
1 =
201
0
1
+ Zk1 = 0.000204
(33)
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Table AD-506
Matrices for Illustrative Example
Normalized Stiffness Matrix, psi
A*
B*
3B*
D*
2.874 E+06
9.578 E+05
0.000 E+00
7.830 E−10
2.711 E−10
2.823 E−18
9.578 E+05
2.874 E+06
0.000 E+00
2.711 E−10
7.228 E−10
−1.506 E−11
0.000 E+00
0.000 E+00
9.579 E+05
2.823 E−12
−1.506 E−11
2.485 E−10
2.349 E−09
8.132 E−10
8.470 E−18
2.400 E+06
7.272 E+05
1.022 E+05
8.132 E−10
2.168 E−09
−4.518 E−11
7.272 E+05
3.809 E+06
1.521 E+05
8.470 E−12
−4.518 E−11
7.454 E−10
1.022 E+05
1.521 E+05
7.273 E+05
3.341 E−24
Normalized Compliance Matrix, 1/psi
1
α*
β*
T
∕3β*
δ*
3.915 E−07
−1.305 E−07
−2.297 E−39
−3.976 E−23
6.424 E−24
−1.305 E−07
3.915 E−07
−6.279 E−39
6.173 E−24
−2.311 E−23
6.668 E−24
−1.546 E−39
−6.466 E−39
1.044 E−06
3.020 E−24
5.610 E−24
−1.205 E−22
−1.192 E−22
1.933 E−23
8.485 E−24
4.438 E−07
−8.292 E−08
−4.500 E−08
1.850 E−23
−6.935 E−23
2.052 E−23
−8.292 E−08
2.802 E−07
−4.696 E−08
1.037 E−23
1.659 E−23
−3.616 E−22
−4.500 E−08
−4.696 E−08
1.391 E−06
Stiffness Matrix
A (lb/in.)
B (lb)
B (lb)
D (lb-in.)
6.897 E+05
2.299 E+05
0.000 E+00
2.255 E−11
7.806 E−12
8.132 E−20
2.299 E+05
6.897 E+05
0.000 E+00
7.806 E−12
2.082 E−11
−4.337 E−13
0.000 E+00
0.000 E+00
2.299 E+05
8.132 E−14
−4.337 E−13
7.156 E−12
2.255 E−11
7.806 E−12
8.132 E−20
2.764 E+03
8.377 E+02
1.177 E+02
7.806 E−12
2.082 E−11
−4.337 E−13
8.377 E+02
4.388 E+03
1.752 E+02
8.132 E−14
−4.337 E−13
7.156 E−12
1.177 E+02
1.752 E+02
8.378 E+02
Compliance Matrix
α (in./lb)
β (1/lb)
βT (1/lb)
δ (1/lb-in.)
1.631 E−06
−5.437 E−07
−2.871 E−38
−1.242 E−20
2.008 E−21
1.044 E−21
−5.437 E−07
1.631 E−06
−7.848 E−38
1.929 E−21
−7.223 E−21
2.084 E−21
−1.932 E−38
−8.083 E−38
4.350 E−06
9.437 E−22
1.753 E−21
−3.765 E−20
−1.242 E−20
2.013 E−21
8.838 E−22
3.852 E−04
−7.198 E−05
−3.906 E−05
1.927 E−21
−7.224 E−21
2.137 E−21
−7.198 E−05
2.433 E−04
−4.076 E−05
1.080 E−21
1.728 E−21
−3.766 E−20
−3.906 E−05
−4.076 E−05
1.208 E−03
202
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Table AD-507.2
Off‐Axis Mechanical Strain
Lower Ply Surface
Upper Ply Surface
Ply No.
ε1
ε2
ε6
ε1
ε2
ε6
1
2.04 E−04
1.02 E−03
−0.19 E−09
2.04 E−04
1.02 E−03
−0.17 E−09
2
2.04 E−04
1.02 E−03
−0.17 E−09
2.04 E−04
1.02 E−03
−0.14 E−09
3
2.04 E−04
1.02 E−03
−0.14 E−09
2.04 E−04
1.02 E−03
−0.11 E−09
4
2.04 E−04
1.02 E−03
−0.11 E−09
2.04 E−04
1.02 E−03
−0.80 E−10
5
2.04 E−04
1.02 E−03
−0.80 E−10
2.04 E−04
1.02 E−03
−0.51 E−10
6
2.04 E−04
1.02 E−03
−0.51 E−10
2.04 E−04
1.02 E−03
−0.23 E−10
7
2.04 E−04
1.02 E−03
−0.23 E−10
2.04 E−04
1.02 E−03
5.88 E−12
8
2.04 E−04
1.02 E−03
5.88 E−12
2.04 E−04
1.02 E−03
3.44 E−11
9
2.04 E−04
1.02 E−03
3.44 E−11
2.04 E−04
1.02 E−03
6.29 E−11
10
2.04 E−04
1.02 E−03
6.26 E−11
2.04 E−04
1.02 E−03
9.14 E−11
11
2.04 E−04
1.02 E−03
9.14 E−11
2.04 E−04
1.02 E−03
1.20 E−10
12
2.04 E−04
1.02 E−03
1.20 E−10
2.04 E−04
1.02 E−03
1.48 E−10
2 =
2
6 =
0
+ Zk2
6
0
= 0.001019
+ Zk6
= 0.0
(34)
AD-508 STRENGTH ANALYSIS
(35)
The strength of the laminate will be examined in terms
of the quadratic criterion in strain space. The laminate
could also be examined in terms of the quadratic criterion
in stress space, but that is not included in this example.
For all 12 plies, the off‐axis mechanical strains are as
shown in Table AD-507.2.
AD-508.1 Quadratic Criterion in Strain Space. The
failure criterion in strain space is:
(39)
Gij i j + Gi i
1 = 0
AD-507.3 On‐Axis Mechanical Strains. From the off‐
axis strains and the transformation relationships, determine the longitudinal, transverse, and shear strains at
both lower and upper surfaces in accordance with the
general equations:
1 + 2 + 1
2 (cos 2 ) + 6 (sin 2 ) (36)
x =
2
2
2
y =
1 +
2
1
2
s =
2
6
2
(2 cos 2 )
2 (cos 2 ) +
1
2
6
2
Expanding this for mechanical strain only yields:
Gxx x2 + Gxy x y + Gyx x y + Gyy y2 + Gss s2
+ Gx x + Gy y 1 = 0
(40)
where
(sin 2 ) (37)
2 (2 sin 2 )
Gss = F Q 2
ss ss
Gx = FxQxx + FyQxy
2
Gxx = F Q 2 + F Q Q + F Q Q
xx xx
xy xx yx
yx yx xx + FyyQ yx
(38)
Gxy
Gy
Gyx
Gyy
For the lower surface of ply No. 1:
x = 0.000965
=
=
=
=
FxxQxxQxy + FxyQxxQyy + FxyQxyQyx + FyyQxyQyy
FxQxy + FyQyy
Gxy
2 + F Q Q
2
FxxQ xy
xy xy yy + FyxQ yxQ yy + FyyQ yy
where the Qs are the on‐axis modulus components of the
lamina as determined in AD-501.1 and the F terms are
from the tested strength constants of the lamina:
y = 0.000259
Fxx = 1 XXc
s = 0.000408
For all 12 plies, the on‐axis mechanical strains are as
shown in Table AD-507.3.
Fyy = 1 YYc
203
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Table AD-507.3
On‐Axis Mechanical Strain
Lower Ply Surface
Ply No.
εx
εy
1
9.65 E−04
2
9.65 E−04
3
2.59 E−04
4
2.59 E−04
5
6.12 E−04
6
6.12 E−04
Upper Ply Surface
εs
εx
εy
εs
2.59 E−04
4.08 E−04
9.65 E−04
2.59 E−04
4.08 E−04
2.59 E−04
−0.41 E−03
9.65 E−04
2.59 E−04
−0.41 E−03
9.65 E−04
4.08 E−04
2.59 E−04
9.65 E−04
4.08 E−04
9.65 E−04
−0.41 E−03
2.59 E−04
9.65 E−04
−0.41 E−03
6.12 E−04
8.16 E−04
6.12 E−04
6.12 E−04
8.16 E−04
6.12 E−04
−0.82 E−03
6.12 E−04
6.12 E−04
−0.82 E−03
7
6.12 E−04
6.12 E−04
−0.82 E−03
6.12 E−04
6.12 E−04
−0.82 E−03
8
6.12 E−04
6.12 E−04
8.16 E−04
6.12 E−04
6.12 E−04
8.16 E−04
−0.41 E−03
9
2.59 E−04
9.65 E−04
−0.41 E−03
2.59 E−04
9.65 E−04
10
2.59 E−04
9.65 E−04
4.08 E−04
2.59 E−04
9.65 E−04
4.08 E−04
11
9.65 E−04
2.59 E−04
−0.41 E−03
9.65 E−04
2.59 E−04
−0.41 E−03
12
9.65 E−04
2.59 E−04
4.08 E−04
9.65 E−04
2.59 E−04
4.08 E−04
Fxy
Fxy*
Fy
Fyy
Gss
Gx
Gxx
Gxy
Gy
Gyx
Gyy
Fxy = Fxy FxxFyy
where Fxy is taken to be −0.5;
Fss = 1/S2
Fyx = Fxy
Fx = 1
X
Fy = 1
Y
1
Xc
1
Yc
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
−0.4202 × 10−9
−0.5
0
0.1 × 10−7
7,072.75
0
1,926.43
3,508.02
0
3,508.02
23,832.2
For the lower surface of ply No. 1:
A = Gxx x2 + Gxy x y + Gyx x y + Gyy y2 + Gss s2
and where εx, εy, and εsare the on‐axis longitudinal, transverse, and shear strains at the lower and upper surfaces of
each ply.
Equation (40) can be solved using the root of the quadratic equation
2
AR
2
= 1,926.43 9.65 × 10 4 + 2(3,508.02) 9.65 × 10 4
(
)
× 2.59 × 10 4 + 23,832 2.59 × 10
(
+ BR + C = 0
)
(
4 2
(
)
+ 7, 072 4.08 × 10
and
(
4 2
)
= 0.00632
R =
B ±
2
B
2A
4AC
B = Gx x + Gy y = 0
where
2
2
A = G 2 + G
xx x
yx x y + Gyx x y + Gyy y + Gss s
B = Gxεx + Gyεy
C = −1
C =
Solve for the positive root only. For the illustrative
example:
R
Fss = 0.3669 × 10−7
Fx = 0
Fxx = 0.7062 × 10−10
=
=
204
B ±
0 ±
0
B2
2A
1
4AC
4(0.00632)(
2(0.00632)
1)
= 12.6
)
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Failure occurs when R = 1. A strength ratio of 12.6 indicates a safety margin of 12.6 times.
Strength ratios R at the lower and upper surfaces of all
12 plies are listed below.
Ply No.
Lower
Upper
1
1.26 E+01
1.26 E+01
2
1.26 E+01
1.26 E+01
3
6.29 E+00
6.29 E+00
4
6.29 E+00
6.29 E+00
5
7.68 E+00
7.68 E+00
6
7.68 E+00
7.68 E+00
7
7.68 E+00
7.68 E+00
8
7.68 E+00
7.68 E+00
9
6.29 E+00
6.29 E+00
10
6.29 E+00
6.29 E+00
11
1.26 E+01
1.26 E+01
12
1.26 E+01
1.26 E+01
AD-510 STRAIN‐SPACE FAILURE ENVELOPES
If desired, the laminate may be examined in terms of
overlapping failure envelopes. To accomplish this, it is
necessary to transform the quadratic strength parameter
of AD-508 to the on‐axis orientation of the plies to be
examined. This transformation can be accomplished
using a procedure similar to the transformation of
modulus components.
Multiple angle functions in terms of the quadratic
strength parameter are calculated:
1
3Gxx + 3Gyy + 2Gxy + 4Gss
8
(
U11 =
U22 =
1
Gxx
2
(
Gyy
1
Gxx + Gyy
8
(
U33 =
)
=
2Gxy
)
= 14,072.9
10,952.9
4Gss
)
=
1,193.5
AD-509 EFFECTIVE ENGINEERING CONSTANTS
The effective engineering constants for laminate may be
written in terms of the components of normalized compliance. Note that the stiffness properties of an asymmetric
laminate may be difficult to determine experimentally,
due to the bending–extensional coupling, and should
not be improperly used. The equations below are for properties in the off‐axis (1–2) reference coordinates. If effective elastic properties in other orientations are desired,
the transformation relationship will have to be employed.
Effective longitudinal tensile modulus
E1 = 1
11
U44 =
1
Gxx + Gyy + 6Gxy
8
U55 =
1
Gxx + Gyy
8
(
(
4Gss
)
= 2,314.47
2Gxy + 4Gss
)
= 5,879.19
Transformation of the quadratic strength parameters in
strain space in multiple angle functions is accomplished
by:
= 2.554 × 106 psi
G11 = U11 + U22 cos 2
+ U33 cos 4
Effective transverse tensile modulus
E2 = 1
22
G12 = U44
= 2.554 × 106 psi
U33 cos 4
Effective shear modulus
E6 = 1
66
= 0.957 × 106 psi
G16 =
1
U sin 2
2 22
+ U33 sin 4
Longitudinal Poisson’s ratio
21 =
12
11
= 0.333
22
= 0.333
G21 = G12
Transverse Poisson’s ratio
21 =
12
G22 = U11
U22 cos 2
+ U33 cos 4
Longitudinal flexural modulus
Ef1 = 1
11
= 2.253 × 106 psi
G26 =
1
U sin 2
2 22
Transverse flexural modulus
Ef2 = 1
22
= 3.568 × 106 psi
G61 = G16
205
U33 sin 4
ASME BPVC.X-2021
To determine the coordinates for the strain‐space
envelope for a particular ply orientation, assume
values of either ϵ1 or ϵ2 and calculate the positive and negative values of the corresponding strain from the equation
G62 = G 26
G66 = U55
G1 =
1
Gx + Gy
2
G2 =
1
Gx + Gy
2
(
(
G6 =
)
1
G
2 x
(
(
Gy cos 2
(
Gy cos 2
+ 1 2 Gx
)
G11 12 + 2G12 1 2 + G 22 22 + G1 1 + G 2 2
U33 cos 4
1 2 Gx
1 = 0
using the quadratic equation as in AD-508.
For the illustrative example, strain‐space envelopes are
calculated for ply orientations of 75 deg, 15 deg, and 45
deg. Values of longitudinal strengths were assumed, and
the positive and negative roots of the quadratic equation, +ϵ2 and −ϵ2, were calculated.
The coordinates for each orientation are shown in
Table AD-510, and the failure envelope plots are
shown in Figure AD-510.
)
)
)
Gy sin 2
206
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Table AD-510
Strain‐Space Envelope Coordinates
Off‐Axis Angle
STRx
STR1y
STR2y
75
0.001
0.149346 E−01
−0.163937 E−01
75
0.002
0.136969 E−01
−0.166149 E−01
75
0.003
0.01208
−0.164572 E−01
75
0.004
0.100063 E−01
−0.158425 E−01
75
0.005
0.730893 E−02
−0.146042 E−01
75
0.006
0.353535 E−02
−0.122896 E−01
75
0.0061
0.305251 E−02
−0.119527 E−01
75
0.0062
0.253858 E−02
−0.115847 E−01
75
0.0063
0.198726 E−02
−0.111793 E−01
75
0.0064
0.138975 E−02
−0.107277 E−01
−0.102166 E−01
75
0.0065
0.732755 E−03
75
0.0066
−0.533163 E−05
−0.962438 E−02
75
0.0067
−0.864546 E−03
−0.891106 E−02
75
0.0068
−0.193794 E−02
−0.798358 E−02
75
0.0069
−0.362526 E−02
−0.644216 E−02
0.163937 E−01
−0.149346 E−01
−0.136969 E−01
75
−0.001
75
−0.002
0.166149 E−01
75
−0.003
0.164572 E−01
−0.01208
75
−0.004
0.158425 E−01
−0.100063 E−01
75
−0.005
0.146042 E−01
−0.730893 E−02
75
−0.006
0.122896 E−01
−0.353534 E−02
15
0.001
0.646058 E−02
−0.671415 E−02
15
0.002
0.629778 E−02
−0.680493 E−02
15
0.003
0.611052 E−02
−0.687125 E−02
15
0.004
0.589812 E−02
−0.691243 E−02
15
0.005
0.565956 E−02
−0.692743 E−02
−0.691484 E−02
15
0.006
0.539339 E−02
15
0.007
0.050977 E−01
−0.687273 E−02
15
0.008
0.047699 E−01
−0.067985 E−01
15
0.009
0.044065 E−01
−0.668868 E−02
15
0.01
0.040027 E−01
−0.653846 E−02
15
0.011
0.355174 E−02
−0.634107 E−02
−0.608647 E−02
15
0.012
0.304356 E−02
15
0.013
0.246227 E−02
−0.575876 E−02
15
0.014
0.177994 E−02
−0.533001 E−02
15
0.015
0.937895 E−03
−0.474153 E−02
−0.381036 E−02
15
0.016
−0.246854 E−03
15
0.0161
−0.407783 E−03
−0.367479 E−02
15
0.0162
−0.584638 E−03
−0.352329 E−02
15
0.0163
−0.783557 E−03
−0.334973 E−02
15
0.0164
−0.101603 E−02
−0.314262 E−02
207
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Table AD-510
Strain‐Space Envelope Coordinates (Cont’d)
Off‐Axis Angle
STRx
STR1y
STR2y
15
0.0165
−0.130991 E−02
−0.287409 E−02
0.0166
−0.180535 E−02
−0.240401 E−02
15
15
−0.001
0.671415 E−02
−0.646058 E−02
15
−0.002
0.680493 E−02
−0.629778 E−02
15
−0.003
0.687125 E−02
−0.611052 E−02
−0.589812 E−02
15
−0.004
0.691243 E−02
15
−0.005
0.692743 E−02
−0.565956 E−02
15
−0.006
0.691484 E−02
−0.539339 E−02
15
−0.007
0.687273 E−02
−0.050977 E−01
15
−0.008
0.067985 E−01
−0.047699 E−01
15
−0.009
0.668868 E−02
−0.044065 E−01
15
−0.01
0.653846 E−02
−0.040027 E−01
15
−0.011
0.634107 E−02
−0.355174 E−02
15
−0.012
0.608647 E−02
−0.304356 E−02
15
−0.013
0.575876 E−02
−0.246227 E−02
15
−0.014
0.533001 E−02
−0.177995 E−02
15
−0.015
0.474153 E−02
−0.937894 E−03
15
−0.016
0.381035 E−02
0.246858 E−03
−0.810515 E−02
45
0.001
0.795831 E−02
45
0.002
0.769693 E−02
−0.799062 E−02
45
0.003
0.729982 E−02
−0.774036 E−02
45
0.004
0.674829 E−02
−0.733568 E−02
45
0.005
0.600768 E−02
−0.674192 E−02
45
0.006
0.500899 E−02
−0.589007 E−02
45
0.007
0.358084 E−02
−0.460877 E−02
45
0.008
0.077214 E−02
−0.194692 E−02
45
0.0081
−0.977554 E−04
−0.109171 E−02
0.810515 E−02
−0.795831 E−02
45
−0.001
45
−0.002
0.799062 E−02
−0.769693 E−02
45
−0.003
0.774036 E−02
−0.729982 E−02
45
−0.004
0.733568 E−02
−0.674829 E−02
45
−0.005
0.674192 E−02
−0.600768 E−02
45
−0.006
0.589007 E−02
−0.500899 E−02
45
−0.007
0.460877 E−02
−0.358084 E−02
45
−0.008
0.194691 E−02
−0.772134 E−03
208
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Figure AD-510
Failure Envelopes — Example Laminate in Strain Space
e20
5 75 deg
0.02
5 15 deg
5 45 deg
0.01
2e1
e10
20.02
20.01
0.01
20.01
20.02
2e2
209
0.02
ASME BPVC.X-2021
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX AF
EXAMPLES FOR DESIGN RULES FOR CLASS II VESSELS
AF-100 GENERAL
t1
Nonmandatory examples of calculations required
under RD-1150, Vessel Parts Subject to Design Analysis.
Symbols and values defined below are used in these examples.
(b) Circumferential Stress
t2
Do = outside diameter
E1 = 1.35 × 106
x = tensile modulus in the longitudinal (axial) direction, psi
E2 = 3.15 × 106
x = tensile modulus in the circumferential (hoop)
direction, psi
F = design factor: 5 for all external pressure calculations and 10 for all internal pressure and reinforcement calculations
L = 60 in.
x = length of cylinder
P = 50 psi
x = internal pressure
PA = allowable external pressure
R = 24 in.
x = inside radius, shell or head
r = 4 in.
x = inside radius, nozzle (in.)
Ss = 1,000 psi
x = secondary bond shear strength
t = thickness, in.
ν1 = 0.27
x = Poisson’s ratio, longitudinal (axial) direction
ν2 = 0.23
x = Poisson’s ratio, circumferential (hoop) direction
t2
=
= 0.38 in. < 0.45
AF-210 SPHERICAL SHELLS UNDER
INTERNAL PRESSURE (SEE RD-1171.2)
Assume hand lay‐up sphere with E1 = E2 = 2.2 × 106 psi:
t
=
=
PR
2(0.001 E)
50 × 24
2 0.001 × 2.2 × 106
(
)
t = 0.27 in.
AF-300 CYLINDRICAL SHELLS UNDER
EXTERNAL PRESSURE (SEE
RD-1172.1)
Assume: Eat = 1.35 × 106, Eaf = 1.39 × 106, t = 0.275, Vx =
0.18, Vy = 0.32, Do = 48.55, L = 60, F = 5
Calculate γ
3/2
Zp =
(2.46 × 106)
)
2
602
× t)
( 48.55
2
= 1214
210
1/2
(1.35 × 106)
(1.39 × 106)
×
50 × 24
(
50 × 24
0.001 × 3.15 × 106
NOTE: Both t1 and t2 are greater than 0.25 in., the minimum
laminate thickness allowed.
PR
2(0.001E1)
2 0.001 × 1.35 × 106
PR
0.001E2
Therefore let t = t1 = 0.45 in.
Select the greater of (a) or (b) below:
(a) Longitudinal Stress
=
=
=
AF-200 CYLINDRICAL SHELLS UNDER
UNIFORM INTERNAL PRESSURE (SEE
RD-1171.1)
t1
= 0.44 in.
[(1
0.18) × 0.32]1/2
ASME BPVC.X-2021
γ = 0.9
AF-410 THICKNESS OF HEADS UNDER
EXTERNAL PRESSURE (SEE
RD-1173.2)
Pa =
3/4
0.84 × 0.8531 × 0.9 × (2.46 × 106)
0.18) × 0.32]3/4 × 60 ×
[(1
1/4
(1.35 × 106)
(
(0.275)5/2
Assume hand lay‐up head with E1 = E2 = 2.2 × 106 psi.
Therefore, let E = 2.2 × 106 psi, and F = 10. Also, assume:
t = 0.25 in. so: Do = 2R + t = 48.25 in. and Ko = 0.9 for 2:1
ellipsoidal heads, per Table RD-1173.2.
48.55 3/2
×5
2
)
= 1.58 psi
PA
Assume hand lay‐up sphere with E1 = E2 = 2.2 × 106 psi.
Therefore, let E = 2.2 × 106 psi and F = 10. Also, assume:
t = 0.25 in. Therefore, Ro = R + t = 24.25 in.
Allowable pressure:
0.41
PA
=
=
2
1 2) (KoDo)
3(1
ij 2.2 × 106 yz
zz0.252
0.41jjjj
zz
10
k
{
0.27 × 0.23) (0.9 × 48.25)2
3(1
PA
2
1 2) R o
0.27 × 0.23) 24.252
3(1
(a) Length of Secondary Overlay on Nozzle. For internal
pressure, let F = 10; also, let r = 4 in. = inside radius of
nozzle.
= 5.72 psi
=
=
Lb
= 1 in. < 3 in.
)
tb =
t
= 0.55 in.
=
(b) Hemispherical Head
t
=
=
1000
10
Therefore, let Lb = 3 in.
(b) Thickness of Secondary Overlay on Nozzle. Assume
secondary laminate modulus E = E1 = E2 = 2.2 × 106 psi.
Therefore, let E = 2.2 × 106 psi and Sa = 0.001E = 2.2 × 103
psi = allowable stress of secondary overlay.
50 × 48
(
F
50 × 4
2
PD
2(0.001E)
2 0.001 × 2.2 × 106
= S
s
2
Assume hand lay‐up head with E1 = E2 = 2.2 × 106 psi.
Therefore, let E = 2.2 × 10 6 and let D = 2R = inside
diameter = 48 in.
(a) Ellipsoidal Head
=
Pr
Lb
AF-400 THICKNESS OF HEADS UNDER
INTERNAL PRESSURE (SEE
RD-1173.1)
t
= 1.78 psi
AF-420 REINFORCEMENT OF OPENINGS AND
NOZZLE ATTACHMENTS (SEE
RD-1174.2)
2.2 × 106
0.41
0.252
10
PA
=
E
× t2
F
3(1
=
E
F
0.41 t 2
AF-310 SPHERICAL SHELLS UNDER UNIFORM
EXTERNAL PRESSURE (SEE
RD-1172.2)
PR
2(0.001E)
tb
Pr
Sa
50 × 4
2.2 × 103
= 0.09 in. < 0.25 in.
50 × 24
2 0.001 × 2.2 × 106
(
Therefore, let tb = 0.25 in.
)
NOTE: In both (a) and (b) above, the minimum allowable dimension governs.
t
= 0.27 in.
211
ASME BPVC.X-2021
(c) Thickness of Reinforcement Pad on Shell or Head.
Assume secondary laminate modulus
E = E1 = E2 = 2.2 × 106 psi. Therefore, let
E2 = 2.2 × 106 and t = 0.25 in. = shell thickness. Select
the greater of (1) and (2) below:
(1) Compute
t p2 = 0.27 in. < 0.55.
Therefore let tp = tp1 = 0.55 in.
(d) Length of Reinforcing Pad. Assume Lc = 2r = 8
in. = longest chord length of opening.
PR
0.001E2
50 × 24
t p1 =
=
LcP
4Ss
F
Lp =
2.2 × 103
8 × 50
= 4 × 1000
10
t p1
= 0.55 in.
Lp = 3.14 in. < 6 in.
(2) Compute as follows.
Step 1. Compute Beta factor
=
=
4 3(1
1 2)
2
4 3(1
according to the requirements of RD-1174.2(f)(2)(-b),
therefore, let Lp = 6 in.
r
Rt
0.27 × 0.23)
2
AF-500 HEAD‐TO‐SHELL JOINT OVERLAY
SUBJECT TO INTERNAL PRESSURE
(SEE RD-1175.2)
4
24 × 0.25
(a) Thickness of Overlay
= 1.06
to =
Step 2. Determine K t from Figure RD-1174.3 for
β = 1.06. Kt = 8.8.
Step 3. Compute maximum stress at opening. Let
S2 = 0.001E2 = 2.2 × 103 psi = allowable stress for the
laminate in the circumferential direction. Smax = S2Kt
= 1.94 × 104 psi.
Step 4. Determine the moment M associated with Smax:
=
P(R + t )
0.001E2
50(24 + 0.25)
0.001 × 2.2 × 106
to = 0.55 in.
2
Smax t
6
1.94 × 104 × 0.252
=
6
(b) Length of Overlay
M =
Lo =
=
M = 201.7 in.
lb
Step 5. Determine reinforcement pad thickness. Let Ef
= 2.25 × 106 psi = flexural modulus of reinforcing laminate
in the circumferential direction. Sf = 0.001Ef
= 2.25 × 103 psi = allowable stress.
6
t p2 =
M
2
6
=
201.7
2
2.25 × 103
( )
50 × 24
(
2 × 1000
10
Lo = 6 in.
t
Sf
PR
2Ss
F
0.25
212
)
ASME BPVC.X-2021
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX AG
GUIDE TO INFORMATION APPEARING ON CERTIFICATE OF
AUTHORIZATION (SEE FIGURE AG-1)
Table AG-1
Guide to Information Appearing on Certificate of Authorization (See Figure AG-1)
Item
Description
(1)
Certification Mark granted by the Society, with RP Designator.
(2)
–The name of the Manufacturer; this description could include “doing business as” (DBA) or an abbreviation of the name.
– The full street address or physical location, city, state or province, country, and zip code.
(3)
This entry describes the scope and limitations, if any, on use of the Certification Mark and Designator, as illustrated below.
RP Designator
– Manufacture of Class I reinforced plastic pressure vessels at the above location only.
– Manufacture of Class II reinforced plastic pressure vessels at the above location only.
– Manufacture of Class I and Class II reinforced plastic pressure vessels at the above location only.
– Manufacture of Class II reinforced plastic pressure vessels at field sites controlled by the above location.
– Manufacture of Class I and Class II reinforced plastic pressure vessels at the above location and Class II reinforced plastic
pressure vessels only at field sites controlled by that location.
– Manufacture of Class II reinforced plastic pressure vessels at the above location only and at field sites controlled by that
location.
– Manufacture of Class III reinforced plastic pressure vessels at the above location only.
– Manufacture of Class I and Class III reinforced plastic pressure vessels at the above location only.
– Manufacture of Class I, Class II, and Class III reinforced plastic pressure vessels at the above location only.
– Manufacture of Class I and Class III reinforced plastic pressure vessels at the above location only and Class II reinforced
plastic pressure vessels at the above location only and at field sites controlled by that location.
(4)
The date authorization was granted by the Society to use the Certification Mark stamp indicated.
(5)
The date authorization to use the Certification Mark stamp will expire.
(6)
A unique Certificate number assigned by the Society.
(7),(8)
The signatures of the current chair and managing director.
213
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Figure AG-1
Sample Certificate of Authorization
CERTIFICATE OF
AUTHORIZATION
CERTIFICATION MARK
PL
E
The named company is authorized by The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers (ASME) for the scope of activity shown below in accordance with the
applicable rules of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. The use of the
Certification Mark and the authority granted by this Certificate of Authorization are
subject to the provisions of the agreement set forth in the application. Any
construction stamped with this Certification Mark shall have been built strictly in
accordance with the provisions of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
SCOPE:
SA
M
COMPANY:
AUTHORIZED:
EXPIRES:
CERTIFICATE NUMBER:
CHAIR, BOARD ON CONFORMITY ASSESSMENT
MANAGING DIRECTOR, CONFORMITY ASSESSMENT
214
ASME BPVC.X-2021
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX AH
GUIDANCE FOR THE USE OF U.S. CUSTOMARY AND SI UNITS IN
THE ASME BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE
included in the SI equivalent if there was any question.
The values of allowable stress in Section II, Part D generally include three significant figures.
(e) Minimum thickness and radius values that are
expressed in fractions of an inch were generally converted
according to the following table:
AH-100 USE OF UNITS IN EQUATIONS
The equations in this Section are suitable for use with
either the U.S. Customary or the SI units provided in
Mandatory Appendix 7, or with the units provided in
the nomenclatures associated with the equations. It is
the responsibility of the individual and organization
performing the calculations to ensure that appropriate
units are used. Either U.S. Customary or SI units may
be used as a consistent set. When necessary to convert
from one system of units to another, the units shall be
converted to at least three significant figures for use in
calculations and other aspects of construction.
Fraction, in.
AH-200 GUIDELINES USED TO DEVELOP SI
EQUIVALENTS
The following guidelines were used to develop SI
equivalents:
(a) SI units are placed in parentheses after the U.S.
Customary units in the text.
(b) In general, separate SI tables are provided if interpolation is expected. The table designation (e.g., table
number) is the same for both the U.S. Customary and
SI tables, with the addition of suffix “M” to the designator
for the SI table, if a separate table is provided. In the text,
references to a table use only the primary table number
(i.e., without the “M”). For some small tables, where interpolation is not required, SI units are placed in parentheses
after the U.S. Customary unit.
(c) Separate SI versions of graphical information
(charts) are provided, except that if both axes are dimensionless, a single figure (chart) is used.
(d) In most cases, conversions of units in the text were
done using hard SI conversion practices, with some soft
conversions on a case‐by‐case basis, as appropriate. This
was implemented by rounding the SI values to the number
of significant figures of implied precision in the existing
U.S. Customary units. For example, 3,000 psi has an
implied precision of one significant figure. Therefore,
the conversion to SI units would typically be to 20 000
kPa. This is a difference of about 3% from the “exact”
or soft conversion of 20 684.27 kPa. However, the precision of the conversion was determined by the Committee
on a case‐by‐case basis. More significant digits were
Difference, %
1
∕32
0.8
−0.8
3
∕64
1.2
−0.8
1
∕16
1.5
5.5
3
∕32
2.5
−5.0
1
ð21Þ
Proposed SI
Conversion, mm
∕8
3
5.5
5
∕32
4
−0.8
3
∕16
5
−5.0
7
∕32
5.5
1
1.0
∕4
6
5.5
∕16
8
−0.8
∕8
10
−5.0
∕16
11
1.0
∕2
13
−2.4
∕16
5
∕8
11
∕16
3
∕4
7
∕8
14
2.0
16
−0.8
17
2.6
19
0.3
22
1.0
1
25
1.6
5
3
7
1
9
(f) For nominal sizes that are in even increments of
inches, even multiples of 25 mm were generally used.
Intermediate values were interpolated rather than
converting and rounding to the nearest mm. See examples
in the following table. [Note that this table does not apply
to nominal pipe sizes (NPS), which are covered below.]
Size, in.
215
Size, mm
1
25
11∕8
29
11∕4
32
11∕2
38
2
50
21∕4
57
ASME BPVC.X-2021
(h) Areas in square inches (in.2) were converted to
square millimeters (mm 2 ), and areas in square feet
(ft2) were converted to square meters (m2). See examples
in the following table:
Table continued
Size, in.
Size, mm
21∕2
64
3
75
31∕2
89
Area (U.S. Customary)
Area (SI)
4
100
41∕2
1 in.2
650 mm2
114
6 in.
2
4 000 mm2
5
125
10 in.
2
6 500 mm2
6
150
5 ft2
8
200
12
300
18
450
20
500
24
600
(i) Volumes in cubic inches (in.3) were converted to
cubic millimeters (mm 3 ), and volumes in cubic feet
(ft3) were converted to cubic meters (m3). See examples
in the following table:
36
900
40
1 000
54
1 350
60
1 500
72
1 800
Size or Length, ft
Size or Length, m
3
5
6 in.3
100 000 mm3
3
160 000 mm3
0.14 m3
(j) Although the pressure should always be in MPa for
calculations, there are cases where other units are used in
the text. For example, kPa is used for small pressures. Also,
rounding was to one significant figure (two at the most) in
most cases. See examples in the following table. (Note that
14.7 psi converts to 101 kPa, while 15 psi converts to 100
kPa. While this may seem at first glance to be an anomaly, it
is consistent with the rounding philosophy.)
1.5
SI Practice
16 000 mm3
5 ft
60
U.S.
Customary
Practice
Volume (SI)
1 in.3
3
(g) For nominal pipe sizes, the following relationships
were used:
U.S.
Customary
Practice
Volume (U.S. Customary)
10 in.
1
200
0.5 m2
Pressure (U.S. Customary)
SI Practice
Pressure (SI)
0.5 psi
3 kPa
2 psi
15 kPa
20 kPa
NPS 1∕8
DN 6
NPS 20
DN 500
NPS 1∕4
DN 8
NPS 22
DN 550
3 psi
NPS 3∕8
DN 10
NPS 24
DN 600
10 psi
70 kPa
101 kPa
1
NPS ∕2
DN 15
NPS 26
DN 650
14.7 psi
NPS 3∕4
DN 20
NPS 28
DN 700
15 psi
100 kPa
NPS 1
DN 25
NPS 30
DN 750
30 psi
200 kPa
NPS 11∕4
DN 32
NPS 32
DN 800
50 psi
350 kPa
NPS 11∕2
DN 40
NPS 34
DN 850
100 psi
700 kPa
NPS 2
DN 50
NPS 36
DN 900
150 psi
1 MPa
NPS 21∕2
DN 65
NPS 38
DN 950
200 psi
1.5 MPa
NPS 3
DN 80
NPS 40
DN 1 000
250 psi
1.7 MPa
NPS 31∕2
DN 90
NPS 42
DN 1 050
300 psi
2 MPa
350 psi
2.5 MPa
NPS 4
DN 100
NPS 44
DN 1 100
NPS 5
DN 125
NPS 46
DN 1 150
400 psi
3 MPa
NPS 6
DN 150
NPS 48
DN 1 200
500 psi
3.5 MPa
4 MPa
NPS 8
DN 200
NPS 50
DN 1 250
600 psi
NPS 10
DN 250
NPS 52
DN 1 300
1,200 psi
8 MPa
NPS 12
DN 300
NPS 54
DN 1 350
1,500 psi
10 MPa
2,000 psi
14 MPa
NPS 14
DN 350
NPS 56
DN 1 400
NPS 16
DN 400
NPS 58
DN 1 450
NPS 18
DN 450
NPS 60
DN 1 500
216
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Table continued
(k) Material properties that are expressed in psi or ksi
(e.g., allowable stress, yield and tensile strength, elastic
modulus) were generally converted to MPa to three significant figures. See example in the following table:
Strength (U.S. Customary)
Strength (SI)
95,000 psi
655 MPa
Temperature, °C
2,050
1 120
AH-300 SOFT CONVERSION FACTORS
The following table of “soft” conversion factors is
provided for convenience. Multiply the U.S. Customary
value by the factor given to obtain the SI value. Similarly,
divide the SI value by the factor given to obtain the U.S.
Customary value. In most cases it is appropriate to round
the answer to three significant figures.
(l) In most cases, temperatures (e.g., for PWHT) were
rounded to the nearest 5°C. Depending on the implied
precision of the temperature, some were rounded to
the nearest 1°C or 10°C or even 25°C. Temperatures
colder than 0°F (negative values) were generally
rounded to the nearest 1°C. The examples in the table
below were created by rounding to the nearest 5°C,
with one exception:
Temperature, °F
Temperature, °F
U.S.
Customary
Temperature, °C
SI
Factor
Notes
in.
mm
25.4
…
ft
m
0.3048
…
70
20
in.2
mm2
645.16
…
100
38
ft2
m2
0.09290304
…
120
50
in.3
mm3
16,387.064
…
150
65
ft3
m3
0.02831685
…
200
95
U.S. gal.
m
0.003785412
…
250
120
U.S. gal.
liters
3.785412
…
300
150
psi
0.0068948
350
175
MPa
(N/mm2)
Used exclusively in
equations
400
205
psi
kPa
6.894757
450
230
Used only in text and
for nameplate
500
260
psi
bar
0.06894757
…
290
ft-lb
J
1.355818
…
600
315
°F
°C
5
∕9 × (°F −32)
650
345
Not for temperature
difference
370
°F
°C
5
700
∕9
For temperature
differences only
750
400
R
K
5
∕9
800
425
Absolute
temperature
850
455
lbm
kg
0.4535924
…
900
480
lbf
N
4.448222
…
925
495
in.-lb
N·mm
112.98484
950
510
Use exclusively in
equations
1,000
540
550
3
ft-lb
N·m
1.3558181
Use only in text
1.0988434
…
1,050
565
ksi in.
MPa m
1,100
595
Btu/hr
W
0.2930711
1,150
620
Use for boiler rating
and heat transfer
1,200
650
lb/ft3
kg/m3
16.018463
…
1,250
675
1,800
980
1,900
1 040
2,000
1 095
217
ASME BPVC.X-2021
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX AI
RIGOROUS NASA SP‐8007 SOLUTION FOR LATERAL AND
LONGITUDINAL PRESSURE
AI-100
ÄÅ
É
ÅÅ C11 C12 C13 ÑÑÑ
ÅÅ
ÑÑ
ÅÅ
ÑÑ
det ÅÅÅC21 C22 C23 ÑÑÑ
ÅÅ
ÑÑ
ÅÅ
Ñ
ÅÅÇC31 C32 C33 ÑÑÑÖ
R
Pa =
ÅÄÅ
ÑÉ
ÅÄÅ C
ÑÉ
Å
ÅÅ 11 C12 ÑÑÑ
1 m R 2 ÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑ
FS ÅÅÅÅn2 +
ÑÑ det ÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅ
ÑÑÑ
ÅÅC 21 C 22 ÑÑÑ
2
L
Ç
Ö
ÅÇ
ÑÖ
( )
2
C33 =
m
L
+ A 66
R
C 22 =
A22
n 2
m
+ A 66
R
L
+ 2(D12 + 2D66)
C13 =
A12 m
R
L
( )
()
2
( )
2 n 2
A
2B22 n 2
2B12 m
n 4
+ D22
+ 22
+
+
2
R
R
R
R
R
L
R
m
L
( )( )
m
L
()
3
()
( )
+ (B12 + 2B66 )
C31 =
C13
+ B11
C12 =
m
L
n 2
R
( )( )
( mL )( Rn )
(A12 + A 66)
C21 =
C 23 =
2
(n)
A11
4
( )
D11
( mL )
C11 =
m
L
2 n
R
C12
( )( )
(B12 + 2B66 )
218
+
A22 n
R R
()
+ B22
n 3
R
()
2
( )
ASME BPVC.X-2021
C32 =
C23
where
A, B, D = values from the classical ABD matrix
n, m = integers varied to obtain the combination that gives the lowest buckling pressure
R = Do/2
For axial loading only (lb/in.),
Nxa =
ÅÄÅ C
ÑÉ
ÅÅ 11 C12 C13 ÑÑÑ
ÅÅ
ÑÑ
Å
Ñ
det ÅÅÅC21 C22 C23 ÑÑÑ
2
ÑÑ
L
ÅÅÅ
ÑÑ
ÅÅC
ÅÇ 31 C32 C33 ÑÑÖ
m
ÅÄÅ C
ÑÉ
FS
ÅÅ 11 C12 ÑÑÑ
Å
ÑÑ
det ÅÅ
ÅÅC 21 C 22 ÑÑÑ
ÅÇ
ÑÖ
( )
For cylindrical bending loads, the maximum line load (lb/in.) from the bending moment, M (in.-lb), line load is calculated from M /πR2. It is recommended that it not exceed 75% of the critical axial line load, Nxa, as calculated above per
NASA SP‐8007.
AI-200 BUCKLING EXAMPLE
(a) Introduction. This demonstrates the use of the rigorous NASA SP‐8007 solution and the simplified equation for
cylinder buckling due to external pressure in RD-1172. The following laminate is used for evaluation purposes:
Material (Top to Bottom)
Veil
E1, psi
550,000
E2, psi
550,000
ν12
G12, psi
0.34
200,000
390,000
t, in.
0.013
Two mats
1,030,000
1,030,000
0.34
(±54)3
1,140,000
1,600,000
0.45
0.086
Mat
1,030,000
1,030,000
0.34
390,000
0.043
Woven roving
2,296,640
1,957,986
0.124
270,000
0.039
Mat
1,030,000
1,030,000
0.34
390,000
0.043
1,000,000
0.127
From this, the classical laminate theory ABD matrix is calculated as follows:
ÄÅ
É
ÅÅ 501,426.04 208,198.05
0.00
5,608.95 1,262.41
0.00 ÑÑÑÑ
ÅÅ
ÑÑ
ÅÅ
ÑÑ
ÅÅ 208,198.05 569,659.28
0.00
1,262.41
3,035.67
0.00
ÑÑ
ÅÅ
ÑÑ
ÅÅ
ÑÑ
ÅÅ
0.00
0.00
207,210.00
0.00
0.00
1,118.52
Å
ÑÑÑ
ABD = ÅÅÅ
ÑÑ
ÅÅ 5,608.95 1,262.41
ÑÑ
0.00
4,662.20
1,400.18
0.00
ÅÅ
ÑÑ
ÅÅ
ÑÑ
ÅÅ 1,262.41
ÑÑ
3,035.67
0.00
1,400.18
4,613.11
0.00
ÅÅ
ÑÑ
ÅÅ
Ñ
ÅÅÇ
0.00
0.00
1,118.52
0.00
0.00
1,391.70 ÑÑÑÖ
The ABD inverse matrix (required for the simplified equation) is then
ABD 1
ÅÄÅ
ÅÅ 2.42021 × 10 6 9.06151 × 10 7
ÅÅ
ÅÅ
7
2.10438 × 10 6
ÅÅÅ 9.06151 × 10
ÅÅ
ÅÅ
0
0
= ÅÅÅ
ÅÅ 3.88959 × 10 6
2.36602 × 10 6
ÅÅ
ÅÅÅ
ÅÅ 2.43918 × 10 6 2.35091 × 10 6
ÅÅ
ÅÅ
0
0
ÅÇ
0
0
4.84705 × 10 6
0
0
3.89561 × 10 6
219
3.88959 × 10 6
2.36602 × 10 6
0
2.43918 × 10 6
2.35091 × 10 6
0
2.42724 × 10 4
7.62934 × 10 5
0
7.62934 × 10 5
2.42145 × 10 4
0
ÑÉÑ
0
ÑÑÑ
ÑÑ
ÑÑ
0
ÑÑ
ÑÑ
6
3.89561 × 10 ÑÑÑ
ÑÑ
ÑÑ
0
ÑÑ
ÑÑ
ÑÑ
0
ÑÑ
Ñ
4
7.21677 × 10 ÑÑÑÖ
ASME BPVC.X-2021
(b) Solution. The rigorous NASA SP‐8007 solution is calculated as follows: The constants used in the NASA SP‐8007
solution are defined as
A11 = ABD1,1
A12 = ABD1,2
A16 = ABD1,3
A26 = ABD2,3
A22 = ABD2,2
A 66 = ABD3,3
B11 = ABD4,1
B12 = ABD5,1
B16 = ABD6,1
A26 = ABD5,3
B22 = ABD5,2
B66 = ABD6,3
D12 = ABD5,4
D16 = ABD6,4
D26 = ABD6,5
D22 = ABD5,5
D11 = ABD4,4
D66 = ABD6,6
The A11 term is the 1,1 term and the D11 term is the 4,4 term from the ABD matrix given above. Some values of the
constants, given here to clarify the procedure, are
A11 = 501,426.04
A12 = 208,198.05
D11 = 4,662.20
B12 = 1,262.41
D66 = 1,391.70
A 66 = 207,210.00
B26 = 0
The cylinder dimensions and the buckling modes being evaluated are
R = 36.351 (outside radius, in.)
L = 72 (design length between stiffeners, in.)
F = 5 (design factor)
m = 1, 2..., 30 and n = 1, 2..., 30 (modes in the hoop and axial directions, taking on integer values between 1 and 30)
t = 0.351 (total thickness of laminate; this is required input for calculating effective mechanical properties for the
simplified equation, in.)
The preliminary calculations for the NASA SP‐8007 equations for the first 30 × 30 modes are
2
( mL )
C11 m , n = A11
2
(n)
+ A 66
R
2
C 22 m , n = A22
4
( mL )
C33 m , n = D11
2
+ 2(D12 + 2D66)
( Rn )
2
+ A 66
2
( mL ) ( Rn )
( mL )
4
(n)
+ D22
R
C12 m , n = (A12 + A 66)
+
A22
R2
+
2B22 n 2
2B12 m
+
R
R
R
L
()
( mL )( Rn )
C21 m , n = C12 m , n
2
C 23 m , n = (B12 + 2B66)
( mL ) ( Rn ) +
C32 m , n = C23 m , n
220
A22 n
R R
3
( ) + B22( Rn )
2
( )
ASME BPVC.X-2021
3
A12 m
R
L
2
( ) + B11( mL )
C13 m , n =
+ (B12 + 2B66)
( mL )( Rn )
C31 m , n = C13 m , n
ÅÄÅ C
ÑÉ
ÅÅ 11 C12 C13 ÑÑÑ
ÅÅ
Ñ
The determinant of the matrix ÅÅÅC 21 C 22 C 23 ÑÑÑÑ can be calculated from
ÅÅ
ÑÑ
ÅÅÇC31 C32 C33 ÑÑÖ
det Nm , n
= C11 m , n (C 22 m , n C33 m , n
C32 m , n C 23 m , n)
+ C31 m , n (C12 m , n C23 m , n
C 22 m , n C13 m , n)
C 21 m , n (C12 m , n C33 m , n
C32 m , n C13 m , n)
ÄÅ
É
ÅÅ C
C ÑÑÑ
The determinant of the matrix ÅÅÅ 11 12 ÑÑÑ can be calculated from
ÅÅÇC 21 C 22 ÑÑÖ
det Dm , n = C11 m , n C 22 m , n
C 21 m , n C12 m , n
The critical pressure for lateral and longitudinal pressure is then calculated by varying the m and n integers to obtain
the smallest value of Pa (allowable design lateral and longitudinal pressure) for the first 30 × 30 modes
det Nm , n
R
Pa m , n = ÅÄ
É
Ñ
ÅÅ
1 m R 2 ÑÑÑÑ det Dm , n
FÅÅÅÅn2 +
ÑÑ
ÅÅÅ
ÑÑÑ
2
L
Ç
Ö
( )
For this example, the lowest modes are n = 6 and m = 1, and the allowable design buckling pressure, psi, including a 5:1
factor of safety is
min (Pa) = 1.059
(c) Using Simplified Equation. The procedure for using the simplified equation per RD-1172.1 is given below. The
mechanical properties needed are calculated from
1
(ABD
1 =
Eat =
(ABD
)5,4
1
)4,4
1
(ABD
= 0.314
2 =
A11A22
A122
= 1,211,778
A22 t
Ehf =
Eaf =
12
t 3(ABD
1
)5,5
(ABD
)5,4
1
)5,5
12
3
t (ABD
1
)4,4
= 0.315
= 1,143,266
= 1,146,001
where the constants used for calculation are from the ABD and ABD inverse matrices using the notation shown above for
the NASA SP‐8007 solution. The allowable design external pressure is then calculated from
Zp =
=
(if Zp
3 2 1 2
Ehf
Eat
Eaf
100, 1
2
(1
2
1 2L
= 398.465
1 2)
Rt
)
0.001Zp; otherwise 0.9
221
= 0.9
Do = 2R
F = 5
KD = 0.84
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Pa =
3 4 1 4 5 2
(KD)0.8531( )Ehf
Eat t
(1
3 4
L(Do
1 2)
2)3 2 F
= 0.7498 psi
where
Do
Eaf
Eat
Ehf
F
KD
x
L
Pa
ν1
ν2
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
outside diameter of shell, in.
axial flexural modulus, psi
axial tensile modulus, psi
hoop flexural modulus, psi
design factor = 5
a knockdown factor to cover all data points using the rigorous equations
0.84
design length of a vessel section, in.
allowable design buckling pressure
flexural Poisson’s ratio in the axial direction
flexural Poisson’s ratio in the hoop direction
222
ASME BPVC.X-2021
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX AJ
FORMS REQUIRED BY SECTION X
Table AJ-1
Latest Revision and Year Date of Forms Referenced in This Code
Revision
Year
Form Q-106 [Note (1)]
Designator
C
2017
Form Q-107 [Note (1)]
C
2017
Form Q-108 [Note (1)]
C
2017
Form Q-115 [Note (1)]
C
2017
Form Q-120 [Note (1)]
D
2021
Form RP-1
D
2017
Form RP-2
D
2017
Form RP-3
E
2017
Form RP-4
D
2017
Form RP-5
C
2017
Form CPV-1
A
2017
Form CPV-2
A
2017
Figure Q-115.1
A
1998
NOTE: (1) The Fabricator shall provide the information
required by the form. The form in this Appendix is recommended but not required. The Fabricator shall reference the
applicable ASME form with the required information.
223
ð21Þ
ASME BPVC.X-2021
FORM Q-106
RECOMMENDED FORM FOR QUALIFYING THE VESSEL DESIGN AND THE PROCEDURE
SPECIFICATION USED IN FABRICATING BAG-MOLDED AND CENTRIFUGALLY CAST
FIBER-REINFORCED PLASTIC PRESSURE VESSELS (CLASS I)
(Revision C — 2017)
Specification No.
Process
A change in any of the essential variables denoted by an asterisk below requires a new Procedure Specification.
*Fiberglass
(Manufacturer and Designation)
*Sizing
(Manufacturer and Designation)
Form of Reinforcement
(Cut Strand, Mats, or Preforms)
Binder for Mats and Preforms
(Polyester Emulsion, Polyester in Alcohol, Polyester Powder, etc.)
Weight of Binder
Solubility
(Percent)
Mats
(High or Low Resistance to Styrene)
(oz/sq ft; 11/2, 2, 3) (gr/m2; 450, 600, 900)
Preforms
(Weight of Binder)
*Resin
(Type, Manufacturer, and Designation)
*Curing Agent
(Type, Manufacturer, and Designation)
Viscosity of Resin System
*Cure
Mandrel
(Time)
(Temperature)
(Pressure)
(Time)
(Temperature)
(Pressure)
(Time)
(Temperature)
Mold
*Post Cure
Furnace
*Percent Glass in Composite
Specific Gravity of Composite (ASTM D 792)
*Initial Bag Pressure
*Final Bag Pressure
Resin Injection Pressure
*Weight of Vessel
*Barcol Hardnesses and Location
Temperature During Lay-up
Pumping Procedure
(07/17)
224
ASME BPVC.X-2021
FORM Q-106 (CONT'D)
(Revision C — 2017)
in.3 (mm3)
*Volumetric Expansion
*Mandrel Rotation, rpm (Centrifugal Casting)
Liner
(Material)
(Thickness)
Qualification
Vessel(s) Serial Number(s)
Design Report Number
Test Report Number
ASME Section X
Edition and Addenda (if applicable) Date
Code Case No.
We certify that the statements made in this Specification are correct.
Date
Signed
(Fabricator)
By
Certificate of Authorization No.
Expires
CERTIFICATION BY SHOP INSPECTOR
OF QUALIFICATION OF DESIGN AND FABRICATION PROCEDURE
Procedure Specification of
for
at
process of fabricating vessel(s) described in
Design Specification and
(User)
(Fabricator)
Design Report Number
I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors
and employed by
of
have witnessed the tests by which the design of the vessel(s) and the fabrication procedure have been qualified and
state that, to the best of my knowledge and belief, these tests of the prototype vessel(s) and the fabrication procedure
employed in constructing the vessel(s) satisfy the requirements of Section X of the ASME BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL
CODE, Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels.
By signing this certificate, neither the Inspector nor his employer makes any warranty, expressed or implied,
concerning the design or procedure covered by the Fabricator's Design Report. Furthermore, neither the Inspector nor his
employer shall be liable in any manner for any personal injury or property damage or loss of any kind arising from or
connected with this inspection.
Date
Commission
(National Board Authorized Inspector Number)
(Authorized Inspector's Signature)
(07/17)
225
ASME BPVC.X-2021
FORM Q-107
RECOMMENDED FORM FOR QUALIFYING THE VESSEL DESIGN AND THE PROCEDURE
SPECIFICATION USED IN FABRICATING FILAMENT-WOUND FIBER-REINFORCED PLASTIC
PRESSURE VESSELS (CLASS I)
(Revision C — 2017)
Procedure Specification No.
A change in any of the essential variables denoted by an asterisk below requires a new Procedure Specification.
*Fiber
(Manufacturer and Designation)
*Sizing or Finish
(Manufacturer and Designation)
*Resin
(Type, Manufacturer, and Designation)
*Curing Agent
(Type, Manufacturer, and Designation)
Viscosity of Resin System
cP (min.) to
8F (8C)
cP (max.) @
*Manner of impregnation
(Prepreg, Wet Wind, Postpreg)
*Percent Fiber by Weight in Composite
*Variables of Winding Process
(measured on cylinder between axis and band path)
Helix Angle
Pattern Description
Band Density: Helical
end/in. (end/mm)
Circumferential
end/in. (end/mm)
Bandwidth:
in. (mm)
Circumferential
in. (mm)
Helical
Tension: Per Strand (End), Roving, or Band (specify which)
lb (N) per
Method of Control
Program
Layer Sequence
[Note (1)]
Ratio Hel./Circ. in Cylinder
*Curing Schedule
Manner of Measuring Temperature:
Mandrel
8F (8C)
8F (8C)
8F (8C)
8F (8C)
8F (8C)
for
for
for
for
for
hr
hr
hr
hr
hr
Oven Air
min
min
min
min
min
Winding Surface
Other
(Describe)
*Liner
(Manufacturer and Designation)
(Thickness)
(Method of Installing Liner)
NOTE:
(1) Use X to indicate layer of helical winding
(a) “O” to indicate full layer of circumferential windings (down and back)
(b) “o” to indicate half-layer of circumferential windings (one pass)
Where a range of values or a tolerance applies, state the applicable range or tolerance.
(07/17)
226
ASME BPVC.X-2021
FORM Q-107 (CONT’D)
(Revision C — 2017)
Manner of Reinforcing Openings
(Describe)
*Pole Pieces
(Material)
(Method of Installing: Wound-in, Bonded, etc.)
(Auxiliary Uses)
Head Contour
(Describe)
Type of Mandrel
(Describe)
Type of Winding Machine
(Describe)
*Weight of Vessel
*Barcol Hardnesses and Location
*Volumetric Expansion
Qualification:
Vessel(s) Serial Number(s)
Design Report Number
Test Report Number
ASME Section X
Edition and Addenda (if applicable) Date
Code Case No.
We certify that the statements made in this Specification are correct.
Date
Signed
(Fabricator)
By
Certification of Authorization No.
Expires
CERTIFICATION BY SHOP INSPECTOR
OF QUALIFICATION OF DESIGN AND FABRICATION PROCEDURE
Procedure Specification of
for
at
process of fabricating vessel(s) described in
Design Specification and
(User)
(Fabricator)
Design Report Number
I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors
and employed by
of
have witnessed the tests by which the design of the vessel(s) and the fabrication procedure have been qualified and
state that, to the best of my knowledge and belief, these tests of the prototype vessel(s) and the fabrication procedure
employed in constructing the vessel(s) satisfy the requirements of Section X of the ASME BOILER AND PRESSURE
VESSEL CODE, Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels.
By signing this certificate, neither the Inspector nor his employer makes any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning the design procedure covered by the Fabricator’s Design Report. Furthermore, neither the Inspector nor his
employer shall be liable in any manner for any personal injury or property damage or loss of any kind arising from or
connected with this inspection.
Date
Commission
(National Board Authorized Inspector Number)
(Authorized Inspector’s Signature)
(07/17)
227
ASME BPVC.X-2021
FORM Q-108
RECOMMENDED FORM FOR QUALIFYING THE VESSEL DESIGN AND THE PROCEDURE
SPECIFICATION USED IN FABRICATING CONTACT-MOLDED, FIBER-REINFORCED PLASTIC
PRESSURE VESSELS (CLASS I)
(Revision C — 2017)
(A change in any of the essential variables denoted by an asterisk below requires a new Procedure Specification.)
I.
Procedure Specification Number
II.
Vessel or Vessel Part Identification
(Use separate sheet for each separate part or component)
III.
Materials for Vessel/Vessel Part or Secondary Overlay
Reinforcements
1.
2.
3.
4.
Material
Material
Material
Material
No.
No.
No.
No.
*Fiber Type
*Fiber Form
*Manufacturer
*Manufacturing No.
1
2
3
4
Resin System
Material Type
Manufacturer
Manufacturing No.
*1. Resin
*2. Catalyst
*3. Promoter
IV.
Laminate Construction for Vessel or Vessel Part (Use separate sheet for each part)
Total Thickness
*Total Number of Plies
*Ply Sequence and Orientation (Ply No. 1 next to process)
Ply No.
Fiber Material No.
Fiber Orientation
Reference Axis
(Use additional sheets if necessary)
*Cure Method
V.
hr
1/2
*Design Barcol Hardness
*Design Fiber by Weight
8F (8C)
*Post Cure
%
1/2
%
Assembly of Vessel Parts
Bond to Join Vessel Part A
to Vessel Part B
(Use separate sheet for each Joint)
*Method of Surface Preparation for Secondary Overlay
*Distance of S.P. From Mating Joint: Part A
in.
Part B
Overlay Construction — Interior Surface (if applicable)
*Number of Plies
Thickness
*Overlay Length
(07/17)
228
in.
ASME BPVC.X-2021
FORM Q-108 (CONT’D)
(Revision C — 2017)
*Ply Sequence and Orientation (Ply No. 1 next to joined parts)
Ply No.
Fiber Material No.
Fiber Orientation
Reference Axis
(Use additional sheets if necessary)
*Cure Method
*Post Cure
*Design Barcol Hardness
1/2
*Design Fiber by Weight
1/2
%
8F (8C)
hr
%
Overlay Construction — Exterior Surface
*Number of Plies
Thickness
*Overlay Length
*Ply Sequence and Orientation (Ply No. 1 next to joined parts)
Ply No.
Fiber Material No.
Fiber Orientation
Reference Axis
(Use additional sheets if necessary)
*Cure Method
*Post Cure
*Design Barcol Hardness
1/2
*Design Fiber by Weight
VI.
%
1/2
8F (8C)
hr
%
Summary
Component/Part Fabrication
No.
Part Identification
Procedure Specification
1
2
3
4
5
6
(07/17)
229
ASME BPVC.X-2021
FORM Q-108 (CONT’D)
(Revision C — 2017)
Component/Part Assembly
No.
Part A
To
Part B
Procedure Specification No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
in.3 (mm3)
*Vessel Volumeric Expansion
*Vessel Weight
Qualification
Vessel(s) Serial Number(s)
Design Report Number
Test Report Number
ASME Section X
Edition and Addenda (if applicable) Date
Code Case No.
We certify that the statements made in this Specification are correct.
Date
Signed
(Fabricator)
By
Certificate of Authorization No.
Expires
CERTIFICATION BY SHOP INSPECTOR
OF QUALIFICATION OF DESIGN AND FABRICATION PROCEDURE
Procedure Specification of
for
at
process of fabricating vessel(s) described in
Design Specification and
(User)
(Fabricator)
Design Report number
I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors
and employed by
of
have
inspected the components described in Part I of the Procedure Specification and have examined the Quality
Control records documenting its fabrication and state that, to the best of my knowledge and belief, the Fabricator
has fabricated the vessel component(s) in accordance with this Procedure Specification and the requirements of
Section X of the ASME BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE, Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels.
By signing this certificate neither the Inspector nor his employer makes any warranty, expressed or implied,
concerning the design procedure covered by the Fabricator’s Design Report. Furthermore, neither the Inspector nor
his employer shall be liable in any manner for any personal injury or property damage or loss of any kind arising
from or connected with this inspection.
Date
Commission
(National Board Authorized Inspector Number)
(Authorized Inspector’s Signature)
(07/17)
230
ASME BPVC.X-2021
FORM Q-115
RECOMMENDED FORM FOR QUALIFYING THE DESIGN AND THE PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION USED IN
ADHESIVE BONDING OF PARTS OF FIBER-REINFORCED PLASTIC PRESSURE VESSELS (CLASS I)
(Revision C — 2017)
Procedure Specification Number
A change in any of the essential variables denoted by an asterisk below requires a new Procedure Specification.
* Adhesive
(Manufacturer and Designation)
* Curing Agent
(Type, Manufacturer, and Designation)
* Preparation of Surfaces
(Machining, Grinding, Degreasing)
* Application of Adhesive
(Dip)
(Brush)
* Cure
(Time)
(Temperature)
Laminate Used in Test
(a) From Cylindrical Shell: Outside Diameter
†
Length of Lap L
Wall Thickness
Fiber Content
Other Information
(b) From Fabricated Flat Laminate: Thickness
Fiber Content
Length of Lap† L
Other Information
†
As required for tensile test per Fig. Q-115.1.
REDUCED SECTION TENSION SPECIMEN OF BONDED JOINT DIMENSIONED SAME AS TYPE 1 SPECIMEN OF ASTM D 638
U.S. Customary Units
Thickness
of Wall, in.
Reduced
Width, in.
1
1⁄ or
4
under
Over 1⁄4 to 1⁄2 , incl.
Over 1⁄2 to 1, incl.
⁄2
⁄4
3
1
Width
Grip, in.
3
⁄4
11⁄8
11⁄2
SI Units
Overall
Length, in.
Thickness
of Wall, mm
Reduced
Width, mm
Width
Grip, mm
Overall
Length, mm
8.5
9.7
12
6 or less
Over 6 to 13, incl.
Over 13 to 25, incl.
13
19
25
19
28
38
216
246
305
CONDITION OF SPECIMEN
Specimen shall be wiped dry; no other conditioning is required.
RECORD OF SPECIMENS TESTED
Specimen
No.
Thickness
Reduced
Width
Length
of Bond
Overlap
1
2
3
(07/17)
231
Area
of
Bond
Total
Load,
lb
Shear
Stress
ASME BPVC.X-2021
FORM Q-115 (CONT’D)
(Revision C — 2017)
Qualification of Vessel With Bonded Joints
Vessel(s) Serial Number(s)
Design Report Number
Test Report Number
ASME Section X
[Edition and Addenda (if applicable) Date]
(Code Case Number)
We certify that the statements made in this Specification are correct:
Date
Signed
(Fabricator)
By
Certificate of Authorization Number
Expires
CERTIFICATION BY SHOP INSPECTOR
OF QUALIFICATION OF ADHESIVE-BONDING PROCEDURE
Procedure Specification of
for
at
process of fabricating vessel(s) described in
Design Specification and
(User)
(Fabricator)
Design Report Number
I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors
and employed by
of
have witnessed the tests by which the design of the
joint(s) and the adhesive-bonding procedure have been qualified and state that, to the best of my knowledge and belief,
these tests of the prototype joint(s) and the adhesive-bonding procedure employed in constructing the vessel(s) satisfy the
requirements of Section X of the ASME BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE, Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels.
By signing this certificate, neither the Inspector nor his employer makes any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning the
design or procedure covered by the Fabricator’s Design Report. Furthermore, neither the Inspector nor his employer shall
be liable in any manner for any personal injury or property damage or loss of any kind arising from or connected with this
inspection.
Date
Commission
(National Board Authorized Inspector Number)
(Authorized Inspector’s Signature)
(07/17)
232
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Figure Q-115.1
Schematic Views of Permissible Joint Designs for Adhesive‐Bonded Cylinder Joints for Tensile Tests
(Revision A — 1998)
233
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Figure Q-115.1
Schematic Views of Permissible Joint Designs for Adhesive‐Bonded Cylinder Joints for Tensile Tests
(Revision A — 1998) (Cont’d)
Machine jaws
W
W
Adjust filler
strips for
straight pull
L
L
Section A-A
A
8 in.
approx.
Bonded
joint
Filler
strip
A
(e) Specimen Fabricated From
Cylinder of Vessel [Note (3)]
(f) Specimen Fabricated From
Flat Laminate [Note (4)]
Record of Specimens Tested
Specimen
Width, W
[1 in. (25 mm)
Recommended]
Length, L
[2 in. (50 mm)
Recommended]
Area of
Bond,
in.2 (mm 2)
Load Failure, lb
(N)
Shear Strength of Joint, psi
(MPa)
1
2
3
4
5
6
Test Machine Number and Make —————— Pull Rate ———————————
NOTES:
(1) Bonded filler pads for proper jaw grip on tensile machine (if required on small diameter and thick specimens).
(2) L = PD/4S
where
D = vessel diameter, in. (mm)
L = length, in. (mm)
P = burst pressure, psi (MPa)
S = shear strength, psi (MPa)
(3) Use fillers for curved sections.
(4) Fillers not required for thin laminates that can be pulled into flat profile by machine jaws.
234
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ð21Þ
FORM Q-120
PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION FOR CLASS II VESSELS
(Revision D — 2021)
Part I — Fabrication
PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION NUMBER:
NOTE: Procedure Specification Form Q-120 for Class II vessels consists of three parts. Part I, Fabrication, shall be completed
for each separately fabricated reinforced plastic vessel part. It shall specify the materials, ply sequence, ply orientation,
and procedure used to fabricate the part. Part I must be accompanied by Parts II and III.
Essential design variables shall be established during design. Any deviation during fabrication must be so noted and
qualified by the Design Engineer.
I.
FABRICATION IDENTIFICATION DATA
A.
Vessel Identification
Fabricator Name:
Name of User:
B.
Fabricator Vessel No.:
User Vessel Number:
Vessel Part Identification
Part Name or Number:
Fabricator Procedure No.:
(Ref. RQ-110 and Appendix 1, 1-100)
C.
Date Fabricated:
Procdure Date:
Registered Engineer Certifying the Design
II. ESSENTIAL DESIGN VARIABLES (To be established during design)
A.
Materials for Vessel Part
Fiber Reinforcements
Manufacturer
Mfg. No.
Material Type
(Glass, etc.)
Manufacturer
Mfg. No.
Material Type
(Epoxy, etc.)
Material Form
(Mat, etc.)
1. Material No. 1
2. Material No. 2
3. Material No. 3
Resin System
1. Resin
2. Catalyst
3. Promoter
B.
Part Fabrication
1. Liner (if applicable)
a. Composite Liner (if applicable)
Ply No.
Thickness
b. Thermoplastic Liner (if applicable)
Material
Thickness
to Ply No.
Manufacturer
Bonding Method
(07/21)
235
Mfg. No.
ASME BPVC.X-2021
FORM Q-120 (CONT’D)
PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION FOR CLASS II VESSELS
(Revision D — 2021)
Part I — Fabrication (Cont’d)
2. Laminate Construction:
(filament wound, contact molded, or both)
Total Thickness
Number of Plies
Ply Sequence and Orientation (No. 1 ply is next to joined parts)
Ply No.
Fiber Material No.
Fiber Orientation
Reference Axis
(Use additional sheets if necessary)
3. Cure Method
Post Cure
°F (°C)
4. Design Barcol Hardness
±
5. Design Percent Fiber by Weight (Filament Wound)
% ±
6. Design Percent Fiber by Weight (Contact Molded)
%
% ±
7. Filament Winding: Bandwidth
8. Fillers/Pigments:
hr
%
Spacing
Material
Use
Location
III. ENGINEERING CONSTANTS
Documentation of Lamina Properties: Material Property Data Report No.
IV. QUALIFICATION
Part
Date Fabricated:
Design Report No.:
Acceptance Test Report No.:
ASME Section X
for Vessel No.
Date Tested:
Edition and Addenda (if applicable) Date
(07/21)
236
Code Case No.
ASME BPVC.X-2021
FORM Q-120 (CONT’D)
PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION FOR CLASS II VESSELS
(Revision D — 2021)
Part I — Fabrication (Cont’d)
A. Identification of Materials Used in Fabrication
1. Reinforcements
Batch Number
a. Material No. 1
b. Material No. 2
c. Material No. 3
2. Resin
3. Catalyst
4. Promoters
B. Resin Data (for each batch number)
1. Batch No.
2. Resin Viscosity
3. Promotion Rate (ppm)
4. Catalyst Rate (ppm)
5. Gel Time (min.)
C. Fabrication Compliance [see RF-110(c)]
List and explain any variations from the essential design variables listed in Section II above. The Fabricator shall
document as part of his Quality Control System (Appendix 1) that the essential variables established for design are
complied with during fabrication.
1.
2.
3.
(Use additional sheets if necessary)
D. Results of Quality Checks (RQ-140)
1. Visual Check
2. Thickness and Dimensional Checks
3. Barcol Hardness Check
4. Thermoplastic Liner Integrity
(07/21)
237
ASME BPVC.X-2021
FORM Q-120 (CONT’D)
PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION FOR CLASS II VESSELS
(Revision D — 2021)
Part I — Fabrication (Cont’d)
E. Qualification Test (Attach Acceptance Test Report)
Passed:
Failed:
F. Certification
We certify that the statements made in Part I of this Specification are correct.
Signed:
Date:
(Fabricator)
By:
Expires:
Certificate of Authorization No.:
CERTIFICATION BY SHOP INSPECTOR
OF QUALIFICATION OF DESIGN AND FABRICATION PROCEDURE
Procedure Specification of
for
at
process of fabricating vessel(s) described in
Design Specification and
(User)
(Fabricator)
Design Report number
I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors
and employed by
of
have inspected the components described in Part I of the Procedure Specification and have examined the Quality Control
records documenting its fabrication and state that, to the best of my knowledge and belief, the Fabricator has fabricated
the vessel component(s) in accordance with this Procedure Specification and the requirements of Section X of the ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels.
By signing this certificate neither the Inspector nor his employer makes any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning
the design or procedure covered by the Fabricator’s Design Report. Furthermore, neither the Inspector nor his employer
shall be liable in any manner for any personal injury or property damage or loss of any kind arising from or connected with
this inspection.
Date
Commission
(National Board Authorized Inspector Number)
(Authorized Inspector’s signature)
(07/21)
238
ASME BPVC.X-2021
FORM Q-120 (CONT’D)
PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION FOR CLASS II VESSELS
(Revision D — 2021)
Part II — Assembly
PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION NUMBER:
NOTE: Procedure Specification Form Q-120 for Class II vessels consists of three parts. Part II, Assembly, shall be completed for
each secondary lay-up required to join two or more separately fabricated parts. It shall detail the materials, dimensions,
and ply sequences of the secondary overlay. Part II, if applicable, must be accompanied by Parts I and III.
Essential design variables shall be established during design. Any deviation during fabrication must be so noted and
qualified.
I.
ASSEMBLY IDENTIFICATION DATA
A.
Vessel Identification
Fabricator Name:
Name of User:
B.
Fabricator Vessel No.:
User Vessel Number:
Secondary Bond Joint Identification
Fabricator Procedure No.:
Bond to Join Vessel Part A:
Procedure Date:
to Vessel Part B:
II. ESSENTIAL DESIGN VARIABLES
A.
Materials for Secondary Overlay
Fiber
Reinforcements
Manufacturer
Mfg. No.
Material Type
(Glass, etc.)
Manufacturer
Mfg. No.
Material Type
(Epoxy, etc.)
Material Form
(Mat, etc.)
1. Material No. 1
2. Material No. 2
3. Material No. 3
Resin System
1. Resin
2. Catalyst
3. Promoter
B.
Surface Preparation
1. Method
2. Distance From Mating Joint: Part A
Part B
in.
in.
(07/21)
239
ASME BPVC.X-2021
FORM Q-120 (CONT’D)
PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION FOR CLASS II VESSELS
(Revision D — 2021)
Part II — Assembly (Cont’d)
C. Overlay Construction
1. Interior Surface (if applicable)
a. Number of Plies
Thickness
b. Length of Overlay (do not include taper): Part A
Part B
c. Ply Sequence and Orientation (No. 1 ply is next to joined parts)
Ply No.
Fiber Material No.
Fiber Orientation
Reference Axis
(Use additional sheets if necessary)
d. Overlay Termination: Taper over a distance of
e. Percent Fiber Content by Weight
f. Barcol Hardness
2. Exterior Surface
a. Number of Plies
Thickness
b. Length of Overlay (do not include taper): Part A
Part B
c. Ply Sequence and Orientation (No. 1 ply is next to joined parts)
Ply No.
Fiber Material No.
Fiber Orientation
(Use additional sheets if necessary)
d. Overlay Termination: Taper over a distance of
e. Percent Fiber Content by Weight
f. Barcol Hardness
(07/21)
240
Reference Axis
ASME BPVC.X-2021
FORM Q-120 (CONT’D)
PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION FOR CLASS II VESSELS
(Revision D — 2021)
Part II — Assembly (Cont’d)
III. QUALIFICATION
Secondary Overlay to Join Part A:
to Part B:
Design Report No.
Test Report No.
ASME Section X
Edition and Addenda (if applicable) Date
Code Case No.
A. Identification of Materials Used in Assembly
Batch Number
1. Reinforcements
a. Material No. 1
b. Material No. 2
c. Material No. 3
2. Resin
3. Catalyst
4. Promoters
B. Resin Data (for each batch number)
1. Batch No.
2. Resin Viscosity
3. Promotion Rate (ppm)
4. Catalyst Rate (ppm)
5. Gel Time (min.)
C. Fabrication Compliance [see RF-110(c)]
List and explain any variations from the essential design variables listed in Section II of this form (Part II). The
Fabricator shall document as part of his Quality Control System (Appendix 1) that the essential variables established for
design are complied with during fabrication.
1.
2.
3.
(Use additional sheets if necessary)
D. Certification
We certify that the statements made in Part II of this Specification are correct.
Date:
Signed:
(Fabricator)
By:
Certificate of Authorization No.:
Expires:
(07/21)
241
ASME BPVC.X-2021
FORM Q-120 (CONT’D)
PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION FOR CLASS II VESSELS
(Revision D — 2021)
Part II — Assembly (Cont’d)
CERTIFICATION BY SHOP INSPECTOR
OF QUALIFICATION OF DESIGN AND FABRICATION PROCEDURE
Procedure Specification of
for
at
process of fabricating vessel(s) described in
Design Specification and
(User)
(Fabricator)
Design Report number
I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors
and employed by
of
have inspected the assembly joint of the components described in Part II of the Procedure
Specification and have examined the Quality Control records documenting this assembly and state that, to the best of
my knowledge and belief, the Fabricator has assembled the components to satisfy the requirements of Section X of the
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels.
By signing this certificate neither the Inspector nor his employer makes any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning
the design or procedure covered by the Fabricator’s Design Report. Furthermore, neither the Inspector nor his employer
shall be liable in any manner for any personal injury or property damage or loss of any kind arising from or connected with
this inspection.
Date
Commission
(National Board Authorized Inspector Number)
(Authorized Inspector’s signature)
(07/21)
242
ASME BPVC.X-2021
FORM Q-120 (CONT’D)
PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION FOR CLASS II VESSELS
(Revision D — 2021)
Part III — Summary
PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION NUMBER:
NOTE: Procedure Specification Form Q-120 for Class II vessels consists of three parts. Part III, Summary, shall compile the
various fabrication procedures used to fabricate the individual parts of the vessel and then join them into a completed
vessel assembly. Part III must be accompanied by Parts I and II.
A.
VESSEL IDENTIFICATION
Fabricator Name:
Name of User:
B.
Fabricator Vessel No.:
User Vessel Number:
SUMMARY OF FABRICATION PROCEDURES (Part I)
No.
Part Identification
Fabricator’s Procedure No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
C.
SUMMARY OF ASSEMBLY PROCEDURES (Part II)
No.
Part A
to
Part B
Fabricator’s Procedure No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
D. QUALIFICATION
We certify that the statements made in Part III of this Specification are correct.
Date:
Signed:
(Fabricator)
By:
Certificate of Authorization No.:
Expires:
ASME Section X
Edition and Addenda (if applicable) Date
(07/21)
243
Code Case No.
ASME BPVC.X-2021
FORM Q-120 (CONT’D)
PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION FOR CLASS II VESSELS
(Revision D — 2021)
Part III — Summary (Cont’d)
CERTIFICATION BY SHOP INSPECTOR
OF QUALIFICATION OF DESIGN AND FABRICATION PROCEDURE
Procedure Specification of
for
at
process of fabricating vessel(s) described in
Design Specification and
(User)
(Fabricator)
Design Report number
I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors
and employed by
of
have witnessed the tests by which the design of the vessel(s) and the fabrication procedure have been qualified and state
that, to the best of my knowledge and belief, these tests and the fabrication procedure employed in constructing the
vessel(s) satisfy the requirements of Section X of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Fiber-Reinforced Plastic
Pressure Vessels.
By signing this certificate neither the Inspector nor his employer makes any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning
the design or procedure covered by the Fabricator’s Design Report. Furthermore, neither the Inspector nor his employer
shall be liable in any manner for any personal injury or property damage or loss of any kind arising from or connected with
this inspection.
Date
Commission
(National Board Authorized Inspector Number)
(Authorized Inspector’s signature)
(07/21)
244
ASME BPVC.X-2021
FORM RP-1
FABRICATOR’S DATA REPORT FOR FIBER-REINFORCED
PLASTIC PRESSURE VESSELS (CLASS I)
(Revision D — 2017)
As Required by the Provisions of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
1
F
1. Fabricated and certified by
(name and address of Fabricator)
2
F
2. Fabricated for
(name and address of Purchaser)
3
F
3. Location of installation
(name and address)
4
F
4. Type
Vessel No.
(horiz. or vert. vessel)
(Manufacturer’s serial)
(CRN)
5
F
6
F
(dwg. no.)
(National Bd. no.)
Year Built
7
F
5. Vessel fabricated in accordance with Design Specification no.
Date
and Procedure Specification no.
Date
8
F
6. ASME Section X
9
F
[Edition and Addenda (if applicable) Date]
(Code Case No.)
7. Tests on prototype vessel conducted and certified by
8. Fabricated for
10
F
Maximum allowable working pressure
psi (kPa) at maximum allowable temperature
Minimum allowable temperature [when less than 2208F (2298C)]
Hydrostatic,
Pneumatic, or
11
F
Test pressure
.
Total weight of completed vessel
Combination
12
F
9. SHELL: Type
(bag molded, centrif. cast, filament wound)
Diameter
13
F
Nominal thickness
Length
Barcol hardness
14
F
15
F
10. HEADS: Type
(molded, centrifugally cast, filament wound)
16
F
Attachment
(integral, adhesive bonding, bolted, quick opening, etc.)
Shape or Contour
(a)
Location
Nominal
Barcol
Nominal
(Describe, giving radii, angle, ratios,
(Top, Bottom, Ends)
Thickness
Hardness
Weight
where appropriate)
(1)
17
F
(2)
(b) If bolted, bolts used
18
F
(c) If quick opening or other
(Material, Spec. no., T. S., size, number)
(Describe or attach sketch)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
(d) If filament wound, describe pole pieces or head fittings
(1)
20
F
(2)
21
F
11. SAFETY OR SAFETY RELIEF VALVE OUTLETS: Number
Location
(07/17)
245
Size
19
F
ASME BPVC.X-2021
FORM RP-1 (Back)
(Revision D — 2017)
22
F
12. NOZZLES:
Purpose (Inlet,
Outlet, Drain)
Diameter
or Size
Number
Type
Material
Reinforcement
Material
Thickness
How Attached
Attached
(where and how)
13. INSPECTION OPENINGS:
23
F
Manholes:
Handholes:
No.
No.
Size
Size
Location
Location
Threaded:
No.
Size
Location
14. SUPPORTS:
Skirt
24
F
Lugs
(yes or no)
Legs
Other
(number)
(number)
(describe)
Attached
(where and how)
25
F
15. REMARKS
(Brief description of purpose of the vessel, such as air tank, water tank, LPG storage, etc. If description of the purpose of the vessel does not clearly indicate the
contents of the vessel, state what the contents are to be. Describe any unusual features of design or construction not covered by items 3 to 14 inclusive.)
26
F
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE
We certify the statements in this Data Report to be correct.
Date
Signed
by
(Fabricator)
Our Certificate of Authorization No.
(authorized representative)
to use the Certification Mark with RP Designator expires
(date)
27
F
CERTIFICATE OF SHOP INSPECTION
Vessel made by
at
I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors and employed by
of
have inspected the pressure vessel described in this Fabricator’s Data Report on
and state that, to the best of
(date)
my knowledge and belief, the Fabricator has constructed this pressure vessel in accordance with the applicable Sections of the ASME BOILER
AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE.
By signing this certificate, neither the Inspector nor his employer makes any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning the pressure vessel
described in this Fabricator's Data Report. Furthermore, neither the Inspector nor his employer shall be liable in any manner for any personal
injury or property damage or loss of any kind arising from or connected with this inspection.
Date
Commission
28
F
(National Board Authorized Inspector Number)
(Authorized Inspector’s signature)
(07/17)
246
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Table AJ-2
Guide for Completing Form RP-1
(Revision E — 2017)
Reference to
Circled
Numbers in
the Form
Description
(1)
Name and street address of Fabricator, i.e., maker of all components not covered by Partial Data Reports.
(2)
Name and address of Purchaser and/or Owner.
(3)
Name and street address of USER, where vessel is to be installed. If not known, so indicate; e.g., not known — built for stock.
(4)
Type of vessel, such as vertical or horizontal vessel, including method of support.
(5)
Fabricator’s serial number (one vessel on one report). CRN lines are for Canadian Registration Number and the number of the
drawing approved by the Provincial Authorities.
(6)
National Board number from Fabricator’s series of N.B. numbers or State number if User inspected vessel. If USER vessel, strike
out National Board and show name of State.
(7) (10)
These are the Fabricator’s Specification numbers.
(8)
ASME Code, Section X, Edition (e.g., 1998) and Addenda (e.g., A98, A99, etc., if applicable) used for fabrication.
(9)
All Code Case numbers and revisions used for fabrication must be listed. Where more space is needed, use Remarks section or
list on a supplemental page.
(11)
Test Pressure must conform to RT-450 or RT-460, depending on type of test method used.
(12)
Specify bag molded, centrifugally cast, or filement wound, or a combination of these, as bag molded and helically wound or
centrifugally cast plus level (or circle) wound, if the design is a combination.
(13)
The thickness of the laminate. Spell out liner thickness (if used) as a separate item.
(14)
The Barcol hardness is required for qualification vessels (RT-221) and recorded.
(15)
State the process or a combination of the processes along with the shape, as elliptical, spherical, etc., and list the ratio of major
to minor axis if elliptical. If heads are flat (Article RD-7), list material and thickness.
(16)
The details of adhesive bonding, bolted, or quick opening to be recorded in the Data Report.
(17)
The top and bottom heads for vertical vessels and ends for horizontally mounted vessels.
(18)
Bolts used to secure removable head or heads of vessel.
(19)
Safety precautions to be spelled out for quick opening design (Article RD-8).
(20)
Show design of pole pieces wound in on axis of rotation. Show design of fittings and method of holding the fittings in place if
located other than on axis of rotation (not permitted for 3,000 psi [20 MPa] operation design). In all cases, design adequacy is
mandatory.
(21)
Indicate nozzle or other opening which is designated for pressure relief device.
(22)
Show other nozzles and openings and design of attachment.
(23)
Show openings designated for inspection and design of attachment.
(24)
Indicate provisions for vessel support. If attached, show design; vessels must be qualified on the vessel support listed in the
Data Report.
(25)
It is important under Remarks to be very complete in listing concentration temperature of contents of the vessel along with
surface of the vessel used to prevent corrosion. The Fabricator of the vessel line or resin along with Specification number
and type is important for future reference, as vessel may be used for contents other than the contents for which the original
design was intended. For attached Partial Data Reports, list the part name, the name of the Fabricator, and the serial number
of the part.
(26)
Certificate of Compliance block is to show name of Fabricator as shown on the ASME Certificate of Authorization. This should
be signed by chief Inspector, Manager of Quality Control, or a like person.
(27)
Certificate of Shop Inspection is to be completed by the Fabricator and signed by the Authorized Inspector who performs the
shop inspection.
(28)
The National Board Authorized Inspector number shall be shown.
GENERAL NOTE: Any quantity to which units apply shall be entered on the Fabricator’s Data Report with the chosen units.
247
ASME BPVC.X-2021
FORM RP-2
FABRICATOR’S PARTIAL DATA REPORT (CLASS I)
A Part of a Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessel Fabricated by
One Manufacturer for Another Manufacturer
(Revision D — 2017)
As Required by the Provisions of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
1
F
1. (a) Fabricated and certified by
(name and address of Fabricator of part)
2
F
(b) Fabricated for
(name and address of Purchaser of vessel)
3
F
2. Identification—Fabricator’s serial no. of part
4
F
3. (a) Constructed according to Drawing no.
5
F
Dwg. prepared by
6
F
(b) Description of part fabricated and inspected
4. Part fabricated in accordance with Procedure Specification no.
Date
7
F
5. ASME Section X
8
F
(Edition and Addenda (if applicable) Date)
9
F
6. SHELL: Type
(Code Case No.)
Nominal thickness
(bag molded, centrifugally cast, filament wound)
Nominal weight
Diameter
Length
Barcol hardness
10
F
7. HEADS: Type
(molded, centrifugally cast, filament wound)
11
F
Attachment
(integral, adhesive bonding, bolted, quick opening, etc.)
Shape or Contour
(a)
Location
Nominal
Barcol
Nominal
(Describe, giving radii, angle, ratios,
(Top, Bottom, Ends)
Thickness
Hardness
Weight
where appropriate)
(1)
12
F
(2)
13
F
(b) If bolted, bolts used
(Material, Spec. no., T. S., size, number)
(c) If quick opening or other
(Describe or attach sketch)
(1)
14
F
(1)
(2)
(2)
15
F
(d) If filament wound, describe pole pieces or head fittings
(1)
(2)
8. Fabricated for
Maximum allowable working pressure
at maximum allowable temperature
Minimum allowable temperature [when less than 2208F (2298C)]
16
F
9. SAFETY VALVE OUTLETS: Number
10. NOZZLES
Location
17
F
Purpose (Inlet,
Outlet, Drain)
Size
Diameter
Number
or Size
Reinforcement
Type
Material
(07/17)
248
Thickness
Material
How Attached
ASME BPVC.X-2021
FORM RP-2 (Back)
(Revision D — 2017)
18
F
11. INSPECTION OPENINGS
Manholes:
No.
Size
Location
Handholes:
No.
Size
Location
Threaded:
No.
Size
Location
12. SUPPORTS:
19
F
Skirt
Lugs
(yes or no)
Legs
Other
(number)
(number)
(describe)
Attached
(where and how)
20
F
13. REMARKS
21
F
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE
We certify that the statements in this Fabricator's Partial Data Report are correct and that all details of materials, construction, and workmanship
of this vessel conform to Section X of the ASME BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE, Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels.
Date
Signed
by
(Fabricator)
(representative)
Certificate of Authorization no.
Expires
22
F
CERTIFICATE OF SHOP INSPECTION
I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors and employed by
of
have inspected the part of a pressure vessel described in this Fabricator’s Partial Data Report on
(date)
and state that,
to the best of my knowledge and belief, the Fabricator has constructed this part in accordance with the applicable Sections of the ASME BOILER
AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE.
By signing this certificate, neither the Inspector nor his employer makes any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning the part described in this
Fabricator's Partial Data Report. Furthermore, neither the Inspector nor his employer shall be liable in any manner for any personal injury or
property damage or loss of any kind arising from or connected with this inspection.
Date
Commission
(National Board Authorized Inspector Number)
(Authorized Inspector’s signature)
(07/17)
249
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Table AJ-3
Guide for Completing Form RP-2
(Revision C — 2013)
Reference to
Circled
Numbers in
the Form
Description
(1)
Name and street address of Fabricator, i.e., maker of the vessel part covered in this report.
(2)
Name and address of Fabricator who will use the vessel part in making a complete vessel.
(3)
An identifying serial number marked on the vessel part by the part Fabricator (RS-120). This is not to be a National Board
number. CRN line is for Canadian Registration Number and the number of the drawing approved by the Provincial
Authorities.
(4)
Drawing to which vessel part is fabricated.
(5)
Organization that prepared drawing.
(6)
Description of vessel part, i.e., fitting, flat steel head, attached support bracket, etc.
(7)
ASME Code, Section X, Edition (e.g., 1998) and Addenda (e.g., A98, A99, etc., if applicable) used for fabrication.
(8)
All Code Case numbers and revisions used for fabrication must be listed. Where more space is needed, use Remarks section or
list on a supplemental page.
(9)
Specify bag molded, centrifugally cast, or filament wound, or a combination of these, as bag molded and helically wound or
centrifugally cast plus level (or circle) wound, if the design is a combination.
(10)
State the process or a combination of the processes along with the shape, as elliptical, spherical, etc., and list the ratio of major
or minor axis if elliptical. If heads are flat (Article RD-7), list material and thickness.
(11)
The details of adhesive bonding, bolted, or quick opening to be recorded in the Data Report.
(12)
The top and bottom heads for vertical vessels and ends for horizontally mounted vessels.
(13)
Bolts used to secure removable head or heads of vessel.
(14)
Safety precautions to be spelled out for quick opening design (Article RD-8).
(15)
Show design of pole pieces wound in on axis of rotation. Show design of fittings and method of holding the fittings in place if
located other than on axis of rotation (not permitted for 3,000 psi [20 MPa] operation design). In all cases, design adequacy is
mandatory.
(16)
Indicate nozzle or other opening which is designated for pressure relief device.
(17)
Show other nozzles and openings and design of attachment.
(18)
Show openings designated for inspection and design of attachment.
(19)
Indicate provisions for vessel support. If attached, show design; vessels must be qualified on the vessel support listed in the
Data Report.
(20)
It is important under Remarks to be very complete in listing concentration temperature of contents of the vessel along with
surface of the vessel used to prevent corrosion. The Fabricator of the vessel line or resin along with Specification number
and type is important for future reference, as vessel may be used for contents other than the contents for which the original
design was intended.
(21)
Certificate of Compliance block is to show name of Fabricator of the vessel part and the Certification Mark authorization
number, and expiration date. This should be signed by chief Inspector, Manager of Quality Control, or a like person.
(22)
Certificate of Shop Inspection is to be completed by the Fabricator and signed by the Authorized Inspector who performs the
shop inspection.
GENERAL NOTE: Any quantity to which units apply shall be entered on the Fabricator’s Partial Data Report with the chosen units.
250
ASME BPVC.X-2021
FORM RP-3
FABRICATOR’S DATA REPORT FOR CLASS II VESSELS
(Revision E — 2017)
As Required by the Provisions of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
1
F
1. Fabricated and certified by
(name and address of Fabricator)
2
F
2. Fabricated for
(name and address of Purchaser)
3
F
3. Location of installation
(name and address)
4
F
4. Type
5
F
Vessel No.
(horiz. or vert. vessel)
(Manufacturer’s serial)
(CRN)
6
F
(dwg. no.)
Year Built
(National Bd. no.)
7
F
5. Vessel fabricated in accordance with Design Specification no.
and Procedure Specification no.
Date
Date
8
F
9
F
[Edition and Addenda (if applicable) Date]
(Code Case No.)
6. ASME Section X
7. (a) Vessel designed according to Method
(b) Fabricator’s Design Report on file
(A or B)
(c) (1) Elastic constants used for design according to Method A: Ex
, Ey
(yes or no)
, Es
, vx
(2) Elastic and strength constants used for design according to Method B. Add additional columns as required.
Structural layer from inside
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Type of construction: mat. fil., wound, woven, roving, etc.
Thickness
Glass content
Ex
Ey
Es
nx
X
Xc
Y
Yc
S
Wind angle for fil. wound layers
(3) Effective laminate engineering constants for Method B analysis based on information in 7(c)(2) above. (See AD-509.)
E1
8. (a) SHELL:
E2
n12
n 21
E6
Fibers
Ef1
Ef2
(glass, carbon, aramid, etc.)
Resins
(epoxy, polyester, furan, phenolic, etc.)
(b) HEADS: Fibers
(glass, carbon, aramid, etc.)
Resins
(epoxy, polyester, furan, phenolic, etc.)
9. Fabricated for
10
F
Maximum allowable working pressure
Minimum allowable temperature [when less than 2208F (2298C)]
11
F
Hydrostatic, pneumatic, or combination test pressure
NDE
at maximum allowable temperature
.
Total weight of completed vessel
(AE, RT, etc.)
12
F
10. SHELL: Type
Nominal thickness
13
F
(bag molded, centrif. cast, filament wound)
Diameter
Length
Barcol hardness
14
F
15
F
11. HEADS: Type
(contact molded, filament wound)
16
F
Attachment
Location
(Top, Bottom, Ends)
(a)
(1)
(integral, adhesive bonding, bolted, quick opening, etc.)
Nominal
Thickness
Barcol
Hardness
Nominal
Weight
17
F
(2)
(07/17)
251
Shape or Contour
(Describe, giving radii, angle, ratios, where appropriate)
ASME BPVC.X-2021
FORM RP-3 (Back)
(Revision E — 2017)
18
F
(b) If bolted, bolts used (Material, Spec. no., T.S., size, number)
(c) If quick opening or other (describe or attach sketch)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
19
F
(d) If filament wound, describe pole pieces or head fittings
20
F
(1)
(2)
21
F
12. SAFETY OR SAFETY RELIEF VALVE OUTLETS: Number
Size
Location
22
F
13. NOZZLES
Purpose (Inlet,
Outlet, Drain)
Diameter
or Size
Number
Type
Material
Reinforcement
Material
Thickness
How Attached
(Bonded or
Integrally
Attached)
Attached
(where and how)
23
F
14. INSPECTION OPENINGS:
Manholes:
No.
Size
Location
Handholes:
No.
Size
Location
15. SUPPORTS:
24
F
Skirt
Lugs
Legs
(yes or no)
Other
(number)
(number)
(describe)
Attached
(where and how)
16. VESSEL FABRICATED FOR STORAGE OF
25
F
17. REMARKS
(Brief description of purpose of the vessel, such as air tank, water tank, LPG storage, etc. If description of the purpose of the vessel does not clearly indicate the
contents of the vessel state what the contents are to be. Describe any unusual features of design or construction not covered by items 3 to 16 inclusive.)
26
F
CERTIFICATE OF DESIGN
Fabricator’s Design Report on file at
Fabricator’s Design Report certified by
PE State
27
F
Reg. no.
We certify the statements in this Data Report to be correct.
Date
Signed
by
(Fabricator)
Our Certificate of Authorization no.
(authorized representative)
to use the Certification Mark with RPDesignator expires
(date)
28
F
CERTIFICATE OF SHOP INSPECTION
I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors and employed by
of
have inspected the pressure vessel described in this Fabricator’s Data Report on
and state that, to the best of
(date)
my knowledge and belief, the Fabricator has constructed this pressure vessel in accordance with the applicable Sections of the ASME BOILER
AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE.
By signing this certificate, neither the Inspector nor his employer makes any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning the pressure vessel
described in this Fabricator's Data Report. Furthermore, neither the Inspector nor his employer shall be liable in any manner for any personal
injury or property damage or loss of any kind arising from or connected with this inspection.
Date
Commission
29
F
(National Board Authorized Inspector Number)
(Authorized Inspector’s signature)
(07/17)
252
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Table AJ-4
Guide for Completing Form RP-3
(Revision F — 2017)
Reference to
Circled
Numbers in
the Form
Description
(1)
Name and street address of Fabricator, i.e., maker of all components not covered by Partial Data Reports.
(2)
Name and address of Purchaser and/or Owner.
(3)
Name and street address of USER, where vessel is to be installed. If not known, so indicate; e.g., not known — built for stock.
(4)
Type of vessel, such as vertical or horizontal vessel, including method of support.
(5)
Fabricator’s serial number (one vessel on one report). CRN lines are for Canadian Registration Number and the number of the
drawing approved by the Provincial Authorities.
(6)
National Board number from Fabricator’s series of N.B. numbers or State number if User inspected vessel.
(7) (10)
These are the Fabricator’s Specification numbers.
(8)
ASME Code, Section X, Edition (e.g., 1998) and Addenda (e.g., A98, A99, etc., if applicable) used for fabrication.
(9)
All Code Case numbers and revisions used for fabrication must be listed. Where more space is needed, use Remarks section or
list on a supplemental page.
(11)
Test Pressure must conform to RT-450 or RT-460, depending on type of test method used.
(12)
Specify contact molded, centrifugally cast, or filament wound, or a combination of these, as contact molded and helically
wound, if the design is a combination.
(13)
The thickness of the laminate. Spell out liner thickness (if used) as a separate item.
(14)
The Barcol hardness is required for qualification vessels (RT-221) and recorded.
(15)
State the process or a combination of the processes along with the shape, as elliptical, spherical, etc., and list the ratio of major
to minor axis if elliptical. If heads are flat (Article RD-7), list material and thickness.
(16)
The details of adhesive bonding, bolted, or quick opening to be recorded in the Data Report.
(17)
The top and bottom heads for vertical vessels and ends for horizontally mounted vessels.
(18)
Bolts used to secure removable head or heads of vessel.
(19)
Safety precautions to be spelled out for quick opening design (Article RD-8).
(20)
Show design of pole pieces wound in on axis of rotation. Show design of fittings and method of holding the fittings in place if
located other than on axis of rotation [not permitted for 3,000 psi (20 MPa) operation design]. In all cases, design adequacy is
mandatory.
(21)
Indicate nozzle or other opening which is designated for pressure relief device.
(22)
Show other nozzles and openings and design of attachment.
(23)
Show openings designated for inspection and design of attachment.
(24)
Indicate provisions for vessel support. If attached, show design; vessels must designed with support listed in the Data Report.
(25)
It is important under Remarks to be very complete in listing concentration temperature of contents of the vessel along with
surface of the vessel used to prevent corrosion. The Fabricator of the vessel line or resin along with Specification number
and type is important for future reference, as vessel may be used for contents other than the contents for which the original
design was intended. For attached Partial Data Reports, list the part name, the name of the Fabricator, and the serial number
of the part.
(26)
This certificate is to be completed by the Fabricator to show the disposition of the Fabricator’s Design Report and to identify
the registered Professional Engineer who certifies it.
(27)
State of the U.S.A.; or province of Canada, if applicable.
(28)
Certificate of Shop Inspection is to be completed by the Fabricator and signed by the Authorized Inspector who performs the
shop inspection of the completed vessel.
(29)
The National Board Authorized Inspector number shall be shown.
GENERAL NOTE: Any quantity to which units apply shall be entered on the Fabricator’s Data Report with the chosen units.
253
ASME BPVC.X-2021
FORM RP-4
FABRICATOR’S PARTIAL DATA REPORT FOR CLASS II VESSELS
A Part of a Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessel Fabricated by
One Fabricator for Another Fabricator
(Revision D — 2017)
As Required by the Provisions of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
1
F
1. (a) Fabricated and certified by
(name and address of Fabricator of part)
2
F
(b) Fabricated for
(name and address of Purchaser of vessel)
3
F
2. Identification—Fabricator’s serial no. of part
F
4
3. (a) Constructed according to Drawing no.
5
F
Dwg. prepared by
6
F
(b) Description of part fabricated and inspected
4. Part fabricated in accordance with Procedure Specification no.
5. ASME Section X
8
F
(Edition and Addenda (if applicable) Date)
(Code Case No.)
9
F
6. SHELL: Type
Date
7
F
Nominal thickness
Fibers
(contact molded, filament wound)
Resin
(glass, etc.)
Nominal weight
(epoxy, etc.)
Diameter
Length
Barcol hardness
10
F
7. HEADS: Type
(contact molded, centrifugally cast, filament wound)
11
F
Attachment
(integral, adhesive bonding, bolted, quick opening, etc.)
Shape or Contour
(a)
Location
Nominal
Barcol
Nominal
(Describe, giving radii, angle, ratios,
(Top, Bottom, Ends)
Thickness
Hardness
Weight
where appropriate)
(1)
12
F
(2)
13
F
(b) If bolted, bolts used
(Material, Spec. no., T. S., size, number)
(c) If quick opening or other
(Describe or attach sketch)
(1)
14
F
(1)
(2)
(2)
15
F
(d) If filament wound, describe pole pieces or head fittings
(1)
(2)
8. Fabricated for
Maximum allowable working pressure
at maximum allowable temperature
Minimum allowable temperature [when less than 2208F (2298C)]
9. NDE
(AE, RT, etc.)
16
F
10. SAFETY VALVE OUTLETS: Number
11. NOZZLES
Location
17
F
Purpose (Inlet,
Outlet, Drain)
Size
Diameter
Number
or Size
Reinforcement
Type
Material
(07/17)
254
Thickness
Material
How Attached
ASME BPVC.X-2021
FORM RP-4 (Back)
(Revision D — 2017)
18
F
12. INSPECTION OPENINGS
Manholes:
No.
Size
Location
Handholes:
No.
Size
Location
Threaded:
No.
Size
Location
13. SUPPORTS:
19
F
Skirt
Lugs
(yes or no)
Legs
Other
(number)
(number)
(describe)
Attached
(where and how)
20
F
14. REMARKS
21
F
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE
We certify that the statements made in this Fabricator's Partial Data Report are correct and that all details of materials, fabrication, and workmanship
of this vessel conform to Section X of the ASME BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE, Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels, Class II.
Date
Signed
by
(Fabricator)
(representative)
Certificate of Authorization no.
Expires
(date)
22
F
CERTIFICATE OF SHOP INSPECTION
I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors and employed by
of
have inspected the part of a pressure vessel described in this Fabricator’s Partial Data Report on
and state that,
(date)
to the best of my knowledge and belief, the Fabricator has constructed this part in accordance with the applicable Sections of the ASME BOILER
AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE.
By signing this certificate, neither the Inspector nor his employer makes any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning the part described in this
Fabricator's Partial Data Report. Furthermore, neither the Inspector nor his employer shall be liable in any manner for any personal injury or
property damage or loss of any kind arising from or connected with this inspection.
Date
Commission
(National Board Authorized Inspector Number)
(Authorized Inspector’s signature)
(07/17)
255
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Table AJ-5
Guide for Completing Form RP-4
(Revision C — 2013)
Reference to
Circled
Numbers in
the Form
Description
(1)
Name and street address of Fabricator, i.e., maker of the vessel part covered in this report.
(2)
Name and address of Fabricator who will use the vessel part in making a complete vessel.
(3)
An identifying serial number marked on the vessel part by the part Fabricator (RS-120). This is not to be a National Board
number. CRN line is for Canadian Registration Number and the number of the drawing approved by the Provincial
Authorities.
(4)
Drawing to which vessel part is fabricated.
(5)
Organization that prepared drawing.
(6)
Description of vessel part, i.e., fitting, flat steel head, attached support bracket, etc.
(7)
ASME Code, Section X, Edition (e.g., 1998) and Addenda (e.g., A98, A99, etc., if applicable) used for fabrication.
(8)
All Code Case numbers and revisions used for fabrication must be listed. Where more space is needed, use Remarks section or
list on a supplemental page.
(9)
Specify contact molded or filament wound, or a combination of these, as contact molded and helically wound, if the design is a
combination.
(10)
State the process or a combination of the processes along with the shape, as elliptical, spherical, etc., and list the ratio of major
or minor axis if elliptical. If heads are flat (Article RD-7), list material and thickness.
(11)
The details of adhesive bonding, bolted, or quick opening to be recorded in the Data Report.
(12)
The top and bottom heads for vertical vessels and ends for horizontally mounted vessels.
(13)
Bolts used to secure removable head or heads of vessel.
(14)
Safety precautions to be spelled out for quick opening design (Article RD-8).
(15)
Show design of pole pieces wound in on axis of rotation. Show design of fittings and method of holding the fittings in place if
located other than on axis of rotation [not permitted for 3,000 psi (20 MPa) operation design]. In all cases, design adequacy is
mandatory.
(16)
Indicate nozzle or other opening which is designated for pressure relief device.
(17)
Show other nozzles and openings and design of attachment.
(18)
Show openings designated for inspection and design of attachment.
(19)
Indicate provisions for vessel support. If attached, show design; vessels must be qualified on the vessel support listed in the
Data Report.
(20)
It is important under Remarks to be very complete in listing concentration temperature of contents of the vessel along with
surface of the vessel used to prevent corrosion. The Fabricator of the vessel line or resin along with Specification number
and type is important for future reference, as vessel may be used for contents other than the contents for which the original
design was intended.
(21)
Certificate block is to show name of Fabricator of the vessel part and the Certification Mark, authorization number, and
expiration date. This should be signed by chief Inspector, Manager of Quality Control, or a like person.
(22)
Certificate of Shop Inspection is to be completed by the Fabricator and signed by the Authorized Inspector who performs the
shop inspection.
GENERAL NOTE: Any quantity to which units apply shall be entered on the Fabricator’s Partial Data Report with the chosen units.
256
ASME BPVC.X-2021
FORM RP-5 FABRICATOR'S DATA REPORT SUPPLEMENTARY SHEET
(Revision C — 2017)
As Required by the Provisions of the ASME Code Rules, Section X
1
F
1. Fabricated and certified by
(Name and address of Fabricator)
2
F
2. Fabricated for
(Name and address of Purchaser)
3
F
3. Location of installation
(Name and address)
4
F
4. Type
5
F
(Horiz., vert., or sphere)
(Tank, separator, etc.)
(Fabricator's Serial No.)
6
F
CRN
(Drawing No.)
Data Report
Item Number
(Nat’l. Board No.)
(Year built)
Remarks
7
F
8 Type
Certificate of Authorization: F
Date
No.
Expires
Name
Signed
(Fabricator)
Date
(Representative)
Name
Commission
(Authorized Inspector)
(07/17)
257
9
F
(National Board Authorized Inspector Number)
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Table AJ-6
Guide for Completing Form RP-5
(Revision C — 2017)
Reference to
Circled
Numbers in
the Form
Description
(1)
Name and street address of Fabricator.
(2)
Name and address of Purchaser and/or Owner.
(3)
Name and address of USER, where vessel is to be installed. If not known, built for stock.
(4)
Type of vessel, such as vertical or horizontal.
(5)
Fabricator’s serial number.
(6)
National Board Number from Fabricator’s series of N.B. Numbers.
(7)
Fill in information for which there was insufficient space on the Data Report Form as indicated by the notation “See attached
Form RP-5” on the Data Report Form.
(8)
Fill in information identical to that shown on the Data Report Form to which this sheet is supplementary. Indicate the type of
Certificate of Authorization, number, expiration date, and signature of company representative.
(9)
The National Board Authorized Inspector number shall be shown.
GENERAL NOTE: Any quantity to which units apply shall be entered on the Manufacturer’s Data Report with the chosen units.
258
ASME BPVC.X-2021
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX AK
LAMINA ELASTIC CONSTANTS — MICROMECHANICS
AK-100 LAMINA ELASTIC CONSTANTS
The laminate analysis method detailed in Article RD-12 includes the use of the five elastic constants of each lamina
(layer) of a laminate. The elastic constants of each lamina are required for determination of the laminate stiffness
coefficients in accordance with Article RD-12. The elastic constants of each lamina can be determined by testing in
accordance with Article RT-7. Alternatively, the elastic constants of each lamina may be determined in accordance
with this Nonmandatory Appendix. The procedures detailed in this Article are commonly referred to as micromechanics.
The five elastic constants that must be determined for each lamina are the longitudinal modulus, transverse modulus,
shear modulus, major Poisson’s ratio, and minor Poisson's ratio.
AK-200 NOMENCLATURE
The symbols used in this Article are defined below.
Ef
Em
Ex
Ey
Gf
Gm
Gs
SGf
SGr
t
Vf
vf
Vm
vm
W
Wf
Δ
νf
νm
νx
νy
x
ρc
ρf
ρm
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
tensile modulus of the fiber
tensile modulus of the resin matrix
Young’s modulus of an orthotropic lamina in the principal direction of the greater modulus
Young’s modulus of an orthotropic lamina in the principal direction of the lesser modulus
shear modulus of the fiber
shear modulus of the matrix
shear modulus of an orthotropic lamina in the principal coordinates
relative density of fiber
relative density of resin matrix
thickness of the lamina, in. (mm)
volume fraction of fiber
volume of fiber per unit area, in.3/ft2 (m3/m2)
volume fraction of matrix
volume of resin matrix per unit area, in.3/ft2 (m3/m2)
fiber weight of the lamina per unit area, oz/ft2 (kg/m2)
weight fraction of fiber
factor related to Poisson’s ratios = 1 − νxνy
Poisson’s ratio of the fiber
Poisson’s ratio of the matrix
principal Poisson’s ratio of a lamina. It is the negative of strain in the y direction from the stress in the x direction
minor Poisson’s ratio of a lamina. It is the negative of strain in the x direction from the stress in the y direction
νx × Ey/Ex
density of the composite
density of the fiber, lb/in.3 (kg/m3)
density of the resin matrix
AK-300 PRELIMINARY CALCULATIONS
Typically, the weight per unit area of the fiber reinforcement is known, as are the densities of the fiber and resin matrix.
If the laminate physically exists, the layer thickness can be measured. If the laminate does not physically exist, then either
the thickness or the fiber weight fraction of the lamina is assumed and verified after fabrication.
Note that the thickness and fiber weight fraction of the lamina are related by:
259
ASME BPVC.X-2021
(U.S. Customary Units)
1 W f yzz
W ijjj 1
zz
+
jj
83 j SGf
Wf × SGm zz
k
{
(1a)
1 W f zyz
ji 1
zz
t = W jjjj
+
j SGf
W f × SR m zz
k
{
(1b)
t=
(SI Units)
(U.S. Customary Units)
W
16 f
vf =
(2a)
(SI Units)
vf =
W
(2b)
f
(U.S. Customary Units)
(3a)
vm = t144
vf
t
1000
vf
(SI Units)
vm =
Vf =
vf
(4)
vm + v f
Vm = 1
Wf =
(3b)
(5)
Vf
Vf × f
(
Vf × f + 1
(
c = m 1
Gm =
Gf =
Vf
)+
Vf
f × Vf
Em
2(1 + vm)
Ef
(
2 1 + vf
260
)m
)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
ASME BPVC.X-2021
AK-400 MICROMECHANICS EQUATIONS FOR A UNIDIRECTIONAL LAYER
The following micromechanics equations apply to a unidirectional layer:
Ef
Kf =
2 1 v f 2v f 2
(
Km =
KT =
Em
(
2 1
)
(
)
(Kf + Gm)Vm + (Km + Gm)Vf
K m K f + Gm Vm + K f (K m + Gm)V f
4 × (v f
+
Vf
2
( m + 1)(
(
)
+
ÄÅ
ÅÅ
1)ÅÅÅ + f +
ÅÅÇ
(
Ä
{
(14)
(15)
Gm
m=3
4vm
(16)
f =3
4v f
(17)
1 ÅÅÅ
Å × m+
2 ÅÅÅÇ
× m
1 zyz
zzV V
Kf z m f
Gf
Ä
yi
y ÅÅ
1zzzzjjj + f zzz + ÅÅÅÅ × m + f × m
{ ÅÇ
{k
+ f
(13)
Vf
Vm
1
+
+
Kf
Km
Gm
=
y
1zzz
{
vm)2 VmV f
ji 1
vm)jjjj
K
k m
vx = vmVm + v f V f +
i
3V f × Vm2jjj
k
(12)
Vf
Vm
1
+
+
Kf
Km
Gm
(v f
B =
(11)
2vm2
vm
Ex = EmVm + Ef Vf +
i
A = 3V f × Vm2jjjj
k
(10)
)
(
× m
)
ÉÑ ÄÅ
ÑÅ
1 V f + 1ÑÑÑÑ ÅÅÅÅ m
ÑÖ ÇÅ
(
)
ÉÑ
3ÑÑÑ
f V f ÑÑÑ
ÑÖ
)
261
ÉÄ
3ÑÑÑ ÅÅÅ
f V f ÑÑÑÖÑ ÅÅÇV f × m × (
(
)(
1
+ f
) 2(
1)
ÉÑ
( × m + 1)ÑÑÑÑ
Ö
× m
É
3ÑÑÑ
f V f ÑÑÑÖ
)
(18)
(19)
ASME BPVC.X-2021
i
C = 3V f × Vm2jjj
k
y
1zzz
{
(
+ f
ÅÄ
) + ÅÅÅÅÅÇ
× m+
ÑÉ ÅÄ
1 V f + 1ÑÑÑÑ + ÅÅÅÅ + f +
ÑÖ ÅÇ
(
)
ÅÄÅ
Å
GmÅÅÅ 4B2
ÅÅÇ
0.5
(
Gyz =
4AC
)
(
× m
É
3ÑÑÑ
f V f ÑÑÖÑ
)
ÑÉÑ
Ñ
+ 2BÑÑÑ
ÑÑÖ
(20)
(21)
2A
4KT × vx 2
Ex
(22)
4KT × Gyz
KT + m × Gyz
(23)
m=1+
Ey =
Vf
Gs = Gm +
1
Gf
Gm
vy = vx ×
+
Vm
2Gm
Ey
(24)
(25)
Ex
NOTE: Knitted or woven fabric layers can be treated as two or three individual layers of unidirectional reinforcement. For example, a
layer of woven roving can be treated as two layers of unidirectional reinforcement, one at 0 deg and one at 90 deg with the appropriate
weights of reinforcement in the respective directions, and with thicknesses in each direction proportioned to the weights. A layer of
woven roving can also be treated as three layers of unidirectional reinforcement, e.g., 0 deg/90 deg/0 deg, again with appropriate
weights and thicknesses in the respective directions.
AK-500 MICROMECHANICS OF A RANDOMLY DISTRIBUTED, FIBER-REINFORCED LAMINA
For a lamina with randomly distributed fibers (e.g., chopped strand mat layer), the number of required elastic constants
reduces from five to three as there is just one Young’s modulus value and one Poisson’s ratio. The three elastic constants
are determined by first calculating fictitious properties for a continuous, unidirectional lamina with the thickness and
weight of reinforcement in accordance with RD-1330. The average properties are then calculated by integrating over all
directions from 0 deg to 180 deg. This results in the following equations:
E =
Ey 2 + 2Ey × Ex + 4Ey × Gs + Ex 2 + 4Ex × Gs
4vx 2 × Ey 2 + 8vx × Ey × Gs
(26)
(3Ey + 3Ex + 2vx × Ey + 4Gs × )
v=
G=
Ex + Ey
4Gs ×
+ 6vx × E y
(27)
3E y + 3Ex + 2vx × Ey + 4Gs ×
Ey
E
1
1
× x + ×
8
8
262
1 jij vx × E y zyz
1
j
zz + Gs
z
4 jjk
2
{
(28)
ASME BPVC.X-2021
where
=1
(29)
vx × vy
AK-501 EXAMPLE 1
Determine the five elastic constants (in U.S. Customary units) for a unidirectional layer with the following inputs:
Lamina reinforcement weight: W = 4.36 oz/ft2
Specific gravity of resin: SGm = 1.126
Specific gravity of fiber: SGf = 2.62
Modulus of resin matrix: Em = 465,000 psi
Poisson’s ratio of matrix: νm = 0.35
Modulus of fiber: Ef = 11.1 × 106 psi
Poisson’s ratio of fiber: νf = 0.22
(a) Preliminary Calculations. Using the values from AK-501, perform the preliminary calculations as follows:
Density of the resin: ρm = 0.0361 × SGm= 0.0406 lb/in.3
Density of the fiber: ρf = 0.0361 × SGf = 0.0946 lb/in.3
Lamina thickness in inches (assume Wf = 0.70):
Wf = 0.70
t=
1 W f yz
W ijj 1
zz = 0.04
jj
+
z
j
83 SGf
Wf × SGm z
k
{
Volume of fiber:
vf =
W
= 2.8811 in.3/ft2
16 f
Volume of resin:
v f = 2.885 in.3 /ft2
vm = t × 144
Volume fraction of the fiber:
Vf =
vf
= 0.4996
v f + vm
Volume fraction of the resin:
Vm = 1
V f = 0.5004
Density of the composite:
V f m = 0.0676 lb/in.3
(
)
c = Vf × f + 1
(b) Fiber and Matrix Properties. Use values from (a) and AK-501 to determine fiber and matrix properties.
Shear modulus of matrix:
Em
Gm =
= 1.722 × 105 psi
2(1 + vm)
Shear modulus of fiber:
Gf =
Ef
(
2 1 + vf
)
= 4.549 × 106 psi
263
ASME BPVC.X-2021
(c) Micromechanics Equations for a Unidirectional Composite
Kf =
Km =
KT =
Ef
(
2 1
2v f 2
)
vf
Em
(
2 1
(
2vm2
)
vm
)
= 8.124 × 106
= 5.741 × 105
(
)
K m K f + Gm × Vm + K f K m + Gm × V f
(Kf + Gm)Vm + (Km + Gm)Vf
= 1.196 × 106
Modulus in fiber direction:
Ex = Em × Vm + Ef × V f +
4(v f
vm)2 × Vm × V f
Vf
Vm
1
+
+
Kf
Km
Gm
= 5.781 × 106 psi
Major Poisson’s ratio:
ij
jjv
jj f
vx = vm × Vm + v f × V f + k
where
(
B =
(
1
)
)(
+ f
ÄÅ
) + ÅÅÅÅÅÇ
(
× m+ f m
+
Ä
× m+
1 yzz
zz × Vm × V f
Kf z
{
Vf
Vm
1
+
+
Kf
Km
Gm
× m
ÉÄ
3ÑÑÑ ÅÅÅ
f V f ÑÑÖÑ ÅÅÅÇV f m
)
ÉÑ ÄÅ
ÑÅ
1) × V f + 1ÑÑÑ ÅÅÅ( m
ÑÑÖ ÅÅÇ
1 ÅÅÅ
Å × m+(
2 ÅÅÅÇ
yÅÅÅ
i
1zzzzÅÅÅ + f + jjjj m
Å
{ÅÇ
k
yi
+ jjj m + 1zzzzjjjj
2k
{k
(
)(Ä
+ f
1
V f ij
C = 3V f Vm2
) + ÅÅÅÅÅÇ
1
3V f × Vm2
ÄÅ
+ f
)(
A = 3V f × Vm2
yzij 1
vmzzzzjjjj
K
{k m
ÉÑ ÄÅ
1 × V f + 1ÑÑÑÑ ÅÅÅÅ + f +
ÑÖ ÅÇ
)
=
Gf
Gm
f =3
4v f = 2.12
m=3
4vm = 1.6
264
1
(
× m
ÉÑ
Ñ
× m + 1 ÑÑÑÑ =
ÑÖ
) (
1)( + f )
É
yz 3ÑÑÑÑ
z
V
f zz f ÑÑÑ = 480.401
{ ÑÖ
(
(
= 0.277
)
(
2
× m
ÉÑ
f
)
660.568
ÉÑ
Ñ
× V f 3ÑÑÑ
ÑÑÖ
3ÑÑ
3
f ) × V f ÑÑÑÖ = 2.149 × 10
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Transverse shear modulus:
ÅÄÅ
Å
GmÅÅÅ 4B2
ÅÅÇ
0.5
(
Gyz =
4AC
)
2A
m=1+
ÑÉÑ
Ñ
+ 2BÑÑÑ
ÑÑÖ
= 4.602 × 105 psi
4KT × vx 2
= 1.064
Ex
Transverse modulus:
Ey =
4KT Gyz
= 1.306 × 106 psi
KT + mGyz
In-plane shear modulus:
Vf
Gs = Gm +
1
Gf
V
+ m
Gm
2Gm
= 4.694 × 105 psi
Minor Poisson's ratio:
Vy = Vx ×
Ey
Ex
= 0.063
The following is the summary of properties:
Summary of Properties
Elastic Constants for Lamina
Calculated Values
Modulus in direction of fiber
Ex = 5.781 × 106 psi
Modulus transverse to fiber
Ey = 1.306 × 106 psi
In-plane shear modulus
Gs = 4.694 × 105 psi
Major Poisson’s ratio
υx = 0.277
Minor Poisson’s ratio
υy = 0.063
AK-502 EXAMPLE 2
Determine the three elastic constants (in U.S. Customary units) for a randomly oriented layer with the same inputs as in
Example 1 except for the following:
Lamina reinforcement weight: W = 1.50 oz/ft2
Assumed weight fraction of fiber: Wf = 0.326
(a) Preliminary Calculations. Using the values from AK-502, perform the preliminary calculations as follows:
Lamina thickness:
t=
1 W f yzz
W ijjj 1
zz = 0.04 in.
+
jj
83 j SGf
Wf × SGm zz
k
{
Volume of fiber:
vf =
W
= 0.9912 in.3/ft2
16pf
265
ASME BPVC.X-2021
Volume of resin:
3 2
f = 4.78 in./ft
m = t144
Volume fraction of the fiber:
Vf =
vf
v f + vm
= 0.1717
Volume fraction of the resin:
Vm = 1
V f = 0.8283
Density of the composite:
(
c = Vf × f + 1
Vf
)×
3
m = 0.0499 lb/in.
(b) Fiber and Matrix Properties. Use values from (a) and AK-502 to determine fiber and matrix properties.
Shear modulus of matrix:
Em
Gm =
= 1.722 × 105 psi
2(1 + vm)
Shear modulus of fiber:
Ef
Gf =
(
2 1 + vf
= 4.549 × 106 psi
)
(c) Calculation of fictitious Properties for a Continuous, Unidirectional Lamina
Ef
Kf =
= 8.124 × 106
2 1 v f 2v f 2
(
Km =
KT =
(
)
Em
(
2 1
2vm2
)
vm
)
= 5.741 × 105
(
)
K m K f + Gm × Vm + K f K m + Gm × V f
= 7.123 × 105
(Kf + Gm)Vm + (Km + Gm)Vf
Modulus in fiber direction:
Ex = Em × Vm + Ef × V f +
vm)2 × VmV f
4(v f
Vf
Vm
1
+
+
Kf
Km
Gm
= 2.293 × 106 psi
Major Poisson’s ratio:
ij
jjv
jj f
vx = vm × Vm + v f × V f + k
yzij 1
vmzzzzjjjj
K
{k m
1 yzz
zz × VmV f
Kf z
{
Vf
Vm
1
+
+
Kf
Km
Gm
where
266
= 0.323
ASME BPVC.X-2021
A = 3V f × Vm2 ×
=
+
Vf
2
)(
1
+ f
1.393 × 103
3V f × Vm2 ×
B =
(
(
1
i
yi
× jjjj m + 1zzzzjjjj
k
{k
C = 3V f × Vm2 ×
(
)(
1
(
× m+ f m
× m
ÉÑ
)
+ f
ÄÅ
) + ÅÅÅÅÅÇ
× m+
ÉÑ ÄÅ
1 × V f + 1ÑÑÑÑ × ÅÅÅÅ + f +
ÑÖ ÅÇ
(
)
4v f = 2.12
m=3
4vm = 1.6
0.5
(
Gyz =
1)( + f )
2
(
× m
) (
(
ÉÑ
× m + 1 ÑÑÑÑ
ÑÖ
× m
ÉÑ
f
4AC
)
2A
m=1+
ÉÑ
ÑÑ
+ 2BÑÑÑ
ÑÑÖ
= 2.275 × 105 psi
4KT × vx 2
= 1.13
Ex
Transverse modulus:
Ey =
4KT Gyz
KT + mGyz
= 6.688 × 105 psi
In-plane shear modulus:
Vf
Gs = Gm +
1
Gf
Gm
+
Vm
2Gm
= 2.374 × 105 psi
Minor Poisson’s ratio:
y= x×
Ey
Ex
= 0.094
(d) Properties for a randomly oriented fiber layer:
=1
E =
Ey 2 + 2Ey × Ex + 4Ey × Gs ×
vx × vy
+ Ex 2 + 4Ex × Gs ×
(
4vx 2 × Ey 2 + 8vx × Ey × Gs ×
3Ey + 3Ex + 2vx × Ey + 4Gs ×
267
)
)
ÑÉ
f
) × Vf 3ÑÑÑÑÑÑÖ
) × Vf 3ÑÑÑÑÑÖ = 1.625 × 103
Gm
f =3
ÄÅ
ÅÅ
GmÅÅÅ 4B2
ÅÅÇ
1
Gf
=
Transverse shear modulus:
ÄÅ
3ÑÑ ÅÅ
f )V f ÑÑÑÖ × ÅÅÅÇV f × m(
Ä
ÑÉÑ ÅÄÅ
1 ÅÅ
+ f + ÅÅÅ × m + (
1) × V f + 1ÑÑÑ × ÅÅÅ( m
ÑÑÖ ÅÅÇ
2 ÅÅÇ
ÄÅ
ÑÉÑ
ÅÅ
i
y
zz 3ÑÑ
× ÅÅÅ + f + jjjj × m
f zzV f ÑÑÑ = 304.772
ÅÅÇ
k
{ ÑÖ
)(
y
1zzzz
{
ÄÅ
) + ÅÅÅÅÅÇ
= 1.18 × 106
ASME BPVC.X-2021
v=
Ex + E y 4Gs × + 6vx × Ey
3E y + 3Ex + 2vx × Ey + 4Gs ×
ÅÄÅ
Ey
ÅÅ 1
E
1
G = ÅÅÅ × x + ×
ÅÅ 8
8
ÅÇ
= 0.326
ÑÉ
1 jij vx × E y zyz 1 ÑÑÑÑ
j
zz + GsÑÑ = 4.449 × 105
z
4 jjk
2 ÑÑÑÖ
{
The following is the summary of properties:
Summary of Properties
Elastic Constants for Lamina
Calculated Values
6
Modulus
E = 1.18 × 10
Shear modulus
Gs = 4.449 × 105 psi
Poisson’s ratio
υx = 0.326
268
psi
ASME BPVC.X-2021
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX AL
FIRE AND EXCESSIVE HEAT EXPOSURE GUIDANCE
insulation jacket. These shall be added after the vessel is
inspected and marked with the RP Certification Mark;
otherwise, such coatings and insulation will interfere
with the final inspection of the vessel. The thickness
and type of coating and/or insulation are dependent
on the type of fire or level of heat exposure, and the duration of exposure; the thickness and type of coating and/or
insulation shall be specified by a qualified insulation and
coatings specialist. (This is outside the scope of Section X.)
There are fire-retardant resins that are available, but they
only retard the spread of the fire and do not increase the
resistance of the vessel wall to degradation from exposure
to a fire.
Where vessels are fully buried underground or leak
detection is also desired, a double-walled insulated
vessel can be constructed.
Any vessel potentially exposed to fire shall have the
supports (skirt, legs, lugs, saddles, etc.) fireproofed. For
skirts made of the same material as the vessel wall,
both the inside and outside shall be fireproofed. Such fireproofing methods shall meet federal, state, and local
building codes.
AL-100 GENERAL
This Appendix provides guidance to Owners or Users of
fiber-reinforced plastic (FRP) pressure vessels to mitigate
the effects of fire and exposure to excessive heat on FRP
vessels covered by this Section. Composite laminates
rapidly lose strength at temperatures above 250°F to
400°F (121°C to 204°C), depending on the resin used
or if they are burning. In addition, the insulating properties of laminates reduce the temperature increase of the
vessel contents. Hence, the vessel pressure may not
increase sufficiently to actuate a relief device before
there is a through-wall leak or, worse, a sudden failure
of the vessel wall. For these reasons, it is recommended
that owners of FRP equipment take all precautions necessary to prevent fire exposure or excessive heat to the
structural wall of the vessel. While the vessel itself may not
contain a flammable substance, it could be sited in an area
in which a fire may start due to leakage of a flammable fluid
resulting in a pool fire, electrical fire, or chemical fire or
could be struck by lightning. A massive release is the
worst-case scenario that could damage nearby equipment
and injure, with possible death, nearby personnel. This
situation requires that exposure of FRP vessels to fire
or excessive heat be minimized. The National Board
Inspection Code provides guidance on continued use
and repair of FRP vessels exposed to excessive heat or fire.
AL-203 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER OR DELUGE
SYSTEMS
If it is expected that fire exposure will be of a long duration outlasting the protective ability of a coating or insulation, or there are no insulation or coating systems, then an
automatically actuated sprinkler or deluge system should
be added to cool the vessel wall. Design shall meet the
requirements of the NFPA 13 or other local building codes.
AL-200 SUGGESTED METHODS TO MITIGATE
FIRE EXPOSURE
AL-201 ISOLATION FROM FIRE OR EXCESSIVE
HEAT SOURCES
AL-204 BELOW-GRADE INSTALLATION
If possible, the vessel shall be sited away from any
potential fire or excessive heat source, such as from flammable fluids that may leak and catch fire, electrical equipment that can catch fire due to shorts or overloads, and
reactive chemicals that can cause excessive heat, and shall
be properly grounded against lightning strikes if sited
outdoors.
Any vessel that contains a heavier than air flammable
fluid shall be installed below grade in a concrete vault or
else be buried with a double wall. In addition, any buried
flammable fluid piping shall also be double walled in such
cases. Where vessels and piping are buried, they shall be
designed to resist any external loads, earth loads, and high
water table buoyancy loads, if any. This shall apply only to
horizontal vessels or very short vertical vessels. The vault
or double wall shall be equipped with leak detection instrumentation. The National Board Inspection Code
currently recommends installation above ground or
below grade in a vault for high pressure gaseous hydrogen
composite storage vessels. Above-ground installation for
AL-202 PROTECTIVE COATINGS AND INSULATION
The simplest method of mitigating fire or excessive heat
exposure is to coat or insulate the exposed surfaces with
either an intumescent coating or a heat- or fire-resistant
269
ASME BPVC.X-2021
other lighter than air gaseous flammable fluids can also be
considered. However, all such above-ground vessels shall
be protected by an automatic sprinkler or deluge system.
this reason and the fact that the relief device may not
actuate because the MAWP has not been reached, it is advisable in some cases to install an automatically actuated
vent valve on the vessel to blow the contents down to
a safe area in the event of a fire. If the pressure in the
vessel is released prior to a failure of the wall, there is
less likelihood of a sudden release of the contents.
AL-205 BLOW-DOWN VENTING
During exposure to fire, there could be a localized hot
spot in the vessel wall that could fail despite the application of fire protection coatings, insulation, and devices. For
270
ASME BPVC.X-2021
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX AM
GUIDE TO THE RELOCATION OF PART RR REQUIREMENTS
Part ROP. Table AM-100-1 lists the new locations for
all requirements formerly located in Part RR.
(b) Part RR has been revised to reference this Appendix. Both Part RR and this Appendix will be deleted from
the next Edition of this Section.
(c) Table AM-100-1 may also be obtained in a spreadsheet format from https://cstools.asme.org/csconnect/
CommitteePages.cfm?Committee=N20130000.
AM-100 GENERAL
(a) The 2021 Edition of this Section adopts the new
ASME BVPC Section XIII, Rules for Overpressure Protection. All Section X pressure relief device requirements
have been transferred from Part RR to Section XIII,
and the remaining Section X overpressure protection requirements have been restructured within the new
Table AM-100-1
Cross-Reference List
Section X−2019
Section X−2021
RR-100(a)
ROP-100(b)
RR-100(b)
ROP-100(c)
RR-110
ROP-150
RR-111
ROP-100(d)
RR-112
ROP-150
RR-120
ROP-160(a)
RR-121
ROP-160(b)
RR-130
ROP-140(a)
RR-201
ROP-170(a)
RR-202
ROP-170(b)
RR-203
ROP-170(c)
RR-210
ROP-170(d)
RR-220
ROP-170(e)
Section X−2019
RR-110(b)
Section XIII−2021
3.1.2(b)
RR-110(e)
11.1
Mandatory Appendix 2
Mandatory Appendix IV
271
ð21Þ
ASME BPVC.X-2021
ENDNOTES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
By lethal fluids is meant poisonous gases or liquids of such a nature that a very small amount of the gas or of the
vapor of the liquid, mixed or unmixed with air, is dangerous to life when inhaled. For purposes of the Code, this class
includes substances of this nature which are stored under pressure or may generate a pressure if stored in a closed
vessel.
Requirements for pressure vessels for human occupancy are covered by ASME PVHO‐1.
Wherever the word User appears in this Section, it shall be considered to include an agent acting in his behalf. The
agent may be the Fabricator when multiple duplicate vessels are being fabricated.
A glossary of terms used in fiber‐reinforced plastic pressure vessel fabrication is given in Mandatory Appendix 4.
Matched‐die‐method parts are acceptable under this Section as being equivalent to bag‐molded parts when using
the same type of fiber reinforcement and the same resin system.
Sudden cyclic changes in temperature shall be part of the design consideration
An exception to this one‐sixth value is permitted for vessels per RG-404.2 (Filament Winding — With Uncut
Filaments), where the maximum combined stress value may be one‐fifth of maximum membrane stress.
Nominal pipe size (NPS) is a designation assigned for the purpose of convenient specification of pipe size. The actual
inside and outside dimensions are listed in ANSI B36.10M.
Diameters of vessels and sizes of openings are nominal.
The governing principle in the design and fabrication of a Class II vessel is the establishment of the Procedure
Specification (Form Q-120) at the time of design and the strict observance of the Procedure Specification during
fabrication. The engineering constants of laminate materials upon which the design is based, and from which
fabrication will occur, are determined using a mathematical treatment known as laminate theory. Laminate
theory utilizes the orthotropic properties of the individual lamina (based on the specific resin–fiber combination),
ply sequence, and ply orientations identified in the Procedure Specification to determine the stiffness coefficients
and effective elastic properties of the resultant laminate.
The Procedure Specification is qualified by observance of the mandatory design rules of this Article and strict
observance of the Procedure Specification during fabrication (as documented by quality control records) to assure
that the combinations of resin, reinforcement, ply sequence, and ply orientation upon which the design was based
are followed during fabrication.
The structural integrity of the vessel is confirmed by individual acceptance testing of each vessel using acoustic
emission monitoring.
An example of these calculations appears in Nonmandatory Appendix AD.
Random short length is that produced by cutter blades with not less than 1 in. (25 mm) nor more than 4 in. (100 mm)
spacing.
See Article RT-2 for detailed requirements governing the conducting of these checks and tests.
Essential variables shall be held within tolerances established in the Procedure Specification.
Essential variables shall be held within tolerances established elsewhere in this Section.
SNT‐TC‐1A, Recommended Practice for Personnel Qualification and Certification in Nondestructive Testing.
The water jacket method described in pamphlet C‐1, published by the Compressed Gas Association, Inc., 1235
Jefferson Davis Highway, Arlington, VA 22202, may be used.
In the case of vessel designs that have not been previously qualified, it is recommended that a preliminary hydrostatic qualification pressure test in accordance with RT-223.1(a)(3) be carried out before the cyclic pressure and
qualification pressure test of a prototype vessel is conducted.
During the cyclic pressure test, the minimum presure shall be the lower of 20% of design pressure or 30 psig (0.270
MPa).
If polyester is being used, the surface of the repaired area may be covered with cellophane or other suitable
nonpermeable film to retard evaporation of monomer.
The maximum allowable external working pressure is required only when specified as a design condition.
Wherever the word “stamp” or “stamping,” referring to the Certification Mark to be applied to the vessel, appears in
this Section, it may be construed to mean marking the vessel nameplate with the Certification Mark with RP
Designator by means other than a steel stamp (see RS-130 and RS-131).
272
ASME BPVC.X-2021
23
24
25
26
27
Holiday is defined as a discontinuity, such as a pinhole, void, crack, thin spot, foreign inclusion, or contaminant in the
laminate.
Yield is measured in yards per pound and is furnished by the fiber producer. The constant (1.125) in the equation is
a function of the reinforcement content and the resin specific gravity. The normal variation of fiberglass content in
filament winding is from 60% to 75% by weight.
The equations in Article AA-2 are for isotropic materials only. Any deviation from such materials will require
modifications of the equations.
This construction has the further advantage of not transmitting discharge‐pipe strains to the valve. In these types of
installations, the back‐pressure effect will be negligible, and no undue influence upon normal valve operation can
result.
Note that 3/β = 9.07 in., which is less than the length L = 10 in.; by AC-231(b), B = B = 1, B = 2, and G = G = G = 0, which
have been used above.
273
2021
ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code
AN
INTERNATIONAL
CODE
The ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC) is a globally recognized and
trusted source of technical requirements and guidance for the design and
construction of boilers, pressure vessels, and nuclear components. With each
new edition, the Code continues to evolve, introducing new technologies and
processes to promote safety across pressure equipment applications and
disciplines. Developed through a rigorous consensus process and fueled by the
foresight of leading industry experts from around the world, the ASME BPVC is
an ever-evolving set of standards that meets the needs of a changing world.
ASME provides BPVC users with an integrated suite of related offerings, which includes
• referenced standards
• related standards and guidelines
• conformity assessment programs
• learning and development solutions
• ASME Press books and journals
For additional information and to order:
Phone: 1.800.THE.ASME
(1.800.843.2763)
Email: customercare@asme.org
Website: go.asme.org/bpvc